TimePlex LINK/2+ microLINK/2+, miniLINK/2+, Integrated Connectivity System User's Guide
ಜಾಹಿರಾತು
ಜಾಹಿರಾತು
LINK/2+
Integrated Connectivity Systems
User's Guide
MC15811
June 1994
TimePlex Group
Worldwide Headquarters
400 Chestnut Ridge Road
Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675
USA
(888) 777-0929
•
(201) 391-1111
Americas Division
400 Chestnut Ridge Road
Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675
USA
(888) 777-0929 • (201) 391-1111
CANADA
30 Fulton Way
Richmond Hill, ON
Canada L4B-1E6
(905) 886-6100
Americas Customer Support
16255 Bay Vista Drive
Clearwater, FL 34620
USA
(727) 530-9475
Timeplex Federal Systems, Inc.
12150 Monument Drive
Suite 750
Fairfax, VA 22033
USA
(703) 385-3366
Europe/Middle East/Africa
Division
Langley Business Centre
Station Road, Langley
Slough, Berkshire, SL3 8DT
United Kingdom
(44) 0 1753 601000
EUROPE/AFRICA DISTRIBUTORS
10 Rue de Genéve, Bte 17
B-1140 Brussels
Belgium
(32) 2 745.02.30
FRANCE
39 Avenue des Trois Peuples
F-78180 Montigny-le-Bretonneux
France
(33.1) 30.64.81.00
GERMANY
Edisonstrasse 11-13
D-60388 Frankfurt
Germany
(49) 610-973-8505
Far East Division
30th Floor, Windsor House
311 Gloucester Road
Causeway Bay
Hong Kong
(852) 2830 9889
Australia/New Zealand
Division
Level 21
1 York Street
Sydney, NSW 2000
Australia
(612) 9 247 1422
4/98
NO WARRANTIES ARE EXTENDED BY THIS DOCUMENT. The technical information in this document is proprietary to Timeplex, Inc. and the recipient has a personal, non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use this information solely with the use of Timeplex products. The only product warranties made by Timeplex, Inc., if any, are set forth in the agreed terms and conditions for purchase of a
Timeplex product. Timeplex, Inc. disclaims liability for any and all damages that may result from publication or use of this document and/or its contents except for infringement of third party copyright or misappropriation of third party trade secrets. No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner without the prior written consent of Timeplex, Inc.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED AND LIMITED RIGHTS
All software and related software documentation supplied by Timeplex, Inc. to the United States
Government are provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraph (c)(2) of the Commercial Computer Software–
Restricted Rights at CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
All documentation, other than software documentation which are provided with Restricted Rights, are provided with Limited Rights. U.S. Government rights to use, duplicate, or disclose documentation, other than software documentation, are governed by the restrictions defined in paragraph (a)(15) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.
“DFARS” is the Department of Defense Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regulation.
Contractor/manufacturer is Timeplex, Inc., 400 Chestnut Ridge Road, Woodcliff Lake, NJ 07675.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Revisions may be issued at such time.
Timeplex and LINK/2+ are registered trademarks of Timeplex, Inc.
TIME/VIEW, miniLINK/2+, and microLINK/2+ are trademarks of Timeplex, Inc.
ACCUNET is a registered trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
NOTICE
Telecommunications products must be installed and operated in compliance with the relevant
National Regulatory requirements summarized in the REGULATORY section of User’s Guide.
READ IN FULL, PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, any product-specific National Regulatory requirements applicable to the country of installation.
ii
©
1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1997, 1998 Timeplex, Inc.
L2UG
12/31/97
DISCLAIMER
Ascom Timeplex is now Timeplex, Inc. The new company logo is
.
Please disregard
any
references to the company’s former name in this manual.
Thank you.
1998 Timeplex, Inc.
01/01/98
L2UG
7/31/95
WARNING
NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE
THIS EQUIPMENT. SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED
BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
VORSICHT
NICHT VOM BENUTZER REPARIERPARE TEILE IM
GEHÄUSE. BITTE WENDEN SIE SICH AN
QUALIFIZIERTES WARTUNGSPERSONAL.
ATTENTION
CET APPAREIL NE CONTIENT AUCUN ELÉMENT QUE
L'UTILISATEUR PUISSE RÉPARER. CONFIER LA
MAINTENANCE À UN PERSONNEL TECHNIQUE
QUALIFIÉ.
iii
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL
This manual applies to the microLINK/2+
(6-slot Mainframe), miniLINK/2+
(13-slot
Mainframe), and LINK/2+
(18-slot Mainframe) Integrated Connectivity Systems with the following software versions:
Module Boot PROM Number Software Number
Network
Interlink
Integrated Trunk
X.50 Server
Voice Server
NCL
ILC
ILQ
XSM
VSM.3
RP48101C
RP47780B
RP48117A
RP48142A
RP50012J
RP50013E
RP50003B, RP50004B
RP48120A
RP48141A
Voice Server VSM.5
RP48197A RP48198A
NOTE:
The suffix revision letters on the boot PROM and software numbers listed in this table may not agree with the current suffix revision letters.
NOTES:
In this manual, the term LINK/2+ System is used to represent all models unless specific reference to a particular Mainframe type is needed.
In this manual, a module name is used generically to represent all models of that module, e.g., Quad Asynchronous Module includes
QAM, QAM.1, QAM.2, QAM.3, and QAM.6. A model designation, e.g., QAM.1, is generally used to refer to a specific model or interface.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is part of a three-volume set which also includes the LINK/2+ Configuration
Planning Manual and LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual. Other related publications include:
•
LINK/2+ Bipolar Framing Module (BFM) User’s Manual, MC15486
•
LINK/2+ Bipolar Interface Module (BIM.8, BIM.9) User’s Manual, MC15237
The LINK/2+ System must be installed by qualified service personnel and be functioning properly before a user can begin operation.
o Program the LINK/2+ System using worksheets filled out in accordance with the LINK/2+
Configuration Planning Manual. Refer to Chapter 6, Configuration Commands, for configuration guidelines, typical configuration procedures, and configuration command descriptions.
o Operate the LINK/2+ System using supervisory port commands described in the Commands section of this manual:
•
To monitor system status and alarms, see Chapter 5, Display Commands.
iv
L2UG
6/30/97
•
To connect/disconnect channels, change parameters, and perform other configuration activities, see Chapter 6, Configuration Commands. For detailed information on any parameter, see the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual. If changes to DIP switch settings are needed, see the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
•
To perform diagnostic tests, see Chapter 7, Diagnostic Commands.
Users should also familiarize themselves with the Introduction section of this manual before operating the LINK/2+ System.
o Isolate faults and perform corrective maintenance on the LINK/2+ System according to information given in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
NOTE: The Installation and Maintenance Manual is for use by qualified service personnel only.
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL
This manual describes how to operate your LINK/2+ System. The information is organized as follows.
Introduction (Chapters 1 and 2)
This section provides information that a user should be familiar with before using the LINK/2+
System.
•
Chapter 1, Product Description, describes the key features of the LINK/2+ System, provides a functional description of the system and its modules, and gives system specifications.
•
Chapter 2, Getting Started, presents information a user needs to start using the LINK/2+
System, such as power application and turn-off, self-test and other start-up activities, and supervisory port log in and log out. This chapter also includes procedures for loading operational software and database backup.
Commands (Chapters 3 through 7)
This section explains how to operate the LINK/2+ System using supervisory port commands.
•
Chapter 3, General Information, explains the command format and provides operational guidelines.
•
Chapter 4, Support Commands, discusses supervisory port operational commands and command files.
•
Chapter 5, Display Commands, describes the commands that provide status, statistical, and configuration information.
L2UG
6/30/97 v
•
Chapter 6, Configuration Commands, describes the commands used to configure the
LINK/2+ System. This chapter also includes guidelines for performing configuration activities and typical configuration procedures.
•
Chapter 7, Diagnostic Commands, describes the commands that allow the user to test channels, intermachine links, modules, and alarm relays.
Appendixes
Appendix A provides error and status messages.
SERVICE
For service in the U.S., contact Customer Support at 1-800-237-6670.
For service outside the U.S., contact your local sales representative.
Information required for service is:
Model No: ______________________ Serial No: __________________________
WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, AND NOTES
Be sure that you understand all directions, warnings, and limitations before using this product. In this manual:
•
WARNINGS present information or describe conditions which if not observed could result in injury.
•
PRECAUTIONS reflect conditions which could cause product damage or data loss.
•
NOTES describe limitations on the use of the equipment or procedure.
IF PRODUCT IS RECEIVED DAMAGED
Forward an immediate request to the delivering carrier to perform an inspection and prepare a damage report. SAVE container and packing material until contents are verified.
Concurrently, report the nature and extent of damage to Customer Support so that action can be initiated to repair or replace damaged items or instructions issued for returning items.
The responsibility of the manufacturer ends with delivery to the first carrier. ALL CLAIMS for loss, damage, or nondelivery must be made against the delivering carrier WITHIN 10 DAYS OF
RECEIPT of shipment.
vi
L2UG
6/30/97
TO RETURN PRODUCT
Please obtain instructions from Customer Support before returning any item(s). Report the fault or deficiency along with the model, type, and serial number of the item(s) to Customer Support.
Upon receipt of this information, Customer Support will provide service instructions or a Return
Authorization Number and other shipping information. All items returned under this warranty must be sent to the manufacturer with charges prepaid.
L2UG
6/30/97 vii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1. Product Description
APPLICATIONS................................................................................................................ 1-1
PRODUCT FEATURES..................................................................................................... 1-2
Node Capacity ............................................................................................................... 1-2
Advanced Bandwidth Management (ABM).................................................................... 1-3
System Security Features ............................................................................................... 1-4
Redundant Operation ..................................................................................................... 1-6
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 1-7
Mainframe ..................................................................................................................... 1-7
Fan Housing .................................................................................................................. 1-7
Power Supply Chassis and Power Supply Module.......................................................... 1-9
Network Module............................................................................................................ 1-9
Driver Module ............................................................................................................. 1-10
Interlink Module .......................................................................................................... 1-10
Digital Termination Module......................................................................................... 1-10
Link Framing Module .................................................................................................. 1-10
Bipolar Interface Module ............................................................................................. 1-11
Integrated Trunk Module ............................................................................................. 1-11
D-Channel Module ...................................................................................................... 1-12
Voice Processor ........................................................................................................... 1-12
Analog Voice I/O Channel Modules ............................................................................ 1-13
Voice Server Module ................................................................................................... 1-14
Channelized Services Processor ................................................................................... 1-15
X.50 Server Module..................................................................................................... 1-15
Bypass Module ............................................................................................................ 1-15
Data I/O Channel Modules........................................................................................... 1-16
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................... 1-17
Chapter 2. Getting Started
POWER APPLICATION AND TURN-OFF....................................................................... 2-1
Procedure 2-1. Power Turn-On ...................................................................................... 2-2
Procedure 2-2. Power Turn-Off...................................................................................... 2-2
SELF-TEST AND OTHER START-UP ACTIVITIES ....................................................... 2-3
Self-Test ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
Bit Error Rate (BER) Test.............................................................................................. 2-5
Channel Connections ..................................................................................................... 2-6
Alarm Indicators and Messages...................................................................................... 2-6
ACCESSING THE SUPERVISORY PORT ....................................................................... 2-7
Supervisory Port Log In................................................................................................. 2-8
Supervisory Port Log Out .............................................................................................. 2-8 viii
L2UG
6/30/97
NETWORK MODULE/INTERLINK MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE .............. 2-9
Procedure 2-3. Loading Network Module/Interlink Module
Operational Software ................................................................................................ 2-9
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE................................ 2-11
Procedure 2-4. Loading Integrated Trunk Module Operational Software ...................... 2-12
X.50 SERVER MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE ............................................... 2-14
Procedure 2-5. Loading X.50 Server Module Operational Software.............................. 2-14
Procedure 2-6. Copying X.50 Server Module Operational Software ............................. 2-16
VSM.3/VSM.5 VOICE SERVER MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE .................. 2-16
Procedure 2-7. Loading VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module
Operational Software .............................................................................................. 2-17
Procedure 2-8. Copying VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module
Operational Software .............................................................................................. 2-18
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2-19
DATABASE BACKUP .................................................................................................... 2-19
Procedure 2-9. Database Backup.................................................................................. 2-19
OPENING AND CLOSING MAINFRAME DOOR ......................................................... 2-21
COMMANDS
Chapter 3. General Information
COMMAND FORMAT...................................................................................................... 3-1
Structure of Commands ................................................................................................. 3-3
SUPERVISORY PORT OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES................................................... 3-7
Entering Commands from Supervisory Terminal ........................................................... 3-7
Issuing Remote Commands............................................................................................ 3-7
Issuing External Port (LINK/CSU) Commands .............................................................. 3-8
Making Menu Selections ............................................................................................... 3-9
Chapter 4. Support Commands
SUPPORT COMMANDS................................................................................................... 4-1
Clear (Unmask) Unsolicited Messages (CLR MUM) Command .................................... 4-1
Clear Supervisory Port Pagination (CLR PG) Command................................................ 4-6
Clear Password (CLR PW) Command ........................................................................... 4-6
Clear Time Out (CLR TMO) Command ........................................................................ 4-6
Clear Screen and Home Cursor (CLS) Command........................................................... 4-7
Copy Software (COP SW) Command ............................................................................ 4-7
Define and Clear Password (DEF PW1, DEF PW2, CLR PW) Commands .................... 4-8
Log Out (EX) Command................................................................................................ 4-9
Help (HELP) Command................................................................................................. 4-9
Home Cursor (HOME) Command.................................................................................. 4-9
Load Database (LOA DB) Command............................................................................. 4-9
Load Software (LOA SW) Command .......................................................................... 4-10
Save Database (SAV DB) Command ........................................................................... 4-10
Set Day of Year (SET DAT) Command ....................................................................... 4-11
Mask and Unmask Unsolicited Messages (SET MUM, CLR MUM)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 4-11
L2UG
6/30/97 ix
x
Set and Clear Supervisory Port Pagination (SET PG, CLR PG)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 4-12
Set Time of Day (SET TIM) Command ....................................................................... 4-12
Set and Clear Time Out (SET TMO, CLR TMO) Commands ...................................... 4-12
Stop Command File Execution (STP) Command ......................................................... 4-13
Toggle Bank (TGL BNK) Command ........................................................................... 4-13
Send Message (") Command ........................................................................................ 4-13
Command Keyword Information (?) Command ........................................................... 4-14
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS .................................................................................... 4-15
Delete Command Lines (D) Command ........................................................................ 4-15
Define/Clear Command File (DEF @) Command ........................................................ 4-15
Display Command File (DSP @) Command ................................................................ 4-19
Edit Command Lines (E) Command ............................................................................ 4-19
Insert Command Lines (I) Command ........................................................................... 4-20
Exit Command File Editor (X) Command .................................................................... 4-20
Execute Command File (@) Command........................................................................ 4-20
Clear Preset Time (CLR @) Command ........................................................................ 4-21
USING COMMAND FILES............................................................................................. 4-22
Linking Command Files .............................................................................................. 4-22
Repeating Command Files ........................................................................................... 4-22
Delay Time (*) Command ........................................................................................... 4-23
Terminal Control and Banner (&) Command ............................................................... 4-23
Chapter 5. Display Commands
CLEAR ALARM LIST (CLR AQ) COMMAND.............................................................. 5-12
CLEAR TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST (CLR TAQ) COMMAND .............................. 5-12
DISPLAY ACTIVE POLL GROUP (DSP ACT POL) COMMAND ................................ 5-12
DISPLAY AND CLEAR ALARM LIST (DSP AQ, CLR AQ) COMMANDS ................. 5-12
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE NONPROPRIETARY
BUNDLE PARAMETERS (DSP BDL NPR) COMMAND ......................................... 5-14
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE PROPRIETARY BUNDLE
PARAMETERS (DSP BDL PR) COMMAND ............................................................ 5-15
DISPLAY BANDWIDTH (DSP BW) COMMAND ......................................................... 5-16
DISPLAY BUNDLE CONFIGURATION (DSP CFG) COMMAND ............................... 5-16
DISPLAY CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP CH) COMMAND ..................................... 5-17
DISPLAY DATABASE CHECKSUM CONDITION (DSP CKS) COMMAND .............. 5-26
DISPLAY CHANNEL CONNECT STATUS (DSP CON) COMMAND .......................... 5-26
DISPLAY SUPERVISORY COMPUTER PORT PARAMETERS (DSP CP)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-27
DISPLAY CHANNELIZED SERVICES PROCESSOR DS-1
PARAMETERS (DSP CSP) COMMAND ................................................................... 5-27
DISPLAY ISDN D-CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP DCM) COMMAND.................... 5-28
DISPLAY INTERMACHINE LINK PARAMETERS (DSP DL) COMMAND ................ 5-29
DISPLAY VOICE PROCESSOR DS-0 PARAMETERS (DSP DS0)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-30
DISPLAY VOICE PROCESSOR DS-1 PARAMETERS (DSP DS1)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-31
DISPLAY DESTINATION CHANNELS (DSP DST, DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, DSP DST XCH) COMMANDS ................................ 5-32
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
DISPLAY DESTINATION INTERMACHINE LINK (DSP DST DL)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-35
DISPLAY EXTERNAL PORT PARAMETERS (DSP EP) COMMAND ......................... 5-36
DISPLAY ERROR (DSP ERR) COMMAND................................................................... 5-37
DISPLAY EIA FUNCTIONS (DSP FN) COMMAND ..................................................... 5-38
DISPLAY ALARM HISTORY (DSP HIS) COMMAND ................................................. 5-40
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE DS-1 PARAMETERS
(DSP ILQ) COMMAND.............................................................................................. 5-43
DISPLAY LINK FRAMING PARAMETERS (DSP LFM) COMMAND ......................... 5-44
DISPLAY MAP FOR X.50 SUBRATE CHANNELS (DSP MAP) COMMAND ............. 5-45
DISPLAY MASTER DS-0 CHANNELS (DSP MDS0) COMMAND............................... 5-46
DISPLAY PHONE NUMBERS (DSP PHN BCK, DSP PHN XDL)
COMMANDS ............................................................................................................. 5-47
DISPLAY BROADCAST/POLLING CONNECT STATUS (DSP POL)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-48
DISPLAY PROM PART NUMBER (DSP PPN) COMMAND ......................................... 5-49
DISPLAY ABM PROFILE PARAMETERS (DSP PRO) COMMAND ............................ 5-50
DISPLAY QUALITY PARAMETERS (DSP QUA) COMMAND ................................... 5-51
DISPLAY REVISION (DSP REV) COMMAND ............................................................. 5-52
DISPLAY ROUTING PARAMETERS (DSP RTE) COMMAND .................................... 5-53
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG DS0) COMMAND .................................................... 5-54
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG EQ) COMMAND ...................................................... 5-55
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG LI) COMMAND ....................................................... 5-56
DISPLAY SUPERVISORY PORT PARAMETERS (DSP SP) COMMAND ................... 5-57
DISPLAY SPEED PROFILE (DSP SPR) COMMAND .................................................... 5-57
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 1 (DSP ST ALM 1) COMMAND ...................................... 5-58
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 2 (DSP ST ALM 2) COMMAND ...................................... 5-58
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 6 (DSP ST ALM 6) COMMAND ...................................... 5-59
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 7 (DSP ST ALM 7) COMMAND ...................................... 5-60
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 9 (DSP ST ALM 9) COMMAND ...................................... 5-61
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 10 (DSP ST ALM 10) COMMAND .................................. 5-62
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 12 (DSP ST ALM 12) COMMAND .................................. 5-63
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 15 (DSP ST ALM 15) COMMAND .................................. 5-64
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 21 (DSP ST ALM 21) COMMAND .................................. 5-65
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 24 (DSP ST ALM 24) COMMAND .................................. 5-66
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 25 (DSP ST ALM 25) COMMAND .................................. 5-67
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 26 (DSP ST ALM 26) COMMAND .................................. 5-68
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 27 (DSP ST ALM 27) COMMAND .................................. 5-69
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 33 (DSP ST ALM 33) COMMAND .................................. 5-70
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK BUNDLE STATUS (DSP ST BDL)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-71
DISPLAY BYPASS CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST BP) COMMAND ........................... 5-73
DISPLAY CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST CH) COMMAND .......................................... 5-75
DISPLAY CLOCK STATUS (DSP ST CLK) COMMAND ............................................. 5-76
DISPLAY D-CHANNEL MODULE STATUS (DSP ST DCM) COMMAND.................. 5-80
DISPLAY INTERMACHINE LINK STATUS (DSP ST DL) COMMAND...................... 5-81
DISPLAY DS-0 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST DS0) COMMAND ................................ 5-85
DISPLAY DS-1 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST DS1) COMMAND ................................ 5-87
DISPLAY LINK FRAMING MODULE STATUS (DSP ST LFM) COMMAND ............. 5-90
DISPLAY BROADCAST/POLLING STATUS (DSP ST POL) COMMAND .................. 5-93 xi
xii
DISPLAY QUALITY STATUS (DSP ST QUA) COMMAND......................................... 5-93
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS (DSP ST SY) COMMAND .............................................. 5-95
DISPLAY VOICE SERVER MODULE CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST VCH)
COMMAND................................................................................................................ 5-98
DISPLAY X.50 SUBRATE CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST XCH)
COMMAND.............................................................................................................. 5-100
DISPLAY X.50 DS-0 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST XS0) COMMAND ..................... 5-101
DISPLAY SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DSP SY) COMMAND ...................................... 5-102
DISPLAY AND CLEAR TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST (DSP TAQ,
CLR TAQ) COMMANDS ......................................................................................... 5-103
DISPLAY TIME OF DAY (DSP TIM) COMMAND ..................................................... 5-105
DISPLAY TOPOLOGY (DSP TOP) COMMAND ......................................................... 5-105
DISPLAY TIME SLOT ASSIGNMENTS (DSP TS) COMMAND................................. 5-106
DISPLAY PARTIAL TEST (DSP TST) COMMAND.................................................... 5-107
DISPLAY VOICE PROFILE (DSP VPR) COMMAND ................................................. 5-108
DISPLAY X.50 SUBRATE CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP XCH) COMMAND ..... 5-109
DISPLAY X.50 DS-0 CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP XS0) COMMAND ................ 5-110
Chapter 6. Configuration Commands
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES .................................................................... 6-1
Verifying Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-14
Changing Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-14
Adding Modules .......................................................................................................... 6-15
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node ................................................................................. 6-37
GUIDELINES FOR PERFORMING CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES.......................... 6-41
Maintaining Configuration Records ............................................................................. 6-41
Performing Configuration Activities from a Local or Remote Site ............................... 6-41
Parameter Effectivity ................................................................................................... 6-42
CONFIGURATION COMMANDS .................................................................................. 6-43
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR FMC, CLR MC, or CLR MM) Command ............. 6-43
Clear Remote Node Gateway (CLR GWY) Command ................................................. 6-44
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR MC) Command ..................................................... 6-44
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR MM) Command .................................................... 6-44
Clear Broadcast/Polling Group Members (CLR POL) Command ................................. 6-44
Clear ABM Profile (CLR PRO) Command .................................................................. 6-44
Clear Redundant Module (CLR RDN) Command ........................................................ 6-44
Clear Region (CLR REG) Command ........................................................................... 6-44
Clear Routing Table (CLR RTE) Command ................................................................ 6-44
Clear Nodal Security (CLR SEC) Command................................................................ 6-44
Clear Speed Profile (CLR SPR) Command .................................................................. 6-45
Clear Voice Profile (CLR VPR) Command .................................................................. 6-45
Convert Bias Routing (CNV BIAS) Command ............................................................ 6-45
Convert ABM Profile (CNV PRO) Command ............................................................. 6-45
Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON, CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC, DSC
BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Command .................................................................... 6-46
Connect Channel (CON CH) Command....................................................................... 6-48
Direct Channel Connect (CON DR) Command ............................................................ 6-48
Connect DS-0 Channel (CON DS0) Command ............................................................ 6-49
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
Connect to Node and Disconnect from Node (CON ND, DSC ND)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 6-49
Connect and Disconnect Broadcast/Polling Group Members (CON POL, DSC POL)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 6-51
Connect and Disconnect Channels by Priority (CON PR, DSC PR)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 6-52
Connect and Disconnect Channels by ABM Profile (CON PRO, DSC PRO) Commands 6-
52
Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command ............................................... 6-53
Define Integrated Trunk Module Bundle Parameters (DEF BDL NPR,
DEF BDL PR) Commands...................................................................................... 6-54
Define Bias Routing (DEF BIAS CH, DEF BIAS DS0) Commands ............................ 6-56
Define System Clock Fallback List (DEF CFB) Commands ........................................ 6-57
Define Channel Parameters (DEF CH/, DEF DS0, DEF MDS0) Commands ................ 6-59
Define Channel Connection (DEF CON) Command .................................................... 6-66
Define Supervisory Computer Port Parameters (DEF CP) Command ........................... 6-66
Define Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF CSP)
Command ............................................................................................................... 6-67
Define ISDN D-Channel Parameters (DEF DCM) Command....................................... 6-68
Define Intermachine Link Parameters (DEF DL) Command......................................... 6-68
Define Destination Channel (DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0,
DEF DST XS0) Commands .................................................................................... 6-70
Define Destination X.50 Subrate Channel (DEF DST XCH) Command ....................... 6-72
Define DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF DS0) Command ............................................. 6-72
Define Voice Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF DS1) Command ................................. 6-72
Define External Port Parameters (DEF EP) Command ................................................. 6-73
Define Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameters (DEF ILQ) Command.................... 6-74
Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM) Command ................................ 6-75
Define Master Clocking List (DEF MCL) Command ................................................... 6-78
Define Master DS-0 Channels (DEF MDS0) Command............................................... 6-79
Define Master Clocking Nodes (DEF MM) Command................................................. 6-79
Define Broadcast/Polling Master Channel (DEF MSR POL) Command ....................... 6-80
Define Node Number (DEF NOD) Command.............................................................. 6-80
Define Intermachine Link Out-Of-Service Time (DEF OOS) Command ...................... 6-80
Define and Clear Broadcast/Polling Group Members (DEF POL,
CLR POL) Commands............................................................................................ 6-81
Define and Clear ABM Profile (DEF PRO, CLR PRO) Commands ............................. 6-82
Define System Maximum Phasor Size (DEF PSZ) Command ...................................... 6-83
Define Quality (DEF QUA) Command ........................................................................ 6-83
Define System Connect Retry Timer (DEF RET) Command ........................................ 6-84
Define and Clear Routing
Define Station Clock Speed (DEF SC) Command ........................................................ 6-88
Define Supervisory Port Parameters (DEF SP) Command............................................ 6-88
Define and Clear Speed Profile (DEF SPR, CLR SPR) Commands .............................. 6-89
Define and Clear Voice Profile (DEF VPR, CLR VPR) Commands ............................. 6-90
Define X.50 Subrate Channel Parameters (DEF XCH) Command ................................ 6-91
Define X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF XS0) Command..................................... 6-92
Delete Slot (DEL) Command ....................................................................................... 6-93
Delete Channel (DEL CH) Command .......................................................................... 6-93
Delete Route (DEL RTE) Command............................................................................ 6-94 xiii
xiv
Disconnect (DSC) Command ....................................................................................... 6-94
Disconnect Bundle (DSC BDL) Command .................................................................. 6-94
Disconnect Bypass Channel (DSC BP) Command ....................................................... 6-94
Disconnect I/O Channel (DSC CH) Command............................................................. 6-94
Disconnect Channels on Intermachine Link (DSC DL) Command ............................... 6-94
Disconnect DS-0 Channel (DSC DS0) Command ........................................................ 6-95
Disconnect from Node (DSC ND) Command............................................................... 6-95
Disconnect Broadcast/Polling Group Members (DSC POL) Command ........................ 6-96
Disconnect Channels by Priority (DSC PR) Command ................................................ 6-96
Disconnect Channels by ABM Profile (DSC PRO) Command ..................................... 6-96
Insert and Remove Module (INS, RMV) Commands ................................................... 6-96
Insert and Delete Route (INS RTE, DEL RTE) Commands.......................................... 6-97
Remove Module (RMV) Command ............................................................................. 6-98
Set Alarm Forwarding (SET ALM FWD) Command ................................................... 6-98
Set Bias Routing for X.50 Subrate Channel (SET BIAS XCH) Command ................... 6-98
Set Bias Routing for X.50 DS-0 Channel (SET BIAS XS0) Command ........................ 6-99
Set Bump (SET BMP) Command .............................................................................. 6-100
Set Bundle Configuration (SET CFG) Command ....................................................... 6-101
Assign ABM Profile to Channels (SET CH) Command ............................................. 6-102
Set Clock (SET CLK) Command ............................................................................... 6-103
Set Clock Qualification Tolerance Level (SET CQT) Command ................................ 6-103
Set Clock Switching (SET CSW QS, SET CSW SS) Commands ............................... 6-104
Set Contention (SET CTN) Command ....................................................................... 6-104
Set Backup Link (SET DL BCK) Command .............................................................. 6-104
Set Expansion Link (SET DL EXP) Command .......................................................... 6-105
Set Dial-Up Retry (SET DRT) Command .................................................................. 6-106
Set Dial-Up Timer (SET DTM) Command ................................................................ 6-106
Set Grooming Flag and Grooming Time (SET GRM) Commands .............................. 6-106
Set and Clear Remote Node Gateway (SET GWY, CLR GWY) Commands .............. 6-108
Set QAM I/O Error Character (SET IO) Command .................................................... 6-108
Set Password Level 1 CON/DSC (SET L1C) Command ............................................ 6-109
Set Map (SET MAP) Command ................................................................................ 6-109
Set Phone Numbers (SET PHN BCK, SET PHN XDL) Commands ........................... 6-110
Change ABM Profile Parameter (SET PRO) Commands ........................................... 6-111
Set and Clear Redundant Module (SET RDN, CLR RDN) Commands ...................... 6-112
Set System Connect Retry Timer (SET RET) Command ............................................ 6-113
Set and Clear Nodal Security (SET SEC, CLR SEC) Commands ............................... 6-114
Set Link Framing Module Time Slots (SET TSA and SET TSB) Commands ............. 6-114
Set Voice Server Module (SET VSM) Command....................................................... 6-115
Set X.50 Server Module (SET XSM) Command ........................................................ 6-115
Chapter 7. Diagnostic Commands
DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDS ............................................................................................ 7-9
Busy Out DS-0 (BSY) Command .................................................................................. 7-9
Center Phasor (CEN PHS) Command ............................................................................ 7-9
Clear Bypass Channel Loop (CLR BP LP) Command .................................................... 7-9
Clear Bypass Phasor (CLR BP PH) Command ............................................................... 7-9
Clear I/O Module Channel Loop (CLR CH) Command................................................ 7-10
Clear Intermachine Link Loop (CLR DL) Command ................................................... 7-10
L2UG
6/30/97
Clear DS-0 Channel Loop (CLR DS0) Command ........................................................ 7-10
Clear DS-1/E-1 Trunk Loop (CLR DS1) Command ..................................................... 7-10
Clear Local DS-0 (CLR LCL) Command ..................................................................... 7-10
Clear LFM (CLR LFM) Command .............................................................................. 7-10
Clear Test Generator (CLR MG) Command................................................................. 7-10
Clear Phasor (CLR PH) Command .............................................................................. 7-11
Clear Alarm Relay (CLR RLY) Command .................................................................. 7-11
Clear Tone Generator (CLR TON) Command.............................................................. 7-11
Loop Bypass Channel and Clear Bypass Channel Loop (LP BP,
CLR BP LP) Commands......................................................................................... 7-11
Loop I/O Module Channel and Clear Channel Loop (LP CH, CLR CH)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 7-12
Loop Intermachine Link and Clear Intermachine Link Loop (LP DL, CLR DL)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 7-23
Loop DS-0 Channel and Clear DS-0 Channel Loop (LP DS0, CLR DS0)
Commands.............................................................................................................. 7-40
Loop DS-1/E-1 Trunk and Clear Trunk Loop (LP DS1, CLR DS1) Commands ........... 7-48
Loop LFM and Clear LFM (LP LFM, CLR LFM) Commands ..................................... 7-51
Loop Network Interface (LP NI) Command ................................................................. 7-53
Loop X.50 Server Module Subrate Channel (LP XCH) Command ............................... 7-58
Loop X.50 Server Module X.50 DS-0 Channel (LP XS0) Command ........................... 7-58
Monitor Channel Data (MON) Command .................................................................... 7-61
Reset Module (RST) Command ................................................................................... 7-63
Reset Bundle (RST BDL) Command ........................................................................... 7-65
Reset V-Channel (RST CH) Command ........................................................................ 7-66
Reset Driver Module (RST DR) Command .................................................................. 7-66
Reset Power Supply Module (RST PS) Command ....................................................... 7-67
Set Database Checksum (SET CKS) Command ........................................................... 7-67
Set and Clear Alarm Relay (SET RLY, CLR RLY) Commands ................................... 7-68
Set and Clear Tone Generator (SET TON, CLR TON) Commands .............................. 7-69
Trace Bypass (TRC BP) Command.............................................................................. 7-70
Trace Channel (TRC CH) Command ........................................................................... 7-73
Test DS-0 Channel (TST DS0) Command ................................................................... 7-75
Test Generator and Clear Test Generator (TST, CLR MG) Commands ........................ 7-76
APPENDIXES
Appendix A. Error and Status Messages
INDEX
REGULATORY
L2UG
6/30/97 xv
xvi
Figures
1-1
1-2
2-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
LINK/2+ System Connections....................................................................... 1-2
Functional Block Diagram of Typical LINK/2+ System................................ 1-8
Typical Database Verification Program Results........................................... 2-21
Supervisory Port Command Format.............................................................. 3-1
Typical Command ........................................................................................ 3-2
Typical Parameter Programming Using Menu Selections............................. 3-10
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
Typical Command Keyword Information (?) Command............................... 4-14
Typical Command File Display (DSP @).................................................... 4-19
Typical Programming to Link Command Files............................................. 4-22
Typical Programming to Repeat Command File........................................... 4-23
Typical Use of Delay Time Command......................................................... 4-23
Typical Use of Terminal Control and Banner (&) Command........................ 4-25
Typical Display of Command File with Terminal Control Character
Sequences and Banner........................................................................... 4-26
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
Typical Active Poll Group Display (DSP ACT POL).................................. 5-12
Typical Alarm List Display (DSP AQ)........................................................ 5-13
Typical Integrated Trunk Module Nonproprietary Bundle Parameter
Display (DSP BDL NPR) ...................................................................... 5-14
Typical Integrated Trunk Module Proprietary Bundle Parameter
Display (DSP BDL PR)......................................................................... 5-15
Typical System Bus Bandwidth Display (DSP BW).................................... 5-16 5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
Typical Bundle Configuration Display (DSP CFG)..................................... 5-17
Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH).......................................... 5-18
Typical Checksum Display (DSP CKS)...................................................... 5-26
5-9 Typical Supervisory Computer Port Parameter Display (DSP CP)............... 5-27
5-10 Typical Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameter
Display (DSP CSP) ............................................................................... 5-27
5-11 Typical ISDN D-Channel Parameter Display (DSP DCM).......................... 5-28
5-12 Typical Intermachine Link Parameter Display (DSP DL)............................. 5-29
5-13 Typical Voice Processor DS-0 Parameter Display (DSP DS0)..................... 5-30
5-14 Typical Voice Processor DS-1 Parameter Display (DSP DS1)..................... 5-31
5-15 Typical Destination Channel Display (DSP DST, DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, or DSP DST XCH) ............................. 5-33
5-16 Typical Destination Intermachine Link Display (DSP DST DL).................. 5-36
5-17 Typical External Port Parameter Display (DSP EP) .................................... 5-36
5-18 Typical Start-Up Error Condition Display (DSP ERR)................................ 5-37
5-19 Typical EIA Function Display (DSP FN).................................................... 5-39
5-20 Typical Alarm History Display (DSP HIS) (Sheet 1 of 2)............................ 5-40
5-21 Typical Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameter Display (DSP ILQ)........ 5-43
5-22 Typical Link Framing Parameter Displays (DSP LFM)............................... 5-44
5-23 Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Map Display (DSP MAP)............................ 5-45
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
5-24 Typical Master DS-0 Channel Parameter Display (DSP MDS0).................. 5-46
5-25 Typical Phone Number Directory for Expansion Display
(DSP PHN XDL) .................................................................................. 5-47
5-26 Typical Broadcast/Polling Connect Status Display (DSP POL)................... 5-48
5-27 Typical PROM Part Number Display (DSP PPN) ....................................... 5-49
5-28 Typical ABM Profile Parameter Display (DSP PRO).................................. 5-50
5-29 Typical Quality Parameter Display (DSP QUA).......................................... 5-51
5-30 Typical Revision Parameter Display (DSP REV)........................................ 5-52
5-31 Typical Routing Parameter Display (DSP RTE).......................................... 5-53
5-32 Typical DS-0 Channel Signaling Display (DSP SIG DS0)........................... 5-54
5-33 Typical Signaling from DS-1 Interface Display (DSP SIG EQ) ................... 5-55
5-34 Typical Signaling toward DS-1 Interface Display (DSP SIG LI).................. 5-56
5-35 Typical Supervisory Port Parameter Display (DSP SP)............................... 5-57
5-36 Typical Speed Profile Display (DSP SPR) .................................................. 5-57
5-37 Typical Alarm 1 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 1)...................................... 5-58
5-38 Typical Alarm 2 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 2)...................................... 5-58
5-39 Typical Alarm 6 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 6)...................................... 5-59
5-40 Typical Alarm 7 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 7)...................................... 5-60
5-41 Typical Alarm 9 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 9)...................................... 5-61
5-42 Typical Alarm 10 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 10) .................................. 5-62
5-43 Typical Alarm 12 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 12).................................. 5-63
5-44 Typical Alarm 15 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 15).................................. 5-64
5-45 Typical Alarm 21 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 21).................................. 5-65
5-46 Typical Alarm 24 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 24).................................. 5-66
5-47 Typical Alarm 25 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 25).................................. 5-67
5-48 Typical Alarm 26 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 26).................................. 5-68
5-49 Typical Alarm 27 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 27).................................. 5-69
5-50 Typical Alarm 33 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 33).................................. 5-70
5-51 Typical Integrated Trunk Bundle Status Display (DSP ST BDL)................. 5-71
5-52 Typical Bypass Channel Status Display (DSP ST BP) ................................ 5-74
5-53 Typical Channel Status Display (DSP ST CH)............................................ 5-75
5-54 Typical Clock Status Display (DSP ST CLK) ............................................. 5-77
5-55 Typical D-Channel Module Status Display (DSP ST DCM)........................ 5-80
5-56 Typical Intermachine Link Status Display (DSP ST DL)............................. 5-82
5-57 Typical DS-0 Channel Status Display (DSP ST DS0) ................................. 5-85
5-58 Typical DS-1 Trunk Status Display (DSP ST DS1) .................................... 5-88
5-59 Typical E-1 Trunk Status Display (DSP ST DS1) ....................................... 5-89
5-60 Typical Link Framing Module Status Displays (DSP ST LFM)................... 5-90
5-61 Typical Broadcast/Polling Status Display (DSP ST POL) ........................... 5-93
5-62 Typical Quality Status Display (DSP ST QUA) .......................................... 5-94
5-63 Typical System Status Display (DSP ST SY).............................................. 5-96
5-64 Typical Voice Server Module Channel Status Display (DSP ST VCH)........ 5-98
5-65 Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Status Display (DSP ST XCH) .................. 5-100
5-66 Typical X.50 DS-0 Channel Status Display (DSP ST XS0)....................... 5-101
5-67 Typical System Parameter Display (DSP SY)........................................... 5-102
5-68 Typical Time-Stamped Alarm List Display (DSP TAQ)............................ 5-104
5-69 Typical Time and Date Display (DSP TIM).............................................. 5-105
5-70 Typical Topology Display (DSP TOP)...................................................... 5-106
5-71 Typical Time Slot Assignments Display (DSP TS).................................... 5-106 xvii
xviii
5-72 Typical Partial Test Display (DSP TST) ................................................... 5-107
5-73 Typical Voice Profile Display (DSP VPR) ................................................ 5-108
5-74 Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Parameter Display (DSP XCH) ................. 5-109
5-75 Typical X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameter Display (DSP XS0) ...................... 5-110
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Example of Direct Channel Connect (CON DR) Command......................... 6-50
Typical Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command................... 6-53
Typical Define Integrated Trunk Module Bundle Parameters Commands..... 6-55
Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands........................................... 6-60
6-6
Typical Define Supervisory Computer Port Parameters (DEF CP)
Command.............................................................................................. 6-66
Typical Define Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameters
6-7
6-8
(DEF CSP) Command ........................................................................... 6-67
Typical Define ISDN D-Channel Parameters (DEF DCM) Command.......... 6-68
Typical Define Intermachine Link Parameters (DEF DL) Command............ 6-69
6-9 Typical Define Voice Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF DS1) Command.... 6-73
6-10 Typical Define External Port Parameters (DEF EP) Command.................... 6-74
6-11 Typical Define Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameters
(DEF ILQ) Command............................................................................ 6-75
6-12 Typical Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM)
Commands............................................................................................. 6-76
6-13 Typical Define Master Clocking List (DEF MCL) Command...................... 6-79
6-14 Typical Define ABM Profile (DEF PRO) Command................................... 6-83
6-15 Typical Define Quality (DEF QUA) Command........................................... 6-84
6-16 Sample Network to Be Routed.................................................................... 6-86
6-17 Typical Define Routing (DEF RTE) Commands.......................................... 6-87
6-18 Typical Define Station Clock Speed (DEF SC) Command........................... 6-88
6-19 Typical Define Supervisory Port Parameters (DEF SP) Command............... 6-89
6-20 Typical Define Speed Profile (DEF SPR) Command.................................... 6-90
6-21 Typical Define Voice Profile (DEF VPR) Command................................... 6-91
6-22 Typical Define X.50 Subrate Channel Parameters (DEF XCH)
Command.............................................................................................. 6-92
6-23 Typical Define X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF XS0) Command........ 6-92
6-24 Typical Set Groom (SET GRM) Command Displays................................. 6-107
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Bypass Channel Loopback.......................................................................... 7-11
Bidirectional Bus Channel Loopbacks......................................................... 7-14
Serial Bidirectional Loopback..................................................................... 7-16
Parallel Bidirectional Loopback.................................................................. 7-16
Local Digital Channel Loopback................................................................. 7-18
I/O Module Channel Loopback Plug for DTE1 or DCE
7-7
7-8
7-9
(Unbalanced Interface)........................................................................... 7-19
Local Analog Channel Loopback................................................................. 7-20
Remote Analog Channel Loopback.............................................................. 7-21
Remote Digital Channel Loopback (CCITT Circuit 140)............................. 7-22
7-10 Bidirectional V-Channel Loopback.............................................................. 7-23
7-11 Local Bus Intermachine Link Loopback...................................................... 7-26
7-12 Local Digital and Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopbacks for
Line Drivers .......................................................................................... 7-26
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
7-13 Local Digital and Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Analog Modems............................................................................... 7-31
7-14 Local Analog Loopback for LFM.14 Link Framing Module
(Low Speed Port)................................................................................... 7-32
7-16 Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers..................................................................................... 7-34
7-17 Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Analog Modems............................................................................... 7-37
7-18 Remote Digital Loopback for LFM.14 Link Framing Module
(Low Speed Port)................................................................................... 7-39
7-19 Remote Bus Intermachine Link Loopback ................................................... 7-40
7-20 Typical Loop DS-0 Channel (LP DS0) Command....................................... 7-42
7-21 DS-0 Channel Equipment Loopback............................................................ 7-43
7-22 DS-0 Channel Link Interface Loopback....................................................... 7-45
7-23 Bidirectional DS-0 Channel Loopback......................................................... 7-45
7-24 Remote Analog Integrated Trunk Module Loopback.................................... 7-46
7-25 Remote Bus Integrated Trunk Module Loopback......................................... 7-46
7-26 Remote Analog and Remote Digital Integrated Trunk Module
Loopbacks for Analog Modems.............................................................. 7-47
7-27 Voice Server Module Bidirectional Loopback.............................................. 7-47
7-28 Typical Loop DS-1 Trunk (LP DS1) Command.......................................... 7-49
7-29 DS-1 Signal Equipment Loopback.............................................................. 7-49
7-30 DS-1 Signal Link Interface Loopback......................................................... 7-50
7-31 Bidirectional DS-1 Signal Loopback........................................................... 7-50
7-32 High Speed Port Loopbacks for LFM.14 Link Framing Module................... 7-52
7-33 Network Interface Loopback Toward Voice Processor, Integrated
Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor.................................. 7-54
7-34 Network Interface Loopback for LFM.14 Link Framing Module
Low Speed Port (Toward ILQ.1 Integrated Trunk Module)..................... 7-55
7-35 Network Interface Loopback Toward DS-1 Trunk....................................... 7-56
7-36 Network Interface Loopback for LFM.14 Link Framing Module
Low Speed Port (Toward JT-2 Trunk) ................................................... 7-57
7-37 X.50 Subrate Channel Bidirectional Loopback............................................ 7-59
7-38 X.50 DS-0 Channel Bidirectional Loopback................................................ 7-60
7-39 Set Tone Equipment Test............................................................................ 7-70
7-40 Set Tone Link Interface Test....................................................................... 7-71
7-41 Typical Trace Bypass Display (TRC BP).................................................... 7-72
7-42 Typical Trace Channel Display (TRC CH).................................................. 7-74
7-43 Typical Test DS-0 Channel (TST DS0) Command...................................... 7-75
7-44 Internal Test Generator............................................................................... 7-77 xix
xx
Tables
1-1
2-1
4-1
5-1
5-2
Specifications............................................................................................. 1-18
BER Levels .................................................................................................. 2-6
Support Commands ...................................................................................... 4-2
Display Commands....................................................................................... 5-3
Alarm 32 Error Code Messages .................................................................. 5-42
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-7
Configuration Commands............................................................................. 6-2
Typical Configuration Activities
Verifying Parameters............................. 6-16
Typical Configuration Activities
Changing System Parameters................. 6-17
Typical Configuration Activities
Routing.................................................. 6-22
Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Voice Processor DS-0
Channel Parameters............................................................................... 6-25
6-10 Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Bundle Configuration............. 6-29
6-11 Typical Configuration Activities
Changing I/O Channel Parameters.......... 6-30
6-12 Typical Configuration Activities
Defining Channel Connections................ 6-31
6-13 Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Broadcast/Polling Master and Group Connections.......................................................................... 6-33
6-14 Typical Configuration Activities
Defining Voice Compression
Connections........................................................................................... 6-34
6-15 Typical Configuration Activities
Setting and Assigning Advanced
Bandwidth Management (ABM) Profiles................................................ 6-35
6-16 Typical Configuration Activities
Assigning Voice Profiles........................ 6-36
6-17 Typical Configuration Activities
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node............ 6-37
6-18 Typical Configuration Activities—Defining an X.50 Server Module
Channel Connection............................................................................... 6-40
7-1 Diagnostic Commands.................................................................................. 7-2
A-1 Error and Status Messages........................................................................... A-2
L2UG
6/30/97
Chapter
1
Product Description
LINK/2+ Integrated Connectivity Systems are the building blocks of high capacity wide area networks for voice-data-image communications. In private, public, and hybrid networking applications, LINK/2+ Systems form powerful digital networks characterized by bandwidth efficiency, integrated communications, and full network management capabilities.
In private networks, LINK/2+ Systems use an optimized protocol that integrates network traffic and provides an error protected channel for control and supervisory information. In hybrid networks, LINK/2+ Systems connect to public facilities at the DS-1 and higher levels. For DS-1 applications, LINK/2+ Systems use standard D4/G.732/TTC formatting to take advantage of the full voice and data services offered by common carriers. For applications using NTT High-Speed
Digital Leased Circuit Services, LINK/2+ Systems use JT-2 framing for trunk speeds up to 6.312
Mbps. LINK/2+ Systems also give users convenient access to fractional T-1 and switched 56 kbps services.
Networks of LINK/2+ Systems can accommodate up to 2000 nodes. This high number of nodes, full gateway capabilities, and intermachine link speeds ranging from 4.8 kbps to 2.048 Mbps give LINK/2+ networks outstanding flexibility to connect multiple sites with widely varying requirements throughout the world.
The design of LINK/2+ Systems ensures minimal interruption of critical communication facilities. Redundant system control elements are available on all LINK/2+ models. After a communication facility failure, automatic alternate routing reconnects critical circuits according to programmable priorities. System options enable backup or expansion of circuit bandwidth using dial-up networks. These capabilities allow network design to be based on average rather than peak loads.
Optional microcontroller-based digital phase locked loop (PLL) circuitry on LINK/2+ Systems, with on-board Stratum 3 accurate oscillator and clock qualifier monitor circuit, ensures detection of faulty clock reference as well as smooth network operation during subsequent clock switchover. The PLL option enhances network reliability and offers greater operational flexibility.
The LINK/2+ System incorporates a modular design for flexibility and superior performance. See the "Functional Description" paragraphs for a description of each module.
APPLICATIONS
LINK/2+ Systems form the basis for powerful and efficient private and hybrid networks and also give common carriers an economical means of providing channelized services with high reliability, supported by comprehensive diagnostics. Figure 1-1 indicates the range of voice-dataimage inputs to a LINK/2+ System along with different types of network connections. A
LINK/2+ network can integrate a wide variety of inputs into a cost-effective and efficient solution to a full range of communications problems.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-1
PBX
VIDEO
FAX
PUBLIC
NETWORK
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE (DDS)
SWITCHED 56 KBPS DDS
ISDN PRIMARY
X.50 SERVICE
LINK/2+
SYSTEM
OPTIMIZED CONNECTIONS
TO OTHER LINK/2+ NODES
Figure 1-1. LINK/2+ System Connections
PRODUCT FEATURES
LINK/2+ Systems deliver full integration of voice, data, and image transmission over T-1/E-1 facilities (1.544 to 2.048 Mbps), NTT High-Speed Digital Leased Circuit Services (6.312 Mbps), and lower speed facilities as well (from 4.8 kbps). Fractional T-1/E-1/NTT services are also supported. LINK/2+ Systems offer automatic alternate routing and other management capabilities for full and fractional connections through an embedded ARQ control channel. In addition, asymmetrical and simplex transmission facilities are supported for those applications where transmit and receive speeds differ for individual channels.
LINK/2+ System features include:
●
Node capacity to as many as 2000 nodes
●
Advanced Bandwidth Management (ABM) for network efficiency
●
Extensive system security
●
Redundant operation to ensure high reliability
Node Capacity
LINK/2+ networks can directly address up to 2000 nodes. The TIME/VIEW 2000 Network
Management System establishes all routing tables and channel connections. Supervisory port commands are also available for establishing internetwork connections.
1-2
L2UG
6/30/94
Advanced Bandwidth Management (ABM)
The LINK/2+ System provides the following ABM features:
●
Selective routing
●
Grooming
●
Bumping
●
ILP bandwidth contention and pooling
Selective Routing
Selective routing is the process by which routing decisions are made according to the specific path criteria defined in a channel’s ABM profile. This feature is supported for channels that pass through transfer nodes. At connection time, the Network Module will test a possible outbound intermachine link to determine if it meets a channel’s ABM profile requirements. Any intermachine link failing to meet these requirements is rejected and the next link in the routing table will be considered. This process continues until a suitable intermachine link is found and the connection is made, or until all possible outbound links have been rejected and an appropriate disconnect reason is assigned. The user has the ability to override selective routing path criteria.
For information on defining a channel’s ABM profile, see Advanced Bandwidth Management
Profile Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual. For information on routing, see Routing chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
Grooming
Grooming is the process of disconnecting and reconnecting channels at a time of minimal usage with the intention of obtaining a more desirable route. The system maintains two user-specified timetables that represent the grooming disconnect time and grooming reconnect time for each day of the week. These timetables are checked against the actual time at least once every 60 seconds.
Provided that the system grooming parameter is enabled and the grooming disconnect time has been reached, the system searches for the first channel with grooming enabled in its ABM profile which meets certain qualifications. Any channel that does not have grooming enabled in its
ABM profile or does not meet the required conditions remains connected. Any channel(s) disconnected for grooming will be reconnected when the grooming reconnect time has been reached.
Dial-up services backup intermachine links will be disconnected at grooming disconnect time if and only if the primary intermachine link has been restored to in-service status. Once disconnected, dial-up services backup intermachine links are not reconnected at grooming reconnect time. Another feature, automatic grooming, provides grooming of switched backup bindles every 10 minutes. This feature will disconnect the backup bundle when the primary bundle is stable for 10 minutes and no connections are present on the backup bundle.
Grooming of channels that pass through transfer nodes is supported with certain restrictions listed in the System Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-3
For information on enabling grooming in a channel’s ABM profile, see Advanced Bandwidth
Management Profile Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual. For information on system grooming and specifying grooming disconnect and reconnect times, see
System Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
Bumping
Bumping is the process that will selectively disconnect (bump) one or more lower level channels, thereby allowing a higher level channel to connect. The higher level channel connects using the resources previously allocated to the lower level channel(s). A channel is assigned this bumping level in its ABM profile.
The bumping process utilizes two schemes: end-to-end and point-to-point. The end-to-end scheme attempts to locate a single channel that, when bumped, will provide enough bandwidth for the bumper to reach its destination node. The point-to-point scheme searches for one or more channels that, when bumped as a group, will satisfy the bumper’s bandwidth requirements to the next node.
For information on assigning bumping levels, see Advanced Bandwidth Management Profile
Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual. To enable system bumping and select the bumping scheme, see System Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration
Planning Manual.
ILP Bandwidth Contention and Pooling
The ILP bandwidth contention feature enables the user to designate ILP DS-0 channels as bandwidth contention channels.
For information on designating ILP bandwidth contention channels, see Digital Voice and
Channelized Services Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual. For information on enabling ILP bandwidth contention and bandwidth pooling on a system level, see
System Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
System Security Features
The LINK/2+ System provides the following features for security:
●
Password protection
●
Gateway and nongateway designation
●
Nodal security
●
Intermachine link security
1-4
L2UG
6/30/94
Password Protection
Password protection ensures that unauthorized users do not have access to the LINK/2+ System via the supervisory terminal. Two levels of password protection correspond to the gateway and nongateway commands discussed in the following paragraphs. If the supervisory port is designated as a gateway, users with password 2 can enter gateway and nongateway commands, while users with password 1 can enter nongateway commands only.
For information on defining passwords, see Chapter 4, Support Commands.
Gateway and Nongateway Designation
The gateway status of the supervisory port determines the types of commands that can be issued from the node. Gateway status also affects the supervisory computer port, for example, when an element management system is used. Designating the supervisory port or supervisory computer port as a gateway enables a device connected to the port to issue gateway commands to the local node and to remote nodes.
Gateway commands affect node operation, for example, configuration and diagnostic commands. Gateway commands are divided into two groups:
●
Global gateway commands are accepted by the local node and all remote nodes within the same network if the supervisory port or supervisory computer port originating the commands is designated a gateway. Global gateway commands are typically used for diagnostics.
Global gateway commands are noted by a G in the "G" column of the command summary tables throughout this manual.
●
Nonglobal gateway commands are accepted by a local node if the supervisory port or supervisory computer port is designated a gateway.
Nonglobal gateway commands are accepted by a remote node in the same network if:
The supervisory port or supervisory computer port originating the command is designated a gateway.
The node number of the node originating the command is on the alarm notification list of the node receiving the command.
Nonglobal gateway commands are typically used for configuration activities. Nonglobal gateway commands are noted by a G in the "G" column of the command summary tables throughout this manual.
Commands that do not affect node operation, for example, display commands, are called
nongateway commands. These commands may be directed to a local or remote node regardless of the gateway/nongateway status of the supervisory port or the supervisory computer port.
Nongateway commands do not have an entry in the "G" column of the command summary tables throughout this manual.
NOTE:
Supervisory port and supervisory computer port gateway status cannot be selected via the local supervisory terminal. Gateway status is initially determined by Network Module DIP switch but can be changed by a SET GWY or CLR GWY command issued from a remote node. See Chapter 6, Configuration Commands.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-5
Nodal Security
Nodal security restricts a LINK/2+ System from accepting global gateway commands. When nodal security is enabled, all global gateway commands are interpreted by the LINK/2+ System as nonglobal gateway commands and are accepted only if both:
●
The supervisory port or supervisory computer port originating the command is designated a gateway.
●
The node number of the node originating the command is on the alarm notification list of the node receiving the command.
For information on setting and clearing nodal security, see Chapter 6, Configuration Commands.
Intermachine Link Security
Intermachine link security determines whether supervisory port or supervisory computer port commands issued from remote nodes will be accepted over a specified intermachine link.
Enabling intermachine link security does not affect voice or data communications between nodes.
For more information on operation when intermachine link security is enabled, see Intermachine
Link Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
Redundant Operation
All LINK/2+ modules except I/O channel modules are capable of redundant operation. The following paragraphs describe the types of redundancy available for different modules.
The Network Module, Interlink Module, Voice Processor, Channelized Services Processor,
Integrated Trunk Module, D-Channel Module, and Bypass Module can be configured for redundant operation. When redundancy is toggled, all channels supported by that module are first automatically disconnected and then automatically reconnected.
Redundant operation for the Voice Server Module is achieved with pooled redundancy, that is, connections on a failed Voice Server Module disconnect and reconnect using unassigned channels on another Voice Server Module.
For the X.50 Server Module, up to four primary and four redundant modules may be installed at a node. Modules are defined as either primary or redundant via a user entered command. An algorithm assigns a redundant X.50 Server Module to automatically take over for a failed primary X.50 Server Module. During redundancy switchover, the X.50 DS-0 channels and X.50
subrate channels remain fully connected.
When a redundant Power Supply Module is installed, both Power Supply Modules for that
Mainframe share the load under normal operation. If either Power Supply Module fails, the remaining Power Supply Module assumes the full load for that Mainframe without traffic interruption.
1-6
L2UG
6/30/94
Redundant operation of any of these modules occurs automatically when a failure is detected in the primary module. Redundant operation may also be activated via operator initiated command except for the Voice Server Module.
The Integrated Trunk and D-Channel Modules implement a form of redundancy called cold standby. When a primary Integrated Trunk Module or D-Channel Module fails, the redundant module comes online automatically. Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundles are dropped and reconnected automatically.
Redundant Digital Termination Modules or Link Framing Modules can be used with redundant
Interlink Modules, Voice Processors, Integrated Trunk Modules, and Channelized Services
Processors. If either of the primary modules fails, the redundant pair of modules assumes operation. Some Digital Termination Module and Link Framing Module models have two independent units on a single module, allowing vertical redundancy. See the Modules section of the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for further information on redundancy capabilities of these modules.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The following paragraphs describe the function of all units and modules comprising a LINK/2+
System. A functional block diagram of a typical LINK/2+ System is shown in Figure 1-2.
Mainframe
The Mainframe provides mounting and connectors for all modules. Mainframes are available with 6 slots (microLINK/2+), 13 slots (miniLINK/2+), or 18 slots. As shown in Figure 1-4, 18slot Mainframe systems can include a Control Mainframe and one or two Expander Mainframes.
See the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual for information on the number and types of modules that can be installed in each Mainframe.
The Line Termination System (LTS) Chassis is a special type of Mainframe designed to accommodate up to 12 Line Termination Modules. An LTS Chassis is required when Subrate
Channel Processors are installed in the LINK/2+ Mainframe (see "Data I/O Channel Modules" paragraph for a description of the Subrate Channel Processor). The LTS Chassis can be collocated with the LINK/2+ Mainframe or installed in a separate rack within cabling distance
(approximately 50 feet) of the LINK/2+ Mainframe.
Fan Housing
The Fan Housing provides cooling for the 13-slot and 18-slot Mainframes. The 6-slot Mainframe has a Fan Tray Module which is integral to the Mainframe.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-7
TO LINK/CSU
(OPTIONAL)
TO
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
TO
SUPERVISORY
COMPUTER
TO STATION
CLOCKS
BUS
EXPANDER
TO I/O
DEVICES
EXPANDER A MAINFRAME
DRIVER
MODULE
I/O
CHANNEL
MODULE(S)
M
O
N
C
O
M
B
U
S
VOICE
PROCESSOR(S)
LINE
DRIVER
VOICE SERVER
MODULE(S)
X.50
SERVER
MODULE(S)
D-CHANNEL
MODULE(S)
CONTROL MAINFRAME
BUS
EXPANDER
TO I/O
DEVICES
DRIVER
MODULE
I/O
CHANNEL
MODULE(S)
NETWORK
MODULE
BYPASS
MODULE
X.50
SERVER
MODULE(S)
M
M
C
O
O
N
B
U
S
INTERLINK
MODULE(S)
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE(S)
VOICE
PROCESSOR(S)
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR(S)
VOICE SERVER
MODULE(S)
D-CHANNEL
MODULE(S)
LINE
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
LINE
DRIVER
BUS
EXPANDER
EXPANDER B MAINFRAME
EXPANDER B MAINFRAME IS FUNCTIONALLY
EQUIVALENT TO EXPANDER A MAINFRAME
NOTES:
= LINE DRIVER CAN BE DIGITAL TERMINATION MODULE,
LINK FRAMING MODULE, BIPOLAR INTERFACE MODULE,
OR FACILITY INTERFACE MODULE.
CSU = CHANNEL SERVICE UNIT
DSU = DIGITAL SERVICE UNIT
CSU
DS-1/E-1
TRUNK
CSU
OR
DSU
INTER-
MACHINE
LINK
DS-1/E-1
TRUNK
CSU
CSU
DS-1/E-1
TRUNK
CSU
DS-1/E-1
TRUNK
Figure 1-2. Functional Block Diagram of Typical LINK/2+ System
1-8
L2UG
6/30/94
Power Supply Chassis and Power Supply Module
The Power Supply Chassis provides mounting for Power Supply Module(s) for 18-slot
Mainframes. Power Supply Modules for 6-slot and 13-slot Mainframes are integral to the
Mainframe.
The Power Supply Module converts AC power into regulated +5 VDC and
±
12 VDC required for operating a Mainframe. The Power Supply Module is the switching regulator type and incorporates control and logic circuits that provide for load sharing when a redundant Power
Supply Module is installed (13-slot and 18-slot Mainframes only). If a Power Supply Module failure is detected, control is transferred to the redundant Power Supply Module without interruption of power to that Mainframe.
Network Module
The Network Module exercises primary microprocessor control over the LINK/2+ System. The
Network Module processes commands from the supervisory terminal or supervisory computer, and provides the system clocks via phase locked loop.
●
The Network Module supervisory port permits an attached asynchronous ASCII terminal or microcomputer to communicate with the Network Module microprocessor. The supervisory
computer port permits the TIME/VIEW Network Management System (NMS) to communicate with the Network Module microprocessor. A supervisory terminal or network management system can access stored information to:
Define or display programming parameters
Display network configuration and connect status
Connect or disconnect channels
Define channel, bundle, and intermachine link routing
Initiate diagnostic tests and display test results
A microcomputer attached to the supervisory port can be used to download operational software to the Network Module, Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk Module, VSM.3 and
VSM.5 Voice Server Modules, and X.50 Server Module.
●
The Network Module external port can be used to connect to a LINK Channel Service Unit
(LINK/CSU). The LINK/CSU is an intelligent channel service and digital service unit combination that is programmable for either extended superframe (ESF) or D4 framing format. The LINK/CSU frees up slots in the LINK/2+ System Mainframe and provides up to
28 nonredundant or 14 redundant CSUs.
A LINK/2+ supervisory terminal or network management system can issue commands to the
LINK/CSUs in the network. For information on the LINK/CSU, see the LINK/CSU User’s
Guide.
L2UG
6/30/97
1-9
●
The Network Module station clock port allows one or two external clock sources (station clocks) to be connected to the Network Module. The LINK/2+ System can be programmed to use these station clocks to provide system clocking. Station clock speeds between 2400 bps and 2.048 Mbps are supported.
Driver Module
Driver Modules provide the interface between the 18-slot Control Mainframe and Expander
Mainframe(s). When Expander Mainframes are used, a Driver Module must be installed in the
Control Mainframe and in each Expander Mainframe.
Interlink Module
The Interlink Module provides the interface between the common bus and an intermachine link.
The Interlink Module assembles the data frame, maintains intermachine link synchronization, and transfers data between the I/O channels and that intermachine link.
Interlink Modules are available that can be configured for:
●
Symmetrical operation in which the transmit and receive speeds are the same
●
Asymmetrical operation in which the transmit and receive speeds are different
●
Simplex operation in which data is either transmitted or received but not both
A Satellite Buffer option for the Interlink Module provides additional buffer capability which compensates for variable delay times commonly associated with satellite transmissions.
Digital Termination Module
The Digital Termination Module interfaces with unframed North American T-1 or European megabit service. The module is available in both single and dual unit configurations. The Digital
Termination Module interfaces directly with a CSU. For digital radio facilities, the Digital
Termination Module interfaces directly with the DSX-1 interface of the transceiver.
Link Framing Module
The Link Framing Module (models LFM and LFM.1) interfaces with unframed or framed T-1 service. The LFM and LFM.1 Modules support D4 framing requirements of AT&T PUB 62411.
The LFM Module supports ESF format as defined in Government of Canada Department of
Communications specification CS-03.
An Equalizer Linedriver Module can be used with an LFM Module to meet Government of
Canada Department of Communications specification CS-03 Issue 6 Supplement B Amendment
3 for connection to common carrier at distances up to 655 feet (200 meters).
The LFM.3 Link Framing Module interfaces with 2.048 Mbps digital services that conform to
CCITT recommendation G.704.
1-10
L2UG
6/30/94
The LFM.5 and LFM.6 Link Framing Modules interface with the Nippon Telephone and
Telegraph (NTT) Branching T-1 service. For further information on these modules, see the Link
Framing Module Model LFM.5 and Link Framing Module Model LFM.6 User’s Manuals.
The LFM.9 Link Framing Module provides independent station clock at 1.544 MHz to major nodal hubs in a network. The LFM.9 provides clock from one of two inputs to up to eight nodes.
The module can switch between inputs without causing a clock fallback at the Network Module if one input fails.
The LFM.10, LFM.11, and LFM.12 Link Framing Modules provide n x 64 kbps or n x 56 kbps bundled output over T-1 facilities to enable low-cost access to fractional T-1 service. These modules create user-selected bundle sizes from 1 to 24 DS-0 channels at speeds from 56 kbps to
1.544 Mbps. Release 7 and later Link Framing Modules (LFM.10, LFM.11, and LFM.12) are software programmable. Pre-release 7 modules use DIP switches to set link framing parameters.
For pre-release 7 modules, see the Link Framing Module Models LFM.10, LFM.11, and LFM.12
User’s Manual for DIP switch settings.
The LFM.14 Link Framing Module combines four T-1 links together and provides the framing and electrical encoding for interfacing to the Japanese NTT High-Speed Secondary Service. This service allows a single 6.312 Mbps trunk to be divided into multiple n x 64 kbps bundles, where n ranges from 1 to 24.
Bipolar Interface Module
The Bipolar Interface Modules (BIM.1, BIM.2, and BIM.3) interface a Voice Processor,
Channelized Services Processor, or Integrated Trunk Module to a DSX-1 or G.703 transmission facility. The Bipolar Interface Module converts the unipolar non-return-to-zero (NRZ) signal from the Voice Processor, Channelized Services Processor, or Integrated Trunk Module to alternate mark inversion (AMI) bipolar format.
The Bipolar Interface Module (64 kbps BIM) interfaces the ILC.2 Interlink Module, QSC.2 Quad
Synchronous Module, or QSP.2 Quad Synchronous Processor Module to a G.703 transmission facility. The 64 kbps BIM supports G.703 64 kbps codirectional and contradirectional coding.
Integrated Trunk Module
The Integrated Trunk Module allows hybrid networking in a LINK/2+ network using industrystandard channelized services. Using the Integrated Trunk Module, networks can take advantage of public network services while maintaining cost effectiveness and network management control.
The Integrated Trunk Module uses a flexible, multipurpose channelization format in which varying numbers of DS-0s are grouped into proprietary and nonproprietary bundles. The
Integrated Trunk Module can support up to 24 proprietary bundles per physical link, 24 DS-0 nonproprietary bundles per T-1 link, or 31 DS-0 nonproprietary bundles per E-1 link. The
Integrated Trunk Module supports Switched 56K service, ISDN primary rate, and byte alignment.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-11
Integrated Trunk Modules support configurations for:
●
T-1/NTT operation, where the module (ILQ.1) supports line transmission rates of up to
1.544 Mbps for use in North American (T-1) and Japanese (NTT) networks
●
E-1 operation, where the module (ILQ.2) supports line transmission rates of up to 2.048
Mbps for use in European (CEPT) networks
D-Channel Module
The D-Channel Module establishes the B-channel and/or H0-channel connections between two nodes as well as the signaling support for one of the 24 or 31 time slots on the Integrated Trunk
Module.
The D-Channel Module supports multiple Q.931 protocols, including 4ESS, 5ESS, NTT,
NUMERIS, DMS250/100, and Austel. The D-Channel Module supports carriers in different countries including AT&T in the United States, NTT in Japan, AOTC in Australia, and France
Telecom.
Voice Processor
The Digital Voice Processor Module (Voice Processor) transfers DS-0 channels via time slot interchange between other LINK/2+ System modules and a DS-1 trunk. DS-0 channels can be locally or remotely connected to other DS-0 channels, Quad Voice Module channels, Enhanced
Voice Module channels, Quad Synchronous Module channels, or Quad Synchronous Processor channels. A Voice Processor with ADPCM capability can convert PCM channels to ADPCM channels on a per channel basis to provide more efficient bandwidth utilization. Voice Processor channels can be processed by a Voice Server Module to achieve greater voice compression and echo cancellation. The Voice Processor can connect to a Digital Termination Module, Link
Framing Module, or LINK/CSU.
The ILP.8 and ILP.13 Voice Processors provide access to Japanese TTC (Telecommunications
Technology Committee) formatted PBXs.
A Facility Interface Module (FIM.1) is used with an ILP.8 or ILP.13 Voice Processor to provide electrical translation and isolation between the Voice Processor and the 2.048 Mbps TTC trunk.
1-12
L2UG
6/30/94
Analog Voice I/O Channel Modules
The following analog voice I/O channel modules can be used in a LINK/2+ System:
●
The Quad Voice Module converts analog voice signals to digital signals and vice versa using
16 kbps voice compression, continuously variable slope delta (CVSD) modulation, pulse code modulation (PCM), or adaptive differential pulse code modulation (ADPCM), depending on the model. In PCM mode, the Quad Voice Module produces a 64 kbps rate output for scanning by either the Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services
Processor. Each Quad Voice Module contains four individual I/O voice channels. E & M interfacing for each I/O voice channel is included on the module. Quad Voice Module channels can be processed by a Voice Server Module to achieve greater voice compression and echo cancellation.
●
The Enhanced Voice Module converts analog voice and Group III facsimile (fax) signals to digital signals and vice versa using voice compression or pulse code modulation (PCM). Each
Enhanced Voice Module contains four individual I/O channels. Voice compression can be specified on a per channel basis, with compression rates of 6 kbps, 8 kbps, or 16 kbps at each channel.
Echo cancellation can be specified on a per channel basis. E & M interfacing for each I/O voice channel is included on the module. In PCM mode, the Enhanced Voice Module produces a 64 kbps rate output for scanning by either the Voice Processor, Voice Server
Module, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor.
Models EVM.2 and EVM.3 accept and convert fax signals for on-board compression and transmittal through the network. All Enhanced Voice Modules can accept fax signals for compression through the VSM.1 or VSM.3 Voice Server Module. Model EVM.3 also supports nonstandard fax functions beyond the Group III standard.
●
The Foreign Exchange Office Module accepts four 2-wire loop or ground start analog voice circuits for conversion to digital signals and vice versa using voice compression or pulse code modulation (PCM).
For the FXO Foreign Exchange Office Module, voice compression can be specified on a per channel basis with rates of 8 kbps or 16 kbps using adaptive sub-band excited transformation (ASET) compression..
For the FXO.1 Foreign Exchange Office Module, voice conversion is provided for each channel using 64 kbps PCM.
For the FXO.3 Foreign Exchange Office Module, voice compression can be specified on a per channel basis with rates of 5.33 kbps or 8 kbps using codebook excited linear prediction (CELP) compression and 16 kbps using adaptive transform coding (ATC) compression.
When FXO channels are directed to the VSM.1 or VMS.3 Voice Server Module by voice profile programming, fax transmissions are also accepted.
An FXO/Network Termination Module is supplied with a Foreign Exchange Office Module for connection to the Central Office.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-13
●
The Foreign Exchange Station Module accepts four 2-wire loop or ground start analog voice circuits for conversion to digital signals and vice versa using voice compression or pulse code modulation (PCM).
For the FXS Foreign Exchange Station Module, voice compression can be specified on a per channel basis with rates of 8 kbps or 16 kbps using ASET compression.
For the FXS.1 Foreign Exchange Station Module, voice conversion is provided for each channel using 64 kbps PCM.
For the FXS.3 Foreign Exchange Station Module, voice compression can be specified on a per channel basis with rates of 5.33 kbps or 8 kbps using CELP compression and 16 kbps using ATC compression.
When FXS channels are directed to the VSM.1 or VSM.3 Voice Server Module by voice profile programming, fax transmissions are also accepted.
An FXS/Network Termination Module is supplied with a Foreign Exchange Station
Module for connection to the Subscriber.
●
The QVC Voice Module converts analog voice signals to digital signals and vice versa using
CVSD modulation. Each QVC Voice Module contains four individual I/O voice channels.
Two E & M Interface Modules are also supplied. Each E & M Interface Module handles two
I/O voice channels.
Voice Server Module
The Voice Server Module provides voice compression, echo cancellation, and fax transmission for Voice Processor and Integrated Trunk Module channels as well as for Quad Voice Module,
Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Office Module, and Foreign Exchange Station
Module I/O channels.
The VSM and VSM.1 Voice Server Modules compress a 64 kbps channel to 8 or 16 kbps, with or without echo cancellation, using ASET compression. Each Voice Server Module supports up to 31 channels. In addition to voice, the VSM.1 Voice Server Module supports up to eight simultaneous Group III facsimile (fax) connections. The VSM.1 Voice Server Module monitors for fax transmission and switches automatically from voice to fax operation.
The VSM.3 Voice Server Module compresses a 64 kbps channel to 5.33 or 8 kbps using CELP compression and 16 kbps using ATC compression, with or without echo cancellation. Each
VSM.3A Voice Server Module supports up to 8 channels and each VSM.3B Voice Server
Module supports up to 16 channels. In addition to voice, the VSM.3 Voice Server Module supports nonstandard fax or Group III fax connections. The VSM.3 Voice Server Module monitors for fax transmission and switches automatically from voice to fax transmission.
The VSM.5 Voice Server Module is capable of two modes of operation, clear mode and STU-
III Secure Mode. In clear mode, the VSM.5 compresses a 64 kbps PCM channel to 4.8 or 9.6
kbps using VCELP compression, with or without echo cancellation. In the STU III Secure Mode, the VSM.5 can transport encrypted secure voice and data at rates of 2.4, 4.8, or 9.6 kbps. Each
VSM.5 Voice Server Module supports up to 12 channels. The VMS.5 Voice Server Module monitors the modem signal and dynamically switches between clear and secure modes without user intervention.
1-14
L2UG
6/30/97
NOTE:
The VSM.3 and VSM.5 CELP compression schemes are not compatible with each other.
If multiple Voice Server Modules are installed, they operate in a pooled redundancy mode.
Channelized Services Processor
The Channelized Services Processor scans for, constructs, and transfers contiguous and noncontiguous 64 kbps bundles between the D4 or G.732 formatted devices and a DS-1/E-1 trunk in a framed format at either 1.544 or 2.048 Mbps. In an appropriate bundle configuration, the Channelized Services Processor supports fractional T-1 applications. See the LINK/2+
Configuration Planning Manual for information on bundle configurations. The Channelized
Services Processor can connect to a Digital Termination Module, Link Framing Module, or
LINK/CSU.
X.50 Server Module
The X.50 Server Module takes 64 kbps X.50 framed DS-0 channels from the X.50 network locally via an Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk Module, Channelized Services Processor,
Voice Processor, Quad Synchronous Processor Module, or Quad Synchronous Module and demultiplexes the X.50 DS-0 channels into synchronous X.50 subrate channels of 2400, 4800,
9600, or 19200 bps.
The X.50 subrate channels can be:
•
Passed on to a Quad Synchronous Processor Module or Quad Synchronous Module for use by a local I/O device (local subrate drop).
•
Remultiplexed by an Integrated Trunk Module (via a Bypass Module) or Interlink Module for transmission over a T-1 or E-1 network (bridge, or remote subrate drop).
•
Passed through the Bypass Module and back to an X.50 Server Module to be remultiplexed by the X.50 Server Module and sent to the X.50 network via another Voice Processor
Module, Quad Synchronous Processor Module, or Quad Synchronous Module (drop and insert).
Each X.50 Server Module supports up to 16 X.50 Division 2 or Division 3 framed DS-0 channels. Up to four primary and four redundant X.50 Server Modules can be installed at a node.
Bypass Module
The Bypass Module provides channel bypassing capability at a node. Full duplex data and control functions originating at one node may be routed through as many as seven intermediate bypass nodes to a destination node.
The local and remote connections of the Channelized Services Processor or Integrated Trunk
Module to the Interlink Module or another Channelized Services Processor or Integrated Trunk
Module are also established via the Bypass Module.
L2UG
6/30/97
1-15
Data I/O Channel Modules
The following data I/O channel modules can be used in a LINK/2+ System:
●
The Quad Synchronous and Dual Synchronous Modules provide the interface between I/O data channels and the common bus. Each Quad Synchronous Module contains four individual synchronous I/O data channels. Each Dual Synchronous Module contains two high speed synchronous I/O data channels. The Quad Synchronous and Dual Synchronous Modules have the ability to supply n x 64 kbps rates to be formatted in bundles by the Channelized Services
Processor and placed on a DS-1/E-1 trunk. The Quad Synchronous Module can supply n x 56 kbps or n x 64 kbps rates for placement on a T-1 or E-1 interface by the Integrated Trunk
Module.
The QSC.7 Quad Synchronous Module has a single application of converting 56 kbps subrate data channels into 64 kbps logical DS-0 channels.
●
The Quad Synchronous Processor provides the interface between I/O data channels and the common bus. Each Quad Synchronous Processor contains four individual synchronous I/O data channels supporting the range of data rates from 50 bps to 1.984 Mbps. All ports can operate simultaneously at 1.984 Mbps. The Quad Synchronous Processor has the ability to supply n x 64 kbps rates to be formatted in bundles by the Channelized Services Processor and placed on a DS-1/E-1 trunk. The Quad Synchronous Processor has the ability to supply n x 56 kbps or n x 64 kbps rates to be formatted in bundles by the Integrated Trunk Module and placed on a DS-1/E-1 trunk. The Quad Synchronous Processor can be configured for symmetrical, asymmetrical, or simplex operation.
Individual channels on a Quad Synchronous Processor can be configured to operate in the following special modes:
Broadcast/polling mode—In broadcast/polling mode, a single channel at a central host site can connect to multiple remote channels called a nest poll group. The channels forming the nest poll group must reside in the same nest (LINK/2+ Mainframe). The communication between the host channel and the remote nest poll group uses only one time slot in the connecting intermachine link. When the host channel transmits, all nest poll group channels receive the transmission. Only one nest poll group channel can transmit at a time.
56K/64K mode—Switched 56K service provides 56 kbps of data communication on a dial-up basis. In switched 56K and nonswitched 56K modes, data is always transmitted at
56 kbps. In switched 56K mode, the Quad Synchronous Processor performs speed translation from 56 kbps to 64 kbps (DS-0) format by "stuffing" the eighth bit with signaling and dialing information received from a Terminal Interface Unit (TIU). In nonswitched 56K mode, the eighth bit is stuffed with a 1. A Quad Synchronous Processor operating in switched 56K mode can be scanned by an Interlink Module (for networking to a remote node) or by a Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized
Services Processor.
LPDA-1 mode—LPDA-1 (Link Problem Diagnostic Aid) is an IBM test protocol that allows a front end processor (FEP) to obtain test information from a pair of remote modems. In LPDA-1 mode, the Quad Synchronous Processor channel allows function transmission in inband mode which guarantees compliance with ones density. Any transition of the function lead (F3 IN) will be communicated from the FEP to the modem
1-16
L2UG
6/30/94
to start test mode, even if the Quad Synchronous Processor channel is in data mode. Test mode continues until another transition of the F3 IN function is sent by the FEP.
Simplex broadcast mode—In simplex broadcast mode, a single originator channel at one node can connect to multiple terminator channels at other nodes. When the originator channel transmits, all terminator channels receive the transmission, but the terminator channels cannot transmit back to the originator.
●
The Quad Asynchronous Module provides the interface between I/O data channels and the common bus. Each Quad Asynchronous Module contains four individual asynchronous I/O data channels.
●
The Dual Isochronous Module provides the interface between I/O data channels and the common bus. Each Dual Isochronous Module contains two I/O data channels that can be independently configured for isochronous, plesiochronous, or asynchronous operation.
●
The Isochronous Communication Module provides the interface between I/O data channels and the common bus. Each Isochronous Communication Module contains two I/O data channels that can be independently configured for isochronous or plesiochronous operation.
The Isochronous Communication Module provides frequency discrimination, I/O rates up to
1.544 Mbps, plus more speeds than available on the Dual Isochronous Module.
●
The Subrate Channel Processor is intended for generation of 64 kbps DS-0 channels from customer subrate data and 56 kbps data in a DDS environment. The Subrate Channel
Processor can support DS-0A or DS-0B signal formats and any mix of primary/secondary channel capability.
In DS-0A configuration, the Subrate Channel Processor emulates the Office Channel Unit
(OCU) functionality. Four independent ports at the standard subrates (2.4, 4.8, or 9.6
kbps), secondary port rates (3.2, 6.4, or 12.8 kbps), and 56/72 kbps are supported, depending on the model. On a per port basis, a 64 kbps DS-0 channel is generated. The overall throughput is 256 kbps (four DS-0 channels). Data to and from the network is carried over four independent DS-0A formatted channels through an Interlink Module or
Voice Processor.
In DS-0B configuration, the Subrate Channel Processor integrates the functionality of the
OCU and Subrate Data Multiplexers (SRDM). Up to five standard subrates or secondary port rates are multiplexed into a single 64 kbps channel. Data to and from the network is carried over a single DS-0B formatted channel through an Interlink Module, Integrated
Trunk Module, or Voice Processor.
A Line Termination Module is required to terminate the Subrate Channel Processor connection. Each Line Termination Module supports up to two Subrate Channel Processors.
Line Termination Modules are installed in a separate LTS Chassis (see "Mainframe" paragraph).
SPECIFICATIONS
The LINK/2+ System operates as a microprocessor based synchronous, time division, character interleaved multiplexer. A nonvolatile memory maintains the user programmed database for approximately 45 days (between 0° and 60° C) without AC power.
Table 1-1 lists additional specifications for each Mainframe type.
L2UG
6/30/94
1-17
Specification
Physical
Configuration
Size
Weight
Power Requirements
Table 1-1. Specifications
18-Slot LINK/2+ System
Rack mounted only
Control Mainframe or Expander
Mainframe: 13
1/8"
(33.3 cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by
20
1/4"
(51.6 cm) deep
13-Slot miniLINK/2+ System
Rack mounted only
Mainframe: 13
1/8"
(33.3 cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by
20
1/4"
(51.6 cm) deep
6-Slot microLINK/2+ System
Free standing with case
Rack mounted without case
With case: 23 high by 8
24
3/4"
3/8"
1/4"
(59 cm)
(21.3 cm) wide by
(62.9 cm) deep
Fan housing: 5
1/4"
(13.3 cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by
20
1/4"
(51.6 cm) deep
Power Supply Chassis: 7" (17.8
cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by
20
1/4"
(51.6 cm) deep
Fan Housing: 3
1/2"
(8.9 cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by 16
1/2"
(41.9 cm) deep
Floor plate: 13
3/8"
(34 cm) wide
Without case: 22
3/4"
(57.8 cm) high by 6
3/4"
(17.1 cm) wide by
20
3/8"
(51.8 cm) deep Power Supply Chassis
(optional; used for -48 VDC
E & M Power Supply Module):
7" (17.8 cm) high by 19" (48 cm) wide by 20
1/4
" (51.6 cm) deep
Mainframe (without internal power supplies or modules):
24.5 lbs (11.1 kg)
With case: 60 lbs (27.2 kg)
Without case: 33 lbs (15 kg)
Control Mainframe or Expander
Mainframe (without internal power supplies or modules):
24.5 lbs (11.1 kg)
Typical Module: 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg)
Typical Module: 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg)
Fan Housing: 6.5 lbs (2.95 kg)
Fan housing: 10 lbs (4.5 kg)
Power Supply Chassis: 16.6
lbs (7.5 kg)
Power Supply Module: 18.5
lbs (8.4 kg)
Power Supply Module: 18.5
lbs (8.4 kg)
Power Supply Chassis
(optional; used for -48 VDC
E & M Power Supply Module):
16.6 lbs (7.5 kg)
Each Mainframe:
•
115/230 VAC Power Supply
Module: 115 +10 VAC at 12A or 230 +20 VAC at 6A, 47 to
63 Hz, single phase
•
100/200 VAC Power Supply
Module: 100 VAC +10 VAC at
15A or 200 +20 VAC at 8A, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
115/230 VAC Power Supply
Module: 115 + 10 VAC at 12A or
230 +20 VAC at 6A, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
100/200 VAC Power Supply
Module: 100 VAC +10 VAC at
15A or 200 +20 VAC at 8A, 47 to
63 Hz, single phase
115/230 VAC Power Supply
Module: 115 +10 VAC at 5A or
230 +20 VAC at 2.5A, 47 to 63
Hz, single phase
•
-48 VDC Power Supply
Module: input 42 to 58 VDC not to exceed 24A
-48 VDC Power Supply
Module: input 42 to 58 VDC not to exceed 24A
-48 VDC E & M Power Supply
Module for certain voice signaling types: 115 +10 VAC at 3A or 230
+20 VAC at 1.5A, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
-48 VDC E & M Power Supply
Module for certain voice signaling types: 115 +10 VAC at 3A or 230
+20 VAC at 1.5A, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
-48 VDC Power Supply Unit for certain E & M voice signaling types: 115 +10 VAC at 0.25A or
230 + 20 VAC at 0.125A, 47 to 63
Hz, single phase
1-18
L2UG
6/30/94
Specification
Power Requirements
(Cont’d)
Power Consumption
Heat Dissipation
Environmental
Requirements
Table 1-1. Specifications (Cont’d)
18-Slot LINK/2+ System
Fan Assembly:
•
115 +10 VAC at 0.9A or 230
+20 VAC at 0.45A, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
•
-48VDC: 0.4A at 48 VDC
1000 watts maximum per
Mainframe
13-Slot miniLINK/2+ System
Fan Assembly: 115 +10 VAC at
0.5A or 230 +20 VAC at 0.25A
Fan Assembly, -48VDC: 0.3A at
48 VDC
685 watts maximum per chassis
6-Slot microLINK/2+ System
280 watts maximum
250 watts maximum per -48 VDC
E & M Power Supply Module
3400 BTUs/hour (1000 watts) maximum per Mainframe plus 850
BTUs/hour (250 watts) maximum per -48 VDC E & M Power Supply
Module
Ambient operating temperature from 0
°
to 45
°
C
80 watts maximum per -48 VDC
E & M Power Supply Module
2330 BTUs/hour (685 watts) maximum plus 280 BTUs/hour (80 watts) maximum per -48 VDC
E & M Power Supply Module
Ambient operating temperature from 0
°
to 45
°
C
30 watts maximum per -48 VDC
Power Supply Unit
958 BTUs/hour (280 watts) maximum plus 103 BTUs/hour (30 watts) maximum per -48 VDC
Power Supply Unit
Ambient operating temperature from 0
°
to 45
°
C
Relative humidity to 95%
(noncondensing)
Altitude to 12,000 ft. (3660 m)
Relative humidity to 95%
(noncondensing)
Altitude to 12,000 ft. (3660 m)
Relative humidity to 95%
(noncondensing)
Altitude to 12,000 ft. (3660 m)
L2UG
6/30/94
1-19
Chapter
2
Getting Started
Information you need to start using the LINK/2+ System is contained in this chapter:
●
Power application and turn-off
●
Self-test and other start-up activities
●
Accessing the supervisory port
●
Supervisory port log in and log out
●
Loading Network Module/Interlink Module operational software
●
Loading Integrated Trunk Module operational software
●
Loading X.50 Server Module operational software
●
Loading VSM.3 and VSM.5 Voice Server Module operational software
●
Opening and closing Mainframe door
This chapter assumes the LINK/2+ System has already been properly configured and installed. If not, see the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual and the Installation section of the LINK/2+
Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Day-to-day management of the LINK/2+ System can be performed via the integral supervisory port or the optional TIME/VIEW 2000 Network Management System. This manual discusses supervisory port operation only. For information on using TIME/VIEW, see the TIME/VIEW
2000 documentation.
Typical network management activities that the operator can perform from the supervisory terminal once the LINK/2+ System is powered up include:
●
Monitoring system status and alarm messages. See Chapter 5, Display Commands.
●
Connecting/disconnecting channels and performing other configuration activities. See
Chapter 6, Configuration Commands.
●
Performing diagnostic tests. See Chapter 7, Diagnostic Commands.
POWER APPLICATION AND TURN-OFF
Procedure 2-1 defines the power turn-on sequence for each LINK/2+ System. Procedure 2-2 defines the power turn-off sequence.
L2UG
6/30/97
2-1
Procedure 2-1. Power Turn-On
1.
Ensure that all channel devices and external line drivers are turned on and operational.
2.
If local supervisory terminal is to be used, ensure that terminal is turned on and operational.
3.
For 18-slot Mainframes, remove power supply grille.
For 13-slot (miniLINK/2+) Mainframes, open Mainframe door.
4.
For 18-slot and 13-slot Mainframes, set POWER switch on Power Supply Module(s) to 1 and observe that:
●
●
●
POWER ON (green) indicator is lit.
ON LINE (green) indicator is lit on in-control Power Supply Module.
LOAD SHARE (yellow) indicator is lit on in-control Power Supply Module
(redundancy) or is off if only a single Power Supply Module (no redundancy) is installed.
Go to step 6.
5.
For 6-slot (microLINK/2+) Mainframes:
A.
Ensure power cord from Power Supply Module is connected to rear of Fan Tray
Module.
B.
Apply power by connecting power cord from Fan Tray Module to AC power source.
C.
Ensure that both fans in Fan Tray Module are rotating.
PRECAUTION: If one or both of the fans fail to operate, unplug the power cord from rear of chassis immediately. See Fan
Tray Module replacement procedure in the LINK/2+
Installation and Maintenance Manual.
6.
The LINK/2+ System performs a self-test. (See "Self-Test" paragraph.) If the self-test is successful, the LINK/2+ System is ready for operation. If an error occurs, see the
Troubleshooting chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
7.
If Line Termination System (LTS) Chassis and Line Termination Modules are installed, connect -48 VDC power source at rear of chassis.
8.
For 18-slot Mainframes, reinstall power supply grille.
For 13-slot Mainframes, close Mainframe door.
Procedure 2-2. Power Turn-Off
1.
Notify all concerned parties that the LINK/2+ System is being shut down.
2-2
L2UG
6/30/94
2.
If LTS Chassis and Line Termination Modules are installed, disconnect -48 VDC power source at rear of chassis.
3.
For 18-slot Mainframes, remove power supply grille.
For 13-slot (miniLINK/2+) Mainframes, open Mainframe door.
4.
For 18-slot and 13-slot Mainframes, set POWER switch on Power Supply Module(s) to 0.
For 6-slot (microLINK/2+) Mainframes, disconnect power cord from AC power source.
All indicators go off.
SELF-TEST AND OTHER START-UP ACTIVITIES
The following paragraphs discuss activities that occur after system start-up and during system operation:
●
Self-test
●
Bit error rate (BER) test
●
Channel connections
●
Alarm indicators and messages
Self-Test
When power is applied to the LINK/2+ System, the Network Module ON LINE indicator lights and the system automatically resets and runs a self-test diagnostic procedure The self-test routine checks the hardware and firmware of the following modules:
●
Network Module
●
Interlink Module
●
Integrated Trunk Module
●
X.50 Server Module
●
Voice Processor
●
D-Channel Module
●
Channelized Services Processor
●
Enhanced Voice Module
●
Voice Server Module
●
Dual Isochronous Module
L2UG
6/30/94
2-3
2-4
●
Isochronous Communication Module
●
Foreign Exchange Office Module
●
Foreign Exchange Station Module
●
Quad Asynchronous Module
The supervisory terminal lists each test as it is performed on the Network Module in the following order:
NCL BOOT STARTUP TESTS
RAM - OK
PROM - OK
NCL STARTUP TESTS
UART - OK
ECP - OK
DATABASE - OK D2
RTC - OK
PLL - OK
NOTES:
The "68020 - ERROR" message is displayed only if one of the 68020
CPU diagnostic tests fail.
The "DIP SWITCH 8 OFF" message is displayed only if DIP Switch
K1-8 on the Network Module is incorrectly set to the OFF/OPEN position.
The "ERROR BATTERY" message is displayed only if one, or both, batteries on the Network Module are defective or low in voltage.
●
If the Network Module self-test is satisfactory and passwords have been previously defined:
Module comes online.
Message, LINK/2 (or microLINK/2) Supervisory Port On-Line, appears on the supervisory terminal.
Password prompt (ENTER PASSWORD:) appears. See "Supervisory Port Log In" paragraph.
After password is entered correctly:
Time and date appear on the supervisory terminal.
Prompt (Nxxxx>) appears. (xxxx is the local node number.)
●
If the Network Module self-test is satisfactory and passwords have not been previously defined:
Module comes online.
L2UG
6/30/97
Message, LINK/2 (or microLINK/2) Supervisory Port On-Line, and time and date appear on the supervisory terminal.
Prompt (Nxxxx>) appears.
●
If the Network Module self-test is NOT satisfactory and a redundant Network Module is installed, the LINK/2+ System switches to the redundant Network Module. The supervisory terminal lists the self-test messages for this Network Module.
●
If any error messages appear or alarm indicators light, see the Troubleshooting chapter in the
LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Self-tests of the Interlink, Integrated Trunk, D-Channel, Voice Processor, Channelized Services
Processor, Dual Isochronous, Isochronous Communication, Enhanced Voice, Foreign Exchange
Office, Foreign Exchange Station, Quad Asynchronous, Voice Server, and X.50 Server Modules are run during the Network Module self-test, but no messages are displayed on the supervisory terminal for these modules.
●
If the self-tests of the Interlink, Integrated Trunk, D-Channel, Voice Processor, Channelized
Services Processor, Isochronous Communication, Enhanced Voice, Foreign Exchange Office,
Foreign Exchange Station, Voice Server, and X.50 Server Modules are satisfactory:
Module’s ON LINE indicator lights.
Module comes online.
●
If the self-tests of the Dual Isochronous and Quad Asynchronous Modules are satisfactory, the modules come online, but no indicators light.
●
If any error messages appear or alarm indicators light, see the Troubleshooting chapter in the
LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Bit Error Rate (BER) Test
Upon start-up, each Interlink Module and proprietary bundle on an Integrated Trunk Module continuously performs a BER test to determine the quality of the transmission facility. The BER results are averaged over several half-minute periods (windows) and then categorized based on the values presented in Table 2-1. BER status can be displayed with the DSP ST DL command; see Chapter 5, Display Commands. BER is not calculated on a simplex transmit only intermachine link.
The BER affects connections in the following manner:
●
Connections are disallowed if the BER fails to exceed POOR at least once following powerup or reset.
●
If an ABM profile is used, channels can be automatically connected or rerouted only over intermachine links meeting the user-specified link error performance level.
L2UG
6/30/94
2-5
BER Level
Table 2-1. BER Levels
Description
VERY GOOD
GOOD
FAIR
POOR
Better than 1 x 10-5
Between 1 x 10-5 and 1 x 10-4
Between 1 x 10-4 and 1 x 10-3
Worse than 1 x 10-3
Channel Connections
The LINK/2+ System automatically connects noncontention channels after start-up. For I/O channels designated as contention channels, the LINK/2+ System allocates bandwidth dynamically, at the request of the user (via I/O module control signals). A bandwidth contention channel will be automatically connected if the following conditions exist:
●
The request function (I/O module control signal) for that channel is activated.
●
Sufficient bandwidth is available.
Channel connect messages for noncontention channels are displayed on the supervisory terminal; see "Alarm Indicators and Messages" paragraph.
When the network is configured, individual channels or groups of channels can be designated as noncontention channels or as bandwidth contention channels, according to the application. For example, the noncontention channels may use all of the bandwidth during daytime operations.
The contention channels can come online when bandwidth becomes available due to some noncontention channels being programmed to be disconnected at a specific time in the evening.
For information on configuring channels as contention or noncontention, see the LINK/2+
Configuration Planning Manual.
When used with the Integrated Trunk Module, the D-Channel Module can provide dial-up connections between nodes, as well as bandwidth expansion and backup or redundancy of existing intermachine links.
For commands used to connect and disconnect channels, see Chapter 6, Configuration
Commands.
Alarm Indicators and Messages
To inform the user of a problem or status:
●
Module alarm indicators light.
2-6
L2UG
6/30/94
●
Unsolicited alarm messages are displayed on the supervisory terminal when system errors occur, when define (DEF) or SET commands are issued, and at a fixed time interval until the alarm is cleared. Other alarm conditions must be solicited by entering the DSP AQ command.
●
Unsolicited channel connected and not connected messages are also displayed on the supervisory terminal.
NOTE:
The supervisory terminal will NOT display unsolicited messages if the SET MUM LOC command has been entered. To resume the display of unsolicited messages, enter the CLR MUM LOC command.
See Chapter 4, Support Commands.
The supervisory terminal will NOT display continuous occurrences of alarm 07 (intermachine link declared out-of-service) if the DEF DL parameter alarm 7 masking (AL7MASK) is set to ON. See
Intermachine Link Parameters chapter in the LINK/2+ Configuration
Planning Manual.
Alarm 04 (power supply failure) does not occur in the microLINK/2+
System, and alarm 08 (fan failure) does not indicate a fan failure in the microLINK/2+ System. The Fan Fail Alarm Defeat Plug (FFD) must be installed to avoid continuous display of alarm 08. If the
Power Supply Module fails or the fans stop rotating, see the
LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for replacement procedure.
If an alarm condition occurs, see the Troubleshooting chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and
Maintenance Manual. For a summary of error and status messages, see Appendix A.
ACCESSING THE SUPERVISORY PORT
If a local supervisory terminal is to be used, the LINK/2+ System must be programmed by
Network Module DIP switch to use default supervisory port parameter values or parameter values stored in the database:
●
If Network Module DIP switch is set to use default supervisory port parameter values, the parameter values take effect when power is applied to the LINK/2+ System. Default supervisory port parameter values are:
speed: 9600 bps
stop bits: 1
data bits/parity: 8 data bits, no parity
●
If Network Module DIP switch is set to use parameters from the database, supervisory port parameter values must be defined from a supervisory port or a supervisory computer port.
See "Define Supervisory Port Parameters (DEF SP) Command" paragraph in Chapter 6,
Configuration Commands.
L2UG
6/30/94
2-7
The supervisory port is online when the LINK/2+ System is turned on. To access the supervisory port:
●
Ensure that:
Supervisory terminal is connected to LINK/2+ System.
Supervisory port parameter values have been defined.
Supervisory terminal is turned on and operational.
●
If passwords have been defined, log in per "Supervisory Port Log In" paragraph.
●
Prompt (Nxxxx>) must be displayed before commands can be entered. If prompt is not displayed, enter Control C character or BREAK.
To prevent unauthorized supervisory port access, log out per "Supervisory Port Log Out" paragraph when you are finished at the supervisory terminal.
Supervisory Port Log In
If passwords have been defined, the password prompt (ENTER PASSWORD:) appears on the supervisory terminal whenever power is applied or a reset occurs to the LINK/2+ System. To log in to the LINK/2+ System, carefully key in the correct password, then press RETURN key.
If the password is entered correctly:
●
Time and date appear on the supervisory terminal.
●
Prompt (Nxxxx>) appears.
NOTE:
If the password is not entered correctly, the password prompt
(ENTER PASSWORD:) appears again on the supervisory terminal.
If the password is entered incorrectly three times, the LINK/2+
System will wait 30 seconds before allowing further password attempts. See your system manager for correct password.
If necessary, passwords can be disabled. See the Network Module chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
The password used to log in determines the commands that you are allowed to use. See "System
Security Features" paragraphs.
Supervisory Port Log Out
To prevent unauthorized system access, you can log out of the LINK/2+ System in two ways:
●
By entering the EX command. At the prompt (Nxxxx>), type EX to log out. If prompt is not displayed, enter Control C character or BREAK.
2-8
L2UG
6/30/94
●
By a time out. If the log in time out parameter is enabled, you will be logged out if no keystroke is entered for 30 minutes.
After logging out of the LINK/2+ System:
●
Message "Logged Out" appears on the supervisory terminal.
●
Time and date appear.
●
Password prompt "ENTER PASSWORD:" appears.
NETWORK MODULE/INTERLINK MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE
The LINK/2+ System is shipped with the Network Module/Interlink Module operational software already installed in the Network Module(s). Two copies of the software reside on each
Network Module; a copy in each of two flash memory banks. In addition, a high density, 3.5inch floppy disk containing the operational software is also provided.
NOTE:
The Interlink Module software is resident on the Network Module and is automatically loaded to the Interlink Modules by the Network
Module. No separate action by the user is required.
If a new version of the software is released, perform the following procedure to load the operational software, provided on the floppy disk, from a microcomputer to the Network
Module.
Procedure 2-3. Loading Network Module/Interlink Module Operational
Software
1.
Determine the supervisory port parameters for use in configuring the microcomputer by entering the DSP SP command. Record these parameters:
•
SPEED: for example, 9600 bps
•
STOP: 1 stop bit (required setting)
•
DATA: 8 data bits, no parity (required setting)
If the STOP and DATA parameters do not match the required settings, enter the DEF SP command to change the supervisory port parameters to the required settings.
2.
Connect the serial port of the microcomputer to the supervisory port of the LINK/2+
System. The microcomputer should have the following:
•
High-density 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
•
Serial port
•
Communications application software containing XMODEM with CRC file transfer protocol (compatible with ProComm Plus 2.01)
L2UG
6/30/94
2-9
2-10
3.
Using the parameters recorded in step 1 for the supervisory port, configure the microcomputer communications application software for the same parameters.
4.
Verify that the communications application is running correctly by entering a supervisory port command such as DSP TIM.
5.
Verify (on the disk label) that the version of the operational software is correct prior to loading and record the filename.
6.
Insert the operational software disk into the microcomputer.
7.
Replace the operational software in the offline bank of flash EPROM with the new operational software by entering:
LOA SW n:ss (or LOA SW n:ss/F)
NOTE:
If the terminal emulation program running on the microcomputer supports a speed of 57600 bps, you can use the optional /F modifier with the LOA SW command to download the operational software at a speed of 57600 bps to the Network Module.
You do not need to reconfigure the SP port speed to 57600 bps when using the /F modifier as the Network Module automatically switches the SP port to this speed. However, you do need to reconfigure the emulation program speed to 57600 bps.
The following message is displayed:
ERASING OFFLINE-FLASH
NOTE:
To abort the LOA SW command, enter CONTROL C. If the file transfer has been started, press ESC to abort the file transfer.
When erasing is complete, the following message is displayed:
CONNECT SP PORT TO PC AND INVOKE XMODEM PROTOCOL.
C’s appear on the screen until the file transfer is started.
8.
Set the file transfer protocol on the microcomputer to XMODEM to send the file from the microcomputer to the LINK/2+ System. Enter the path and filename recorded from the disk label.
If successful, the load process takes about 12 minutes (at 9600 bps). If not successful, repeat step 7.
PRECAUTION: The TGL BNK command is used to upgrade the system.
Issuing this command to an online Network Module will automatically reset the node.
9.
When ready to upgrade, enter:
TGL BNK n:ss
L2UG
6/30/94
The LINK/2+ System resets. The offline bank of flash EPROM becomes the online bank.
The Network Module is now using the new operational software and the new operational software is automatically loaded to all Interlink Modules in the node.
Observe that the start-up self-test is successful.
10. If the new operational software is to be loaded onto the other bank, enter:
COP SW n:ss where ss is the slot number of the online Network Module.
11. If a redundant pair of Network Modules exists and if the new operational software is to be loaded onto the offline Network Module, copy the new version of operational software from the online Network Module to the offline bank of the offline module by entering the following commands:
COP SW n:ss
1
n:ss
2 where n:ss
1 is the source module slot location and n:ss location.
2
is the destination module slot
TGL BNK n:ss where ss is the slot number of the offline Network Module.
The offline Network Module resets. The offline bank of flash EPROM becomes the online bank.
12. If the new operational software is to be loaded onto the second bank of the offline Network
Module, issue the following command to the online Network Module:
COP SW n:ss
1
n:ss
2 where n:ss
1 is the source module slot location and n:ss location.
2
is the destination module slot
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE
The LINK/2+ System is shipped with the Integrated Trunk Module operational software already installed in the Integrated Trunk Module(s). In addition, a high density, 3.5-inch floppy disk containing the operational software is also provided.
If a new version of the software is released, perform the following procedure to load the operational software, provided on the floppy disk, from a microcomputer to the Integrated Trunk
Module.
L2UG
6/30/94
2-11
Procedure 2-4. Loading Integrated Trunk Module Operational Software
1.
Determine the supervisory port parameters for use in configuring the microcomputer by entering the DSP SP command. Record these parameters:
•
SPEED: for example, 9600 bps
•
STOP: 1 stop bit (required setting)
•
DATA: 8 data bits, no parity (required setting)
If the STOP and DATA parameters do not match the required settings, enter the DEF SP command to change the supervisory port parameters to the required settings.
2.
Connect the serial port of the microcomputer to the supervisory port of the LINK/2+
System. The microcomputer should have the following:
•
High-density 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
•
Serial port
•
Communications application software containing XMODEM with CRC file transfer protocol (compatible with ProComm Plus 2.01)
3.
Using the parameters recorded in step 1 for the supervisory port, configure the microcomputer communications application software for the same parameters.
4.
Verify that the communications application is running correctly by entering a supervisory port command such as DSP TIM.
5.
Verify (on the disk label) that the version of the operational software is correct prior to loading and record the filename.
6.
Insert the operational software disk into the microcomputer.
PRECAUTION: Before logically removing the online Integrated Trunk
Module, notify all users that all channels are being taken offline or data will be lost.
7.
Logically remove the online Integrated Trunk Module using the RMV n:ss command.
8.
Replace the operational software in the flash EPROM with the new operational software by entering:
LOA SW n:ss (or LOA SW n:ss/F)
NOTE:
If the terminal emulation program running on the microcomputer supports a speed of 57600 bps, you can use the optional /F modifier with the LOA SW command to download the operational software at a speed of 57600 bps to the Integrated Trunk Module.
2-12
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
6/30/94
You do not need to reconfigure the SP port speed to 57600 bps when using the /F modifier as the Network Module automatically switches the SP port to this speed. However, you do need to reconfigure the emulation program speed to 57600 bps.
The following message is displayed:
CONNECT SP PORT TO PC AND INVOKE XMODEM PROTOCOL.
NOTE:
To abort the LOA SW command, enter CONTROL C. If the file transfer has been started, press ESC to abort the file transfer.
C’s appear on the screen until the file transfer is started.
9.
Set the file transfer protocol on the microcomputer to XMODEM to send the file from the microcomputer to the LINK/2+ System. Enter the path and filename recorded from the disk label.
If successful, the load process takes about 5 minutes (at 9600 bps). The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. INSERT AND WAIT FOR 90 SECONDS TO PROGRAM FLASH.
NOTE:
Immediately after the operational software has been loaded, the lights on the Integrated Trunk Module will cycle on and off a few times while the flash is being programmed. After the lights remain off, proceed to the next step.
10. Logically insert the Integrated Trunk Module using the INS n:ss command. The ON LINE indicator should light indicating that this Integrated Trunk Module is now online.
If the ON LINE indicator does not light, use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new RP part number is displayed. If the correct part number is displayed, use the RST n:ss command to reset the Integrated Trunk Module.
11. If a redundant pair of Integrated Trunk Modules exists and if the new operational software is to be loaded onto the offline Integrated Trunk Module, proceed as follows:
A.
Logically remove the offline Integrated Trunk Module using the RMV n:ss command.
B.
Copy the new version of operational software from the online Integrated Trunk Module to the offline module by entering the following command:
COP SW n:ss
1
n:ss
2 where n:ss
1 location.
is the source module slot location and n:ss
2
is the destination module slot
Depending on the slot numbers, the following message is displayed:
COPYING SW FROM SLOT 1:05 TO SLOT 1:06.
2-13
If successful, the copy process takes about 30 seconds. The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. INSERT AND WAIT FOR 90 SECONDS TO PROGRAM
FLASH.
NOTE:
Immediately after the operational software has been loaded, the lights on the Integrated Trunk Module will cycle on and off a few times while the flash is being programmed. After the lights remain off, proceed to the next step.
C.
Logically insert the offline Integrated Trunk Module using the INS n:ss command.
Use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new RP part number is displayed.
12. To copy the operational software to another Integrated Trunk Module in the Control
Mainframe, repeat step 11A through 11C. Note that the source module must always be online and the destination module must first be logically removed.
X.50 SERVER MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE
The LINK/2+ System is shipped with the X.50 Server Module operational software already installed in the X.50 Server Module(s). In addition, a high density, 3.5-inch floppy disk containing the operational software is also provided.
If a new version of the software is released, perform the following procedure to load the operational software, provided on the floppy disk, from a microcomputer to the X.50 Server
Module.
Procedure 2-5. Loading X.50 Server Module Operational Software
NOTE:
If an existing X.50 Server Module in the node already contains the current software, you can copy the current software to another X.50
Server Module using the COP SW command. See Procedure 2-6.
1.
Determine the supervisory port parameters for use in configuring the microcomputer by entering the DSP SP command. Record these parameters:
•
SPEED: for example, 9600 bps
•
STOP: 1 stop bit (required setting)
•
DATA: 8 data bits, no parity (required setting)
If the STOP and DATA parameters do not match the required settings, enter the DEF SP command to change the supervisory port parameters to the required settings.
2.
Connect the serial port of the microcomputer to the supervisory port of the LINK/2+
System. The microcomputer should have the following:
•
High-density 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
2-14
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
6/30/94
•
Serial port
•
Communications application software containing XMODEM with CRC file transfer protocol (compatible with ProComm Plus 2.01)
3.
Using the parameters recorded in step 1 for the supervisory port, configure the microcomputer communications application software for the same parameters.
4.
Verify that the communications application is running correctly by entering a supervisory port command such as DSP TIM.
5.
Verify (on the disk label) that the version of the operational software is correct prior to loading and record the filename.
6.
Insert the operational software disk into the microcomputer.
PRECAUTION: Before logically removing an online X.50 Server Module, notify all users that all channels are being taken offline or data will be lost.
7.
Logically remove the X.50 Server Module using the RMV n:ss command.
8.
Replace the operational software in the flash EPROM with the new operational software by entering:
LOA SW n:ss (or LOA SW n:ss/F)
NOTE:
If the terminal emulation program running on the microcomputer supports a speed of 57600 bps, you can use the optional /F modifier with the LOA SW command to download the operational software at a speed of 57600 bps to the X.50 Server Module.
You do not need to reconfigure the SP port speed to 57600 bps when using the /F modifier because the Network Module automatically switches the SP port to this speed. However, you do need to reconfigure the emulation program speed to 57600 bps.
The following message is displayed:
CONNECT SP PORT TO PC AND INVOKE XMODEM PROTOCOL.
NOTE:
To abort the LOA SW command, enter CONTROL C. If the file transfer has been started, press ESC to abort the file transfer.
C’s appear on the screen until the file transfer is started.
9.
Set the file transfer protocol on the microcomputer to XMODEM to send the file from the microcomputer to the LINK/2+ System. Enter the path and filename recorded from the disk label.
If successful, the load process takes about 5 minutes (at 9600 bps). The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. INSERT AND WAIT FOR 90 SECONDS TO PROGRAM FLASH.
2-15
10. Logically insert the X.50 Server Module using the INS n:ss command. If the X.50 Server
Module was originally online, the ON LINE indicator should light indicating that this X.50
Server Module is once again online.
If the ON LINE indicator does not light, use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new RP part number is displayed. If the correct part number is displayed, use the RST n:ss command to reset the X.50 Server Module.
Procedure 2-6. Copying X.50 Server Module Operational Software
To copy the current operational software from one X.50 Server Module (source) to another X.50
Server Module (destination) in the node, proceed as follows:
PRECAUTION: Before logically removing an online X.50 Server Module, notify all users that all channels are being taken offline or data will be lost.
1.
Logically remove the destination X.50 Server Module using the RMV n:ss command.
2.
Copy the new version of operational software from the source X.50 Server Module to the destination X.50 Server module by entering the following command:
COP SW n:ss
1
n:ss
2 where n:ss
1 location.
is the source module slot location and n:ss
2
is the destination module slot
Depending on the slot numbers, the following message is displayed:
COPYING SW FROM SLOT 1:08 TO SLOT 2:06.
If successful, the copy process takes about 30 seconds. The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. INSERT AND WAIT FOR 90 SECONDS TO PROGRAM FLASH.
3.
Logically insert the destination X.50 Server Module using the INS n:ss command.
Use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new RP part number is displayed.
VSM.3/VSM.5 VOICE SERVER MODULE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE
The LINK/2+ System is shipped with the VSM.3 and VSM.5 Voice Server Module operational software already installed in the VSM.3 and VSM.5 Voice Server Modules. In addition, a highdensity, 3.5-inch floppy disk containing the operational software is also provided.
If a new version of the software is released, perform the following procedure to load the operational software, provided on the floppy disk, from a microcomputer to the VSM.3 or
VSM.5 Voice Server Module.
2-16
L2UG
6/30/97
Procedure 2-7. Loading VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module
Operational Software
NOTE:
If an existingVSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module in the node already contains the current software, you can copy the current software to another VSM.3 or VSM.5Voice Server Module respectively, using the COP SW command. See Procedure 2-8.
1.
Determine the supervisory port parameters for use in configuring the microcomputer by entering the DSP SP command. Record these parameters:
•
SPEED: for example, 9600 bps
•
STOP: 1 stop bit (required setting)
•
DATA: 8 data bits, no parity (required settings)
If the STOP and DATA parameters do not match the required settings, enter the DEF SP command to change the supervisory port parameters to the required settings.
2.
Connect the serial port of the microcomputer to the supervisory port of the LINK/2+
System. The microcomputer should have the following:
•
High-density, 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
•
Serial port
•
Communications application software containing XMODEM with CRC file transfer protocol (compatible with ProComm Plus 2.01)
3.
Using the parameters recorded in step 1 for the supervisory port, configure the microcomputer communications application software for the same parameters.
4.
Verify that the communications application is running correctly by entering a supervisory port command such as DSP TIM.
5.
Verify (on the disk label) that the version of the operational software is correct prior to loading and record the filename.
6.
Insert the operational software disk into the microcomputer.
PRECAUTION: Before logically removing an online VSM.3 or VSM.5
Voice Server Module, notify all users that all channels are being taken offline or voice/fax traffic will be lost.
7.
Logically remove the VSM.3 or VMS.5 Voice Server Module using the RMV n:ss command.
8.
Replace the current operational software in the VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module with the new operational software by entering:
LOA SW n:ss (or LOA SW n:ss/F)
L2UG
6/30/97
2-17
NOTE:
If the terminal emulation program running on the microcomputer supports a speed of 57600 bps, you can use the optional /F modifier with the LOA SW command to download the operational software at a speed of 57600 bps to the VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module.
You do not need to reconfigure the SP port speed to 57600 bps when using the /F modifier because the Network Module automatically switches the SP port to this speed. However, you do need to reconfigure the emulation program speed to 57600 bps.
The following message is displayed:
CONNECT SP PORT TO PC AND INVOKE XMODEM PROTOCOL.
NOTE:
To abort the LOA SW command, enter CONTROL C. If the file transfer has been started, press ESC to abort the file transfer.
C’s appear on the screen until the file transfer is started.
9.
Set the file transfer protocol on the microcomputer to XMODEM to send the file from the microcomputer to the LINK/2+ System. Enter the path and file name recorded from the disk label.
If successful, the load process takes about 5 minutes (at 9600 bps). The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. MODULE READY TO GO ONLINE.
10. Logically insert the VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module using the INS n:ss command. If the VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module was originally online, the ON LINE indicator should light indicating that this Voice Server Module is once again online.
After the module comes back online, use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new software number is displayed.
Procedure 2-8. Copying VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module
Operational Software
To copy the current operational software from one VSM.3 Voice Server Module (source) to another VSM.3 Voice Server Module (destination) or from one VSM.5 Voice Server Module
(source) to another VSM.5 Voice Server Module (destination) in the node, proceed as follows:
PRECAUTION: Before logically removing an online VSM.3 or VSM.5
Voice Server Module, notify all users that all channels are being taken offline or voice/fax traffic will be lost.
1.
Logically remove the source VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module using the RMV n:ss command.
2.
Logically remove the destination VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module using the RMV n:ss command.
2-18
L2UG
6/30/97
3.
Copy the new version of operational software from the source VSM.3 Voice Server Module to the destination VSM.3 Voice Server Module or from the source VSM.5 Voice Server
Module to the destination VSM.5 Voice Server Module by entering the following command:
COP SW n:ss
1
n:ss
2 where n:ss
1 location.
is the source module slot location and n:ss
2
is the destination module slot
Depending on the slot numbers, the following message is displayed:
COPYING SW FROM SLOT 1:08 TO SLOT 2:06.
If successful, the copy process takes about 50 seconds. The following message is displayed:
LOAD COMPLETE. MODULE READY TO GO ONLINE.
4.
Logically insert the source VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module using the INS n:ss command.
5.
Logically insert the destination VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module using the INS n:ss command.
Use the DSP PPN n:ss command to verify that the new RP part number is displayed.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
For information on configuring the LINK/2+ System, see the Configuration Planning Manual.
After the system has been configured, refer to the following paragraphs for information on backing up the configured database.
DATABASE BACKUP
After system configuration has been completed, perform Procedure 2-9 to back up the database via file transfer to a microcomputer hard disk drive or floppy disk. Periodically perform database backups after changes have been made to the system configuration.
Procedure 2-9. Database Backup
1.
Determine the supervisory port parameters for use in configuring the microcomputer to match the supervisory port by entering the DSP SP command. Record these parameters:
•
SPEED: for example, 9600 bps
•
STOP: for example, 1 stop bit (required setting)
•
DATA: for example, 8 data bits, no parity (required setting)
L2UG
6/30/97
2-19
2-20
If the STOP and DATA parameters do not match the required settings, enter the DEF SP command to change the supervisory port parameters to the required settings.
2.
Connect the serial port of the microcomputer to the supervisory port of the LINK/2+
System. The microcomputer should have the following:
•
High-density 5.25-inch floppy disk drive, high-density 3.5-inch floppy disk drive, or hard disk drive
•
Serial port
•
Communications application software containing XMODEM with CRC file transfer protocol (compatible with ProComm Plus 2.01)
•
CHECKDB.EXE program (provided with LINK/2+ operational software floppy disk package)
3.
Using the parameters recorded in step 1 for the supervisory port, configure the microcomputer communications application software for the same parameters.
4.
Verify that the communications application is running correctly by entering a supervisory port command such as DSP TIM.
5.
Issue the DSP CKS command and record the displayed checksum and the time and date of the last database change for future reference. (The purpose of this step is for comparison of the stored database with the contents of the Network Module database.)
6.
If the database is to be backed up to a floppy disk, insert the disk.
7.
Back up the database from the Network Module to the microcomputer by entering:
SAV DB
The following message is displayed:
CONNECT SP PORT TO PC AND INVOKE XMODEM PROTOCOL
NOTE:
To abort the SAV DB command, enter CONTROL C. If the file transfer has been started, press ESC to abort the file transfer.
8.
Set the file transfer protocol on the microcomputer to XMODEM for the microcomputer to receive the file from the Network Module. Enter an appropriate filename to distinguish the version of the database being backed up.
9.
At the DOS prompt, verify that the database backup was successful by entering:
CHECKDB filename
This program will provide the following information, Figure 2-1:
•
Database filename selected by the user
•
Node ID
•
Database checksum and validated checksum
L2UG
6/30/97
•
Timestamp with time the last database change was made
•
Datestamp with date the last database change was made
ascomTimeplex LINK/2 NCL Database Verification Program RP50001A
Filename Node Checksum Validated Timestamp Datestamp
N4_12-21.8AM 0004 57 57 07:54:42 12/21/93
N4_12-31.8AM 0004 75 75 15:16:42 12/30/93
Figure 2-1. Typical Database Verification Program Results
OPENING AND CLOSING MAINFRAME DOOR
WARNING: KEEP MAINFRAME DOOR LOCKED DURING NORMAL
OPERATION. VOLTAGES WITHIN THE MAINFRAME
COULD PRESENT A SHOCK HAZARD.
The 18-slot and 13-slot (miniLINK/2+) Mainframe front doors have a handle located on the left side for opening and closing the door.
To open the 6-slot (microLINK/2+) Mainframe front door, unlock the key at the bottom of the door and pull door slightly forward at the base. Lift door off frame.
To close the microLINK/2+ Mainframe front door, position the door on the top of the frame, then push the bottom of the door toward the back of the unit until the door snaps into place. Lock the door.
L2UG
6/30/97
2-21
Chapter
3
General Information
The supervisory port allows network control, monitoring, diagnostics, information retrieval, and configuration activities for the LINK/2+ System to be conducted from a supervisory terminal.
Supervisory port commands can be directed to the local LINK/2+ System and to remote
LINK/2+ and LINK/1 Systems in the network. Commands can also be directed to LINK
Channel Service Unit Systems (LINK/CSU) connected to any node in the network.
Command format and supervisory port operational guidelines are described in this chapter.
Commands are discussed in the following chapters:
●
Support Commands, Chapter 4, discusses supervisory port operational commands and command files.
●
Display Commands, Chapter 5, describes the commands that provide status, statistical, and configuration information.
●
Configuration Commands, Chapter 6, describes the commands used to configure the
LINK/2+ System. This chapter also includes guidelines for performing configuration activities and typical configuration procedures.
●
Diagnostic Commands, Chapter 7, describes the commands that allow the user to test channels, intermachine links, modules, and alarm relays.
For a summary of all supervisory port messages, see Appendix A.
For information on accessing the supervisory port, see Chapter 2, Getting Started.
COMMAND FORMAT
The supervisory port command format is shown in Figure 3-1.
[NOD xxxx] DSP CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
RANGE
MODIFIER
INSTRUCTION
OPTIONAL REMOTE NODE DESIGNATION
Figure 3-1. Supervisory Port Command Format
L2UG
6/30/94
3-1
3-2
Figure 3-2 shows a typical command which displays channel parameters for the following I/O channels at remote node 12:
●
Channel 4 in slot 11 of the Control Mainframe (nest 1)
●
Channels 3 and 4 in slot 9 of Expander A Mainframe (nest 2)
●
Channels 1 through 3 in slot 5 of Expander B Mainframe (nest 3)
●
Channel 2 in slot 6 through channel 4 in slot 10 of Expander B Mainframe (nest 3)
NOD 12 DSP CH 1:11:4,2:9:3,2:9:4,3:5:1-3:5:3,3:6:2-3:10:4
SINGLE CHANNELS
RANGES OF CHANNELS
RANGE
MODIFIER
INSTRUCTION
REMOTE NODE DESIGNATION
NOTE: WHEN ENTERING A
COMMAND, INCLUDE
SPACES WHEN INDICATED.
Figure 3-2. Typical Command
The following symbols are used in this User’s Guide to designate selections of nodes,
Mainframes, slots, and channels in the range part of a command: c = I/O channel number (1-4) cc = DS-0 channel number (1-31), X.50 DS-0 channel number (1-16),
VSM/VSM.1 channel number (1-31), VSM.3A channel number (1-8),
VSM.3B channel number (1-16), or VSM.5 channel number (1-12) ccc = bypass channel number (1-511) n = Mainframe (nest) number, 1=Control Mainframe; 2=Expander A Mainframe
(upper); 3=Expander B Mainframe (lower) sr = X.50 subrate channel (1 to 20) ss = slot number (1-18) xxxx = node number (1-2000)
* = all elements in a range. Can also be used to specify all channels on a module, e.g., n:ss:*
{ } = required parameter. Choose one of the elements within the braces. Braces are never entered as part of the command.
[ ] = optional parameter. Brackets are never entered as part of the command.
A semicolon (;) can be entered in place of a colon (:) when entering nest:slot:channel numbers.
A command line can have a maximum of 80 characters. Commands directed to a remote node can have a maximum of 50 characters.
L2UG
6/30/97
Structure of Commands
Command structure consists of:
●
Optional remote node designation
●
Instruction
●
Modifier
●
Range
The optional remote node designation lets you direct a command to a specific remote node. If a command is to be executed at the local node, the local node number is not required.
NOTE:
See the "Issuing Remote Commands" paragraphs for information on issuing remote commands in expanded networks.
The instruction is a 2- or 3-character abbreviation, for example, DEF for DEFINE and CLR for
CLEAR. The instruction part of the command is always required.
The modifier follows the instruction and specifies:
●
A particular physical part of the LINK/2+ System, e.g.:
CH = channel
DL = intermachine link
SP = supervisory port
●
A particular action, e.g.:
PG = pagination
CON = connection
PR = priority
Some commands require only one modifier. For example, the command:
SET PG where: SET = instruction
PG = modifier sets pagination on the supervisory terminal.
Other commands require two or three modifiers. For example, the command:
DEF CFB 1 SC1
L2UG
6/30/94
3-3
where: DEF= instruction
CFB 1 SC1 = modifiers defines station clock 1 as the primary clock source on the system clock fallback list.
The range part of the command further specifies the device on which the command is to be executed. The following paragraphs describe how ranges are specified.
Specifying a Node
When a command specifies a node, the range can include any combination of: xxxx = a single node xxxx,xxxx = multiple nodes xxxx-xxxx = a range of nodes in ascending order
* = all nodes. This selection must be entered alone.
For example, to display the routing parameters for nodes 2, 3, and 100 to 111, the command is:
DSP RTE 2,3, 100-111 where: DSP = instruction
RTE = modifier
2,3, 100-111 = range
Specifying a Module
When a command specifies a module, the Mainframe (nest) and slot number are both required.
The range can include any combination of: n:ss = a single slot n:ss,n:ss = multiple slots n:ss-n:ss = a range of slots in ascending order
* = all slots. This selection must be entered alone.
For example, to logically insert a module in slot 4 of Expander A Mainframe (nest 2), the command is:
INS 2:4 where: INS = instruction
2:4 = range
3-4
L2UG
6/30/94
Specifying an Intermachine Link
When a command specifies an intermachine link, only the slot number where the Interlink
Module is located is required. The range can include any combination of: ss = a single intermachine link ss,ss = multiple intermachine links ss-ss = a range of intermachine links in ascending order
* = all intermachine links. This selection must be entered alone.
For example, to display the intermachine link parameters for the Interlink Modules in slots 11 and 13, the command is:
DSP DL 11, 13 where: DSP = instruction
DL = modifier
11, 13 = range
Specifying a Channel
When a command specifies a channel, the Mainframe (nest), slot, and channel number are required. Depending on the command, the channel number could be: n:ss:c = I/O channel number (1-4) n:ss:cc = DS-0 channel number (1-31), X.50 DS-0 channel number (1-16)
VSM/VSM.1 channel number (1-31), VSM.3A channel number (1-8),
VSM.3B channel number (1-16), or VSM.5 channel number (1-12) n:ss:ccc = bypass channel number (1-511)
The range can include any combination of: n:ss:c = a single channel n:ss:c,n:ss:c = multiple channels n:ss:c-n:ss:c = a range of channels in ascending order n:ss:* = all channels on module in specified slot
* = all channels. This selection must be entered alone.
For example, to display channel parameters for channel 4 on the I/O module in slot 5 of
Expander B Mainframe (nest 3), the command is:
DSP CH 3:5:4
L2UG
6/30/97
3-5
where: DSP = instruction
CH = modifier
3:5:4 = range
To display channel parameters for all channels on the I/O modules in slots 10, 11, and 12 of the
Control Mainframe (nest 1), the command is:
DSP CH 1:10:1-1:12:4 where: DSP = instruction
CH = modifier
1:10:1-1:12:4 = range
Specifying an X.50 Subrate Channel
When a command specifies an X.50 subrate channel, the Mainframe (nest), slot, X.50 DS-0
(X.50 aggregate) channel, and the X.50 subrate channel number (1-20) are required.
The range can include any combination of: n:ss:cc:sr = a single X.50 subrate channel n:ss:cc:sr,n:ss:cc:sr = multiple X.50 subrate channels n:ss:cc:sr-n:ss:cc:sr = a range of X.50 subrate channels in ascending order n:ss:cc:* = all X.50 subrate channels in an X.50 DS-0 channel on module in specified slot
For example, to display the channel parameters for X.50 subrate channels 7 to 12 on X.50 DS-0 channel 8 of the XSM Module in slot 17 of the Control Mainframe (nest 1), the command is:
DSP XCH 1:17:8:7-1:17:8:12 where: DSP = instruction
XCH = modifier
1:17:8:7-1:17:8:12 =range
To display the channel parameters for all X.50 subrate channels on X.50 DS-0 channel 10 of the
XSM Module in slot 12 of the Control Mainframe (nest 1), the command is:
DSP XCH 1:12:10:* where: DSP = instruction
XCH = modifier
1:12:10:* = range
3-6
L2UG
6/30/97
SUPERVISORY PORT OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
The supervisory port recognizes several supervisory terminal control key editing functions which are used to support all phases of supervisory port operation; see Table 4-1 in Chapter 4, Support
Commands.
The following paragraphs explain how to enter commands, issue remote commands, issue external port (LINK/CSU) commands, and make menu selections.
Entering Commands from Supervisory Terminal
Use the following procedure to enter commands from the supervisory terminal:
1.
Ensure supervisory port prompt (Nxxxx>) is displayed. (xxxx is the local node number.)
If the prompt is not displayed, enter Control C character.
LINK/2+ System displays supervisory port prompt.
2.
Type complete command at the supervisory port prompt.
If you make a typing error, backspace by using the Backspace or DEL key or entering
Control H character(s), type the correct character(s), and then enter Control A or Control F character to move cursor to the end of the command line.
3.
Press RETURN key to enter the command.
●
If the command was entered incorrectly:
●
A question mark is displayed in lieu of the supervisory port prompt.
An up arrow points to the error.
Press the RETURN key and reenter the command.
If the command was entered correctly:
Command is executed.
Response, if any, is displayed.
Supervisory port prompt is displayed.
Issuing Remote Commands
NOTE:
In the command summary tables throughout this User’s Guide, a # in the "N" column indicates that a command can be issued to a remote node.
All commands entered through the supervisory port are directed to the local node unless the command is preceded with the remote node designation, NOD xxxx.
L2UG
6/30/94
3-7
NOTES:
A remote command will NOT be executed if any of the following conditions exist:
●
If the local node number entered is invalid, the message
"ILLEGAL SOURCE NODE" is displayed.
●
If the command is directed to an undefined node, a question mark is displayed and an up arrow points to the error. Press the
RETURN key to return to the supervisory port prompt.
●
If a route between the local and remote nodes has not been defined, the command is aborted. See "Define and Clear Routing
Table (DEF RTE, CLR RTE) Commands" and "Define and Clear
Subnetwork Routing Table (DEF SRT, CLR SRT) Commands" paragraphs in Chapter 6, Configuration Commands.
●
If a nonglobal gateway command is issued to another node in the same network and the remote node does not have the originator node number on its alarm notification list, the command is aborted.
●
If an intermachine link has failed, routing tables to a remote node are incorrect, intermachine link security is enabled, or an inbound intermachine link along the route is defined for
TRANSLATE=FULL or TRANSLATE=NO BYPASS, the message
"NO ACKNOWLEDGE" is displayed. The local LINK/2+ System will retry the command every 30 seconds. To abort the command immediately, enter Control C character or press BREAK key.
Intermachine links at a node defined with TRANSLATE=NO
BYPASS will not block messages terminating at that node.
●
If a command is issued to a node more than seven bypass hops from the source node, or a response to a command cannot locate the source node due to erroneous routing, the local LINK/2+
System will retry the command every 30 seconds. After 4 minutes, the retransmissions will stop and the message "NO RESPONSE -
CMD ABORTED" is displayed. To abort the command before the
4 minutes have elapsed, enter Control C character or press
BREAK key.
●
In a network with nodes that have different firmware levels, some commands may not be recognized by the older nodes. If a remote node does not recognize a command, a question mark is displayed at the local supervisory terminal. Press RETURN key to return to the supervisory port prompt.
Issuing External Port (LINK/CSU) Commands
A LINK/2+ supervisory terminal can issue commands to a LINK/CSU connected to any
LINK/2+ System in the network. The LINK/CSU command must be preceded by EP. For example, the following command is issued to the LINK/CSU at the local node:
EP D L 5
3-8
L2UG
6/30/94
where: EP = external port prefix
D L 5 = LINK/CSU command
To issue a command to a LINK/CSU connected to a remote node, precede the entire command with the remote node designation, NOD xxx. For example, the following command is issued to the LINK/CSU at node 50:
NOD 50 EP D L 5 where:
NOD 50 = remote node designation
EP = external port prefix
D L 5 = LINK/CSU command
For information on LINK/CSU commands, see the LINK/CSU User’s Guide.
NOTE:
The Network Module DIP switch K1-1 must be set to ON/CLOSED before the EP commands are accepted.
Making Menu Selections
For most commands used to define parameters, the supervisory terminal displays a menu from which parameter values are selected. To select parameter values from a menu:
1.
Enter complete command. System displays first line of current values. The cursor is immediately to the right of the first parameter value, Figure 3-3.
2.
Press the F key to scroll forward or press the B key to scroll backward through the parameter values until the desired value is displayed.
3.
Press the SPACE bar to select the displayed value and move the cursor to the next parameter value. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all parameters on a line are selected.
4.
At the end of a line, press the SPACE bar to return to the first parameter value on the line if further changes are required to the parameters on the current line.
5.
After all the changes on a line are selected, press RETURN key to move to the next display line.
6.
To enter values in the LINK/2+ System after all parameter values on the menu are selected, press the RETURN key while the cursor is on the last display line of the menu.
NOTE:
When a command that displays a menu is entered with a range of channels or slots, the parameter values of the lowest channel or intermachine link are displayed.
The parameter values of the displayed channel are assigned to all channels in the range that are on the same type of module. The parameter values of the displayed intermachine link are assigned to all slots in the range.
For example, Figure 3-3 shows how to change parameter values of a synchronous channel. In the example, channel speed, delay threshold, and phasor size are changed.
L2UG
6/30/94
3-9
ENTRY
DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
RETURN
DISPLAY
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
9600_
PROFILE
1
PRIORITY
02
DELAYTHR
04
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
RESULT
DEF CH COMMAND IS ENTERED.
FIRST LINE OF CHANNEL 1:11:2
PARAMETER VALUES IS DIS-
PLAYED.
F KEY (5 TIMES)
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000_
PROFILE
1
PRIORITY
02
DELAYTHR
04
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
SPEED PARAMETER VALUES
SCROLL FORWARD UNTIL 6000
IS DISPLAYED.
SPACE BAR (3 TIMES)
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
PROFILE
1
PRIORITY
02
DELAYTHR
04_
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
CURSOR ADVANCES TO THE
DELAY THRESHOLD
PARAMETER VALUE.
B KEY (2 TIMES)
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
PROFILE
1
PRIORITY
02
DELAYTHR
02_
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
DELAY THRESHOLD
PARAMETER VALUE SCROLLS
BACKWARD UNTIL 02 IS
DISPLAYED.
RETURN
SPACE BAR (1 TIME)
THEN F KEY (1 TIME)
RETURN
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
TYPE
DCE_
PROFILE
1
PHRESET
PRIORITY
02
PHASOR
MX
DELAYTHR
02
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
OOS OPER
DO NOTHING
CTSGEN CTSDELAY
TRANS
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
TYPE
DCE
PROFILE
1
PHRESET
PRIORITY
02
PHASOR
06_
DELAYTHR
02
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
OOS OPER
DO NOTHING
CTSGEN CTSDELAY
TRANS
SECOND LINE OF PARAMETER
VALUES IS DISPLAYED.
CURSOR ADVANCES TO PHASOR
SIZE PARAMETER.
(CURSOR SKIPS PHRESET
PARAMETER BECAUSE TYPE
SELECTED IS DCE.)
PHASOR PARAMETER VALUE
SCROLLS TO 06.
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
TYPE
DCE
PROFILE
1
PHRESET
PRIORITY
02
PHASOR
06
CTN. TYPE
B/W_
B/W.FNS.
F1,-F1
DELAYTHR
02
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
OOS OPER
DO NOTHING
CTSGEN CTSDELAY
TRANS
THIRD LINE OF PARAMETER
VALUES IS DISPLAYED.
RETURN
N0100>DEF CH/ QSC 1:11:2
SPEED
6000
TYPE
DCE
PROFILE
1
PHRESET
PRIORITY
02
PHASOR
06
CTN. TYPE
B/W
B/W.FNS.
F1,-F1
N0100>_
DELAYTHR
02
CONNECT FNS.
ORIG OUTBAND
OOS OPER
DO NOTHING
CTSGEN CTSDELAY
TRANS
PARAMETER VALUES ARE
ENTERED.
SUPERVISORY PORT PROMPT
IS DISPLAYED.
Figure 3-3. Typical Parameter Programming Using Menu Selections
3-10
L2UG
6/30/94
Chapter
4
Support Commands
Supervisory port support commands allow you to:
●
Load or copy operational software
●
Backup and restore configuration database
●
Toggle operational software between banks of memory
●
Enable or disable password protection on the supervisory port
●
Set or clear supervisory port pagination
●
Set the time and date
●
Display or inhibit the display of unsolicited messages
●
Display a list of supervisory port commands
●
Set up command files
The supervisory port also recognizes several supervisory terminal control key editing functions, which are used to support all phases of supervisory port operations.
Table 4-1 lists support commands and control key editing functions in alphabetical order by command mnemonic and key name.
SUPPORT COMMANDS
Supervisory port support commands are described in the following paragraphs. Commands are in alphabetical order by command mnemonic. Related commands are discussed together.
Commands used for command file applications are described in the "Command File Commands" and "Using Command Files" paragraphs.
Clear (Unmask) Unsolicited Messages (CLR MUM) Command
See "Mask and Unmask Unsolicited Messages (SET MUM, CLR MUM) Commands" paragraph.
L2UG
6/30/94
4-1
Table 4-1. Support Commands
G
G
G
G
G
N
#
#
Command
B key
Description: Scrolls backward through a menu.
BACKSPACE key
Description: Backspaces to correct typing errors on same line.
BREAK key
Description: Cancels command, causes prompt to be displayed, exits repetitive command file command, and halts connect/disconnect messages.
CLR MUM LOC
Description: Clears the supervisory port of masking unsolicited messages from local node.
CLR MUM REM
Description: Allows the local node to transmit unsolicited alarms to the nodes on alarm notification list of local node.
CLR PG
#
Description: Clears pagination on supervisory terminal.
#
CLR PW
Description: Clears supervisory port of old passwords for password 1 (PW1) and password 2 (PW2), and disables password protection.
CLR TMO
Description: Disables 30-minute timer and allows user unlimited time on the supervisory terminal (used only if password protection is enabled).
CLR @ file
Description: Clears preset execution time of command file, where file is a number between 1 and 8.
CLS
Description: Clears screen and moves cursor to upper left-hand corner of screen.
CONTROL A keys
Description: When entered at the prompt, displays last command entered but does not execute the command. Entering
Control A when the cursor is within a command line moves the cursor to the end of the command. Entering Control A at the end of a command line will repeat any characters from the previous command that are to the right of the cursor.
CONTROL B keys
Description: When repeatedly entered at the prompt, scrolls backward through the last 20 commands executed. Any command can be executed by pressing RETURN key.
CONTROL C keys
Description: Same as BREAK key.
CONTROL D keys
Description: Displays and executes last command entered.
4-2
L2UG
6/30/97
G N
G
G
G
#
#
#
Table 4-1. Support Commands (Cont’d)
Command
CONTROL F keys
Description: Same as Control A, plus when repeatedly entered at the prompt, scrolls forward through the last 20 commands executed. Any command can be executed by pressing RETURN key.
CONTROL H keys
Description: Same as BACKSPACE key.
CONTROL Q keys
Description: Enables output of data to terminal (X-ON).
CONTROL R keys
Description: Lists the last 20 commands executed.
CONTROL S keys
Description: Disables output of data to terminal (X-OFF).
CONTROL Z keys
Description: Ends insert mode of command file editor when used in the first position of a line.
COP SW n:ss n:ss
COP SW 1:ss
Description: In the first command format, copies operational software from the online Network Module, Integrated Trunk
Module, or X.50 Server Module to the offline Network Module, Integrated Trunk Module, or X.50 Server Module. In the second command format, copies operational software from the online memory bank to the offline memory bank of the online
Network Module.
DEF PW1
Description: Defines new password for password level 1 and enables password protection after both PW1 and PW2 are defined.
DEF PW2
Description: Defines new password for password level 2 and enables password protection.
DEF @ file
Description: Opens a command file for creating, editing, or deleting with the command file editor, where file is a number between 1 and 8.
DEL key
Description: Backspaces to correct typing errors on same line.
DSP @
{
* or d[-d]...
[
,d[-d]
]}
Description: Displays contents of command file(s).
ESC key
Description: Ends insert mode of command file editor when used in the first position of a line.
EX
Description: Exits or logs out user from LINK/2+ System, preventing unauthorized user access via the supervisory terminal.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-3
G N
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
#
#
#
#
#
#
Table 4-1. Support Commands (Cont’d)
Command
F key
Description: Scrolls forward through a menu.
HELP
Description: Lists available LINK/2+ System supervisory port commands.
HOME
Description: Moves cursor to upper left-hand corner of screen without clearing screen.
LOA DB[/F]
Description: Downloads previously stored configuration parameters (database) to the online Network Module from a microcomputer connected to the supervisory port. Optional /F modifier causes database to be downloaded at speed of
57.6 kbps.
LOA SW n:ss[/F]
Description: Loads operational software from a microcomputer to a Network Module, Integrated Trunk Module, or X.50
Server Module. Optional /F modifier causes operational software to be downloaded at speed of 57.6 kbps.
RETURN key
Description: Enters command or moves to next line of parameters.
SAV DB[/F]
Description: Uploads the Network Module database (configuration parameters) from the Network Module to a microcomputer connected to the supervisory port. Optional /F modifier causes database to be uploaded at speed of 57.6 kbps.
SET DAT mm-dd-yyyy
Description: Sets month-day-year of real-time clock.
SET MUM LOC
Description: Causes the supervisory port to mask unsolicited messages from the local node.
SET MUM REM
Description: Causes the local node to not transmit unsolicited alarms to the nodes on alarm notification list of local node.
SET PG
Description: Sets pagination on supervisory terminal.
SET TIM tt:tt:tt [/OFF=±hh:mm]
Description: Sets time of day in hours:minutes:seconds and initializes real-time clock. Optional /OFF modifier permits introducing a plus or minus offset in hours:minutes for network management alarm time-stamping purposes.
SET TMO
Description: Enables 30-minute timer to log out user if no keystroke is made for 30 minutes (used only if password protection is enabled).
SPACE bar
Description: Advances cursor from one parameter to the next on a line of a menu. When pagination is set, advances to the next screen.
4-4
L2UG
6/30/97
G N
G #
#
#
Table 4-1. Support Commands (Cont’d)
Command
STP
Description: Stops currently executing command file from continuing. No commands following STP command will execute.
TGL BNK n:ss
"
Description: Switches execution of operational software between two independent banks of flash EPROM that are part of a
Network Module.
Description: Sends text message, up to 48 characters, to supervisory port of specified remote node.
?
Description: Displays keyword information for available LINK/2+ System supervisory port commands.
@ file [/tt:tt:tt]
@ file [/tt:tt:tt mm-dd-yyyy]
@ file [/mm-dd-yyyy tt:tt:tt]
@ file [/mm-dd-yyyy]
Description: Executes command file specified, where file is a number from 1-8. If a time and/or date is entered as part of the command, the command file is executed at the time specified.
FOR COMMAND FILES ONLY
BACKSPACE key
Description: Repositions cursor for editing command lines after using E command.
CONTROL C
Description: Exits the command file editor without saving the current changes.
CONTROL Z
Description: Ends insert mode of command file editor when used in the first position of a line.
D
{i
or i-j
}
Description: Deletes line i or lines i through j of a command file after the file has been opened with the DEF @ command, where i and j are line numbers.
E
{ i
}
Description: Places cursor at end of line i of a command file for editing after the file has been opened with the DEF @ command, where i is a line number. The backspace key is used to reposition the cursor.
ESC key
Description: Ends insert mode of command file editor when used in the first position of a line.
I [i]
Description: Allows the insertion of new lines into a command file after the file has been opened with the DEF @ command, where i is 0 or a line number. If no line number or 0 is used, new lines are inserted before the first line. If a line number is used, new lines are inserted after the specified line.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-5
Table 4-1. Support Commands (Cont’d)
G N Command
RETURN key
Description: Moves cursor to next line of command file when used at the end of a line. Ends insert mode of editor when used in the first position of a line.
X
Description: Saves the current command file, as edited, and exits the command file editor.
*tt:tt:tt
Description: Enters a time delay into a command file. The LINK/2+ System waits the specified length of time before executing the next command in the command file.
&x
1
… x
254
Description: Enters terminal screen control characters and text into a command file.
G entry in “G” column indicates a nonglobal gateway command.
# entry in “N” column indicates that a command can be issued to a remote node by preceding the command with NOD xxxx.
d = command file number (1 to 8) mm-dd-yyyy = month-day-year n = nest number: 1 = Control Mainframe; 2 = Expander A Mainframe (upper); 3 = Expander B Mainframe (lower) ss = slot number tt:tt:tt = hour:minute:second (24-hour clock) x
1
… x
254
= up to 254 characters
[ ] = optional parameter. Brackets are never entered as part of command.
{ } = required parameter. Choose one of the elements within braces. Braces are never entered as part of command.
…
= used before [ ] symbol to indicate command can be entered with several parameter values. Dots are never entered as part of command.
Clear Supervisory Port Pagination (CLR PG) Command
See "Set and Clear Supervisory Port Pagination (SET PG, CLR PG) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Password (CLR PW) Command
See "Define and Clear Password (DEF PW1, DEF PW2, CLR PW) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Time Out (CLR TMO) Command
See "Set and Clear Time Out (SET TMO, CLR TMO) Commands" paragraph.
4-6
L2UG
6/30/97
Clear Screen and Home Cursor (CLS) Command
The CLS command is used to clear the screen and move the cursor to the upper left-hand corner of the screen.
Copy Software (COP SW) Command
The COP SW command is used to copy operational software from the online Network Module,
Integrated Trunk Module, or X.50 Server Module to the offline Network Module, Integrated
Trunk Module, or X.50 Server Module respectively; or to copy the operational software from the online memory bank to the offline memory bank of the online Network Module. This command can only be issued locally.
The COP SW command is also used to copy operational software from one VSM.3 Voice Server
Module to another VSM.3 Voice Server Module, and from one VSM.5 Voice Server Module to another VSM.5 Voice Server Module.
Commands:
[NODxxxx] COP SW n:ss n:ss where: first n:ss = nest and slot number of online Network Module, Integrated Trunk Module,or
X.50 Server Module that operational software is to be copied from second n:ss = nest and slot number of offline Network Module, Integrated Trunk Module, or
X.50 Server Module that operational software is to be copied to
NOTE:
For the Integrated Trunk Module and X.50 Server Module, the source module must be defined and online. The destination module must be logically removed prior to issuing the COP SW command and then logically inserted after the copy process completes.
For the VSM.3 and VSM.5 Voice Server Modules, both the source and destination modules must be logically removed prior to issuing the COP SW command and then logically inserted after the copy process completes.
[NODxxxx] COP SW 1:ss where:
1:ss = slot number of online Network Module. This command copies the operational software from the online memory bank to the offline memory bank.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-7
Define and Clear Password (DEF PW1, DEF PW2, CLR PW) Commands
The DEF PW1 and DEF PW2 commands enable password protection. The CLR PW command disables password protection.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF PW1
[NOD xxxx] DEF PW2
[NOD xxxx] CLR PW
The DEF PW1 and DEF PW2 commands enable password protection and allow the user to define new passwords for password level 1 and password level 2. If the supervisory port is designated as a gateway, password level 2 offers gateway mode, while password level 1 offers nongateway mode.
NOTE:
PW2 can be defined without defining PW1. However, if PW1 is defined, PW2 must also be defined.
After entering each command, the LINK/2+ System prompts:
ENTER OLD/DEFAULT PASSWORD:
Enter the old password. If the password was not previously defined, enter the default password
TIMEPLEX. The LINK/2+ System prompts:
ENTER NEW PASSWORD:
Enter the new password of 4 to 8 ASCII characters. An entry that is invalid causes an invalid message response. After a valid password is entered, the LINK/2+ System prompts for verification of the password:
ENTER AGAIN:
Enter the new password again. If the verification is incorrect, the LINK/2+ System prompts for the new password again.
If password protection is enabled, the DSP ST SY command display includes one of the following messages:
SP USER STATUS = GATEWAY
SP USER STATUS = NONGATEWAY
SP USER STATUS = NOT LOGGED IN
NOTE:
The SP USER STATUS message will not be displayed after passwords are defined, until the user logs off and logs on again.
The CLR PW command disables password protection and clears the supervisory port of old passwords for password 1 (PW1) and password 2 (PW2). After entering the CLR PW command, the LINK/2+ System prompts:
ENTER PASSWORD:
4-8
L2UG
6/30/97
Enter the password for PW2. If the entry is correct, passwords 1 and 2 will be disabled. If password protection is desired, the user must define PW1 and PW2 after clearing passwords.
While defining or clearing passwords, if the user enters the old/default password incorrectly three times, the user will be logged out.
NOTE:
If the user’s password does not work or if the user has forgotten the password, password protection can also be disabled with a DIP switch on the Network Module. See the Network Module chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Log Out (EX) Command
The EX command logs the user out of the LINK/2+ System, preventing unauthorized user access via the supervisory terminal.
Command:
EX
Help (HELP) Command
The HELP command scrolls through the list of available LINK/2+ System supervisory port commands. To view the list of commands, enter the SET PG command, then enter the HELP command. To view more commands, press the SPACE bar.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] HELP
Home Cursor (HOME) Command
The HOME command is used to move the cursor to the upper left-hand corner of the screen
without clearing the screen.
Load Database (LOA DB) Command
The LOA DB command downloads (restores) previously stored configuration parameters
(database) to the online Network Module from a microcomputer connected to the supervisory port. This command can only be issued to a local node (either by directly connecting the microcomputer or by connecting it remotely via modems) and should only be used for database
recovery.
The microcomputer requires a communications program that supports the XMODEM file transfer protocol using 128 byte data packets and CRC error checking. If needed, see the LINK/2+
Installation and Maintenance Manual appendixes for the database recovery procedure.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-9
Command:
LOA DB[/F] where:
/F = causes the database to be downloaded at speed of 57.6 kbps.
PRECAUTION: This command will cause the node to reset when the transfer is complete.
After the database has been downloaded, the online Network Module will automatically reset. If a redundant Network Module pair exists, the node will not toggle redundancy.
Load Software (LOA SW) Command
The LOA SW command downloads operational software from a microcomputer to a Network
Module, Integrated Trunk Module, X.50 Server Module, or VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server
Module. This command can only be issued to a local node (either by directly connecting the microcomputer or by connecting it remotely via modems).
The microcomputer requires a communications program that supports the XMODEM file transfer protocol using 128 byte data packets and CRC error checking. If a new software release needs to be loaded, see the loading operational software procedures in the Getting Started chapter of this
User’s Guide.
When loading Network Module operational software , this command must always be directed to an online Network Module. When loading operational software to an Integrated Trunk Module,
X.50 Server Module, or VSM.3 or VSM.5 Voice Server Module, the module must be logically removed prior to issuing the LOA SW command and then logically inserted after the software has been loaded.
Command:
LOA SW n:ss[/F] where:
/F = causes operational software to be downloaded at speed of 57.6 kbps.
Save Database (SAV DB) Command
The SAV DB command uploads (saves) the Network Module database (configuration parameters) from the Network Module to a microcomputer. This command can only be issued locally.
The microcomputer requires a communications program that supports the XMODEM file transfer protocol using 128 byte data packets and CRC error checking. See the database backup procedure in the Getting Started chapter of this User’s Guide.
4-10
L2UG
6/30/97
NOTE:
The SAV DB command does not include the supervisory port parameters in the backed up database. Prior to issuing the SAV DB command, confirm and record the supervisory port parameters using the DSP SP command.
Command:
SAV DB[/F] where:
/F = causes database to be uploaded at speed of 57.6 kbps.
Set Day of Year (SET DAT) Command
The SET DAT command sets the day of the year of the real time clock.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET DAT mm-dd-yyyy where: mm-dd-yyyy = month-day-year
The response includes the time, the day of the week, and month in literal format.
For example:
SET DAT 12-14-1990
TIME: 10:24:30 DATE: FRI DEC-14-1990
Mask and Unmask Unsolicited Messages (SET MUM, CLR MUM)
Commands
The SET MUM LOC command causes the supervisory port to mask (not to display) unsolicited messages from the local node. The SET MUM REM command causes the local node to inhibit transmission of unsolicited alarms to the nodes on the alarm notification list of the local node.
The CLR MUM LOC command clears the supervisory port of masking unsolicited messages from the local node. The CLR MUM REM command allows the local node to transmit unsolicited alarms to the nodes on the alarm notification list of the local node.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET MUM LOC
[NOD xxxx] SET MUM REM
[NOD xxxx] CLR MUM LOC
[NOD xxxx] CLR MUM REM
L2UG
6/30/97
4-11
Set and Clear Supervisory Port Pagination (SET PG, CLR PG)
Commands
The SET PG command causes the supervisory port to output one page (23 lines) of data to the supervisory terminal and then wait for any key (except Control S, Control C, or BREAK) to be pressed before outputting the next page.
The CLR PG command causes the supervisory port to continuously output data to the supervisory terminal.
Commands:
SET PG
CLR PG
Set Time of Day (SET TIM) Command
The SET TIM command sets the time of day and initializes the real time clock. Enter hours, minutes, and seconds separated by colons.
Command:
[NOD xxx] SET TIM tt:tt:tt [/OFF=±hh:mm] where: tt:tt:tt = hours:minutes:seconds (24-hour clock)
/OFF=±hh:mm = Optional plus or minus offset in hours and minutes
(12-hour clock) separated by colons. This offset is used by the
Network Management System for alarm time-stamping.
NOTES:
The offset time is expressed as an offset from Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (UCT).
The LINK/2+ System does not automatically adjust for daylight savings time.
Set and Clear Time Out (SET TMO, CLR TMO) Commands
The SET TMO and CLR TMO commands enable and disable the 30-minute timer that can be used when password protection is enabled.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET TMO
[NOD xxxx] CLR TMO
The SET TMO command enables the 30-minute timer. The user will be logged out if no keystroke is made at the supervisory terminal for 30 minutes.
The CLR TMO command disables the 30-minute timer and allows the user unlimited time on the supervisory terminal until the user manually logs out with the EX command.
4-12
L2UG
6/30/97
If password protection is enabled, the DSP SY command display includes one of the following messages to show if the 30-minute timer is enabled or disabled:
SP TIMEOUT: ENABLED
SP TIMEOUT: DISABLED
Stop Command File Execution (STP) Command
The STP command stops a currently executing command file from continuing, once the system processes the STP command.
No commands, following the STP command, in the command file sequence will execute.
Toggle Bank (TGL BNK) Command
The TGL BNK command is issued to a Network Module. This command switches execution of operational software from the Network Module’s current online flash EPROM bank to the current offline flash EPROM bank. For example, if the Network Module is currently executing from the operational software in bank B, it will execute from bank A after the TGL BNK command is executed.
Before switching to the other memory bank, the Network Module performs a checksum on the operational software in the new memory bank, and will only switch after confirming that the software in the new bank is satisfactory.
PRECAUTION: The TGL BNK command also resets the Network Module, but the online Network Module remains the online module after resetting.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] TGL BNK n:ss
Send Message (") Command
The " command sends up to 48 characters of text to the supervisory port of the specified remote node. If the remote node is unable to display the text message for any reason, the " command times out after 14 seconds and displays the message "BUSY" at the local supervisory terminal.
The receiving supervisory terminal precedes the output text with an identifier of the sending node.
Command:
NOD xxxx "text where: text = up to 48 printable characters.
A quotation mark after the text is not required.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-13
NOTES:
This command does not function if the receiving intermachine link security is enabled.
The Send Message command can send text only to LINK/2+ Release
7 and higher nodes.
Command Keyword Information (?) Command
The ? command displays keyword information for available LINK/2+ System supervisory port commands, Figure 4-1. Initially, the keywords displayed are the 1-, 2-, or 3-character instruction part of each LINK/2+ command.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] ?
A plus sign (+) following a 2- or 3-character keyword in the display indicates that more information is available. To display more information about that command, enter the keyword abbreviation followed by a ?. Figure 4-1 shows how to use the ? command to find more information about the CLR command.
If the character string ’ ’ appears in the display, this indicates that no additional keyword is required.
N0100>?
?, @, CLR+, CON+, DEF+, DSC+, DSP+, INS, LP+, MON+, NOD, RMV, RST, SET+,
TRC+, TST+, BSY, CEN+, HEL, EP, CNV+, EX, DEL+
N0100>
N0100>CLR ?
@, AQ, BP+, CH, DL, MG, PG, PH, RDN, RLY, RTE, MC, FMC, DS0, DS1, TON, LCL,
MUM+, SEC, PW, TMO, REG, POL, PRO, MM, VPR, SPR
N0100>
N0100>CLR BP ?
LP, PH
NOTE: CLR GWY and SET GWY commands do not appear on the screen because these commands can only be issued remotely, e.g., NOD 1234 SET GWY SP.
Figure 4-1. Typical Command Keyword Information (?) Command
4-14
L2UG
6/30/97
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
Command files allow the user to replace complex commands, or a sequence of commands, with a single macro command that is stored in the database. The following paragraphs describe the commands for defining, displaying, editing, executing, and clearing command files.
Delete Command Lines (D) Command
The D command deletes a specified line or range of lines in a command file when the supervisory terminal is in command file edit mode.
Command at the CMD? prompt:
D {i or i-j} where: i = number of command line to be deleted i-j = range of command line numbers for lines to be deleted, where i < j.
Define/Clear Command File (DEF @) Command
The DEF @ command opens a new or existing command file for editing and displays the command file editor prompt for edit commands. Up to eight separate command files can be defined. Each command file can contain a maximum of 254 characters (including spaces and carriage returns). Each command file is given a unique 1-digit identifier from 1 to 8.
The edit commands available through the DEF @ command are also used to clear a command file.
Command:
DEF @ file where: file = specified command file (a number from 1 to 8)
The following guidelines apply when defining command files:
●
If more than 254 characters are entered in a command file, the message "Out of Space" is displayed when the editor is exited. Redefine the command file. See "Linking Command
Files" paragraph to program a command file of more than 254 characters.
●
A LINK/2+ System can be programmed to execute a command file repeatedly. See
"Repeating Command Files" paragraph.
●
Two special supervisory port commands are available only for use within a command file. See
"Terminal Control and Banner Command" and "Delay Time Command" paragraphs.
●
If the Copy Software (COP SW) command follows the Remove Module (RMV) command in a command file, use the Delay Time (*) command to include at least a 5 second delay preceding the COP SW command.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-15
4-16
To define a new command file:
1.
At the supervisory port prompt, enter the DEF @ command with the number of the command file to be defined. The system displays the command file number followed by the command file editor prompt (CMD?) to indicate the LINK/2+ System is in the command file edit mode.
2.
At the CMD? prompt, type I and press the RETURN key. The system displays a 1 for the first line.
3.
Type a supervisory port command followed by the RETURN key. The system displays the number for the next line and places the cursor in the first position of the new line.
4.
Repeat step 3 until all commands for the command file have been entered.
5.
In the first position of the next line, press the RETURN key to exit insert mode and return to the CMD? prompt. (Instead of the RETURN key, you can also use the ESCAPE key or
CONTROL Z.) The system displays the number of the command file and all the lines of the file followed by the CMD? prompt.
6.
Type X followed by the RETURN key to save the file and exit to the supervisory port prompt. To exit without saving the file or any changes, type CONTROL C.
For example, to create command file 1 consisting of the DSP ST SY and DSP SY commands, use these steps:
1.
At the supervisory port prompt, enter DEF @ 1 to display:
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #1
CMD? _
2.
Enter I to be prompted with the first line number.
3.
Enter DSP ST SY to display:
1 DSP ST SY
2 _
4.
Enter DSP SY to display:
1 DSP ST SY
2 DSP SY
3 _
5.
Press the RETURN key to display:
Command File #1
1 DSP ST SY
2 DSP SY
CMD? _
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
6.
Enter X to save the file and display the supervisory port prompt.
To edit a command file:
1.
At the supervisory port prompt, enter the DEF @ command with the number of the file to be edited. The system displays the command file number and the complete file followed by the command file editor prompt (CMD?) to indicate the LINK/2+ System is in the command file edit mode.
2.
To edit a line of the file, enter E and the number of the line to display the line with the cursor positioned at the end of the line.
3.
Use the BACKSPACE key to move the cursor to the first character to be changed and type over the existing characters to make the changes. Press the RETURN key to display the edited file followed by the CMD? prompt.
4.
To delete one or more lines of the file, enter D and the number of the line or the range of lines to be deleted. The system displays the edited file followed by the CMD? prompt.
5.
To insert lines into the file, enter I and the number of the line just before the insertion point.
Use I 0 or I without any line number to insert lines at the beginning of the file before line 1.
The system displays the next line number so the new lines can be inserted.
6.
Type the supervisory port command to be inserted and press the RETURN key at the end of the line to display the next line number.
7.
Repeat step 6 as many times as required to insert the new lines.
8.
In the first position of the next line, press the RETURN key to exit insert mode. (Instead of the RETURN key, you can also use the ESCAPE key or CONTROL Z.) The system displays the number of the command file and all the lines of the file followed by the CMD?
prompt.
9.
Type X followed by the RETURN key to save the edited file and exit to the supervisory port prompt. To exit without saving the file or any changes, type CONTROL C.
For example, to edit command file 1 of the previous example:
1. Enter DEF @ 1 to display:
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #1
1 DSP ST SY
2 DSP SY
CMD? _
2.
To edit the first line, enter E 1 to display:
1 DSP ST SY_
4-17
4-18
3.
Backspace to the beginning of SY, type QUA * and press the RETURN key to complete the edit and display:
Command File #1
1 DSP ST QUA *
2 DSP SY
CMD? _
4.
To begin inserting lines after line 1, enter I 1 to display:
2 _
5.
Enter command lines such as:
2 DSP AQ
3 DSP ST ALM 26
4 _
6.
Press the RETURN key to exit insert mode, reassign line numbers, and display:
Command File #1
1 DSP ST QUA *
2 DSP AQ
3 DSP ST ALM 26
4 DSP SY
CMD? _
7.
To delete line 2, enter D 2 to display:
Command File #1
1 DSP ST QUA *
2 DSP ST ALM 26
3 DSP SY
CMD? _
8.
Enter X to save the edited file and display the supervisory port prompt.
To clear a command file:
1.
At the supervisory port prompt, enter the DEF @ command with the number of the command file to be cleared. The system displays the command file number and the complete file followed by the command file editor prompt (CMD?).
2.
Type D 1-N followed by the RETURN key, where N is the number of the last line in the file. The system deletes all lines of the file and displays just the command file number followed by the CMD? prompt.
3.
Type X followed by the RETURN key to exit to the supervisory prompt.
L2UG
6/30/97
For example, to clear the command file of the previous example:
1.
Enter DEF @ 1 to display:
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #1
1 DSP ST QUA *
2 DSP ST ALM 26
3 DSP SY
CMD? _
2.
Enter D 1-3 to delete all lines and display:
Command File #1
CMD? _
3.
Enter X to return to the supervisory port prompt.
Display Command File (DSP @) Command
The DSP @ command displays the contents of a command file.
Command:
DSP @
{
* or d[-d]...
[
,d[-d]
]}
where: d = command file number (1 to 8)
NOTE:
Range of command file numbers must be in ascending order.
For example, to display command file 1, enter DSP @ 1. The supervisory terminal will then display the individual commands that comprise command file 1, Figure 4-2.
N0100>DSP @ 1
Command File #1
DSP ST SY
DSP SY
Figure 4-2. Typical Command File Display (DSP @)
Edit Command Lines (E) Command
The E command displays a specified line for editing in a command file when the supervisory terminal is in command file edit mode. The E command places the cursor at the end of the displayed line, and the BACKSPACE key can be used to position the cursor for overtyping the characters to be changed.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-19
Command at the CMD? prompt:
E {i} where: i = number of command line to be edited
Insert Command Lines (I) Command
The I command allows the insertion of new lines into a command file when the supervisory terminal is in command file edit mode. The I command displays the line number of the first new line followed by the cursor. After the new line is typed followed by the RETURN key, the system displays the next line number and cursor for additional lines.
Command at the CMD? prompt:
I [i] where: i = number of command line just before the insertion point
If 0 or no line number is used, the new line is inserted before the current line 1 of the file.
Exit Command File Editor (X) Command
The X command exits the command file editor and returns the supervisory prompt to the screen.
Command at the CMD? prompt:
X
Execute Command File (@) Command
The @ command executes a command file. Command files can be executed either manually
or automatically at a specified time of day. The individual commands that were entered into the specified command file via the DEF @ command are executed one at a time in the order in which the commands were originally entered.
Commands:
@ file [/tt:tt:tt]
@ file [/tt:tt:tt mm-dd-yyyy]
@ file [/mm-dd-yyyy tt:tt:tt]
@ file [/mm-dd-yyyy] where: file = specified command file (a number from 1 to 8) tt:tt:tt = (optional) time in hours:minutes:seconds when the command file is to be executed (24-hour clock) tt:tt:tt mm-dd-yyyy = (optional) time in hours:minutes:seconds and date as month-day-year when the command file is to be executed mm-dd-yyyy tt:tt:tt = (optional) date as month-day-year and time in hours:minutes:seconds when the command file is to be executed
4-20
L2UG
6/30/97
mm-dd-yyyy = (optional) date as month-day-year when the command file is to be executed
If the @ command is entered without the time modifier, the command file is executed only once
(upon entry).
Time of Day Execution
If the time modifier, i.e., tt:tt:tt, is included in the @ command, the specified command file is executed once every 24 hours, at the time specified, until the time is cleared using the CLR @ command.
Time and Date Execution
If the time and date modifier is included in the @ command, the specified command file is executed once on the time and date specified.
Date Execution
If the date modifier is included in the @ command, the specified command file is executed on the date specified, at the time the command file was entered.
For example, to program the LINK/2+ System to execute command file 2 at 5:00 P.M. every day, enter:
@ 2/17:00:00 where: @ = instruction
2 = specifies command file 2
17:00:00 = sets execution time for 5 P.M.
Clear Preset Time (CLR @) Command
The CLR @ command clears the time that the LINK/2+ System is programmed to automatically execute a command file.
Command:
CLR @ file where: file = specified command file (a number from 1 to 8)
Only the time that the LINK/2+ System is programmed to execute the command file is cleared from the database, not the command file itself.
NOTE:
A reset to a nonredundant Network Module or loss of power to the
LINK/2+ System also clears the time at which a command file will automatically be executed.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-21
For example, to clear the preset time from command file 2, enter:
CLR @ 2 where:
CLR @ = instruction
2 = specifies command file 2
USING COMMAND FILES
The following paragraphs describe how to use command files more efficiently by linking command files, repeating a command file, and using the special commands that can only be used as instructions within a command file.
Linking Command Files
To enter a sequence of commands containing more than 254 characters, command files can be linked together. Enter the @ command as the final command in the current command file and specify the identification number of the command file to which you wish to link.
For example, Figure 4-3 shows how command file 5 is programmed so that the last instruction, i.e., @ 6, executes command file 6.
N0100> DEF @ 5
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #5
1 DEF DST CH 1:8:*/N2 C1:10:*
2 NOD 2 DEF DST CH 1:10:*/N1 C1:8:8
3 DSC CH 1:9:11:9
4 @ 6
CMD? X
Figure 4-3. Typical Programming to Link Command Files
Repeating Command Files
To program a LINK/2+ System to execute a specified command file repeatedly, enter the @ command as the final command in the current command file and specify the identification number of the current command file.
To stop execution of a repeating command file, press BREAK key or enter Control C character.
For example, Figure 4-4 shows how to program the LINK/2+ System to repeatedly execute command file 4, which displays intermachine link status of the Interlink Module in slot 11.
4-22
L2UG
6/30/97
N0100> DEF @ 4
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #4
1 DSP ST DL 11
2 @ 4
CMD? X
Figure 4-4. Typical Programming to Repeat Command File
Delay Time (*) Command
The Delay Time (*) command is used to enter a time delay within a command file. After a * command is executed, the system waits the amount of time specified by the * command before executing the next command in the file.
Command:
*tt:tt:tt where: tt:tt:tt = time in hours:minutes:seconds (24-hour clock)
For example, Figure 4-5 shows a command file that displays intermachine link status for the
Interlink Module in slot 11 every 15 seconds.
NOTE:
The Delay Time command is a special supervisory port command that can only be entered as an instruction within a command file.
N0100> DEF @ 4
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE, EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #4
1 DSP ST DL 11
2 *00:00:15
3 @ 4
CMD? X
Figure 4-5. Typical Use of Delay Time Command
Terminal Control and Banner (&) Command
The & command is used to enter terminal screen control characters and text into a line of a command file. Typically, the control characters are used to clear the screen and position text that is used as a banner while a command file is being executed.
L2UG
6/30/97
4-23
4-24
Command:
&x
1
... x
254 where: x
1
... x
254
= up to 254 terminal screen control characters and alphanumeric characters that can be typed in a command file
To enter a terminal screen control character (e.g., home, clear, or cursor forward), press the appropriate key on the keyboard or enter the sequence of special characters specified by your terminal user’s manual. When the & key is entered as the first character on a line in a command file:
●
The terminal echoes the control characters and text on the screen as they are entered.
●
The terminal screen control functions are executed and text is displayed on the screen when the command file is executed.
For example, Figure 4-6 shows a typical example of how to program the LINK/2+ System to clear the supervisory terminal screen, return the cursor to the home position, and display the banner "DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS" each time command file 4 is executed.
All the key entries that follow the & command are displayed when the DSP @ command is entered, including terminal control character sequences, Figure 4-7.
NOTE:
The Terminal Control and Banner command is a special supervisory port command that can only be entered as an instruction within a command file.
L2UG
6/30/97
ACTION
ENTER COMMAND FILE
EDIT MODE AND SELECT
COMMAND FILE 4.
TO DEFINE TERMINAL
CONTROL AND BANNER
FOR RUN TIME:
ENTRY
DEF @ 4
RETURN
DISPLAY
N0100>DEF @ 4
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE,
EDIT, INSERT, E(XIT)
Command File #4
CMD? _
N0100>DEF @ 4
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE,
EDIT, INSERT, E(XIT)
Command File #4
CMD? I
1 _
• TYPE TERMINAL
CONTROL SEQUENCE
TO MOVE CURSOR TO
HOME POSITION.
• TYPE TERMINAL
CONTROL SEQUENCE
TO CLEAR TERMINAL
SCREEN.
RETURN
• GO TO INSERT MODE I
• TYPE TERMINAL
CONTROL AND
BANNER COMMAND.
&
CONTROL
ESCAPE
N0100>DEF @ 4
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE,
EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #4
CMD? I
1 &_
A
VALID COMMANDS ARE: DELETE,
EDIT, INSERT, E(X)IT
Command File #4
CMD? I
1 &
_
K
RESULT
CMD? PROMPT IS
DISPLAYED INDICATING
YOU ARE IN COMMAND
FILE EDIT MODE.
CURSOR MOVES TO
THE FIRST LINE OF
FILE.
CURSOR MOVES TO
UPPER LEFT-HAND
CORNER OF SCREEN
(HOME POSITION).
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL SCREEN
GOES BLANK.
• DEFINE BANNER
WHICH WILL BE
DISPLAYED ON
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL AT RUN
TIME.
DISPLAYING DATA LINK
STATISTICS
RETURN
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2_
TERMINAL CONTROL
SEQUENCE AND
BANNER ARE ENTERED
INTO COMMAND FILE.
CURSOR MOVES TO
THE BEGINNING OF
NEXT LINE.
ENTER DSP ST DL
COMMAND FOR
INTERLINK MODULE IN
SLOT 6 INTO COMMAND
FILE.
DSP ST DL 6
RETURN
ENTER COMMAND TO
WAIT 15 SECONDS
BEFORE EXECUTING
THE NEXT COMMAND IN
THE COMMAND FILE.
*00:00:15
RETURN
= Control sequence is terminal dependent.
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2DSP ST DL 6
3_
CURSOR MOVES TO
THE BEGINNING OF
NEXT LINE.
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2DSP ST DL 6
3*00:00:15
4_
CURSOR MOVES TO
THE BEGINNING OF
NEXT LINE.
Figure 4-6. Typical Use of Terminal Control and Banner (&) Command (Sheet 1 of 2)
L2UG
6/30/97
4-25
ACTION
ENTER COMMAND TO
CONTINUALLY EXECUTE
COMMAND FILE 4.
@ 4
ENTRY
RETURN
DISPLAY RESULT
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2DSP ST DL 6
3*00:00:15
4@ 4
5_
CURSOR MOVES TO
THE BEGINNING OF
NEXT LINE.
LEAVE INSERT MODE
BY PRESSING Z KEY
WHILE HOLDING DOWN
CONTROL KEY.
SAVE AND EXIT THE
COMMAND FILE.
X
CONTROL
RETURN
Z
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2DSP ST DL 6
3*00:00:15
4@ 4
CMD?_
CMD? PROMPT
RETURNS.
DISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
2DSP ST DL 6
3*00:00:15
4@ 4
CMD? X
N0100>_
COMMAND FILE
EDIT MODE IS
EXITED.
SUPERVISORY PORT
PROMPT IS
DISPLAYED.
Figure 4-6. Typical Use of Terminal Control and Banner (&) Command (Sheet 2)
N0100>DSP @ 4
Command File #4
& ^A^[kDISPLAYING DATA LINK STATISTICS
DSP ST DL 6
@ 4
Figure 4-7. Typical Display of Command File with Terminal Control Character Sequences and Banner
4-26
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/94
Chapter
5
Display Commands
Supervisory port display commands provide status, statistical, and configuration information for local and remote nodes. The status information is related to:
●
Alarms
●
Database checksum
●
System bus bandwidth
●
EIA control functions
●
Start-up errors
●
Clock errors
●
Modules
●
DS-1 and DS-0 signaling
●
Channels
●
Connections
●
Destinations
●
Broadcast/polling groups
●
Intermachine links
●
Integrated trunk bundles
●
Nodes
●
X.50 DS-0 channels and X.50 subrate channels
The statistical information is related to:
●
Intermachine links
●
Integrated trunk bundles
●
DS-1 interface quality performance
●
Internal message generator partial test
5-1
5-2
The configuration information is related to:
●
I/O and DS-0 channel parameters
●
DS-1 and quality parameters
●
Bundle configurations
●
Intermachine link parameters
●
Integrated trunk parameters
●
D-channel parameters
●
Routing parameters
●
Supervisory port, supervisory computer port, and external port parameters
●
System parameters
●
PROM part numbers and module revisions
●
ABM profiles, speed profiles, and voice profiles
●
ISDN or Switched 56K dial-up services and phone numbers
●
X.50 DS-0 channel parameters and X.50 subrate channel parameters
Commands that display parameters retrieve information only from the online Network Module database.
Table 5-1 lists the display commands in alphabetical order by command mnemonic.
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 5-1. Display Commands
N
# CLR AQ
Command
Description: Clears alarm table and displays alarms currently in effect.
# CLR TAQ
Description: Clears time-stamped alarm list.
# DSP ACT POL n:ss:c
Description: For local node, continuously displays the active group member of the specified broadcast/polling group until any key is pressed. For remote node, takes instantaneous status to display the current active group member.
# DSP AQ[/C]
Description: Displays contents of alarm table. Optional /C modifier clears alarm list after system displays alarms.
# DSP BDL NPR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays nonproprietary bundle parameters for Integrated Trunk Module(s) specified.
# DSP BDL PR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]
}
Description: Displays proprietary bundle parameters for Integrated Trunk Module(s) specified.
# DSP BW
Description: Displays system bus bandwidth currently defined for Interlink Module(s), Integrated Trunk Module(s), and the local connections of Voice Server Module(s), Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), and X.50 Server Module(s).
# DSP CFG
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]..
.
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
[/M]
Description: Displays the current bundle configuration for all the DS-0 channels of the specified Channelized Services Processor or
Integrated Trunk Module. Optional /M modifier displays the master channel, speed, size, and members of the bundle. For Integrated
Trunk Module, /M modifier also displays ARQ bandwidth.
# DSP CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
Description: Displays parameters of I/O channel(s) specified.
# DSP CKS
Description: Displays database checksum value and status and the time and date of the last change made to the database.
# DSP CON
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of specified I/O channels. Same as DSP DST CH command.
Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP CP
Description: Displays supervisory computer port parameters.
# DSP CSP
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
Description: Displays DS-1 parameters for Channelized Services Processor(s) in specified slot(s).
# DSP DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays ISDN D-channel parameters for D-Channel Module(s) specified.
L2UG
7/31/95
5-3
N
# DSP DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
Command
Description: Displays intermachine link parameters for intermachine link(s) specified.
# DSP DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays parameters for specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s).
# DSP DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays DS-1 parameters for Voice Processor(s) in specified slot(s).
# DSP DST
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of all data and analog voice I/O channels, all digital voice DS-0 channels, all X.50 DS-0 channels, and all X.50 subrate channels at a node. Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP DST CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of specified I/O channels. Same as DSP CON command. Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP DST DL
{ ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
DSP DST DL
{ ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
DSP DST DL
{ ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of all channel connections on the specified intermachine link or the specified proprietary bundle. Optionally displays information only for specified node and I/O channels, DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channels, or X.50 subrate channels.
# DSP DST DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of specified DS-0 channels or bundles. Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP DST XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of specified X.50 subrate channels. Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP DST XS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Pppp]
Description: Displays destination channel and connect status of specified X.50 DS-0 channels. Optional /P modifier displays information only for channels with specified ABM profile.
# DSP EP
Description: Displays the current parameter values of the external port that interfaces the LINK/2+ System to the LINK/CSU.
# DSP ERR
Description: Displays errors that occurred on start-up or reset for Network Module, Interlink Module(s), Integrated Trunk Module(s),
D-Channel Module(s), Dual Isochronous Module(s), Isochronous Communication Module(s), Voice Server Module(s), Enhanced
Voice Module(s), Foreign Exchange Office Module(s), Foreign Exchange Station Module(s), Quad Asynchronous Module(s),
Channelized Services Processor(s), Voice Processor(s), and X.50 Server Module(s).
5-4
L2UG
7/31/95
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
N
# DSP FN n:ss:c
Command
Description: For local end of channel, continuously displays EIA functions/control signals of I/O channel specified until any key is pressed. For remote end, displays instantaneous EIA functions/control signals.
DCE FUNCTION DISPLAY
RTS
F4
BO
F3 F2
DTR
F1
I
= 0 0 0 0 1
O
= 0 0 0 1
F5
TEST
F4
CTS
F3
RI
F2
CD
F1
DSR
0 = OFF
1 = ON
( I =) EIA INPUT
TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
FROM DCE
F5 Test
F4 Clear-to-send (CTS) signal. For channel using 64 kbps Bipolar
Interface Module, alarm indication signal (AIS). May toggle under data pass conditions.
A steady 0 indicates AIS condition.
F3 Ring indicator (RI) signal. For analog voice channel, M lead from local PBX. For Quad Synchronous Processor channel in
LPDA mode, test indicator (TI) signal. For Dual Isochronous
Module channel, 1 indicates local channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem. For channel using 64 kbps
Bipolar Interface Module, loss of sync (LOS) signal.
F2 Data carrier detect (CD) signal
F1 Data set ready (DSR) signal. For channel using 64 kbps
Bipolar Interface Module, not applicable. 1 is displayed.
(O=) EIA OUTPUT
FROM LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TO DCE
Request-to-send (RTS) signal
Out-of-service (BO) signal. For analog voice channel, E lead to local PBX. For Quad Synchronous Processor channel in LPDA mode, test mode (TM) signal. For Dual
Isochronous Module channel, 1 indicates remote channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
Data terminal ready (DTR) signal
DTE FUNCTION DISPLAY
CD
F4
RI CTS
F3 F2
DSR
F1
I
= 0 0 0 0 1
O
= 0 0 0 1
F5
F4 F3
BO
F2
RTS
F1
DTR
(
I
=) EIA INPUT
TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
FROM DTE
F5 Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
F4 Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
F3 Busy out (BO) signal. For Quad Synchronous Processor channel in LPDA mode, test mode (TM) signal. For Dual
Isochronous Module channel, 1 indicates local channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
F2 Request-to-send (RTS) signal
F1 Data terminal ready (DTR) signal
0 = OFF
1 = ON
(O=) EIA OUTPUT
FROM LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TO DTE
Data carrier detect (CD) signal
Ring indicator (RI) signal. For Quad Synchronous Processor channel in LPDA mode, test indicator (TI) signal. For Dual
Isochronous Module channel, 1 indicates remote channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
Clear-to-send (CTS) signal
Data set ready (DSR) signal
L2UG
6/30/94
5-5
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
Command N
# DSP HIS[option]
Description: Displays alarm history for the last 10 alarm 32 DS-0 dial-up connection failures. Option is one of the following:
/C = clears the alarm history
/A = displays the entire alarm history buffer (up to 255 errors)
/K = clears the buffer without displaying the alarms
# DSP ILQ
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]
…
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
Description: Displays DS-1 parameters for Integrated Trunk Module(s) specified.
# DSP LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays model type and current parameters for LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12, or LFM.14 Link Framing Module(s) specified.
# DSP MAP
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays X.50 subrate channel database time slot assignments for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50
Server Module.
# DSP MDS0
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays the current parameter values for the specified master DS-0 channel(s) of a Channelized Services Processor.
# DSP PHN BCK 1:ss
Description: Displays ISDN or Switched 56K phone number directories used for link backup for Interlink Module or Integrated Trunk
Module specified.
# DSP PHN XDL 1:ss
Description: Displays ISDN or Switched 56K phone number directories used for link expansion or dial link for Integrated Trunk
Module specified.
# DSP POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A]
Description: Displays the connect status and master channel of the specified broadcast/polling group member(s). Optional /A modifier displays the connect status of all members in the broadcast/polling group of the specified master channel.
# DSP PPN
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays PROM part numbers for Network Module, Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk Module, D-Channel Module,
Channelized Services Processor, Voice Processor, Quad Asynchronous Module, Isochronous Communication Module, Voice
Server Module, Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Office Module, Foreign Exchange Station Module, Dual Isochronous
Module, and X.50 Server Module in slot locations specified.
# DSP PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]
…
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
[/D]
DSP PRO/D
Description: Displays ABM profile parameters for the specified ABM profile(s) and/or the default profile (/D).
# DSP QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays parameters defined for performance monitoring of the Voice Processor(s) or Channelized Services
Processor(s) specified.
5-6
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
Command N
# DSP REV
{
* or n:ss
}
Description: Displays the contents of the module revision PROM for the Network Module, Integrated Trunk Module, D-Channel
Module, Isochronous Communication Module, Voice Server Module, Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Office Module,
Foreign Exchange Station Module, Voice Processor, Channelized Services Processor, and X.50 Server Module.
# DSP RTE
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]
…
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
Description: Displays the current routing parameter values to node(s) specified.
# DSP SIG DS0 n:ss:cc
Description: Continuously displays the signaling of the specified Voice Processor, Channelized Services Processor, or Integrated
Trunk Module DS-0 channel.
# DSP SIG EQ
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays the current state of the signals received from the DS-1 interface for all DS-0 channels of the Voice
Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), or Integrated Trunk Modules(s) specified.
# DSP SIG LI
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays the current state of the signals sent to the DS-1 interface for all DS-0 channels of the Voice Processor(s),
Channelized Services Processor(s), or Integrated Trunk Module(s) specified.
# DSP SP
Description: Displays supervisory port parameters.
# DSP SPR
{
* or sp[-sp]...
[
,sp[-sp]
]}
Description: Displays the defined Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) for the specified profile number.
# DSP ST ALM 1[/C]
Description: Displays nest and slot numbers for modules that were inserted/removed. Optional /C modifier clears alarm 1 history.
# DSP ST ALM 2[/C]
Description: Displays nest and slot number for modules that have start-up hardware errors. Optional /C modifier clears alarm 2 history.
# DSP ST ALM 6[/C]
Description: Displays Interlink Module slot numbers and Integrated Trunk Module slot and bundle numbers for the intermachine links that are declared in-service. Optional /C modifier clears alarm 6 history.
# DSP ST ALM 7[/C]
Description: Displays Interlink Module slot numbers and Integrated Trunk Module slot and bundle numbers for the intermachine links that are declared out-of-service. Optional /C modifier clears alarm 7 history.
L2UG
6/30/94
5-7
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
N
# DSP ST ALM 9[/C]
Command
Description: Displays nest and slot numbers for modules that have database/hardware conflicts. Optional /C modifier clears alarm
9 history.
# DSP ST ALM 10[/C]
Description: Displays nest and slot numbers for modules that have not responded to the Network Module. Network Module nest and slot numbers are displayed if an invalid node number has been defined. Optional /C modifier clears alarm 10 history.
# DSP ST ALM 12[/C]
Description: Displays nest, slot, and channel numbers for channels or DS-0s that have failed initial connection attempts. Optional
/C modifier clears alarm 12 history.
# DSP ST ALM 15[/C]
Description: Displays alarm status of all Voice Processors at the node. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm after alarm is displayed.
# DSP ST ALM 21[/C]
Description: Displays alarm status of all Channelized Services Processors and Integrated Trunk Modules at the node. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm after alarm is displayed.
# DSP ST ALM 24[/C]
Description: Displays BER information for intermachine links and integrated trunk bundles whose BER fell below the error performance alarm threshold specified in the intermachine link parameters or in the integrated trunk bundle parameters. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm history.
# DSP ST ALM 25[/C]
Description: Displays BER information for intermachine links and integrated trunk bundles whose BER met or exceeded the error performance alarm threshold specified in the intermachine link parameters or in the integrated trunk bundle parameters. (Alarm 25 occurs only after Alarm 24.) Optional /C modifier clears the alarm history.
# DSP ST ALM 26[/C]
Description: Displays the channel disconnects that resulted from error performance violations. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm history.
# DSP ST ALM 27[/C]
Description: Displays the channel disconnects caused by bumping. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm history.
# DSP ST ALM 33[/C]
Description: Displays out-of-service status for the X.50 DS-0 channels of an X.50 Server Module. Optional /C modifier clears the alarm history.
# DSP ST BDL
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
[option]
Description: Displays status of specified integrated trunk bundle(s). Option is one of the following:
/B = clears BER window
/C = clears all counters
5-8
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
N Command
# DSP ST BP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]
…
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
…
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
DSP ST BP Nxxxx
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
…
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Description: Displays status of specified bypass channel(s) and clears phasor error history. (In the second command format shown above, Nxxxx n:ss:c is an originating or terminating I/O channel, n:ss:cc is an originating or terminating DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel, and n:ss:cc:sr is an originating or terminating X.50 subrate channel.)
# DSP ST CH
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays loopback and phasor error status of all I/O channels in specified slot(s), and clears phasor error history.
# DSP ST CLK[/C]
Description: Displays status of PLL and nodal timing source. Optional /C modifier clears all clock errors, alarm 5, and alarm 23 in the alarm queue.
# DSP ST DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C]
Description: Displays operation status of the D-Channel Module including ISDN protocol layer 2 and layer 3 performance parameter statistics of the D-Channel Module and B-channel, H0-channel, and D-channel connection status. Optional /C modifier clears the statistics.
# DSP ST DL
{
* or ss[-ss]
…
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
[option]
DSP ST DL {* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
[option]
Description: In the first command format, displays status of specified intermachine link(s). In the second command format, displays status of specified integrated trunk bundle(s). Option is one of the following:
/B = clears BER window
/C = clears all counters and satellite buffer phasor error history
NOTE: Issuing /B will disconnect channels if present BER is less than user-specified link error performance rate.
# DSP ST DS0
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays channel connect status, phasor error status, loopback status, and test tone status of all DS-0 channels on
Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), and Integrated Trunk Module(s) in specified slot(s), and clears phasor error history.
# DSP ST DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C]
Description: Displays module alarm conditions, DS-0 connect failures, loopback and test tone status, function status, and number of DS-0 channel or bundle connections on Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), and Integrated Trunk Module(s) in specified slot(s). In addition, local and remote loss of frame alignment signals, local and remote loss of multiframe alignment signals, and red alarm messages are displayed for G.703 interfaces. Optional /C modifier clears existing frame buffer error in the display (Channelized Services Processor and Integrated Trunk Module only).
# DSP ST LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[option]
Description: Displays status and history of LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12, or LFM.14 Link Framing Module(s) specified.
Option is one of the following:
/A = displays only modules with a history of red or yellow alarm (LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12) or out-ofservice condition (LFM.14)
/C = clears history and CRC error counters
L2UG
7/31/95
5-9
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
N
# DSP ST POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/C]
Command
Description: Displays the streaming data error and constant spaces error conditions for the specified broadcast/polling member(s).
Optional /C modifier clears all errors and reenables the channel.
# DSP ST QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C]
Description: Displays the errors of specified Voice Processor(s) and Channelized Services Processor(s) in 24-hour intervals.
Optional /C modifier clears the data after data is displayed.
# DSP ST SY[/T]
Description: Displays system status. Optional /T modifier truncates the display, i.e., shows status information but does not show the modules logically and physically inserted in each slot.
# DSP ST VCH
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays associated I/O channels as well as the loopback status, phasor errors, fax connection attempt errors, and fax speed of the specified V-channels.
# DSP ST XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/M]
Description: Displays the operating status of the X.50 subrate channels for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s). Optional /M modifier displays the time slot map.
# DSP ST XS0
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C]
Description: Displays the aggregate status of the X.50 DS-0 channels for the specified X.50 Server Module(s). The module operating status is also displayed. Optional /C modifier clears count of framing errors and losses.
# DSP SY
Description: Displays system parameters.
# DSP TAQ
[ a[-a]
…
[
,a[-a]
]
] or
DSP TAQ [/C]
Description: Displays time-stamped alarms in FIFO order.
# DSP TIM
Description: Displays time of day in hours:minutes:seconds, day of week, and day of the year as month-day-year.
# DSP TOP
Description: Displays all intermachine links and integrated trunks in a node and the slot and node number to which each intermachine link or integrated trunk is connected.
# DSP TS
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Displays allocated time slots in a full T-1 frame for LFM.10, LFM.11, or LFM.12 Link Framing Module(s) specified.
# DSP TST
Description: Displays message generator counters for partial test.
# DSP VPR
{
* or vp[-vp]
…
[
,vp[-vp]
]}
Description: Displays the defined voice profile for the specified voice profile number(s).
5-10
L2UG
7/31/95
Table 5-1. Display Commands (Cont’d)
N Command
# DSP XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
…
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Description: Displays the current parameter values for the specified X.50 subrate channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
# DSP XS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Displays the current parameter values for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
# entry in "N" column indicates that a command can be issued to a remote node by preceding the command with NOD xxxx.
a = alarm number c = I/O channel number (1 to 4) cc = DS-0 channel number (1 to 31) or X.50 DS-0 channel number (1 to 16) ccc = bypass channel number (1 to 511) n = nest number: 1 = Control Mainframe; 2 = Expander A Mainframe (upper); n:ss:c n:ss:c,n:ss:c n:ss:c - n:ss:c
3 = Expander B Mainframe (lower)
= specifies single channel
= specifies two or more channels
= specifies range of channels in ascending order ppp = ABM profile (1 to 250 or D for default) sp = speed profile (1 to 16) ss = slot number sr = X.50 subrate channel number (1 to 20) vp = voice profile (1 to 64) xxxx = node number (1 to 2000)
* = all elements in a range. Can also be used to specify all channels on a module, e.g., n:ss:*
[ ] = optional parameter. Brackets are never entered as part of command.
{ } = required parameter. Choose one of the elements within braces.
Braces are never entered as part of command.
...
= used before [ ] symbol to indicate command can be entered with several parameter values.
Dots are never entered as part of command.
L2UG
7/31/95
5-11
CLEAR ALARM LIST (CLR AQ) COMMAND
See "Display and Clear Alarm List (DSP AQ, CLR AQ) Commands" paragraph.
CLEAR TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST (CLR TAQ) COMMAND
See "Display and Clear Time-stamped Alarm List (DSP TAQ, CLR TAQ) Commands" paragraph.
DISPLAY ACTIVE POLL GROUP (DSP ACT POL) COMMAND
The DSP ACT POL command displays the active group member of the specified broadcast/polling group, Figure 5-1.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ACT POL n:ss:c
For the local node, the display is updated continuously. Pressing any key at the supervisory terminal stops the display.
For the remote node, an instantaneous status of the broadcast/polling group is taken to display the current active group member.
N0010>DSP ACT POL 1:11:1
CHAN 1:11:01
CHAN 1:11:01 - Broadcast/polling message, where:
n:ss:cc = Indicates that the master channel in the specified nest:slot:channel location is active
CHAN nest:slot:channel = Indicates that the specified broadcast/polling group member is active
NONE ACTIVE = Indicates that an external error occurred and no broadcast/polling group members are active
NONE CONNECTED = Indicates that the master broadcast/polling channel is not connected
Figure 5-1. Typical Active Poll Group Display (DSP ACT POL)
DISPLAY AND CLEAR ALARM LIST (DSP AQ, CLR AQ) COMMANDS
The DSP AQ command displays alarm conditions that have occurred in the network since the last time the alarm list was cleared. The CLR AQ command clears the alarm list. The alarm numbers of any alarm conditions that are still in effect are then displayed. See Appendix A, Error and
Status Messages, for a description of each alarm. See the "Display and Clear Time-stamped
Alarm List (DSP TAQ, CLR TAQ) Commands" paragraph for information on displaying timestamped alarms.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DSP AQ[/C]
[NOD xxxx] CLR AQ where: /C = clears the alarm list after the alarms are displayed.
5-12
L2UG
7/31/95
A typical DSP AQ command is illustrated in Figure 5-2. Except for alarms 06, 07, 13, 30, and
31, only the alarm number is displayed. Whenever alarm 06 or alarm 07 is displayed, one or more slot numbers are displayed to identify the affected Interlink Module(s) or Integrated Trunk
Module(s). Whenever alarm 13 is displayed, the slot number is displayed to identify the Bypass
Module failure or reset. Whenever alarm 30 is displayed, one or more slot numbers are displayed to identify the affected Voice Server Module(s) or D-Channel Module(s). Whenever alarm 31 is displayed, one or more slot numbers are displayed to identify the affected Link Framing
Module(s).
NOTE:
Alarm 31 can be cleared only if the Link Framing Module status
(DSP ST LFM) is cleared using the /C qualifier.
ALARM NODE: xxxx is displayed when an alarm occurs at a remote node that has the local node on its alarm notification list. For more detailed information about the alarms at the remote node, enter a NOD xxxx DSP AQ command.
To further display the error conditions flagged by the alarm list, use the DSP ST CH, DSP ST
DS0, DSP ST DS1, DSP ST DL, DSP ERR, DSP ST LFM, DSP ST SY, DSP ST ALM 1, DSP
ST ALM 2, DSP ST ALM 6, DSP ST ALM 7, DSP ST ALM 9, DSP ST ALM 10, DSP ST
ALM 12, DSP ST ALM 15, DSP ST ALM 21, DSP ST ALM 24, DSP ST ALM 25, DSP ST
ALM 26, DSP ST ALM 27, DSP ST ALM 33, and DSP HIS commands.
N0010>DSP AQ
SLOT 1:02
ALARM 01 - MODULE INSERTED OR REMOVED
ALARM 05 - PLL OR CLOCK SOURCE ERROR
ALARM 06 - LINK IN-SERVICE : 04
ALARM 07 - LINK OUT-OF-SERVICE: 04
ALARM 08 - FAN FAILURE
ALARM 09 - DATABASE CONFLICT
ALARM 10 - INVALID SLOT OR LOCAL NODE #
ALARM 11 - CLOCK SOURCE CONFLICT
ALARM 15 - ILP ALARM
ALARM 29 - DATABASE CHANGED
ALARM NODE:
0001 0019 0022 0032 0033 0135 0140 0151 0199 0240 0400 0476 1670 2000
TIME: 16:06:30 DATE: THU SEP-16-1993
SLOT 1:02 - Nest:slot location of Network Module; apostrophe indicates offline module of redundant pair
ALARM 01 - Alarm number followed by alarm message for local Network Module (shown online) in slot 1:02. See Appendix A, Error and
Status Messages, for a description of each alarm.
NOTE: Alarms 06 and 07 display slot locations of affected Interlink Module(s) or Integrated
Trunk Module(s)
ALARM NODE - Remote alarm notification (online
Network Module only)
TIME - Time of day in 24-hour format; hours:minutes:seconds
DATE - Date in day of week, month-day-year
Figure 5-2. Typical Alarm List Display (DSP AQ)
L2UG
7/31/95
5-13
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE NONPROPRIETARY
BUNDLE PARAMETERS (DSP BDL NPR) COMMAND
The DSP BDL NPR command displays the current nonproprietary bundle parameter values,
Figure 5-3, of the specified Integrated Trunk Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP BDL NPR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
N0010>DSP BDL NPR 1:10:01
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
1:10:01 ORIG DEFAULT NONE 01 02 Nx64K CC NONE
A OOS B OOS C D OOS OOS BITS DSC ALM
1:10:01 7E ENABLE
1:10:01 - Nest:slot:channel number of bundle
CONNECT - Originator/terminator
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling, where:
SP = Space
MK = Mark
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
Figure 5-3. Typical Integrated Trunk Module Nonproprietary Bundle Parameter Display
(DSP BDL NPR)
5-14
L2UG
7/31/95
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE PROPRIETARY BUNDLE
PARAMETERS (DSP BDL PR) COMMAND
The DSP BDL PR command displays the current proprietary bundle parameter values, Figure
5-4, of the specified Integrated Trunk Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP BDL PR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
N0010>DSP BDL PR 1:10:15
CONNECT ARQ SYNCS TX MODE SECURITY ENCRYPT
1:10:15 PR-ORIG 200 04,LVL2 NxSW56K DISABLE NO
BDL TYPE GROOMING POWERUP LINKBACK LINK EXP
1:10:15 DIAL LNK DISABLE NO CON 1:12:14 NONE
GROUP ALMTHLD AL7MASK UNIT
1:10:15 1-3---- DONT CARE ON MASTER
1:10:15 - Nest:slot:channel number of bundle
CONNECT - Proprietary originator/terminator
ARQ - Supervisory channel bandwidth (bps)
SYNCS - Number of sync characters per scan cycle and sync character level
TX MODE - Transport mode
SECURITY - Security
ENCRYPT - Encryption
BDL TYPE - Bundle type
GROOMING - Grooming
POWERUP - Automatic connect at power-up
LINKBACK - Link backup bundle
LINK EXP - Link expansion bundle
GROUP - Group assignment
ALMTHLD - Alarm threshold
AL7MASK - Alarm 7 masking
UNIT - Master/slave designation
Figure 5-4. Typical Integrated Trunk Module Proprietary Bundle Parameter Display
(DSP BDL PR)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-15
DISPLAY BANDWIDTH (DSP BW) COMMAND
The DSP BW command displays the system bus bandwidth currently defined for Interlink
Modules, Integrated Trunk Modules, and for local connections of Voice Server Modules, Voice
Processors, Channelized Services Processors, and X.50 Server Modules, Figure 5-5.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP BW
N0010>DSP BW
ILC BW = 1544 KBS
CSP BW = 216 KBS
ILP BW = 72 KBS
ILQ BW = 1040 KBS
VSM BW = 2232 KBS
XSM BW = 1000 KBS
DEFINED BW = 6104 KBS
ILC BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to Interlink
Modules (For Interlink Modules operating in asymmetrical mode, the average bandwidth of the intermachine link is displayed. For Interlink
Modules operating in simplex mode, half the bandwidth of the intermachine link is displayed.)
CSP BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to local connections of Channelized Services
Processors
ILP BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to local connections of Voice Processors
ILQ BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to
Integrated Trunk Modules
VSM BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to local connections of Voice Server Modules
XSM BW - Aggregate bandwidth assigned to local connections of X.50 Server Modules
DEFINED BW - Total system bus bandwidth defined
Figure 5-5. Typical System Bus Bandwidth Display (DSP BW)
DISPLAY BUNDLE CONFIGURATION (DSP CFG) COMMAND
The DSP CFG command displays the current bundle configuration for all the DS-0 channels of the specified Channelized Services Processor or Integrated Trunk Module, Figure 5-6.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CFG
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
[/M] where: /M = displays the current bundle configuration by indicating each master DS-0 channel, speed of each bundle, size of each bundle, and members of each bundle. For Integrated Trunk Module, also displays ARQ bandwidth of each proprietary bundle as well as the total ARQ bandwidth for the slot, Figure
5-6B.
5-16
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP CFG 1:9
ILQ 1:09
DS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BUNDLE 01 02 01 04 01 02 01 04 01 02 01 04 01 02 01 04
DS0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
BUNDLE 01 02 01 04 01 02 01 04 25 02 25 25 25 02 31
ILQ 1:09 - Nest:slot location of Integrated Trunk
Module (or Channelized Services Processor)
DS0 - DS-0 channel number
BUNDLE - Master DS-0 channel number
(- - indicates unassigned time slot)
A. DSP CFG COMMAND DISPLAY WITHOUT /M MODIFIER
N0010>DSP CFG 1:9/M
ILQ 1:09
MASTER SPEED ARQ BW SIZE MEMBERS
01 640K 6400 10 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19
02 512K 4800 08 02 06 10 14 18 22 26 30
04 384K 2400 06 04 08 12 16 20 24
25 256K 1200 04 25 27 28 29
21 192K 600 03 21 23 31
---------------------------------
TOTAL 15400
ILQ 1:09 - Nest:slot location of Integrated Trunk
Module (or Channelized Services Processor)
MASTER - Master DS-0 channel
SPEED - Speed of bundle
ARQ BW - ARQ bandwidth (Integrated Trunk Module only):
CONDS0 = bundle needs to be connected
DEFBDL = bundle needs to be defined
N/A = nonproprietary bundle
SIZE - Size of bundle (NG indicates bad bundle size count)
MEMBERS - Members of bundle
B. DSP CFG COMMAND DISPLAY WITH /M MODIFIER
Figure 5-6. Typical Bundle Configuration Display (DSP CFG)
DISPLAY CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP CH) COMMAND
The DSP CH command displays the current channel parameter values, Figure 5-7, for the specified I/O channels. For Quad Voice Modules, also displays the model type.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
L2UG
6/30/94
5-17
N0010>DSP CH 1:08:1
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR CONNECT FNS.
QSC 1:08:1 2400 5 01 02 ORIG INBAND
TYPE PHRESET PHASOR OOS OPER CTSGEN CTSDELAY
QSC 1:08:1 DCE MX DO NOTHING AUTO 28
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS.
QSC 1:08:1 B/W F1,-F1
QSC - Module type
1:08:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
FNS. - Mode of transmitting EIA functions, in-band or out-of-band
TYPE - Interface type
PHRESET - Receive phasor reset (DTE, in-band only)
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation (DCE only)
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds (DCE, AUTO CTSGEN only)
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
B/W.FNS. - Bandwidth functions
A. TYPICAL SYNCHRONOUS CHANNEL (QSC, DSC) PARAMETER DISPLAY
N0010>DSP CH 3:05:1
CONNECT PROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR PHASOR
QVM 3:05:1 ORIG 4 32000 01 04 8
CTN.TYPE OOS OPER DIAL.MOD FNS.
QVM 3:05:1 OFF FORCE BUSY PULSE INBAND
QVM - Module type
3:05:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
DIAL.MOD - Dial mode
FNS. - Mode of transmitting E & M signals, in-band or out-of-band
B. TYPICAL VOICE CHANNEL (QVM) PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 1 of 8)
5-18
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP CH 2:1:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
QVM.3 2:01:1 ORIG DEFAULT 4 08 06
CTN.TYPE OOS OPER CODE.LAW PHASOR
QVM.3 2:01:1 OFF FORCE BUSY 8
QVM.3 - Module type
2:01:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CODE.LAW - Code law
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
C. TYPICAL VOICE CHANNEL (QVM.2, QVM.3, AND QVM.5) PARAMETER DISPLAY
N0010>DSP CH 1:5:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
QVM.6 1:05:1 ORIG 3 NONE 64000 01 00
OOS OPER CODE.LAW ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP 1S.DNSTY
QVM.6 1:05:1 FORCE BUSY MU-LAW
PHASOR
QVM.6 1:05:1 8
QVM.6 - Module type
1:05:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CODE.LAW - Code law
ECH CANL - Echo canceler
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length
CEN CLIP - Center clipper
1S.DNSTY - Ones density
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
D. TYPICAL VOICE CHANNEL (QVM.6) PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-19
N0010>DSP CH 1:09:1
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR CONNECT FNS.
QSC 1:09:1 32000 7 01 00 ORIG OUTBAND
TYPE PHRESET PHASOR OOS OPER CTSGEN CTSDELAY
QSC 1:09:1 DTE1 4 FORCE FNS
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS.
QSC 1:09:1 OFF
QSC - Module type (displays QSC for QVC Voice
Modules)
1:09:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
FNS. - Mode of transmitting E & M signals (out-ofband only)
TYPE - Interface type (DTE1 only)
PHRESET - Not used
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CTSGEN - Not used
CTSDELAY - Not used
CTN.TYPE - Contention type (OFF only)
B/W.FNS. - Not used
E. TYPICAL QVC VOICE CHANNEL PARAMETER DISPLAY
N0010>DSP CH 3:4:1
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR CONNECT DATA
QAM 3:04:1 1200 *187 01 06 TERM 07
TYPE DTR.FUNC OOS OPER CTSGEN CTSDELAY POLARITY
QAM 3:04:1 DTE TRNS MARK FF INVERT
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS. P/E.CHAR PARITY STOP
QAM 3:04:1 OFF NO ODD 1
QAM - Module type
3:04:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
DATA - Number of data bits
TYPE - Interface type
DTR.FUNC - Data terminal ready control (DTE only)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation (DCE only)
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds (DCE, AUTO CTSGEN only)
POLARITY - Mark polarity
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
B/W.FNS. - Bandwidth functions
P/E.CHAR - Enable or disable system parity error character
PARITY - Parity type
STOP - Number of stop bits
F. TYPICAL ASYNCHRONOUS CHANNEL PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 3)
5-20
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP CH 1:6:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
EVM 1:06:1 ORIG 2 1 01 06
PHASOR CODE.LAW 1S.DNSTY E-LD FTR OOS OPER
EVM 1:06:1 8 0 FORCE IDLE
ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB SF SIG
EVM 1:06:1
TX TLP IN DBM RX TLP IN DBM FAX NSF
EVM 1:06:1 -18 .0 -18 .0 DISABLE
EVM - Module type
1:06:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed§
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
CODE.LAW - Code law
1S.DNSTY - Ones density
E-LD FTR - E-lead filter
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
ECH CANL - Echo canceler§
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length§
CEN CLIP - Center clipper§
TONE DSB - Tone disable§
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling§
TX TLP IN DBM - Transmit transmission level point in dBm
RX TLP IN DBM - Receive transmission level point in dBm
FAX NSF - Fax nonstandard functions
§ = Values not displayed if a voice profile is selected.
G. TYPICAL VOICE CHANNEL (EVM) PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 4)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-21
N0010>DSP CH 1:7:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
FXO 1:07:1 ORIG 1 NONE 8000 02 07
PHASOR CODE.LAW 1S.DNSTY A/B FLTR OOS OPER
FXO 1:07:1 8 MU-LAW ON FORCE IDLE
ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB SF SIG
FXO 1:07:1 ENABLE 32 MS ENABLE ON NONE
TX TLP IN DBM RX TLP IN DBM FAX NSF
FXO 1:07:1 -10 .0 -10 .0 ENABLE
FXO - Module type
1:07:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed§
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
CODE.LAW - Code law
1S.DNSTY - Ones density
A/B FLTR - A/B bit filter
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
ECH CANL - Echo canceler§
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length§
CEN CLIP - Center clipper§
TONE DSB - Tone disable§
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling
TX TLP IN DBM - Transmit transmission level point in dBm
RX TLP IN DBM - Receive transmission level point in dBm
FAX NSF - Nonstandard fax features
§ = Values not displayed if a voice profile is selected.
◊
= FXO.3 and FXS.3 Modules only
H. TYPICAL VOICE CHANNEL (FXS AND FXO) PARAMETER DISPLAY
◊
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 5)
5-22
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP CH 1:5:1
CONNECT MODE TYPE SPD.PROF OOS OPER PHASOR
ICM 1:05:1 ORIG PLESIOC DTE1 DISABLE MARK FF 10
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR POLARITY MIL.INT.
ICM 1:05:1 1544000 DEFAULT 01 02 D-N,F-N D-B,F-B
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS. CTSGEN CTSDELAY MX.ADJST BYTE CNT
ICM 1:05:1 OFF 1 1
DSR/DTR ERR.POL. MX.STUFF
ICM 1:05:1 TRNS NORMAL 04
ICM - Module type
1:05:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
MODE - Mode of operation
TYPE - Interface type
SPD.PROF - Speed profile (ENABLE/DISABLE)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
SPEED - Channel speed (bps) (When speed profile is enabled, speed profile number is displayed.)
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
POLARITY - Polarity, where:
D-N,F-N = data normal, functions normal
D-I,F-N = data inverted, functions normal
D-N,F-I = data normal, functions inverted
D-I,F-I = data inverted, functions inverted
MIL.INT. - Military switchable interface, where:
D-B,F-B = data balanced, functions balanced
D-U,F-B = data unbalanced, functions balanced
D-B,F-U = data balanced, functions unbalanced
D-U,F-U = data unbalanced, functions unbalanced
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
B/W.FNS. - Bandwidth functions
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds
MX.ADJST - Maximum output clock adjustment
BYTE CNT - Byte counter
DSR/DTR - Data set ready, data terminal ready control
ERR.POL. - Error polarity
MX.STUFF - Maximum stuffer error correction
J. TYPICAL ISOCHRONOUS CHANNEL (ICM) PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 6)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-23
N0010>DSP CH 1:12:1
CONNECT SPEED OUTPUT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR
QSP 1:12:1 TERM 128000 =IN SPD DEFAULT 01 03
TYPE FNS. PHRESET PHASOR CTSGEN CTSDELAY
QSP 1:12:1 DCE3 INBAND MX AUTO 64
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS. OOS OPER DTR.FUNC MIL.INT. POLARITY
QSP 1:12:1 B/W F1,-F1 SPACE D-B,F-B D-N,F-N
SPECIAL STR.TMR. DSR.OPT. SW56_SIG
QSP 1:12:1 LPDA-1 ON
QSP - Module type
1:12:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
◊
OUTPUT - Output channel speed
◊
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TYPE - Interface type
∆
FNS. - Mode of transmitting EIA functions: INBAND,
OUTBAND, or NONE
PHRESET - Receive phasor reset (DTE, in-band only)
PHASOR - Phasor size
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation (DCE only)
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds (DCE, AUTO CTSGEN only)
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
B/W.FNS. - Bandwidth functions
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
DTR.FUNC - Data terminal ready control (DTE only)
MIL.INT. - Military switchable interface, where:
D-B,F-B = data balanced, functions balanced
D-U,F-B = data unbalanced, functions balanced
D-B,F-U = data balanced, functions unbalanced
D-U,F-U = data unbalanced, functions unbalanced
POLARITY - Polarity, where:
D-N,F-N = data normal, functions normal
D-I,F-N = data inverted, functions normal
D-N,F-I = data normal, functions inverted
D-I,F-I = data inverted, functions inverted
SPECIAL - Special features, where:
NONE = No special features selected
LPDA-1 = Link Problem Diagnostic Aid
56K/64K = 56K service
BCAST/D = Broadcast/polling, data sensitivity
BCAST/D/SP = Broadcast/polling, data sensitivity, spacing alarm
BCAST/F = Broadcast/polling, function sensitivity
BCAST/F/SP = Broadcast/polling, function sensitivity, spacing alarm
SMPLX BCST = Simplex broadcast mode
STR.TMR. - Anti-streaming timer, where:
OFF = No anti-streaming timer
1-30 or 64 = 1 to 30 seconds or 64 seconds
DSR.OPT. - Data set ready control
SW56_SIG - Switched 56K service with end-to-end signaling when enabled. 56K service without end-to-end signaling when disabled.
◊
= When value displayed is followed by a "g", the speed is not supported by Network Module type installed. The speed is recognized by the LINK/2+ System, but external clocking is required (that is, TYPE = DTE2) for other than QSP.12, QSP.14, and QSP.18 Module types.
∆
= For "g" speeds, will display NG if interface type is defined as other than DTE2 and Module type is not QSP.12,
QSP.14, or QSP.18.
K. TYPICAL SYNCHRONOUS CHANNEL (QSP) PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 7)
5-24
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP CH 1:17:1
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR CONNECT FNS.
QSC 1:17:1 64000 9 01 00 TERM INBAND
TYPE PHRESET PHASOR OOS OPER CTSGEN CTSDELAY
QSC 1:17:1 DCE MX DO NOTHING AUTO 28
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS.
QSC 1:17:1 OFF
QSC - Module type (displays QSC for Subrate
Channel Processors)
1:17:1 - Nest:slot:channel number
SPEED - Channel speed (bps) (64000 only)
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level (01 only)
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold (00 only)
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
(TERM only)
FNS. - Mode of transmitting E & M signals
(in-band only)
TYPE - Interface type (DCE only)
PHRESET - Not used
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes) (MX only)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation (DO
NOTHING only)
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation (AUTO only)
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds (28 only)
CTN.TYPE - Contention type (OFF only)
B/W.FNS. - Not used
L. TYPICAL SUBRATE CHANNEL PROCESSOR PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-7. Typical Channel Parameter Displays (DSP CH) (Sheet 8)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-25
DISPLAY DATABASE CHECKSUM CONDITION (DSP CKS) COMMAND
The DSP CKS command displays the condition of the database checksum and the time and date of the last change made to the database, Figure 5-8. If a redundant Network Module is installed, the condition of the redundant module database checksum is also displayed.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CKS
N0010>DSP CKS
SLOT 1:01 NO ERROR 9A
SLOT 1:02 ’ ERROR
LAST DB CHANGE: 13:00:53 DATE: TUE DEC-21-1993
SLOT 1:01 - Network Module
9A - Actual hexadecimal value of checksum
SLOT 1:02
’
- Redundant Network Module
LAST DB CHANGE: - Time and date of last change made to the database
Figure 5-8. Typical Checksum Display (DSP CKS)
DISPLAY CHANNEL CONNECT STATUS (DSP CON) COMMAND
The DSP CON command displays the destination channel and connect status of the specified I/O channels. The command also indicates whether a channel connection was established as a result of a logical node translation. If a bias route to the destination channel is defined, the bias intermachine link to be used is also displayed.
The DSP CON command is the same as the DSP DST CH command. See "Display Destination
Channels (DSP DST *, DSP DST CH, DSP DST DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CON
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/Pppp] where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250 or D for default). When this option is used, the command will display information for those channels within the range that have the specified profile.
5-26
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY SUPERVISORY COMPUTER PORT PARAMETERS (DSP CP)
COMMAND
The DSP CP command displays the current supervisory computer port parameter values, Figure
5-9.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CP
N0010>DSP CP
SPEED STOP PARITY
9600 01 NONE
SPEED - Supervisory computer port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
PARITY - Type of parity
Figure 5-9. Typical Supervisory Computer Port Parameter Display (DSP CP)
DISPLAY CHANNELIZED SERVICES PROCESSOR DS-1
PARAMETERS (DSP CSP) COMMAND
The DSP CSP command displays the current DS-1 parameter values, Figure 5-10, for the
Channelized Services Processor(s) in the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP CSP
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP CSP 1:13
FRAMING CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE LN DRV OOS BITS
CSP 1:13 G.732S SYS A-PCM INT 7F
KG RATE KG LEAD KG MODE KG POLR INTL BIT NATL BIT
CSP 1:13 5 SEC BOTH LEVEL POSITIVE 1 1F
CSP 1:13 - Nest:slot number of Channelized
Services Processor
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
KG RATE - Retrain signal rate
KG LEAD - Retrain signal lead
KG MODE - Retrain signal mode
KG POLR - Retrain signal polarity
INTL BIT - International bit
NATL BIT - National bits
Figure 5-10. Typical Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameter Display (DSP CSP)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-27
DISPLAY ISDN D-CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP DCM) COMMAND
The DSP DCM command displays the current ISDN D-channel parameter values, Figure 5-11, for the D-Channel Module(s) in the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP DCM 1:12
NET TYPE NET PLAN NET ID SERVICE INTRFACE POLARITY
DCM 1:12 NATIONAL CARRIER 586 PSN 05 NORMAL
DCM 1:12 - Nest:slot number of D-Channel Module
NET TYPE - Network type
NET PLAN - Network plan
NET ID - Network ID
SERVICE - Service
INTRFACE - Interface
POLARITY - Polarity
Figure 5-11. Typical ISDN D-Channel Parameter Display (DSP DCM)
5-28
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY INTERMACHINE LINK PARAMETERS (DSP DL) COMMAND
The DSP DL command displays the current intermachine link parameter values, Figure 5-12, of the specified Interlink Module(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
N0010>DSP DL 3
SPEED RECEIVE TXCLOCK LN DRV FRAME SATDELAY SATBUFF
LINK 1:03 2048000 =TX SPD SYS EXT 02 NONE
ARQ RXARQ SYNCS UNIT SRM SEL ALMTHLD AL7MASK
LINK 1:03 9600 04,LVL1 SLAVE NO VGOOD<E-5 ON
SECURITY ENCRYPT GROUP TRNSLATE NOD2TRNS LFM SLOT LFM BNDL
LINK 1:03 DISABLE NO 123--6- OFF 3:12 A
LINKBACK LINK EXP ACCESS OOS TIME
LINK 1:03 1:12:2 1:12:1 n/a 60
LINK 1:03 - Nest:slot number of Interlink Module
SPEED - Intermachine link speed (bps)
◊
RECEIVE - Receive intermachine link speed
TXCLOCK - Source of transmit clock
LN DRV - Line driver type and speed (INTERNAL or
EXTERNAL mandatory)
FRAME - Frame mode
SATDELAY - Satellite delay
SATBUFF - Satellite buffer size (bits)
ARQ - Supervisory channel bandwidth (bps)
RXARQ - Receive supervisory channel bandwidth
(bps)
SYNCS - Number of sync characters per scan cycle and sync character level
UNIT - Master/slave designation
SRM SEL - Subrate multiplexing
ALMTHLD - Alarm threshold
AL7MASK - Intermachine link alarm 7 masking
SECURITY - Intermachine link security (DISABLE or
ENABLE)
ENCRYPT - Encryption
GROUP - Group assignment
TRNSLATE - Logical node translation
NOD2TRNS - Node to translate
LFM SLOT - Link Framing Module slot
LFM BNDL - Link Framing Module bundle
LINKBACK - Link backup bundle
LINK EXP - Link expansion bundle
ACCESS - Not Applicable
OOS TIME - Intermachine link out-of-service timer
◊
= When value displayed is followed by a "g", the speed is not supported by Network Module type installed.
The speed is recognized by the LINK/2+ System, but external clocking is required (that is, TXCLOCK cannot
be SYS).
Figure 5-12. Typical Intermachine Link Parameter Display (DSP DL)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-29
DISPLAY VOICE PROCESSOR DS-0 PARAMETERS (DSP DS0)
COMMAND
The DSP DS0 command displays the current parameter values, Figure 5-13, for the specified
Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
N0010>DSP DS0 1:9:1-1:9:5
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
1:09:01 ORIG * 2 1 03 01 AB
1:09:02 CONT DEFAULT NONE 01 02 A-PCM AB
1:09:03 ORIG * 6 1 03 01 NONE
1:09:04 TERM 1 NONE 04 03 A-PCM A
1:09:05 ORIG 9 * 3 02 01 NONE
A OOS B OOS C D OOS ABCD IDL OOS BITS DSC ALM BUSYOUT
1:09:01 SP-MK SPACE
1:09:02 SP-MK SPACE x100 100 SEC
1:09:03 7E ENABLE
1:09:04 MK-SP MARK
1:09:05 E4 ENABLE
PHASOR
1:09:01 08
1:09:02 14
1:09:03 08
1:09:04 14
1:09:05 08
1:09:01 - Nest:slot:channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator/contention connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling, where:
SP = Space
MK = Mark
ABCD IDL - ABCD idle bit pattern
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
BUSYOUT - Busy out timer
PHASOR - Phasor size
Figure 5-13. Typical Voice Processor DS-0 Parameter Display (DSP DS0)
5-30
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY VOICE PROCESSOR DS-1 PARAMETERS (DSP DS1)
COMMAND
The DSP DS1 command displays the current DS-1 parameter values, Figure 5-14, for the Voice
Processor(s) in the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP DS1 1:9
FRAMING CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE TX ADPCM LN DRV OOS BITS
ILP 1:09 D4 NO RCV MU-PCM ANSI EXT
ILP MODE KG RATE KG LEAD KG MODE KG POLR INTL BIT NATL BIT
ILP 1:09 SCAN 30 SEC BOTH PULSE NEGATIVE
SEIZURE PRE-EMPT ORIG DSC SEIZE ON
ILP 1:09 500 MS 2 SEC 33.0 SEC SPACE
ILP 1:09 - Nest:slot number of Voice Processor
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
TX ADPCM - Transport ADPCM
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
ILP MODE - Mode of operation
KG RATE - Retrain signal rate
KG LEAD - Retrain signal lead
KG MODE - Retrain signal mode
KG POLR - Retrain signal polarity
INTL BIT - International bits
NATL BIT - National bits
SEIZURE - Seizure time
PRE-EMPT - Pre-emption timer
ORIG DSC - Originator disconnect time
SEIZE ON - Seizure polarity
Figure 5-14. Typical Voice Processor DS-1 Parameter Display (DSP DS1)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-31
DISPLAY DESTINATION CHANNELS (DSP DST, DSP DST CH, DSP
DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, DSP DST XCH) COMMANDS
The DSP DST * command displays the destination channel and connect status of all I/O channels, all DS-0, all X.50 DS-0 channels, and all X.50 subrate channels at a node. To display the destination channel and connect status of specified channels, use the following commands:
●
DSP DST CH command to display this information for specified I/O channels only
●
DSP DST DS0 command to display this information for specified DS-0 channels only
●
DSP DST XS0 command to display this information for specified X.50 DS-0 channels only
●
DSP DST XCH command to display this information for specified X.50 subrate channels only
Each command also indicates whether a channel connection was established as a result of a logical node translation and the intermachine link speed at which the connection was established.
If a bias route to the destination channel is defined, the bias intermachine link or bias integrated trunk bundle to be used is also displayed. See Figure 5-15 for a typical display.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
[/Pppp]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/Pppp]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Pppp]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST XS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Pppp]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr
]}
[/Pppp] where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250 or D for default). When this option is used, the command will display information for those channels within the range that have the specified profile.
cc = DS-0 channel number (1-31) or X.50 DS-0 channel number (1-16) sr = X.50 subrate channel (1-20)
The DSP DST commands can be used to verify channel connections prior to and following programming of channel connections with any of the following commands:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CNV BIAS
CON
CON CH
CON DS0
DEF BDL PR
DEF BIAS CH
DEF BIAS DS0
DEF CH/
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
DEF CON
DEF DL
DEF DST CH
DEF DST DS0
DEF DST XCH
DEF DST XS0
DEF XCH
DEF XS0
●
●
●
●
●
●
DSC
DSC CH
DSC DS0
SET BIAS XCH
SET BIAS XS0
SET MAP
5-32
L2UG
6/30/94
NOTES:
Channels must be disconnected before channel connections are redefined. Upon reconnection, the DSP DST commands will display the newly defined channel connections.
The profile disconnect reason on a Destination Channel Display,
Figure 5-15, indicating the override mode, shows what is currently being overridden and not why the channel went into the override mode. A plus sign precedes the displayed reasons. A plus sign alone indicates the reason cannot be determined.
N0010>DSP DST CH 1:3:*,1:5:1-1:7:4
ORIG 1:03:01 ->N0030 1:03:01 64000 DISC
ORIG 1:03:02 ->N0030 1:03:02 64000 LINK 04
ORIG 1:03:03 ->N0030 1:03:03 64000 LINK 04
ORIG 1:03:04 ->N0030 1:03:04 64000 LINK 04
ORIG 1:05:01 ->N0010 1:08:01 64000 LOCAL
ORIG 1:05:02 ->N0001 2:11:04 64000 ILQ 05:03
ORIG 1:05:03 ->N0010 1:02:01 64000S LINK 11 B=10
ORIG 1:05:04 ->N0100 2:08:04 64000 DISC
ORIG 1:06:01 ->N0007 2:15:04 16000 DISC
CONT 1:06:02 ->N0001 2:11:04 16000A LINK 08 +<GP>
CONT 1:06:03 ->N0010 1:06:03 16000 DISC PROFL <GP, ST, EN, EP>
ORIG 1:06:04 ->N0010 1:06:04 16000 DISC
ORIG 1:07:01 ->N0026 2:11:04 8000A DISC
ORIG 1:07:02 ->N0029 1:15:02 8000 DISC
ORIG 1:07:03 ->N0030 1:15:03 8000 DISC
ORIG 1:07:04 ->N0158 3:05:02 8000 PEND
ORIG - Connect type, where:
ORIG = Originator
TERM = Terminator
CONT = Contention
PROP = Proprietary
1:03:01 - (Following connect type)
Nest:slot:channel number of local channel or bundle (includes master and slave broadcast/polling channel)
N0030 1:03:01- Node number and nest:slot:channel number of destination channel (Connections defined to local DS-0 channels display "DS0" until channel is connected. Slave broadcast/ polling channel connections display the host channel as the destination channel.) (If logical node translation is enabled and the command is issued from the originator node, the logical node number is displayed. If the command is issued from the terminator node, the physical node number is displayed.)
64000 - Intermachine link or bundle speed (bps)
NOTE: For Isochronous Communication
Module channels with a defined speed profile, if the channel is disconnected, the profile number is displayed.
For Voice Server Module channels with a defined voice profile, if the channel is disconnected, the profile number is displayed.
NOTE: An "A" indicates the channel is operating in asymmetrical mode. An "S" indicates the channel is operating in simplex mode. Otherwise, the channel is operating in symmetrical mode.
Figure 5-15. Typical Destination Channel Display (DSP DST, DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, or DSP DST XCH) (Sheet 1 of 3)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-33
DISC - Connection status, where:
DISC = Disconnected
no connection attempted or channel disconnected by command
DISC ALARM = Disconnected
red or yellow alarm; or initial connection failed because of red or yellow alarm or because of hardware failure on Voice Processor or Channelized Services
Processor (DS-0 channels only).
DISC BUMP = Disconnected due to bumping.
Channel has been bumped by channel having higher bump level.
DISC BUSY = Another channel is already connected to terminator or DS-0 contention channel is busied out.
DISC EPR = Disconnected
BER degraded below link ABM profile error performance criteria.
DISC ERROR = Disconnected
incompatible parameters, no local/remote I/O module installed, or routing to destination node not defined
DISC GROOM = Disconnected due to grooming
DISC NO BW = Disconnected
no bandwidth available because:
- Bandwidth fully used
- No complete route to destination node
- Number of bypasses to destination node
exceeds channel delay threshold parameter
- A channel has a bias route programmed, but
the channel delay threshold parameter is not
large enough to use the bias route.
- Inoperative Bypass Module at intermediate
bypass node
- All of the bypass channels at one or more
bypass nodes are already in use.
- Bypass connect queue at intermediate node
is full.
- X.50 DS-0 channel is out-of-service.
DISC OPER = Operator disconnect (DS-0 contention channels and Isochronous
Communication Module channels only)
DISC PHASR = Disconnected
specified phasor size too low to be accommodated by intermachine link frame
DISC PRMPT = Channel preempted (DS-0 contention channels only)
DISC PROFL = Channel disconnected due to failure to meet ABM profile criteria during connection process
DISC REV = Displayed when disconnect is due to the following:
- Channel’s ABM routing criteria are all default
values.
- The only violation is revision error.
For example, message would be displayed if a
DS-0 channel attempted to connect over a
LINK/1 System.
ILQ ss:cc = Integrated Trunk Bundle to which nonproprietary bundle is connected
LINK ss = Connected
identified by Interlink
Module slot number
LINK ss-L = Connected via logical destination node number
identified by Interlink Module slot number
LINK ss* = Channel is connected to first bypass node (identified by Interlink Module slot number) but destination node has not yet acknowledged connection.
LOCAL = Channel is connected to a DS-0 channel at local node.
NOTE: During bundle dialing and alignment,
DSP DST DS0 response indicates that bundle is connected. Since bundle and intermachine link status is not available yet, the DSP ST BDL response indicates the bundle is not connected.
Upon completion of bundle dialing and alignment, the DSP ST BDL response will show bundle status.
LOCAL-L = Channel is connected via logical destination node number.
PEND = Channel is on connect queue waiting for initial connect attempt.
PEND reason = Channel is on connect queue waiting for connect attempt; reason can be any of the DISC reasons, for example, NO BW,
BUSY, etc.
WAIT = Channel is on retry queue waiting for connect attempt.
WAIT
reason = Channel is on retry queue waiting for connect attempt; reason can be any of the DISC reasons, for example, NO BW,
BUSY, etc.
B =10 - Slot number (or slot and bundle number) of first intermachine link (bias route) that channel will be routed over
Figure 5-15. Typical Destination Channel Display (DSP DST, DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, or DSP DST XCH) (Sheet 2)
5-34
L2UG
6/30/94
+<GP> - ABM profile disconnect reason, where:
EN = Link encryption violation
EP = Error performance violation
GP = Link group violation
RV = Revision violation
ST = Satellite threshold violation
Channels connected in override or channels whose last connect attempt was an override connection will have status flagged with a plus sign. The plus sign will be followed by the ABM criteria that were overridden unless the ABM profile has been redefined since the connection was established.
Figure 5-15. Typical Destination Channel Display (DSP DST, DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, DSP DST XS0, or DSP DST XCH) (Sheet 3)
DISPLAY DESTINATION INTERMACHINE LINK (DSP DST DL)
COMMAND
The DSP DST DL command displays the connection status of all channel connections on the specified Interlink Module intermachine link or the specified Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundle. See Figure 5-16 for a typical display.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST DL
{
ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST DL
{
ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
[NOD xxxx] DSP DST DL
{
ss or 1:ss:cc
} [
Nxxxx n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
The optional channel list results in a display of only those connections that originate or terminate at the specified channels.
NOTE:
If the DSP DST DL command is issued to an intermachine link or proprietary bundle that is actively connecting/disconnecting channels, a "CONNECT/DISCONNECT IN PROGRESS,
COMMAND ABORTED" message may be displayed. In this case, the command should be reissued; the connect/disconnect will have completed and the command should be able to complete.
L2UG
6/30/94
5-35
N0001>DSP DST DL 4
TRANSMIT RECEIVE
001 N0001 1:12:04 -> N0100 1:16:04 144000 1600A LOCAL
002 N0005 1:12:03 -> N0100 1:16:03 0 1600S LINK 07 BP=015
003 N0001 1:12:02 -> N0100 1:16:02 144000 5200A LOCAL
004 N0002 1:12:01 -> N0003 1:08:02 0 9600S LINK 12 BP=148
001 - Channel connection number
N0001 1:12:04 - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of originator connection
-> N0100 1:16:04 - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of terminator connection
144000 1600 - Transmit and receive channel speeds. The displayed channel speeds represent the defined channel speeds plus the bandwidth required for in-band and out-of-band signaling.
NOTE: An "A" indicates the channel is operating in asymmetrical mode. An "S" indicates the channel is operating in simplex mode. Otherwise, the channel is operating in symmetrical mode. If the intermachine link is operating in symmetrical mode, only one column is displayed to indicate the transmit and receive speeds.
LOCAL - Connection status
For a list of connection status messages, see
Figure 5-15, Typical Destination Channel
Display (DSP DST *, DSP DST CH, DSP DST
DS0, or DSP DST). DISC reasons appear for simplex connections only.
BP=015 - Bypass channel number
Figure 5-16. Typical Destination Intermachine Link Display (DSP DST DL)
DISPLAY EXTERNAL PORT PARAMETERS (DSP EP) COMMAND
The DSP EP command displays the current parameter values, Figure 5-17, of the external port that interfaces the LINK/2+ System to the LINK/CSU.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP EP
N0010>DSP EP
*** EP PORT/ALARM-16 DISABLED ***
SPEED STOP PARITY DATA
9600 01 EVEN 07
***EP PORT/ALARM-16 DISABLED*** - Message appears when alarm 16 Network Module DIP switch parameter is disabled.
SPEED - External port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
PARITY - Type of parity
DATA - Number of data bits
Figure 5-17. Typical External Port Parameter Display (DSP EP)
5-36
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY ERROR (DSP ERR) COMMAND
The DSP ERR command displays errors that occurred on start-up or reset, Figure 5-18, for the
Network Module, Interlink Module(s), Integrated Trunk Module(s), Dual Isochronous Module(s),
Isochronous Communication Module(s), Voice Server Module(s), D-Channel Module(s), Quad
Asynchronous Module(s), Enhanced Voice Module(s), Foreign Exchange Office Module(s),
Foreign Exchange Station Module(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), Voice Processor(s), and
X.50 Server Module(s). See Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for a description of the messages for each module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ERR
N0010>DSP ERR
NCL SLOT 1:01
ERROR DATABASE
ERROR RTC
ILC SLOT 1:03
ERROR LINE DRV
CSP SLOT 1:08
ERROR EQ-INTERFACE
ILP SLOT 1:11
ERROR PHASOR CONVERTER
ICM SLOT 1:15
ERROR RAM
ERROR PROM
VSM SLOT 1:17
ERROR CPU RAM
ILQ SLOT 1:18
NO ERRORS
DCI SLOT 3:12
ERROR STC 1
NCL SLOT 1:01 - Module type and slot location followed by error message(s).
See Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for a description of the messages for each module.
NOTE: For Network Module(s) (NCL), the "NO
ERRORS" message may be displayed if an
RTC failure clears itself after an initial failure.
In addition, the "ERROR RTC" message will appear if the RTC fails after it is initially tested good.
Figure 5-18. Typical Start-Up Error Condition Display (DSP ERR)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-37
DISPLAY EIA FUNCTIONS (DSP FN) COMMAND
The DSP FN command monitors and displays the status of the EIA control functions present at an I/O channel interface for the selected channel. The control functions are different for DCE and
DTE channels, Figures 5-19A and 5-19B.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP FN n:ss:c
For a local channel, the EIA control function display is updated continuously. Pressing any key at the supervisory terminal stops the display.
For a remote channel, an instantaneous condition of the EIA control functions is displayed.
NOTE:
When a Quad Synchronous Processor channel is in LP loopback, the
DSP FN command will show remote input functions in the "O=" part of the display.
5-38
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP FN 1:5:1
I=00001 O=0001
Where:
RTS
F4
BO
F3 F2
DTR
F1
I
= 0 0 0 0 1
O
= 0 0 0 1
F5
TEST
F4
CTS
F3
RI
F2
CD
F1
DSR
0 = OFF
1 = ON
N0010>DSP FN 1:5:2
I=00001 O=0001
Where:
CD
F4
RI CTS
F3 F2
DSR
F1
I
= 0 0 0 0 1
O
= 0 0 0 1
F4
_
F3
BO
F2
RTS
F1
DTR
0 = OFF
1 = ON
FUNC-
TION
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
(
I
=) EIA INPUT
TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
FROM DCE
Test
(O=) EIA OUTPUT
FROM LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TO DCE
Clear-to-send (CTS) signal.
For channel using 64 kbps
Bipolar Interface Module, alarm indication signal (AIS).
May toggle under data pass conditions. A steady 0 indicates AIS condition.
Request-to-send (RTS) signal
Ring indicator (RI) signal.
For analog voice channel,
M lead from local PBX.
For Quad Synchronous
Processor channel in LPDA mode, test indicator (TI) signal. For Dual Isochronous
Module channel, 1 indicates local channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem. For channel using
64 kbps Bipolar Interface
Module, loss of sync (LOS) signal.
Out-of-service (BO) signal.
For analog voice channel,
E lead to local PBX. For
Quad Synchronous
Processor channel in LPDA mode, test mode (TM) signal. For Dual Isochronous
Module channel, 1 indicates remote channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
F2
F1
Data carrier detect (CD) signal
Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
Data set ready (DSR) signal.
For channel using 64 kbps
Bipolar Interface Module, not applicable. 1 is displayed.
Data terminal ready (DTR) signal
FUNC-
TION
F5
(
I
=) EIA INPUT
TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
FROM DTE
Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
F4
F3
(O=) EIA OUTPUT
FROM LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TO DTE
Not applicable: 1 or 0 displayed
Request-to-send (RTS) signal
Data carrier detect (CD) signal
Busy out (BO) signal.
For Quad Synchronous
Processor channel in LPDA mode, test mode (TM) signal. For Dual Isochronous
Module channel, 1 indicates local channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
Ring indicator (RI) signal.
For Quad Synchronous
Processor channel in LPDA mode, test indicator (TI) signal. For Dual Isochronous
Module channel, 1 indicates remote channel is operating properly, 0 indicates a problem.
Clear-to-send (CTS) signal
Data terminal ready (DTR) signal
Data set ready (DSR) signal
A. DCE FUNCTION DISPLAY B. DTE FUNCTION DISPLAY
Figure 5-19. Typical EIA Function Display (DSP FN)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-39
DISPLAY ALARM HISTORY (DSP HIS) COMMAND
The DSP HIS command displays the 10 most recent alarm messages for alarm 32 Switched 56K and ISDN dial-up connection errors for DS-0 channels, Figure 5-20. Table 5-2 displays alarm 32 error code messages and the corresponding descriptions.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP HIS[/C][/K][/A] where: /C = displays all messages (up to 255) and clears the alarm history buffer
/K = clears the alarm history buffer without displaying any messages
/A = displays all messages in the alarm history buffer (up to 255)
N0010>DSP HIS
THE LAST 007 DESIGNATED ALARM OCCURRENCES:
DATE: MON JUL-26-1993
ALM: CHAN: TIME: REASON: DATA:
32 1:06:01 17:07:06 RETRY 1
32 1:06:02 18:03:01 UNAVALBL ---
32 1:07:04 18:07:59 GROOMING ---
32 1:07:05 23:01:02 INTENDED ---
32 1:07:06 23:11:28 RETRY 6
DATE: TUE JUL-27-1993
ALM: CHAN: TIME: REASON: DATA:
32 1:06:01 00:50:14 PHONE NO ---
32 1:06:01 00:51:18 DATABASE ---
DATE - Date of errors
ALM - Alarm type
CHAN - Nest:slot:channel number of bundle.
Unless otherwise noted, the channel field indicates the master DS-0.
TIME - Time of errors
REASON - Type of errors, where:
AT TERM = User attempted to connect ISDN or
SW56K at the terminator end. The channel field displays the master DS-0. The data field displays dashes.
AUTOGRM = Dialed-up bundle is being groomed automatically after the primary intermachine link is stable for 10 minutes. The data field displays dashes.
B NOT UP = One or more B-channels not in idle state; therefore, connection was aborted before phone numbers were dialed. The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
BAD DCM = D-Channel Module hardware has failed. The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
BDL FAIL = Bundle failed to come into sync within one minute. If the error was generated by an Integrated Trunk Module, the data field displays an error code. (see Table 5-2)
D DROP = The D-channel was down for 30 seconds; therefore, the D-channel, B-channels, and all DS-0 channels connected through this
D-Channel Module are disconnected. The channel field indicates the D-Channel. The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
D RESET = The D-channel was down for 3 minutes; therefore, the D-Channel Module was reset. The channel field displays the D-channel.
The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
Figure 5-20. Typical Alarm History Display (DSP HIS) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-40
L2UG
4/30/97
REASON - Type of errors, where (cont’d):
DATABASE = An ISDN or Switched 56K bundle cannot be connected because the bundle was not defined or was incorrectly defined in the database. The data field displays dashes.
DCHANNEL = Connect request to the
D-Channel Module was not sent because the
D-channel is not connected. The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
DCMNOTUP = Connect request has been sent to the D-Channel Module; however, the module is not online yet. The data field displays dashes
(ISDN only).
DISC.ERR = Connect request rejected by
D-Channel Module due to an error before dialing, or connect request aborted due to insufficient ARQ bandwidth. The data field displays dashes (ISDN only).
GROOMING = Dialed-up bundle being groomed at system grooming time. (Backup bundles are not reconnected at system grooming reconnect time.) The data field displays dashes.
INTENDED = Dialed-up bundle manually disconnected. The data field displays dashes.
ISDNFAIL = Establishment of ISDN dialed link has failed. The data field displays an error value
(0-255) that is returned from the network (see
Table 5-2). The channel field displays the failed
DS-0, which may not be the master (ISDN only).
MISALIGN = The bundle has failed to align.
The data field displays an error value; see
Table 5-2.
NETWORK = A disconnect was received from the network. The data field displays an error value (0-255) that is returned from the network; see Table 5-2 (ISDN only).
PHONE NO = Connection was initiated; however, phone numbers have not been defined for one or more DS-0 channels.
The data field displays dashes.
REDALARM = Integrated Trunk Module is in red alarm or has been reset. The data field displays dashes.
RETRY = A phone connection for a DS-0 has failed and the connection is being retried. The data field displays the failed DS-0.
SW56FAIL = Establishment of Switched 56K dialed link has failed after retries. The channel field displays the failed DS-0 (SW56K only).
The data field displays an error value; see
Table 5-2.
UNAVALBL = Backup bundle not available, for example, backup bundle already claimed as backup by another failed link. The data field displays dashes.
DATA - Dashes or number that provides additional information for the type of error stated in reason field
Figure 5-20. Typical Alarm History Display (DSP HIS) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-41
5-42
BDL FAIL
Table 5-2. Alarm 32 Error Code Messages
Alarm 32 Error Type
ISDNFAIL or NETWORK
Error Code
58
63
65
66
50
52
54
57
44
45
47
49
38
41
42
43
28
29
31
34
19
21
22
27
7
16
17
18
3
6
1
2
100
101
102
111
127
96
97
98
99
82
88
90
95
69
70
79
81
57
Description
Unassigned destination number
No route to specified transit network
No route to destination
Channel unacceptable to sending entity
Channel negotiation failure
Normal call clearing
User busy
No user responding
No answer from user after alerting indication has been provided
Call rejected
Number changed
Destination out of order
Number format is invalid or incomplete
Requested facility cannot be provided
Normal, unspecified
No circuit/channel available
Network out of order
Temporary network failure
Switching equipment congestion
Access information discarded
Requested circuit/channel not available
Circuit/channel preempted by another call
Resources unavailable, unspecified
Quality service unavailable
User is not subscribed to requested facility
Outgoing calls barred
Incoming calls barred
Bearer capability not authorized
Bearer capability not presently available
Service or option not available, unspecified
Bearer capability not implemented
Channel type not implemented
Requested facility not implemented
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
Invalid call reference value
Identified channel does not exist
Incompatible destination
Destination address missing
Invalid message, unspecified
Mandatory information element is missing
Message type non-existent or not implemented
Message is recognized but call state is in error
Information element non-existent or not implemented
Invalid information element contents
Message not compatible with call state
Recovery procedure initiated after timer expiration
Protocol error, unspecified
Error generated by a network with no error messaging capabilities
SW56 failed to assign crosspoint DS-0s
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 5-2. Alarm 32 Error Code Messages (Cont’d)
Alarm 32 Error Type
MISALIGN
SW56FAIL
Error Code
58
11
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
42
43
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Description
SW56 failed to establish proprietary bundle
Failure to assign scanner DS-0s
Failure during start of write/read sequence numbers
Failure during retries to read sequence numbers
Failure during start of write/read acknowledge
Failure during retries to read acknowledge
Failure calculating network delay
Failure verifying network delay
Failure during broadcast of alignment pattern
ISDN failure to establish proprietary bundle
ISDN failure to stop pattern broadcast
SW56 unsolicited disconnect from network
SW56 network did not respond with a wink
SW56 no answer from terminating end
SW56 network is off hook
SW56 network glare detected
SW56 failed to connect echo canceler disable tone
SW56 failed to disconnect echo canceler disable tone
NOTE: Error type BDL FAIL will only display a code number if the error is generated by an Integrated Trunk Module.
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE DS-1 PARAMETERS (DSP
ILQ) COMMAND
The DSP ILQ command displays the current DS-1 parameter values, Figure 5-21, for the
Integrated Trunk Module(s) in the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ILQ
{
* or 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP ILQ 1:10
FRAMING CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE LFM SLOT LFM BNDL
ILQ 1:10 G.732N RCV A-PCM NONE
LN DRV OOS BITS INTL BIT NATL BIT CRC-4
ILQ 1:10 INT 0 1E ENABLE
ILQ 1:10 - Nest:slot number of Integrated Trunk
Module
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
LFM SLOT - Link Framing Module slot
LFM BNDL - Link Framing Module bundle
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
INTL BIT - International bit
NATL BIT - National bits
CRC-4 - Cyclic redundancy check
Figure 5-21. Typical Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameter Display (DSP ILQ)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-43
DISPLAY LINK FRAMING PARAMETERS (DSP LFM) COMMAND
The DSP LFM command displays the model type and current parameter values, Figure 5-22, for the LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12, or LFM.14 Link Framing Module(s) in the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP LFM 1:7
SPEED TX CLOCK TX CRC RX CRC
LFM.3 1:07 1152K - 18 SYS ENABLE ENABLE
LFM.3 - Link Framing Module type
1:07 - Nest:slot location of specified Link Framing
Module
SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
TX CRC - Transmit cyclic redundancy check
RX CRC - Receive cyclic redundancy check
A. TYPICAL LFM.3 LINK FRAMING MODULE PARAMETER DISPLAY
N0010>DSP LFM 1:11
A:FRAME B:FRAME
LFM.12 1:11 D4 D4
A:SPEED A:LN DRV A:LENGTH A:TX CLK A:YELLOW A:B8ZS
LFM.12 1:11 56K=56x1 EXT ->267 FT SYS ENABLE ENABLE
B:SPEED B:LN DRV B:LENGTH B:TX CLK B:YELLOW B:B8ZS
LFM.12 1:11 56K=56x1 EXT ->267 FT SYS ENABLE ENABLE
LFM.12 - Link Framing Module type
1:11 - Nest:slot location of specified Link Framing
Module
A:FRAME - Framing format for connection A
B:FRAME - Framing format for connection B
(two-to-two mode only)
A:SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection A
A:LN DRV - Line driver type for connection A
A:LENGTH - Line length for connection A
A:TX CLK - Source of transmit clock for connection A
A:YELLOW - Yellow alarm for connection A
A:B8ZS - Bipolar operation for connection A
B:SPEED - Intermachine link speed for connection B
(two-to-one or two-to-two mode only)
B:LN DRV - Line driver type for connection B
(two-to-two mode only)
B:LENGTH - Line length for connection B
(two-to-two mode only)
B:TX CLK - Source of transmit clock for connection B (two-to-two mode only)
B:YELLOW - Yellow alarm for connection B
(two-to-two mode only)
B:B8ZS - Bipolar operation for connection B
(two-to-two mode only)
B. TYPICAL LFM.12 LINK FRAMING MODULE PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-22. Typical Link Framing Parameter Displays (DSP LFM) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-44
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP LFM 1:13
A:MODULE A: SPEED B:MODULE B: SPEED
LFM.14 1:13 UNFRAMED 64K=64x1 NONE
C:MODULE C: SPEED D:MODULE D: SPEED
LFM.14 1:13 D5 1544 K UNFRAMED 64K=64x1
LFM.14 - Link Framing Module type
1:13 - Nest:slot location of specified Link Framing
Module
A:MODULE - Framing type for connection A
A:SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection A
B:MODULE - Framing type for connection B
B:SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection B
C:MODULE - Framing type for connection C
C:SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection C
D:MODULE - Framing type for connection D
D:SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection D
C. TYPICAL LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE PARAMETER DISPLAY
Figure 5-22. Typical Link Framing Parameter Displays (DSP LFM) (Sheet 2)
DISPLAY MAP FOR X.50 SUBRATE CHANNELS (DSP MAP) COMMAND
The DSP MAP command displays the X.50 subrate channel database time slot assignments,
Figure 5-23, for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
[NOD xxxx] DSP MAP
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
where: cc = X.50 DS-0 channel (1-16)
N0020>DSP MAP 1:5:1
XS0 1:05:01 TIMESLOT MAP :
PHASE: A A A A B B B B C C C C D D D D E E E E
TSLOT: 01 06 11 16 02 07 12 17 03 08 13 18 04 09 14 19 05 10 15 20
XCHAN: 01 01 01 01 02 03 02 03 -- -- -- -- 04 05 06 07 -- -- -- --
XS0 1:05:01 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel number
PHASE - X.50 time slot grouping (A-E)
TSLOT - Time slots in X.50 frame
XCHAN - X.50 subrate channels
-- (dashes) - Unassigned time slots
Figure 5-23. Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Map Display (DSP MAP)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-45
DISPLAY MASTER DS-0 CHANNELS (DSP MDS0) COMMAND
The DSP MDS0 command displays the current parameter values, Figure 5-24, for the specified master DS-0 channel(s) of a Channelized Services Processor.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP MDS0
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
NOTE:
The DSP MDS0 command must be issued to master DS-0 channel(s).
If the command is issued to slave DS-0 channel(s), the command is rejected.
N0010>DSP MDS0 1:9:6,1:9:11,1:9:18,1:9:22
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
1:9:06 ORIG 2 01 07 A-PCM NONE
1:9:11 ORIG 2 01 07 A-PCM AB
1:9:18 ORIG 2 01 07 A-PCM A
1:9:22 ORIG 2 01 07 A-PCM AB
A OOS B OOS C D OOS OOS BITS DSC ALM
1:9:06 1A ENABLE
1:9:11 MARK MARK
1:9:18 SP-MK SPACE
1:9:22 MARK MARK
1:9:06 - Nest:slot:channel number of master DS-0 channel
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling, where:
SP = Space
MK = Mark
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
Figure 5-24. Typical Master DS-0 Channel Parameter Display (DSP MDS0)
5-46
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY PHONE NUMBERS (DSP PHN BCK, DSP PHN XDL)
COMMANDS
The DSP PHN BCK and DSP PHN XDL commands display the ISDN or Switched 56K phone number directories for the specified Interlink Module or Integrated Trunk Module, Figure 5-25.
The DSP PHN BCK command displays the directory of phone numbers used for the dial-up service link backup feature utilized by the Interlink Module and the Integrated Trunk Module.
The DSP PHN XDL command displays the directory of phone numbers used for the dial-up service link expansion and dial link features utilized only by the Integrated Trunk Module.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DSP PHN BCK 1:ss
[NOD xxxx] DSP PHN XDL 1:ss
N0010>DSP PHN XDL 1:10
DS0 NTL TYPE LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER DS0 NTL TYPE LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER
01 201-555-1234-1555-11 17
02 201-555-2222 18
03 201-555-3333 19
04 609-555-4321 20
05 21
06 22
07 I H0 011-44-555:473#* 23
08 24
09 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
13 29
14 30
15 31
16
DS0 - DS-0 channels
NTL - National or international
An "
I
" indicates an international phone number.
If blank, the phone number is national
(domestic).
TYPE - B-channel type or H0-channel type
An "H0" indicates an H0-channel.
If blank, the channel is a B-channel.
LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER - ISDN or Switched
56K phone number. The asterisk (*) and pound sign (#) are used with ISDN applications only.
Figure 5-25. Typical Phone Number Directory for Expansion Display (DSP PHN XDL)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-47
DISPLAY BROADCAST/POLLING CONNECT STATUS
(DSP POL) COMMAND
The DSP POL command displays the connect status and master channel of the specified broadcast/polling group member(s), Figure 5-26.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A] where: /A = displays the connect status of all members in the broadcast/polling group of the specified master channel
N0010>DSP POL 1:11:1-1:11:4
CHAN 1:11:01 -> CONNECTED MASTER CHAN
CHAN 1:11:02 -> CONNECTED MASTER CHAN 1:11:01
CHAN 1:11:03 -> CONNECTED MASTER CHAN 1:11:01
CHAN 1:11:04 -> CONNECTED MASTER CHAN 1:11:01
CHAN 1:11:01 - Nest:slot:channel number of Quad
Synchronous Processor
CONNECTED - Connect status (See Appendix A,
Error and Status Messages, for connect status messages.)
MASTER CHAN - Master broadcast/polling group channel
MASTER CHAN 1:11:01 - Nest:slot:channel number of master channel of the indicated broadcast/polling group member
Figure 5-26. Typical Broadcast/Polling Connect Status Display (DSP POL)
5-48
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY PROM PART NUMBER (DSP PPN) COMMAND
The DSP PPN command displays PROM part number(s) for module(s) in the specified slot location(s), Figure 5-27. This display enables you to identify current firmware or software configuration of the following modules: Network Module, Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk
Module, Channelized Services Processor, Voice Processor, Voice Server Module, D-Channel
Module, Quad Asynchronous Module, Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Station
Module, Foreign Exchange Office Module, Isochronous Communication Module, Dual
Isochronous Module, and X.50 Server Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP PPN
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP PPN *
NCL SLOT 1:01
RP48101C
RP50012A-A
RP50012A-B
ILC SLOT 1:03
RP50013A
ILQ SLOT 1:05
RP47780B
RP50003B
RP50004B
ILP SLOT 1:07
RP47698C
VSM SLOT 1:09
RP48142A
RP48141A
XSM SLOT 1:11
RP48117A
RP48120A
NCL SLOT 1:01 - Module type and slot location
RPnnnnnA - PROM part number, where:
RPnnnnn = Indicates part number
A = Suffix letter indicates firmware or software revision level
NOTE: For NCL Module, the boot PROM version is listed first, followed by the software version in the flash EPROM bank (-A or -B) that is online, followed by the software version in the other flash EPROM bank (-A or -B) that is offline.
For ILQ, VSM.3, VSM.5, and XSM Modules, the boot PROM version is listed first, followed by the software version.
Figure 5-27. Typical PROM Part Number Display (DSP PPN)
L2UG
6/30/97
5-49
DISPLAY ABM PROFILE PARAMETERS (DSP PRO) COMMAND
The DSP PRO command displays the ABM profile parameters for the specified ABM profile(s),
Figure 5-28.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
[/D]
[NOD xxxx] DSP PRO /D where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250)
* = displays parameters of all ABM profiles
/D = includes default ABM profile parameters in the display
If DSP PRO/D is entered alone, without ABM profile numbers, the command displays only the default parameters of the ABM profile.
N0010>DSP PRO 6/D
ENCRYPT MAXSAT LNKEPR LNKGRP GROOMING
DEFAULT DONT CARE DONT CARE DONT CARE DONT CARE DISABLE
PROFILE 006 DONT CARE 02 VGOOD <E-5 1 ENABLE
BMPSTATE BMPLEVEL OVERRIDE
DEFAULT DISABLE DISABLE
PROFILE 006 BUMPEE 04 ENABLE
DEFAULT - Default ABM profile parameters
(displayed when /D is included in command)
PROFILE 006 - Parameters for ABM profile specified in command
ENCRYPT - Encryption
MAXSAT - Satellite threshold
LNKEPR - Link error performance
LNKGRP - Link group
GROOMING - Grooming (ENABLE/DISABLE)
BMPSTATE - Bumping state
BMPLEVEL - Bumping level (displayed only when the bumping state is BUMPER, BUMPEE, or
BOTH)
OVERRIDE - Override (ENABLE/DISABLE)
Figure 5-28. Typical ABM Profile Parameter Display (DSP PRO)
5-50
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY QUALITY PARAMETERS (DSP QUA) COMMAND
The DSP QUA command displays the current quality parameter values defined for performance monitoring of the interface of the Voice Processor(s) or Channelized Services Processor(s) specified, Figure 5-29.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP QUA 1:11
ILP 1:11
ALARM : ENABLE
SAMPLE INTERVAL : 10 SEC
ERROR TEST PERIOD : 24 HR
SEVERE ERROR TEST PERIOD : 15 MIN
SEVERE ERROR : 100
ERROR THRESHOLD : 1200
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD : 200
ILP 1:11 - Voice Processor location (CSP location is displayed when the DSP QUA command is issued for a Channelized Services Processor.)
ALARM - Enable/disable Quality Alarm Report
SAMPLE INTERVAL - Quality sample interval
ERROR TEST PERIOD - Error test period
SEVERE ERROR TEST PERIOD - Severe error test period
SEVERE ERROR - Number of errors in sample interval that, if exceeded, will be declared a severe error
ERROR THRESHOLD - Error threshold
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD - Severe error threshold
Figure 5-29. Typical Quality Parameter Display (DSP QUA)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-51
DISPLAY REVISION (DSP REV) COMMAND
The DSP REV command displays the contents of the module revision PROM for the specified
Network Module, Voice Processor, Channelized Services Processor, Integrated Trunk Module,
Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Station Module, Foreign Exchange Office Module,
Isochronous Communication Module, Voice Server Module, D-Channel Module, or X.50 Server
Module, Figure 5-30.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP REV
{
* or n:ss
}
N0010>DSP REV *
SLOT 1:01
AW47116-OX1 REV OX-01 M-NCL. SN1234567
SLOT 1:06
AW15291-1 REV 02- M-ILP SN1234567
SLOT 1:01 - Slot location of module
AW47116-OX1 - Assembly number
REV OX-01 - Revision level
M-NCL. - Module name
SN1234567 - Serial number
Figure 5-30. Typical Revision Parameter Display (DSP REV)
5-52
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY ROUTING PARAMETERS (DSP RTE) COMMAND
The DSP RTE command displays the current routing parameter values to the nodes specified,
Figure 5-31.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP RTE
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]...
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
N0010>DSP RTE 2,3,4,97
NODE:0002
LINK BUNDLE PATH DELAY
11 01 00
05 N/A 03
17 04 03
NODE:0003
LINK BUNDLE PATH DELAY
17 05 01
03 N/A 02
05 N/A 02
NODE:0004
LINK BUNDLE PATH DELAY
17 06 00
NODE:0097
LINK BUNDLE PATH DELAY
05 N/A 00
11 01 01
17 06 01
NODE:0002 - Node to which intermachine links are routed
LINK - Slot location of Interlink Module or Integrated
Trunk Module associated with intermachine link
BUNDLE - Bundle number for Integrated Trunk
Module (not applicable for Interlink Module)
PATH DELAY - Path delay (00 to 07) = minimum number of bypasses between local node and node specified
Figure 5-31. Typical Routing Parameter Display (DSP RTE)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-53
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG DS0) COMMAND
The DSP SIG DS0 command continuously displays the signaling of the specified Voice
Processor, Channelized Services Processor, or Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 channel at both the
DS-1 interface (EQ) and the common bus (LI), Figure 5-32. The specified Channelized Services
Processor or Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 channel must have a bundle size of 1. To end the display, press the RETURN key.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SIG DS0 n:ss:cc
NOTE:
Attempting to display signaling for transparent (DATA) DS-0 channels will be rejected.
N0010>DSP SIG DS0 1:11:2
ILP 1:11:02
EQ: A B C D LI: A B C D
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ILP 1:11:02 - Voice Processor location (ILQ location is displayed when the DSP SIG DS0 command is issued for an Integrated Trunk Module and
CSP location is displayed when the DSP SIG
DS0 command is issued for a Channelized
Services Processor.)
EQ - Equipment signaling
A - A signal
B - B signal
C - C signal
D - D signal
LI - Line signaling
NOTE: If no signaling is present on the specified DS-0 channel, the message "NO SIGNALING EXISTS FOR THIS
DS0" is displayed.
Figure 5-32. Typical DS-0 Channel Signaling Display (DSP SIG DS0)
5-54
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG EQ) COMMAND
The DSP SIG EQ command displays the instantaneous state of the signals received from the DS-1 interface by the Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), or Integrated Trunk
Module(s) specified, Figure 5-33, for all DS-0 channels.
NOTE:
Displayed information will only be valid for a Channelized Services
Processor or Integrated Trunk Module when the bundle size is 1.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SIG EQ
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP SIG EQ 1:11
ILP 1:11
DS0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DS0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
B 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
C 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
ILP 1:11 - Voice Processor location (ILQ location is displayed when the DSP SIG EQ command is issued for an Integrated Trunk Module and CSP location is displayed when the DSP SIG EQ command is issued for a Channelized Services
Processor.)
DS0 - DS-0 channel numbers
A - A signal
B - B signal
C - C signal
D - D signal
Figure 5-33. Typical Signaling from DS-1 Interface Display (DSP SIG EQ)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-55
DISPLAY SIGNALING (DSP SIG LI) COMMAND
The DSP SIG LI command displays the instantaneous state of the signals sent to the DS-1 interface from the Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), or Integrated Trunk
Module(s) specified, Figure 5-34, for all DS-0 channels.
NOTE:
Displayed information will only be valid for a Channelized Services
Processor or Integrated Trunk Module when the bundle size is 1.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SIG LI
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP SIG LI 1:11
ILP 1:11
DS0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
B 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
C 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
D 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
DS0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
C 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
ILP 1:11 - Voice Processor location (ILQ location is displayed when the DSP SIG LI command is issued for an Integrated Trunk Module and CSP location is displayed when the DSP SIG LI command is issued for a Channelized Services
Processor.)
DS0 - DS-0 channel numbers
A - A signal
B - B signal
C - C signal
D - D signal
Figure 5-34. Typical Signaling toward DS-1 Interface Display (DSP SIG LI)
5-56
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY SUPERVISORY PORT PARAMETERS (DSP SP) COMMAND
The DSP SP command displays the current supervisory port parameter values, Figure 5-35.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SP
N0010>DSP SP
*** DEFAULT PARAMETERS SELECTED ***
SPEED STOP DATA
9600 01 8BITS NONE
*** DEFAULT PARAMETERS SELECTED *** -
Message appears when Network Module DIP switch K1-7 is set to OFF/OPEN to indicate default parameters are in effect.
SPEED - Supervisory port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
DATA - Number of data bits and type of parity
Figure 5-35. Typical Supervisory Port Parameter Display (DSP SP)
DISPLAY SPEED PROFILE (DSP SPR) COMMAND
The DSP SPR command displays the defined Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) for the specified profile number, Figure 5-36.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SPR
{
* or sp[-sp]...
[
,sp[-sp]
]}
where: sp = speed profile number (1-16)
N0010>DSP SPR 4
PROF: 04 1544000 1064000 728000 504000 336000
224000 153600 100000 64000 40800
19200
PROF: 04 - Speed profile number followed by valid speed(s) (bps)
NOTE: When "invalid" is displayed instead of a valid speed, a speed not supported by the Isochronous
Communication Module was defined via TIME/VIEW or the computer port.
Figure 5-36. Typical Speed Profile Display (DSP SPR)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-57
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 1 (DSP ST ALM 1) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 1 command displays the nest and slot numbers for modules that were inserted or removed, Figure 5-37.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 1[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 1 history
NOTE:
The prompt appears if no modules were inserted or removed since the last DSP ST ALM 1/C command was issued or since startup/Network Module reset.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 1
MODULE INSERTED OR REMOVED: 1:10
1:10 - Nest:slot number of module
Figure 5-37. Typical Alarm 1 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 1)
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 2 (DSP ST ALM 2) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 2 command displays the nest and slot number for modules that have start-up hardware errors, Figure 5-38.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 2[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 2 history
NOTE:
The prompt appears if no modules have had start-up hardware errors since the last DSP ST ALM 2/C command was issued or since startup/Network Module reset.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 2
HARDWARE ERROR ON STARTUP: 1:09
1:09 - Nest:slot number of module
Figure 5-38. Typical Alarm 2 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 2)
5-58
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 6 (DSP ST ALM 6) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 6 command displays the Interlink Module slot numbers and the Integrated
Trunk Module slot and bundle numbers for intermachine links that are declared in-service, Figure
5-39. Alarm 6 is generated when a new bundle comes online or when a dialed facility is connected. Alarm 6 is also generated when an alarm 7 (link declared out-of-service) has occurred and the link quality has improved sufficiently to restore service.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 6[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 6 history
N0010>DSP ST ALM 6
IN-SERVICE ILCS: 03 05
IN-SERVICE BUNDLES: 10:01 10:05
03 05 - In-service Interlink Module slot numbers 10:01 10:05 - In-service Integrated Trunk Module slot:bundle numbers
Figure 5-39. Typical Alarm 6 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 6)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-59
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 7 (DSP ST ALM 7) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 7 command displays the Interlink Module slot numbers and the Integrated
Trunk Module slot and bundle numbers for intermachine links that are declared out-of-service,
Figure 5-40. The reason for each out-of-service condition is also displayed.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 7[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 7 history
N0010>DSP ST ALM 7
OUT-OF-SERVICE LINKS:
ILC 04 - REMOTE END RESET
ILQ 07:01 - LOCAL OUT OF SYNC 07:02 - REMOTE OUT OF SYNC
07:03 - ARQ FAILURE 07:10 - LOSS OF CLOCK
07:11 - BUNDLE RESET 07:16 - BUNDLE LOOPBACK
07:24 - EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
ILQ 11 - COMMAND RESET
ILC 04 - Out-of-service Interlink Module slot number followed by reason for out-of-service condition
ILQ 07:01 - Out-of-service Integrated Trunk Module slot:proprietary bundle number followed by reason for out-of-service condition
ILQ 11 - Integrated Trunk Module alarm (overrides any bundle alarms)
Figure 5-40. Typical Alarm 7 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 7)
5-60
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 9 (DSP ST ALM 9) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 9 command displays the nest and slot numbers for modules that have database/hardware conflicts, Figure 5-41.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 9[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 9 history
NOTE:
The prompt appears if no modules have experienced database/hardware conflicts since the last DSP ST ALM 9/C command was issued or since start-up/Network Module reset.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 9
DATABASE CONFLICT: 1:10
1:10 - Nest:slot number of module
Figure 5-41. Typical Alarm 9 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 9)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-61
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 10 (DSP ST ALM 10) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 10 command, Figure 5-42, indicates the LINK/2+ System has been identified with an invalid node number and/or a module in the displayed slot has failed to respond to the
Network Module. The Network Module nest and slot numbers are displayed if a node number greater than 2000 has been defined.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 10[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 10 history
NOTE:
The prompt appears if no invalid local node number or nonresponsive module errors have occurred since the last DSP ST
ALM 10/C command was issued or since start-up/Network Module reset.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 10
INVALID SLOT OR LOCAL NODE # 1:10 3:03
1:10 3:03 - Nest:slot numbers of modules that caused the alarm
Figure 5-42. Typical Alarm 10 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 10)
5-62
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 12 (DSP ST ALM 12) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 12 command displays the nest, slot, and channel numbers for channels or
DS-0s that have failed initial connection attempts, Figure 5-43. For Integrated Trunk Module nonproprietary bundles, this alarm may also indicate a public network problem for the specified
DS-0.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 12[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 12 history
N0024>DSP ST ALM 12
CONNECTION FAILURE
1:05 1:07:01 1:07:02 1:07:03 1:07:04 1:11:01
1:11:02:20 2:05:01 2:05:02 2:05:03 2:05:04 2:07:01
3:01:04 2:07:02 2:07:03 2:07:04 3:01:01 3:01:02
3:01:03
1:05 - Nest:slot number of Interlink Module with simplex channel connection failure (appears at the receiving end of an intermachine link with a simplex channel connection failure)
1:07:01 - Nest:slot:bundle number of channel/DS-0 connection failure
1:11:01 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel number connection failure
1:11:02:20 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0:X.50 subrate channel number connection failure
Figure 5-43. Typical Alarm 12 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 12)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-63
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 15 (DSP ST ALM 15) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 15 command displays the alarm 15 status history of all Voice Processors at the node, Figure 5-44.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 15[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 15 history after alarms are displayed
N0010>DSP ST ALM 15
ILP 1:11 ALARM : NONE
QUALITY : GOOD
**DISC ALARM**
ILP 1:11 - Voice Processor location
ALARM - Alarm condition, where:
NONE = No alarm
RED = Red alarm
YELLOW = Yellow alarm
RED/YELLOW = Red and yellow alarm
QUALITY - Quality threshold exceeded alarm, where:
GOOD = No error threshold exceeded
ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED = Error threshold exceeded
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED =
Severe error threshold exceeded
ERROR/SEVERE THRESHOLD EXCEEDED =
Both error and severe error threshold exceeded
**DISC ALARM** - Indicates that a DS-0 channel has failed to connect (will only be displayed if that DS-0 channel has DSC ALM parameter enabled)
Figure 5-44. Typical Alarm 15 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 15)
5-64
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 21 (DSP ST ALM 21) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 21 command displays the alarm 21 status history of all Channelized Services
Processors and Integrated Trunk Modules at the node, Figure 5-45.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 21[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 21 history after alarms are displayed
N0010>DSP ST ALM 21
ILQ 1:10 ALARM : NONE
CSP 1:03 ALARM : RED
QUALITY : GOOD
**DISC ALARM**
ILQ 1:10 - Integrated Trunk Module location
CSP 1:03 - Channelized Services Processor location
ALARM - Alarm condition, where:
NONE = No alarm
RED = Red alarm
YELLOW = Yellow alarm
RED/YELLOW = Red and yellow alarm
QUALITY - Quality threshold exceeded alarm
(Channelized Services Processor only), where:
GOOD = No error threshold exceeded
ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED = Error threshold exceeded
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED =
Severe error threshold exceeded
ERROR/SEVERE THRESHOLD EXCEEDED =
Both error and severe error threshold exceeded
**DISC ALARM** - Indicates that a DS-0 channel has failed to connect (will only be displayed if that DS-0 channel has DSC ALM parameter enabled)
Figure 5-45. Typical Alarm 21 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 21)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-65
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 24 (DSP ST ALM 24) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 24 command displays the required, current, and worst bit error rate (BER),
Figure 5-46, for intermachine links and integrated trunk bundles whose BER fell below the error performance alarm threshold specified in the intermachine link parameters or in the integrated trunk bundle parameters. Alarm 24 is generated each time a link or bundle degrades below the user-specified required BER alarm threshold. Alarm 24 is not generated by an offline module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 24[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 24 history after alarms are displayed
NOTE:
The alarm queue is not cleared. The command DSP AQ/C will clear the alarm queue but will not clear alarm 24 history.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 24
LINK REQUIRED BER CURRENT BER WORST BER
03 VERY GOOD VERY GOOD GOOD
04’ VERY GOOD VERY GOOD GOOD
10:01 VERY GOOD VERY GOOD FAIR
LINK - Slot location of Interlink Module or slot:bundle of Integrated Trunk Module producing alarm 24
REQUIRED BER - Required bit error rate as specified by alarm threshold parameter (VERY
GOOD, GOOD, or FAIR)
CURRENT BER - Current bit error rate (VERY
GOOD, GOOD, FAIR, or POOR)
WORST BER - Worst bit error rate (GOOD, FAIR, or
POOR) since the violation occurred.
Value is updated each time the bit error rate degrades below the last violation.
04’ - Apostrophe indicates offline module of redundant pair.
Figure 5-46. Typical Alarm 24 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 24)
5-66
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 25 (DSP ST ALM 25) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 25 command displays BER information, Figure 5-47, for intermachine links and integrated trunk bundles whose BER meets or exceeds the error performance alarm threshold specified in the intermachine link parameters or in the integrated trunk bundle parameters. Alarm
25 is generated only after an alarm 24 (error performance violation) has occurred and the link or bundle quality has improved sufficiently to remove the violation. Alarm 25 is not generated by an offline module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 25[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 25 history
N0010>DSP ST ALM 25
LINK REQUIRED BER CURRENT BER
03 VERY GOOD VERY GOOD
10:01 VERY GOOD VERY GOOD
LINK - Slot location of Interlink Module or slot:bundle of Integrated Trunk Module producing the alarm
REQUIRED BER - Required bit error rate as specified by alarm threshold parameter (VERY
GOOD, GOOD, or FAIR)
CURRENT BER - Current bit error rate (VERY
GOOD, GOOD, FAIR, or POOR)
Figure 5-47. Typical Alarm 25 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 25)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-67
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 26 (DSP ST ALM 26) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 26 command displays channels that were disconnected due to error performance violations. Information on up to 32 disconnected channels is displayed, Figure 5-48.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 26[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 26 history. Alarm 26 will not reoccur until more disconnects result from error performance violations.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 26
THE LAST 32 CHANNEL(S) DISCONNECTED DUE TO EP VIOLATION:
DATE: JUL-27-1993
CHAN: TIME: CHAN: TIME:
1:09:24 17:01:20 1:09:23 17:01:12
1:09:22 17:01:10 1:09:21 17:01:05
1:09:20 17:01:01 1:09:19 17:00:43
1:09:18 17:00:40 1:09:17 17:00:31
1:05:16 03:00:26 1:05:15 03:00:20
1:05:14 03:00:09 1:05:13 03:00:06
1:05:12 03:00:03 1:05:12 03:00:01
DATE: JUL-26-1993
CHAN: TIME: CHAN: TIME:
1:07:18 23:10:34 1:07:17 23:10:30
1:07:16 23:10:24 1:07:15 23:10:20
1:07:14 23:10:09 1:07:13 23:10:06
1:07:12 23:10:04 1:07:11 23:10:00
1:07:10 22:00:01 1:07:09 21:40:58
1:07:08 21:40:52 1:07:07 21:40:50
1:07:06 21:40:20 1:07:05 21:40:18
1:07:04 21:40:16 1:07:03 21:40:14
1:07:02 21:40:12 1:07:01 21:40:10
THE LAST 32 CHANNEL(S) - Number of channels disconnected due to error performance violation since alarm 26 was last cleared. If more than 32 disconnects occurred, the last 32 will be displayed.
DATE - Date of disconnect
CHAN - Nest:slot:channel number of disconnected channels
TIME - Time of disconnect (hour:minute:second)
Figure 5-48. Typical Alarm 26 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 26)
5-68
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 27 (DSP ST ALM 27) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 27 command displays channels that were disconnected due to bumping.
Information on up to 32 disconnected channels is displayed, Figure 5-49.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 27[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 27 history. Alarm 27 will not reoccur until more disconnects result from bumped channels.
N0001>DSP ST ALM 27
THE LAST 32 CHANNEL(S) DISCONNECTED DUE TO BUMPING:
DATE: SEP-27-1993
CHAN: TIME: BUMPER: CHAN: TIME: BUMPER:
1:09:24 17:01:20 N0010 1:14:24 1:09:23 17:01:12 N0010 1:14:23
1:09:22 17:01:10 N0010 1:14:22 1:09:21 17:01:05 N0010 1:14:21
1:09:20 17:01:01 N0010 1:14:20 1:09:19 17:00:43 N0010 1:14:19
1:09:18 17:00:40 N0010 1:14:18 1:09:17 17:00:31 N0010 1:14:17
1:05:16 03:00:26 N0010 1:15:06 1:05:15 03:00:20 N0010 1:15:15
1:05:14 03:00:09 N0010 1:15:14 1:05:13 03:00:06 N0010 1:15:13
1:05:12 03:00:03 N0010 1:15:12 1:05:12 03:00:01 N0010 1:15:11
DATE: SEP-26-1993
CHAN: TIME: BUMPER: CHAN: TIME: BUMPER:
1:07:18 23:10:34 N0010 1:16:18 1:07:17 23:10:30 N0010 1:16:17
1:07:16 23:10:24 N0010 1:16:16 1:07:15 23:10:20 N0010 1:16:15
1:07:14 23:10:09 N0010 1:16:14 1:07:13 23:10:06 N0010 1:16:13
1:07:12 23:10:04 N0010 1:16:12 1:07:11 23:10:00 N0010 1:16:11
1:07:10 22:00:01 N0010 1:16:10 1:07:09 21:40:58 N0010 1:16:09
1:07:08 21:40:52 N0010 1:16:08 1:07:07 21:40:50 N0010 1:16:07
1:07:06 21:40:20 N0010 1:16:06 1:07:05 21:40:18 N0010 1:16:05
1:07:04 21:40:16 N0010 1:16:04 1:07:03 21:40:14 N0010 1:16:03
1:07:02 21:40:12 N0010 1:16:02 1:07:01 21:40:10 N0010 1:16:01
THE LAST 32 CHANNEL(S) - Number of channels bumped since alarm 27 was last cleared. If more than 32 disconnects occurred, the last 32 will be displayed.
DATE - Date of disconnect
CHAN - Nest:slot:channel number of disconnected channels
TIME - Time of disconnect (hour:minute:second)
BUMPER - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of bumping channel
Figure 5-49. Typical Alarm 27 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 27)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-69
DISPLAY STATUS ALARM 33 (DSP ST ALM 33) COMMAND
The DSP ST ALM 33 command displays the out-of-service status for the X.50 DS-0 channels on the specified X.50 Server Module, Figure 5-50.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST ALM 33[/C] where: /C = clears the alarm 33 history.
N0010>DSP ST ALM 33
XS0 OOS:
1:09:01 1:09:02 1:09:03 1:09:04 1:10:02 2:03:08
2:03:09 2:03:10 2:03:11 2:03:12 2:03:13 2:03:14
2:03:15 2:03:16 3:05:01 3:05:02 3:05:03 3:05:04
3:05:05
XS0 OOS - X.50 DS-0 channels that are out-ofservice
1:09:01 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel number that is out-of-service
Figure 5-50. Typical Alarm 33 Status Display (DSP ST ALM 33)
5-70
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY INTEGRATED TRUNK BUNDLE STATUS (DSP ST BDL)
COMMAND
The DSP ST BDL command displays dial-up service type, bit error rate, out-of-sync conditions, loopback status, and supervisory band frame counts for the specified integrated trunk bundle(s),
Figure 5-51. The command displays the same results as a DSP ST DL command issued to an
Integrated Trunk Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BDL
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
[option] where option is one of the following:
/B = clears BER window
/C = clears counters
NOTE:
Issuing /B will disconnect channels if present BER is less than userspecified link error performance rate.
The displayed bandwidth percentage used by the connections may differ slightly due to rounding method used on Interlink Module to
Integrated Trunk Module intermachine links.
N0010>DSP ST BDL 1:10:1
LINK 1:10:01 ->NODE:0020 L04:01
LINK TYPE=008 DIAL TYPE=DIAL LINK
BER=VERY GOOD WINDOWS=12/032
REMOTE BER=VERY GOOD
OOS=
LOOP=NL
FNS.=N/A
CONNECTIONS : 5
PERCENT BW USED: 10 %
AVAILABLE BW : 144800 BPS
VOICE BW USED : 1600 BPS
DATA BW USED : 7200 BPS
FS: 0043
FR: 0025
RT: 0000
NR: 0000
BS: 0012
OS: 0003
LINK 1:10:01 - Nest:slot:bundle number and online/offline status of Integrated Trunk Module, where:
1:ss:cc = Online module
1:ss:cc’ = Offline module
*
= If asterisk precedes link, integrated trunk is out-of-service.
Figure 5-51. Typical Integrated Trunk Bundle Status Display (DSP ST BDL) (Sheet 1 of 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-71
->NODE:0020 L04:01 - Node number at destination of active intermachine link. Blank if intermachine link is inactive. Node number is followed by destination intermachine link slot:bundle number or slot number if Interlink Module.
LINK TYPE - Link type–when proprietary bundle is
in-service, indicates the frame mode at which the intermachine link is operating. When proprietary bundle is in loopback, indicates the frame mode of the bundle in the node specified by the display command, where:
006 or 008 = LINK/2+ System operating in frame mode 2
NOTE: DS-0 bandwidth contention channels should not be connected over intermachine links with a link type less than 008.
DIAL TYPE - Dial-up service type, where:
DIAL LINK = dial link
EXPANSION FOR 1:ss = Interlink Module expanded
EXPANSION FOR 1:ss:cc = Bundle expanded
LINKBACK FOR 1:ss = Interlink Module backed up
LINKBACK FOR 1:ss:cc = Bundle backed up
NONE = Nondial-up service
BER - Bit error rate condition, where:
PEND = Bit error rate test is in progress, or
Integrated Trunk Module never synchronized to an integrated trunk.
VERY GOOD = Test passed; BER better than
1x10-5
GOOD = Test passed; BER between 1x10-5 and
1x10-4
FAIR = Test passed; BER between 1x10-4 and
1x10-3
POOR = Test failed; BER worse than 1x10-3
WINDOWS - The ratio of full BER windows to total number of BER windows is displayed on the same line as the BER. If all BER windows are full, the window information is not displayed. The total number of BER windows depends on data rate:
Data Rate
448 kbps and greater
Greater than 192 kbps and less than 448 kbps
192 kbps and below
Number of
BER Windows
32 windows
80 windows
160 windows
BER level changes are not checked and updated each time a window is updated, but only for window transition periods. This results in a delay in updating BER levels.
REMOTE BER - Remote bit error rate. N/A indicates integrated trunk is in loopback, or remote node has an earlier firmware revision that does not provide this information.
OOS - Out-of-sync condition, where:
L = Local node is out-of-sync.
R = Remote node is out-of-sync.
LR = Both ends of integrated trunk are out-ofsync. (ROS must have been detected prior to
LOS.)
blank = Link is synchronized.
LOOP - Loopback status of integrated trunk (See
Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for messages.) Loopback time is also displayed.
FNS.= N/A - EIA functions: not applicable
(Not applicable for integrated trunk)
CONNECTIONS - Number of channel connections
PERCENT BW USED - Percent bandwidth used by the connections
AVAILABLE BW - Available bandwidth, in bps
VOICE BW USED - Voice bandwidth used, in bps
DATA BW USED - Data bandwidth used, in bps
FS - Number of supervisory frames sent
FR - Number of supervisory frames received
RT - Number of supervisory frames retransmitted
NR - Number of negative acknowledgments sent.
Indicates errors in supervisory data received.
BS - Number of bad sync characters received
OS - Number of out-of-sync conditions
NOTE: Error displays and counters are only cleared by a "/C" suffix to the DSP ST BDL command.
"/B" suffix clears the BER test by clearing the windows. Issuing /B will disconnect channels if present BER is less than user-specified link error performance rate.
During bundle dialing and alignment, DSP ST BDL response indicates bundle is not connected since bundle and intermachine link status is not available yet. However, DSP DST DS0 response indicates that bundle is connected. Upon completion of dialing and bundle alignment, DSP ST BDL response will show bundle status.
Figure 5-51. Typical Integrated Trunk Bundle Status Display (DSP ST BDL) (Sheet 2)
5-72
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY BYPASS CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST BP) COMMAND
The DSP ST BP command displays the status of the specified bypass channel(s), and clears phasor error history.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]...
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]...
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
where: ccc = bypass channel number (1 to 511)
This command can also be entered as:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BP Nxxxx *
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BP Nxxxx {n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]]}
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BP Nxxxx {n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]]}
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST BP Nxxxx {n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
…
[,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]]} where: * n:ss:c
= all originating or terminating channels
= an originating or terminating I/O channel n:ss:cc = an originating or terminating DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel n:ss:cc:sr = an originating or terminating X.50 subrate channel
Each bypass channel displayed, Figure 5-52, represents a full duplex channel consisting of two separate connections, ORIG and TERM. These connections are completely independent of each other. If the connection of one of the bypass channel pair has not yet been established, the appropriate field will display an asterisk to indicate that the connection is pending.
L2UG
6/30/94
5-73
N0010>DSP ST BP 1:18:1-1:18:10
SLOT 1:18 DEST PHASOR LOOP CH TYPE FNS.
CH 001 ORIG: N0010 CHAN 1:07:01 CSP 07 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0010 CHAN 1:09:01 CSP 09 14
CH 002 ORIG: N0010 CHAN 1:07:02 CSP 07 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0120 CHAN 1:07:01 LINK 05 14 ER
CH 003 ORIG: N0120 CHAN 1:07:04 LINK 11 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0010 CHAN 1:07:04 CSP 07 14 ER
CH 004 ORIG: N0250 CHAN 2:02:01 LINK 17 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0097 CHAN 2:02:01 14
CH 005 ORIG: N0002 CHAN 1:05:04 LINK 15 *
TERM: N0120 CHAN 1:05:04
CH 006 ORIG: N0002 CHAN 1:04:02 LINK 11 *
TERM: N0120 CHAN 1:04:02 ILQ 03:01
004 IDLE CH(S) IN RANGE
SLOT 1:18 - Online Bypass Module
DEST - Destination information about the originator and terminator channels
CH 001 - Bypass channel number
ORIG: N0010 CHAN 1:07:01 - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of originator channel
CSP 07 - On ORIG line, displays slot location of
Channelized Services Processor or Interlink
Module or slot:bundle of Integrated Trunk
Module that connects towards the originator node, where:
CSP = Channelized Services Processor
ILQ = Integrated Trunk Module
LINK = Interlink Module
XSM = X.50 Server Module
NOTE: An asterisk (*) indicates that the connection is pending.
PHASOR - Phasor size in bytes of bypass pair phasors, where:
ER = Phasor error has occurred.
LOOP - Loopback status of Bypass Module, where:
OFF = Bypass channel not in loopback
ON = Bypass channel in bidirectional loopback
CH TYPE - Type of channel being bypassed, where:
ASYNC = Quad Asynchronous Module channel
SYNC = Synchronous, Isochronous, or Voice
Module channel
FNS. - Mode of transmitting functions, in-band or outof-band
TERM: N0010 CHAN 1:09:01 - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of terminator channel
CSP 09 - On TERM line, displays slot location of
Channelized Services Processor or Interlink
Module or slot:bundle of Integrated Trunk
Module that connects towards the terminator node, where:
CSP = Channelized Services Processor
ILQ = Integrated Trunk Module
LINK = Interlink Module
XSM = X.50 Server Module
004 IDLE CH(S) IN RANGE - Number of idle channels in range selected
Figure 5-52. Typical Bypass Channel Status Display (DSP ST BP)
5-74
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST CH) COMMAND
The DSP ST CH command displays I/O channel condition and loopback status of all I/O channels in specified slot(s), Figure 5-53, and clears phasor error history.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST CH
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP ST CH *
SLOT 1:10
CHANNEL 1 2 3 4
LOOPBK NL NL NL NL
STATUS OK OK ERR OK
VLPTIM 000 000 000 000
VPZPCM -- -- -- --
VPZPRO -- -- -- --
FAX ERR --- --- --- 001
FAX SPD --- 9600 14400 2400
SLOT 1:10 - Module slot location
CHANNEL - Channel number
LOOPBK - Loopback status of channels
STATUS - Channel status (cleared after displayed), where:
OK = Channel is connected with no history of phasor error.
ERR = Channel is connected with phasor error detected.
OFF = Channel is disconnected.
VLPTIM - Loopback timeout (000-240 minutes)
◊
VPZPCM - PCM phasor errors, where:
◊
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
VPZPRO - Processed phasor errors, where:
◊
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
FAX ERR - Number of failed fax connection attempts
(cleared after displayed)§
FAX SPD - Fax speed (cleared after displayed when no fax transmission is in progress)§
Can be any of the following:
14400
12000
9600
7200
4800
2400
For EVM.3, FXO.3, and FXS.3 Modules,
ACTIVE is displayed when fax transmission is in progress.
- - - indicates no fax activity
◊
= Only displayed when a Voice Server Module is installed in the node. Information is displayed in these fields if the channel is being processed by a Voice Server Module.
§ = Only displayed for EVM.2 channels
NOTE: See Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for loopback status messages.
For a Quad Synchronous Processor channel, see Appendix A for additional channel status messages.
Figure 5-53. Typical Channel Status Display (DSP ST CH)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-75
DISPLAY CLOCK STATUS (DSP ST CLK) COMMAND
The DSP ST CLK command displays the status of the digital PLL, nodal timing source, and multiple master clock.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST CLK[/C] where: /C = clears all clock errors, alarm 5, and alarm 23 in the alarm queue
For a Network Module with a digital PLL daughterboard, the command displays the following:
●
If no multiple master clocking nodes are defined, the digital PLL and nodal clock source status are displayed, Figure 5-54A.
●
If a multiple master clocking node(s) is defined, the digital PLL, nodal clock source, and multiple master clock status are displayed, Figure 5-54B.
For a Network Module with an analog PLL daughterboard, the command displays the following:
●
If a multiple master clocking node(s) is defined, the multiple master clock status is displayed,
Figure 5-54C.
●
If no multiple master clocking nodes are defined or no analog PLL is being used, the message
"NO INFORMATION AVAILABLE" is displayed.
5-76
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP ST CLK
CLOCK MASTER
HDW QUALIFY PLL PLL-A PLL-B PLL-C
SLOT 1:01 N/A
SLOT 1:02 ONLINE OK OK OK OK OK OK
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK = 2 - DLR4 CLK TOL: LO
CLOCK STATE = LOCKED STABLE
CLOCK SWITCH OPTION = SLOW
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS = 1
SLOT 1:01 (message) - Nest:slot location of primary or redundant Network Module followed by module status, where:
ONLINE = Module is online.
OFFLINE = Module is offline.
N/A = Module is not physically installed in the
Mainframe or the INS command was not issued for the module.
HDW - PLL hardware status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
CLOCK QUALIFY - Clock qualifier circuit status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
MASTER PLL - Master PLL status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
PLL-A PLL-B PLL-C - PLL-A, -B, and -C status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK - Current nodal timing source
CLK TOL - Clock qualification tolerance level, where:
HI = High tolerance frequency range
LO = Low tolerance frequency range
CLOCK STATE - Current nodal timing state (See
Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for current nodal timing states.)
CLOCK SWITCH OPTION - Clock switching option
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS - Nodal clock source errors (Use the /C modifier or CLR AQ command to clear the current errors.)
A. NETWORK MODULE WITH DIGITAL PLL, NO MULTIPLE MASTER CLOCKING NODES
Figure 5-54. Typical Clock Status Display (DSP ST CLK) (Sheet 1 of 3)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-77
N0010>DSP ST CLK
CLOCK MASTER
HDW QUALIFY PLL PLL-A PLL-B PLL-C
SLOT 1:01 N/A
SLOT 1:02 ONLINE OK OK OK OK OK ERROR
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK = 2 - DLR5 CLK TOL: LO
CLOCK STATE = DELAY FALLBACK
CLOCK SWITCH OPTION = QUICK
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS = 1
MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY = 01 [ASSERTING MASTER MODE]
MASTER CLK LIST: 0011,0025,0034,0067,0120,0132,0145,0169,
0172,0180,0193,0200,0215,0225,0252
CLK LAST CLK LAST
PRIOR NODE TYPE RESP PRIOR NODE TYPE RESP
01 09 0169 EXP
02 0011 DEP 2:00 10 0172 DEP 0:10
03 0025 DEP 1:18 11 0180 DEP 5:00
04 0034 DEP 0:30 12 0193 DEP 8:05
05 0067 EXP 13 0200 EXP
06 0120 DEP 3:08 14 0215 DEP 6:12
07 0132 DEP 2:15 15 0225 DEP 7:00
08 0145 DEP 4:10 16 0252 DEP 8:50
SLOT 1:01 (message) - Nest:slot location of primary or redundant Network Module followed by module status, where:
ONLINE = Module is online.
OFFLINE = Module is offline.
N/A = Module is not physically installed in the
Mainframe or the INS command was not issued for the module.
HDW - PLL hardware status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
CLOCK QUALIFY - Clock qualifier circuit status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
MASTER PLL - Master PLL status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
PLL-A PLL-B PLL-C - PLL-A, -B, and -C status, where:
OK = No error exists
ERROR = Error condition exists
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK - Current nodal timing source
CLK TOL - Clock qualification tolerance level, where:
HI = High tolerance frequency range
LO = Low tolerance frequency range
CLOCK STATE - Current nodal timing state (See
Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for current nodal timing states.)
CLOCK SWITCH OPTION - Clock switching option
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS - Nodal clock source errors (Use the /C modifier or CLR AQ command to clear the current errors.)
MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY - Priority level of this master clocking node
[ASSERTING MASTER MODE] - Master mode message (See Appendix A, Error and Status
Messages, for master mode messages.)
MASTER CLK LIST - Master clocking list
PRIOR - Priority level of node on master clocking list
NODE - Master clocking node on master clocking list
Figure 5-54. Typical Clock Status Display (DSP ST CLK) (Sheet 2)
5-78
L2UG
6/30/94
CLK TYPE - Clock type of node on master clocking list, where:
IND = Independent clock source
DEP = Dependent clock source
EXP = Node has not responded for 9 minutes
LAST RESP - Time in minutes:seconds last clock message was received from the node on master clocking list
B. NETWORK MODULE WITH DIGITAL PLL AND MULTIPLE MASTER CLOCKING NODES
N0010>DSP ST CLK
MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY = 01 [ASSERTING MASTER MODE]
MASTER CLK LIST: 0011
CLK LAST CLK LAST
PRIOR NODE TYPE RESP PRIOR NODE TYPE RESP
01 09
02 0011 DEP 2:00 10
03 11
04 12
05 13
06 14
07 15
08 16
MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY - Priority level of this master clocking node
[ASSERTING MASTER MODE] - Master mode message (See Appendix A, Error and Status
Messages, for master mode messages.)
MASTER CLK LIST - Master clocking list
PRIOR - Priority level of node on master clocking list
NODE - Master clocking node on master clocking list
CLK TYPE - Clock type of node on master clocking list, where:
IND = Independent clock source
DEP = Dependent clock source
EXP = Node has not responded for 9 minutes
LAST RESP - Time in minutes:seconds last clock message was received from the node on master clocking list
C. NETWORK MODULE WITH ANALOG PLL AND MULTIPLE MASTER CLOCKING NODES
Figure 5-54. Typical Clock Status Display (DSP ST CLK) (Sheet 3)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-79
DISPLAY D-CHANNEL MODULE STATUS (DSP ST DCM) COMMAND
The DSP ST DCM command displays the operating status of the D-Channel Module including the ISDN protocol layer 2 and layer 3 performance parameter statistics of the D-Channel Module and also displays the B-channel, H0-channel, and D-channel connection status, Figure 5-55.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C] where: /C = clears the statistics
N0097>DSP ST DCM 1:15-1:17
DCM 1:15 - ONLINE SINCE 12:55:55 DATE: TUE AUG-24-1993 SWITCH: 4/5ESS
D-CHANNEL: CONNECTED TO 1:09:16 PHASOR: OK
---- LAYER 3 STATISTICS: ----
ABNORMAL FAILURES : 1 PROTOCOL DISCRIM ERRORS : 3
XMITTED STATUS MESSAGES : 0 CALL REF NUMBER ERRORS : 0
REC MESSAGES TOO SHORT : 0 CALL REF FLAG ERRORS : 0
---- LAYER 2 STATISTICS: ----
RECEIVED FRAMES FCS ERROR : 0 DATA LINK LAYER RESETS : 0
RETRANSMITTED FRAMES : 23 BUFFER OVERFLOWS : *9999
---- CHANNEL STATUS: ----
DS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHY MAP 6 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LOG STATUS CON CON CON IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL DOK
PHY STATUS IDL CON CON IDL IDL CON CON CON CON CON CON CON CON IDL IDL DOK
DS0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
PHY MAP - - - - - - - - 13 7 8 9 10 11 12
LOG STATUS IDL IDL PND PND IDL IDL IDL IDL CON CON CON CON CON CON CON
PHY STATUS IDL IDL NET NET IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL
DCM 1:16’ - STANDBY SINCE 12:55:55 DATE: FRI AUG-20-1993 SWITCH: 4/5ESS
DCM 1:17 - INITIALIZING
DCM 1:15 - ONLINE SINCE - Nest:slot location of
D-Channel Module and module status
(ONLINE, STANDBY, INITIALIZING, or NOT
CONNECTED)
12:55:55 - Time module came online
DATE - Date module came online
SWITCH - Switch type (4/5ESS, NTT, NUMERIS,
ETSI, DMS250/100, or AUSTEL)
D-CHANNEL: CONNECTED TO 1:09:16 -
Nest:slot:Integrated Trunk Module channel number
PHASOR - Phasor status, where:
OK = No phasor problem
ERROR = Over or underflow occurred
LAYER 3 STATISTICS - ISDN protocol layer 3 performance parameters
ABNORMAL FAILURES: 1 - Values following layer 3 performance parameters indicate error counts
(0-9999)
LAYER 2 STATISTICS - ISDN protocol layer 2 performance parameters
RECEIVED FRAMES FCS ERROR: 0 - Values following layer 2 performance parameters indicate error counts (0-9999)
Figure 5-55. Typical D-Channel Module Status Display (DSP ST DCM) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-80
L2UG
6/30/94
*9999 - Asterisk indicates layer 2 and layer 3 error counts exceeded 9999
CHANNEL STATUS - Channel status of B-channels and D-channel. If 24 DS-0 numbers are displayed, 1-23 are B-channels and 24 is the
D-channel. If 31 DS-0 numbers are displayed,
1-15 and 17-31 are B-channels and 16 is the
D-channel.
DS0 - Logical DS-0 numbers
PHY MAP - Physical DS-0 channel
LOG STATUS and PHY STATUS - Logical and physical channel connection status, where:
CON = Connected
NOTE:
DNK = D-channel not okay
DOK = D-channel okay
IDL = Idle
NET = B-channel negotiation
OOS = Out-of-service
PND = Pending
PRO = Disconnection in process
RES = Restart
Rnn = Retries, where nn = 00-63
RNG = Ringing
DCM 1:16’ - Apostrophe indicates offline redundant
D-Channel Module
See Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for layer 2 and layer 3 parameter descriptions.
Figure 5-55. Typical D-Channel Module Status Display (DSP ST DCM) (Sheet 2)
DISPLAY INTERMACHINE LINK STATUS (DSP ST DL) COMMAND
The DSP ST DL command displays bit error rate, out-of-sync conditions, satellite buffer status, loopback status, and supervisory band frame counts for the specified intermachine link(s), Figure
5-56, or integrated trunk bundle(s). The DSP ST DL command clears the BER window, clears counters, and clears satellite buffer phasor error history.
Command:
To issue the command to an Interlink Module, the command format is:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
[option]
To issue the command to an Integrated Trunk Module, the command format is:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST DL
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
[option] where option is one of the following:
/B = clears BER window
/C = clears counters and satellite buffer phasor error history
NOTE:
Issuing /B will disconnect channels if present BER is less than userspecified link error performance rate.
The displayed bandwidth percentage used by the connections may differ slightly due to rounding method used on Interlink Module to
Integrated Trunk Module intermachine links.
For simplex intermachine link connections, the DSP ST DL command shows logical node translation status at the transmitting node only, not at the receiving node.
L2UG
6/30/94
5-81
When a DSP ST DL command is issued to an Integrated Trunk Module, the command displays the same results as a DSP ST BDL command, Figure 5-51.
N0010>DSP ST DL 04
LINK 1:04 ->NODE:0020 L04 (LOGICAL NODE:0012 TRANS=FULL)
LINK TYPE=009
BER=VERY GOOD WINDOWS=12/032
REMOTE BER=VERY GOOD
OOS=
SB=OK
LOOP=NL
FNS.=1001
CONNECTIONS : 5
ASYMMETRICAL TRANSMIT RECEIVE
PERCENT BW USED: 6 % 80 %
AVAILABLE BW : 144800 BPS 7600 BPS
VOICE BW USED : 1600 BPS 1600 BPS
DATA BW USED : 7200 BPS 288000 BPS
FS: 0043
FR: 0025
RT: 0000
NR: 0000
BS: 0012
OS: 0003
LINK 1:04 - Slot location and online/offline status of
Interlink Module, where:
1:ss = Online module
1:ss’ = Offline module
*
= An asterisk preceding link indicates that intermachine link is out-of-service.
->NODE:0020 L04 - Node number at destination of active intermachine link. Blank if intermachine link is inactive. Node number is followed by destination intermachine link slot number.
If destination node is LINK/100+, slot number is indicated by:
DLC:n:ss for nest and slot or
DLC:n:ss:ck for nest, slot, and circuit
(LOGICAL NODE:0012 TRANS=FULL) - Logical node number and translation type
LINK TYPE - When intermachine link is in-service, indicates frame mode at which the intermachine link is operating.
When intermachine link is inactive, indicates frame mode of Interlink Module in the node specified by the display command, where:
009 = LINK/2+ System operating in asymmetrical mode
006 or 008 = LINK/2+ System operating in frame mode 2
005 or 007 = LINK/2+ System operating in frame mode 1
001 or 002 = LINK/1 System
NOTE: DS-0 channels cannot be connected over intermachine links with a link type less than 005. DS-0 bandwidth contention channels should not be connected over intermachine links with a link type less than 008.
BER - Bit error rate condition, where:
PEND = Bit error rate test is in progress, or
Interlink Module never synchronized to an intermachine link.
VERY GOOD = Test passed; BER better than
1x10-5
GOOD = Test passed; BER between 1x10-5 and 1x10-4
FAIR = Test passed; BER between 1x10-4 and
1x10-3
POOR = Test failed; BER worse than 1x10-3
Figure 5-56. Typical Intermachine Link Status Display (DSP ST DL) (Sheet 1 of 3)
5-82
L2UG
6/30/94
WINDOWS - The ratio of full BER windows to total number of BER windows is displayed on the same line as the BER. The total number of BER windows depends on data rate:
Data Rate
448 kbps and greater
Greater than 192 kbps and less than 448 kbps
192 kbps and below
Number of
BER Windows
32 windows
80 windows
160 windows
If all BER windows are full, the window information is not displayed. BER level changes are not checked and updated each time a window is updated, but only for window transition periods. This results in a delay in updating BER levels.
REMOTE BER - Remote bit error rate. N/A indicates intermachine link is in loopback, or remote node has an earlier firmware revision that does not provide this information.
OOS - Out-of-sync condition, where:
L = Local node is out-of-sync.
R = Remote node is out-of-sync.
LR = Both ends of intermachine link are out-ofsync. (ROS must have been detected prior to
LOS.)
blank = Link is synchronized.
SB - Satellite buffer status (displayed only when satellite buffer option is present), where:
OK = Satellite buffer has not over/underflowed
ER = Satellite buffer has over/underflowed
LOOP - Loopback status of intermachine link (See
Appendix A, Error and Status Messages, for messages.) Loopback time is also displayed.
FNS. - EIA functions (See Figure 5-57B)
(Not applicable for integrated trunk)
CONNECTIONS - Number of channel connections
ASYMMETRICAL - Intermachine link mode of operation, where:
ASYMMETRICAL = Transmit and receive speeds are different.
SYMMETRICAL = Transmit and receive speeds are the same.
SIMPLEX = Data is either transmitted or received, but not both.
NOTE: Intermachine link mode of operation is not displayed for integrated trunk status.
PERCENT BW USED - Percent bandwidth used by the connections
AVAILABLE BW - Available bandwidth, in bps
VOICE BW USED - Voice bandwidth used, in bps
DATA BW USED - Data bandwidth used, in bps
FS - Number of supervisory frames sent
FR - Number of supervisory frames received
RT - Number of supervisory frames retransmitted
NR - Number of negative acknowledgments sent.
Indicates errors in supervisory data received.
BS - Number of bad sync characters received
OS - Number of out-of-sync conditions
NOTE: Error displays and counters are only cleared by a "/C" suffix to the DSP ST DL command.
"/B" suffix clears the BER test by clearing the windows. Issuing /B will disconnect channels if present BER is less than user-specified link error performance rate.
A. TYPICAL DSP ST DL DISPLAY
Figure 5-56. Typical Intermachine Link Status Display (DSP ST DL) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-83
FNS.=1001 FNS.=1001
Where:
FNS.=1001 0
= DISABLED
1
= ENABLED
DSR SQ TM DCD
NOTE: Revision A Interlink Modules have SQ
and TM displayed in reverse order.
Where, when using 64 kbps Bipolar Interface Module:
FNS.=1001 0
= DISABLED
1
= ENABLED
DCD LOS TM DCD
Input
DSR
SQ
TM
DCD
EIA INPUT TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
Function
Data set ready signal
Signal quality
Test mode
Data carrier detect signal
Input
DCD
LOS
TM
EIA INPUT TO LINK/2+ SYSTEM
B. TYPICAL DSP ST DL EIA FUNCTIONS DISPLAY
Function
Data carrier detect signal
Loss of sync (frame) signal
Test mode
Figure 5-56. Typical Intermachine Link Status Display (DSP ST DL) (Sheet 3)
5-84
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY DS-0 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST DS0) COMMAND
The DSP ST DS0 command displays channel connect status, phasor error status, loopback status, and test tone status, Figure 5-57, and clears phasor error history for all DS-0 channels on the specified Voice Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), and Integrated Trunk
Module(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST DS0
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP ST DS0 *
ILP 1:15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CON ST IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL
BZ TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
PH ERR NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
LP STA NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
LP TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
TT STA OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
TT TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
VPZPCM - - - - - - - O - O - O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VPZPRO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B - B - - - - U - - - B B - - -
ILP 1:15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CON ST IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL
BZ TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
PH ERR NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
LP STA NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
LP TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
TT STA OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
TT TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
VPZPCM U U - B - - - B - B - - - B - -
VPZPRO B - B - - - B - - - B - B - - -
ILP 1:15 - Module type (ILP, CSP, or ILQ), slot location, and channel number
(1 to 24 for DS-1 facility, 1 to 31 for E-1 facility)
CON ST - Connection status, where:
∆
CON = Connected
PRO = Disconnection in progress
IDL = Idle (disconnected)
BSY = Busied out (contending DS-0 channels only)
DIP = Disconnection in progress (Integrated
Trunk Module only)
INA = Inactive (Integrated Trunk Module only)
PR = Proprietary (Integrated Trunk Module only)
NPR = Nonproprietary (Integrated Trunk
Module only)
BZ TIM - Duration of busy time (contending DS-0 channels only), where:
1-24 = 1 to 24 seconds
PRM = Permanent)
PH ERR - Phasor error status (Voice Processor only), where:
NO = No phasor error since last display or reset
YES = Phasor error has occurred since last display or reset.
LP STA - Loopback status of channels, where:
∆
BI = Channel phasor in bidirectional loopback
EQ = Channel phasor in loopback toward equipment
Figure 5-57. Typical DS-0 Channel Status Display (DSP ST DS0) (Sheet 1 of 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-85
LP STA - Loopback status of channels (cont’d), where:
∆
EX = Channel in a loopback generated by an external source
LI = Channel phasor in loopback toward link network
NL = No loopback
RE = Channel at remote end in loopback toward equipment
RA = Remote Integrated Trunk Module analog loopback toward Interlink Module
RB = Remote Integrated Trunk Module bus loopback
RD = Remote Integrated Trunk Module digital loopback toward ILC Module
VS = Bidirectional loopback on associated
V-channel
LP TIM - Loopback time remaining, where:
∆
001-240 = Minutes remaining before loopback is cleared automatically
PRM = Permanent, that is, loopback is not cleared automatically
TT STA - Test tone generator status (Voice
Processor only), where:
OFF = Test tone generator is disabled.
EQ = Test tone generator enabled toward equipment
LI = Test tone generator enabled toward line
TT TIM - Test tone time remaining (Voice Processor only), where:
001-240 = Minutes remaining before test tone is cleared automatically
PRM = Permanent, that is, test tone is not cleared automatically
VPZPCM - PCM phasor errors, where:
◊
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
VPZPRO - Processed phasor errors, where:
◊
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
◊
= Only displayed when a Voice Server Module is installed in the node. Information is displayed in these fields if the channel is being processed by a Voice Server Module.
∆
= Integrated Trunk Module displays these fields only.
Figure 5-57. Typical DS-0 Channel Status Display (DSP ST DS0) (Sheet 2)
5-86
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY DS-1 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST DS1) COMMAND
The DSP ST DS1 command displays the following information for the specified Voice
Processor(s), Channelized Services Processor(s), and Integrated Trunk Module(s):
●
Alarm conditions
●
Loopback status
●
Test tone status (not available for Integrated Trunk Module)
●
Carrier detect and test signal function status
●
Local and remote loss of frame alignment signals (G.703 interface only)
●
Local and remote loss of multiframe alignment signals (G.703 interface only)
●
Number of DS-0 channel or bundle connections
●
Number of CRC errors (Integrated Trunk Module only)
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C] where: /C = clears existing frame buffer error in the display (Channelized Services
Processor and Integrated Trunk Module only) and CRC errors (Integrated
Trunk Module only)
See Figure 5-58 for a typical DS-1 trunk status display and Figure 5-59 for a typical E-1 trunk status display.
L2UG
6/30/94
5-87
N0010>DSP ST DS1 1:11
ILP 1:11
ALARM : RED
LOOP : BI TIME = 007
TONE : OFF
FNS.: CD = 1 TM = 1
CONNECTIONS : 00
NOTE: Display for Channelized Services Processor and Integrated Trunk Module also shows frame buffer status as "OK" or "ERROR". Display for Integrated Trunk Module also shows CRC4 errors.
ILP 1:11 - Module type (ILP, CSP, or ILQ) and slot location
ALARM - Alarm condition, where:
NONE = No alarm
RED = Red alarm
YEL = Yellow alarm
RED/YEL = Red and yellow alarm
LOOP - Loopback status, where:
BI = DS-1 interface in bidirectional loopback
EQ = DS-1 interface in loopback toward equipment
LI = DS-1 interface in loopback toward LINK network
LK = Local line driver in DS-1 loopback toward
LINK network
LLB = Local line driver in DS-1 loopback toward equipment
NL = No loopback
TIME - Loopback time remaining, where:
001-240 = Minutes remaining before loopback is cleared automatically
PRM = Permanent, that is, loopback is not cleared automatically
TONE - Test tone generator status (does not appear for Integrated Trunk Module), where:
OFF = Test tone generator is disabled.
EQ = Test tone enabled toward equipment
LI = Test tone enabled toward line
FNS.: CD - Status of carrier detect signal, where:
0 = No carrier
1 = Present
TM - Status of test mode, where:
0 = Line driver not in loopback
1 = Line driver in loopback
CONNECTIONS - Number of DS-0 channels connected (for Integrated Trunk Module, number of bundles connected)
Figure 5-58. Typical DS-1 Trunk Status Display (DSP ST DS1)
5-88
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP ST DS1 1:11
ILP 1:11
ALARM : RED
* DISC ALARM *
LOOP : NL
TONE : OFF
FNS.: CD = 1 TM = 0
LOSS OF FAS : NO
LOSS OF MFAS : NO
REMOTE LOSS OF FAS : NO
REMOTE LOSS OF MFAS : NO
RED ALARM - HIGH ERROR RATE
CONNECTIONS : 00
NOTE: Display for Channelized Services Processor and Integrated Trunk Module also shows frame buffer status as "OK" or "ERROR".
ILP 1:11 - Module type (ILP, CSP, or ILQ) and slot location
ALARM - Alarm condition, where:
NONE = No alarm
RED = Red alarm
YEL = Yellow alarm
RED/YEL = Red and yellow alarm
* DISC ALARM * - Indicates that one or more DS-0 channels have failed to connect (will only be displayed if that DS-0 channel has DSC ALM parameter enabled)
LOOP - Loopback status, where:
NL = No loopback
EQ = DS-1 interface in loopback toward equipment
LI = DS-1 interface in loopback toward LINK network
BI = DS-1 interface in bidirectional loopback
LK = Local line driver in DS-1 loopback toward
LINK network
LLB = Local line driver in DS-1 loopback toward equipment
TONE - Test tone generator status (does not appear for Integrated Trunk Module), where:
OFF = Test tone generator is disabled.
EQ = Test tone enabled toward equipment
LI = Test tone enabled toward line
FNS.: CD - Status of carrier detect signal, where:
0 = No carrier
1 = Present
TM - Status of test mode, where:
0 = Line driver not in loopback
1 = Line driver in loopback
LOSS OF FAS - Local loss of frame alignment signal
LOSS OF MFAS - Local loss of multiframe alignment signal
REMOTE LOSS OF FAS - Remote loss of frame alignment signal
REMOTE LOSS OF MFAS - Remote loss of multiframe alignment signal
RED ALARM - Red alarm message (will only be displayed if the error rate is exceeded)
CONNECTIONS - Number of DS-0 channels connected (for Integrated Trunk Module, number of bundles connected)
Figure 5-59. Typical E-1 Trunk Status Display (DSP ST DS1)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-89
DISPLAY LINK FRAMING MODULE STATUS (DSP ST LFM) COMMAND
The DSP ST LFM command displays the status and history of the specified LFM.3, LFM.10,
LFM.11, LFM.12, or LFM.14 Link Framing Module(s), Figure 5-60, and clears the history and
CRC error counters.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[option] where option is one of the following:
/A = displays only Link Framing Modules with a history of red or yellow alarms
(LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12) or out-of-service condition (LFM.14)
/C = clears history and CRC error counters
N0010>DSP ST LFM 1:7
LFM.3 1:07 PROGRAMMABLE: NO
FAC 1 - RED ALARM: NO /NO
FAC 1 - YELLOW ALARM: NO /NO
FAC 1 - LOSS OF MFA: NO /NO
FAC 1 - FRAME ERROR(SQ):NO /NO
FAC 1 - CARRIER DETECT: YES/YES
FAC 1 - CRC ERRORS: 6116
FAC 1 - ASSOCIATED DL:
LFM.3 - Link Framing Module type
1:07 - Nest:slot location
PROGRAMMABLE - Some parameters are software or DIP switch programmable, where:
NO = DIP switch
YES = Software
FAC 1 - Facility 1
RED ALARM: - Red alarm received (NO or YES)
NO /NO - History/status field. Left field indicates whether at least one error has occurred since the last DSP ST LFM/C command was issued.
Right field indicates present operating status.
YELLOW ALARM - Yellow alarm received (NO or
YES)
LOSS OF MFA - Loss of multiframe alignment (NO or YES)
FRAME ERROR(SQ): - Signal quality error (NO or
YES)
CARRIER DETECT - Carrier detected (NO or YES)
CRC ERRORS - Cyclic redundancy check (0000-
9999)
ASSOCIATED DL - Interlink Module slot number that has Link Framing Module defined in LFM slot field (blank if LFM slot has not been defined)
A. TYPICAL LFM.3 LINK FRAMING MODULE STATUS DISPLAY
Figure 5-60. Typical Link Framing Module Status Displays (DSP ST LFM) (Sheet 1 of 3)
5-90
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DSP ST LFM 1:11
LFM.12 1:11 PROGRAMMABLE: YES MODE OF OPERATION: 2 TO 2
FAC 1 - RED ALARM: YES/YES FAC 2 - RED ALARM: YES/YES
FAC 1 - YELLOW ALARM: NO /NO FAC 2 - YELLOW ALARM: NO /NO
FAC 1 - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO FAC 2 - SIGNAL LOSS: YES/NO
FAC 1 - TX ALL ZEROES: NO /NO FAC 2 - TX ALL ZEROES: NO /NO
FAC 1 - FAC. LOOPBACK: NO /NO FAC 2 - FAC. LOOPBACK: NO /NO
FAC 1 - CRC ERRORS: 0 FAC 2 - CRC ERRORS: 1
LFM A - TX FIFO ERROR: NO /NO
LFM A - RX FIFO ERROR: NO /NO
LFM A - ASSOCIATED DL: 04
LFM B - TX FIFO ERROR: NO /NO
LFM B - RX FIFO ERROR: NO /NO
LFM B - ASSOCIATED DL: 05
LFM.12 - Link Framing Module type
1:11 - Nest:slot location
PROGRAMMABLE - Parameters are software or
DIP switch programmable, where:
NO = DIP switch
YES = Software
MODE OF OPERATION - Mode of operation (2 TO
2, 2 TO 1, 1 TO 1)
FAC 1 - Facility 1
RED ALARM: - Red alarm received
YES/YES - History/status field. Left field indicates whether at least one error has occurred since the last DSP ST LFM/C command was issued.
Right field indicates present operating status.
FAC 2 - Facility 2 (displayed for 2-to-2 mode of operation only)
YELLOW ALARM - Yellow alarm received
SIGNAL LOSS - Carrier signal loss
TX ALL ZEROES - Transmitting all zeroes
(>63 bits of 0)
FAC. LOOPBACK - Facility in loopback
CRC ERRORS - Cyclic redundancy check
LFM A - Status of first port
TX FIFO ERROR - Transmit buffer over/underflow
RX FIFO ERROR - Receive buffer over/underflow
ASSOCIATED DL - Interlink Module slot number that has Link Framing Module defined in LFM slot field (blank if LFM slot has not been defined)
LFM B - Status of second port (displayed for 2-to-1 and 2-to-2 modes of operation)
NOTE: The display differs according to the mode of operation. Facility 1 (FAC 1) and Facility 2 (FAC 2) (2-to-2 mode of operation only) indicate data associated with the DS-1 trunk attached to rear panel connectors B and D.
Link Framing Module connection B (LFM B) is displayed for 2-to-1 and 2-to-2 modes of operation.
B. TYPICAL LFM.12 LINK FRAMING MODULE STATUS DISPLAY
Figure 5-60. Typical Link Framing Module Status Displays (DSP ST LFM) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-91
N0010>DSP ST LFM 1:13
LFM.14 1:13 PROGRAMMABLE: YES
FAC 1 - RX R.A.I.: NO /NO FAC 1 - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO
FAC 1 - RX A.I.S.: NO /NO FAC 1 - OUT OF SERVICE: YES/YES
FAC 1 - FAC. LP LK/LA : NO /NO FAC 1 - OUT OF M-FRAME: NO /NO
FAC 1 - FAC. LP LLB: NO /NO
FAC 1 - CRC-5 ERRORS: 2020*
LFM A - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO LFM B - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO
LFM A - RX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES LFM B - RX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES
LFM A - TX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES LFM B - TX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES
LFM C - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO LFM D - SIGNAL LOSS: NO /NO
LFM C - RX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES LFM D - RX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES
LFM C - TX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES LFM D - TX FIFO ERROR: YES/YES
LFM A - ASSOCIATED SLOT:04
LFM B - ASSOCIATED SLOT:06
LFM C - ASSOCIATED SLOT:08
LFM D - ASSOCIATED SLOT:10
LFM.14 - Link Framing Module type
1:13 - Nest:slot location
PROGRAMMABLE - Parameters are software programmable. No DIP switch settings are required.
FAC 1 - Facility 1
RX R.A.I. - Receive remote alarm indication
NO /NO - History/status field. Left field indicates whether at least one error has occurred since the last DSP ST LFM/C command was issued.
Right field indicates present operating status.
SIGNAL LOSS - Facility carrier signal loss
RX A.I.S. - Receive alarm indication signal
OUT OF SERVICE - Out of service condition. Occurs when either signal loss, receive alarm indication signal, receive remote alarm indication, or loss of multiframe alignment has been detected for more than 2 seconds.
FAC. LP LK/LA - Facility in loopback toward LINK/2+ node
OUT OF M-FRAME - Loss of multiframe alignment
FAC. LP LLB - Facility in loopback toward trunk
CRC-5 ERRORS - Number of cyclic redundancy check errors
2020
*
- Asterisk indicates CRC-5 overflow.
LFM A - SIGNAL LOSS - Module carrier signal loss
LFM A - RX FIFO ERROR:- Module receive FIFO errors
LFM A - TX FIFO ERROR - Module transmit FIFO errors
LFM A - ASSOCIATED SLOT - Interlink or
Integrated Trunk Module slot number associated with LFM connector A
LFM B - ASSOCIATED SLOT - Interlink or
Integrated Trunk Module slot number associated with LFM connector B
LFM C - ASSOCIATED SLOT - Interlink or
Integrated Trunk Module slot number associated with LFM connector C
LFM D - ASSOCIATED SLOT - Interlink or
Integrated Trunk Module slot number associated with LFM connector D
C. TYPICAL LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE STATUS DISPLAY
Figure 5-60. Typical Link Framing Module Status Displays (DSP ST LFM) (Sheet 3)
5-92
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY BROADCAST/POLLING STATUS (DSP ST POL) COMMAND
The DSP ST POL command displays streaming data errors and constant space errors for the specified broadcast/polling member(s), Figure 5-61.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/C] where: /C = clears all errors and reenables the channel
N0010>DSP ST POL 1:11:1-1:11:4
STREAMING DATA CONSTANT SPACES
POLL CHAN 1:11:01 OK OK
POLL CHAN 1:11:02 OK OK
POLL CHAN 1:11:03 OK OK
POLL CHAN 1:11:04 OK OK
POLL CHAN 1:11:01 - Nest:slot:channel number of broadcast/polling group member
STREAMING DATA - Streaming data error condition, where:
ERROR = Streaming data error is present and channel is locked out of the broadcast/polling group.
N/A = Anti-streaming timer is off.
OK = No streaming data error is present.
CONSTANT SPACES - Constant spaces error condition, where:
ERROR = Constant spaces error is present and channel is locked out of the broadcast/polling group.
N/A = Spacing alarm is disabled.
OK = No constant spaces error is present.
Figure 5-61. Typical Broadcast/Polling Status Display (DSP ST POL)
DISPLAY QUALITY STATUS (DSP ST QUA) COMMAND
The DSP ST QUA command displays a 24-hour history of errors and severe errors for the Voice
Processor(s) and Channelized Services Processor(s) specified, Figure 5-62.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C] where: /C = clears the data after data is displayed
L2UG
6/30/94
5-93
N0010>DSP ST QUA 1:5
ILP 1:05
TIME: 15:19:10 DATE: THU AUG-05-1993
CURRENT SAMPLING INTERVAL - 1 SECOND
SEVERE ERRORS IN 4 15-MINUTE INTERVALS: 0 0 0 0
SEVERE ERRORS IN 24 1-HOUR INTERVALS:
0 192* 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
TOTAL SEVERE ERRORS OVER 24 HOURS: 200
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD FIRST EXCEEDED AT
TIME: 11:48:50 DATE: THU AUG-05-1993
ERRORS IN 4 15-MINUTE INTERVALS: 0 0 0 0
ERRORS IN 24 1-HOUR INTERVALS:
0 238* 31 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
TOTAL ERRORS OVER 24 HOURS: 464
ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED
ERROR THRESHOLD FIRST EXCEEDED AT
TIME: 11:28:06 DATE: THU AUG-05-1993
ILP 1:05 - Voice Processor location (CSP location is displayed when the DSP ST QUA command is issued for a Channelized Services Processor.)
TIME - Current time
DATE - Current date
CURRENT SAMPLING INTERVAL - Quality sample interval
SEVERE ERRORS IN 4 15-MINUTE INTERVALS -
Severe error 15-minute test period results
SEVERE ERRORS IN 24 1-HOUR INTERVALS -
Severe error 1-hour test period results, where:
N/A = Specified interval has not been reached.
(Will take 24 hours for all N/As to be removed and replaced with data)
*
= During specified interval, a red or yellow alarm occurred.
TOTAL SEVERE ERRORS OVER 24 HOURS - Total number of severe errors
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED -
Severe error message (displayed when severe error threshold is exceeded)
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD FIRST EXCEEDED
AT - Time and date of first severe error
(displayed when severe error threshold is exceeded)
ERRORS IN 4 15-MINUTE INTERVALS - Error 15minute test period results
ERRORS IN 24 1-HOUR INTERVALS - Error 1-hour test period results, where:
N/A = Specified interval has not been reached.
(Will take 24 hours for all N/As to be removed and replaced with data)
*
= During specified interval, a red or yellow alarm occurred.
TOTAL ERRORS OVER 24 HOURS - Total number of errors
ERROR THRESHOLD EXCEEDED - Error message
(displayed when error threshold is exceeded)
ERROR THRESHOLD FIRST EXCEEDED AT - Time and date of first error (displayed when error threshold is exceeded)
Figure 5-62. Typical Quality Status Display (DSP ST QUA)
5-94
L2UG
6/30/94
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS (DSP ST SY) COMMAND
The DSP ST SY command displays phase locked loop and clock source error conditions, Driver and Power Supply Module status, gateway capability, and other status information, Figure 5-63, for the node.
The DSP ST SY command also displays the modules that are defined and physically inserted in each slot. A module is defined when channel parameters for any channel on that module are defined. A module is physically inserted when the module is installed in the Mainframe and the
INS command is issued for that module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST SY[/T] where: /T = truncates display—shows system status information but does not display defined/physical status of modules
L2UG
6/30/94
5-95
N0010>DSP ST SY
ONLINE SINCE 12:29:27 DATE: FRI JUL-16-1993
SP GATEWAY= ON
SP USER STATUS= GATEWAY
RELAY STATUS= OFF
BYPASS CHANS= 010
DAT/FUN/MON TEST= ML 1:13:1->1:13:2
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK= 2 (DS1 1:15)
P.L.L. ERRORS=
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS= 1
DRIVER CARD STATUS NEST 1: DRC2 NEST 2: DRE2 NEST 3: DRE2
EVEN: ON/GOOD OFF/FAIL ON/GOOD
ODD: OFF/GOOD ON/GOOD OFF/GOOD
P.S.: GOOD FAIL GOOD
NODE:0010
SLOT DB HW SLOT DB HW SLOT DB HW SLOT DB HW
1:01 /NCL-A 1:02 /NCL-A’ 1:03 ILC/ILC.2S 1:04 ILC/ILC.2S’
1:05 ILC/ILC.2 1:06 ILC/ILC.2’ 1:07 VSM/VSM.5 1:08 /DTU.2
1:09 /BPM 1:10 /BPM’ 1:11 LFM/LFM.12 1:12 CSP/CSP
1:13 ILP/ILP 1:14 ILQ/ILQ.11 1:15 XSM/XSM 1:16 XSM/XSM’
1:17 QSP/QSP 1:18 VSM/VSM 2:01 QSC/QSC.1 2:02 QSC/QSC.1
2:03 XSM/XSM~ 2:04 XSM/XSM 2:05 QVM/QVM 2:06 QVM/QVM
2:07 QVM/QVM 2:08 QVM/QVM 2:09 QVM/QVM 2:10 QVM/QVM
2:11 QVM/QVM 2:12 QVM/QVM 2:13 QVM/QVM 2:14 QVM/QVM
2:15 QVM/QVM.2 2:16 QVM/QVM.2 2:17 EVM/EVM 2:18 QSP/QSP.3
3:01 DSC/DSC.2 3:02 DSC/DSC.2 3:03 DSC/DSC.4 3:04 DSC/DSC.4
3:05 FXO/FXO 3:06 FXS/FXS 3:07 ICM/ICM.3 3:08 DCM/DCM
3:09 QSC/QSC 3:10 / 3:11 / 3:12 /
3:13 / 3:14 / 3:15 / 3:16 /
3:17 / 3:18 /
NOTE: QSC.3 is displayed for Subrate Channel Processors.
QSC.5 is displayed for QVC Voice Modules.
NCL, DTU, LFM, LFM.1, and BPM Modules should not have any entry in the DB column.
An ILC with an S suffix is displayed for Interlink Modules with a satellite buffer option installed.
HW column for ILQ Module displays ILQ Module type and BIM Module type combined. For example,
ILQ.11 is displayed for ILQ.1 Module with BIM.1 Module.
HW column for ILQ Module displays a question mark if the watchdog timer has expired.
HW column for XSM Module displays tilde for offline primary module and apostrophe for offline redundant module. If no apostrophe, the XSM Module is an online primary or redundant module.
ONLINE SINCE - Online status, indicates the time and date the node was last reset.
SP GATEWAY - Supervisory port gateway status, where:
ON = Supervisory port gateway enabled
OFF = Supervisory port gateway disabled
Figure 5-63. Typical System Status Display (DSP ST SY) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-96
L2UG
6/30/97
SP USER STATUS - Supervisory port user status
(only displayed when password 1 and password
2 are defined), where:
GATEWAY = User logged on with password 2
NONGATEWAY = User logged on with password 1
NOT LOGGED IN = Displayed when DSP ST
SY command is issued to a remote node that has password protection but is presently logged off
NOTE: Supervisory port user status will not be displayed after passwords are defined, until the user logs off and logs on again.
RELAY STATUS - Alarm relay status, where:
ON = Alarm relay test enabled
OFF = Alarm relay test disabled
BYPASS CHANS - Number of bypass channels currently being used
DAT/FUN/MON TEST - Channel in test or channel monitored by other channel, where:
LL = Local channel in test (TST L)
RL = Local channel in test (TST R)
ML = Local channel monitored by other local channel (MON L)
MR = Local channel monitored by other local channel (MON R)
1:13:1-> - When monitoring, ML or MR channel that is sending monitored data.
When testing, LL or RL channel that is under test.
1:13:2 - Channel that is monitoring data (blank when testing)
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK - System clock source
NOTE: "SLAVE HOLDOVER" is displayed when a clock source failure has occurred and the PLL output is being held at the previous clock frequency accuracy while attempting to validate and lock to a new clock source.
"DEFAULT INTERNAL" is displayed to indicate the active master node is locked to the default internal clock and will continue to search for an independent clock source.
P.L.L. ERRORS - Phase locked loop errors, where:
A = Phase locked loop A is not locked.
B = Phase locked loop B is not locked.
C = Phase locked loop C is not locked.
M = Master phase locked loop failed to lock to the internal clock.
Q = Clock qualifier error
W = Phase locked loop hardware error
CLOCK SOURCE ERRORS - Clock source errors, where:
1 = Clock fallback 1 (primary) was lost or interrupted.
2 = Clock fallback 2 was lost or interrupted.
3 = Clock fallback 3 was lost or interrupted.
DRIVER CARD STATUS - Status of Driver Modules
P.S. - Status of Power Supply Module(s)
NODE - Node number of LINK/2+ System where command is executed
SLOT - Nest:slot location of module
DB - Displays module type that is defined in the database for each slot position
HW - Displays module type that is physically installed in each slot position. Apostrophe indicates offline module of a redundant pair.
For Network Module, PLL type is indicated in the HW column, where:
NCL* = Enhanced digital PLL daughterboard
(Release 9 and higher only)
NCL+ = Digital PLL daughterboard with onboard stratum 3 accurate oscillator
NCL- = Analog PLL daughterboard
NCL? = No PLL daughterboard is present on
Network Module
Figure 5-63. Typical System Status Display (DSP ST SY) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
5-97
DISPLAY VOICE SERVER MODULE CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST VCH)
COMMAND
The DSP ST VCH command displays the associated I/O channels as well as the loopback status, phasor errors, facsimile (fax) connection attempt errors, and fax speed of the specified
V-channels, Figure 5-64.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST VCH
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
where: cc = VSM/VSM.1 channel (1-31), VSM.3A channel (1-8), VSM.3B channel
(1-16), or VSM.5 channel (1-12)
N1290>DSP ST VCH 1:05:01-1:09:31
VSM.3B 1:05
VCHN IO LOOP VPZPCM VPZPRO FAX ERR FAX SPEED
1:05:01 1:09:01 OFF -- -- --- ---
1:05:02F 1:14:02 OFF -- -- --- ---
1:05:03 1:14:03 OFF U- -B 001 9600 (V.17)
1:05:04 1:14:04 023 -- -- 000 9600 (V.17)
1:05:05 BUSY
1:05:07 UNAVAIL
1:05:08 1:15:01 OFF BB O- 009 2400 (V.27)
1:05:09 1:15:02* OFF -- -- --- ---
1:05:15 1:15:03 OFF -- -- --- MODEM N/A
VSM.3A 1:08
VSM.5 1:09
VCHN IO LOOP VPZPCM VPZPRO FAX ERR FAX SPEED
1:09:01 1:12:01 OFF -- -- --- ---
1:09:02 1:12:02 OFF -U -- --- 2400 (V.26 STU)
1:09:03 1:12:03 OFF -- -- --- ---
1:09:04 1:12:04 OFF -- -- --- 4800 (V.32 STU)
RANGE SUMMARY - CONNECTED:11 IDLE:25
VSM.3B 1:05 - Module type and nest:slot location of
Voice Server Module (when no module status information is displayed, module is online but no channels are connected)
VCHN - Nest:slot:channel number of connected
Voice Server Module channel. An F following the V-channel number indicates the channel has failed.
IO - Nest:slot:channel number of connected input/output channel. An asterisk after the I/O channel indicates a pending state. The
V-channel is connected but associated I/O channel has not yet received end-to-end acknowledgment and is therefore not fully connected.
LOOP - Loopback status/timeout
Figure 5-64. Typical Voice Server Module Channel Status Display (DSP ST VCH) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-98
L2UG
6/30/97
VPZPCM - PCM phasor errors, where:
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
VPZPRO - Processed phasor errors, where:
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
FAX ERR - Number of failed fax connection attempts
(cleared after displayed), where:
∆
- - - = No errors
001 - 255 = Number of errors
FAX SPEED - FAX speed
∆
Can be any of the following:
14400 (V.17)
12000 (V.17)
9600 (V.17)
7200 (V.17)
4800 (V.29)
2400 (V.27)
9600 (V.32 STU)
4800 (V.32 STU)
2400 (V.26 STU)
300 (B103 STU)
- - - = No fax transmission/reception is in progress
BUSY = V-channel has been blocked using the /B qualifier of the RST CH command.
UNAVAIL = Not connected. Voice Server Module has declared V-channel as failed.
MODEM N/A = No fax/modem capability is available for this channel.
??????????? = Unknown fax speed
VSM 1:09 - Nest:slot of Voice Server Module
MODULE NOT ONLINE - Voice Server Module is not online because:
PRIORITY NOT AVAILABLE = Indicates Voice
Server Module is not online because bus priority is unavailable.
LOGICAL ID NOT AVAILABLE = Indicates that
Voice Server Module is not online because logical ID is not available.
RANGE SUMMARY - Range summary where:
CONNECTED = Number of connected channels
IDLE = Number of idle channels
∆
= Fax speed is displayed only when VSM.1 or VSM.3 Voice Server Module is used and fax transmission/reception is in progress. For VSM.3 Voice Server Module, fax speed is displayed only when command is issued to module receiving fax. For VSM.5 Voice Server Module, speed is displayed only when operating in STU III secure mode.
Figure 5-64. Typical Voice Server Module Channel Status Display (DSP ST VCH) (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/97
5-99
DISPLAY X.50 SUBRATE CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST XCH)
COMMAND
The DSP ST XCH command displays the operating status of the X.50 subrate channels, Figure
5-65, for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/M] where: cc = X.50 DS-0 channel (1-16)
/M = displays the time slot map
N0010>DSP ST XCH 1:6:8/M
XS0 1:06:08
XCH 1:06:08 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CON ST CON CON OOS CON CON CON IDL CON -- IDL
LP TIM -- PRM -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PHASOR -- -- -- -U BB O- -- -- -- --
XCH 1:06:08 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CON ST PND IDL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
LP TIM -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PHASOR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CONNECTED XCH TIMESLOT MAP:
PHASE: A A A A B B B B C C C C D D D D E E E E
TSLOT: 01 06 11 16 02 07 12 17 03 06 13 18 04 09 14 19 05 10 15 20
XCHAN: 01 01 01 01 02 -- 02 -- -- 05 -- 05 11 11 11 11 16 -- -- --
XS0 1:06:08 (message) - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel number followed by status message, where:
(blank) = Connected and not in loopback
AGGREGATE DISC = X.50 DS-0 channel is disconnected.
AGGREGATE IN LOOPBACK = X.50 DS-0 channel is in loopback.
XCH 1:06:08 - X.50 subrate channels 1 to 20 for
X.50 DS-0 channel specified
CON ST - X.50 subrate channel connection status, where:
- - = Not yet initialized
CON = Connected
IDL = Idle
OOS = Out-of-service
LP TIM - Loopback timeout, where:
- - = No loopback
1-240 = 1 to 240 minute timeout
PRM = Permanent loopback
PHASOR - Phasor status, where:
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
PHASE - X.50 time slot grouping (A-E)
TSLOT - Time slots in X.50 frame
XCHAN - X.50 subrate channels
Figure 5-65. Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Status Display (DSP ST XCH)
5-100
L2UG
8/30/94
DISPLAY X.50 DS-0 CHANNEL STATUS (DSP ST XS0) COMMAND
The DSP ST XS0 command displays the aggregate status of the X.50 DS-0 channels, Figure
5-66, for the specified X.50 Server Module(s). The module operating status is also displayed.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP ST XS0
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
[/C] where: /C = clears count of framing errors and losses
N0010>DSP ST XS0 1:9-1:10
XSM 1:09 - ONLINE SINCE 16:17:18 DATE: MON SEP-27-1993
XS0 1:09 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CON ST CON PND CON IDL OOS CON IDL CON IDL IDL OOS IDL IDL IDL IDL IDL
LP TIM -- PRM -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PHASOR -- -- -- -- -B O- -- U- -- -- BB -- -- -- -- --
FRM ERR 000 000 001 -- OVR 126 -- 000 -- -- OVR -- -- -- -- --
FRM LOSS 000 000 001 -- OVR 051 -- 000 -- -- OVR -- -- -- -- --
QUALITY VG PND VG -- LOS GD -- FR -- -- ROS -- -- -- -- --
XSM 1:10 STANDBY SINCE 16:17:30 DATE: MON SEP-27-1993
XSM 1:09 - ONLINE SINCE - Nest:slot location of
X.50 Server Module and module status
(ONLINE, OFFLINE, STANDBY, FAILED, or
INITIALIZING)
16:17:18 - Time module came online
DATE - Date module came online
XS0 1:09 - X.50 DS-0 channel numbers 1 to 16
CON ST - Channel connection status, where:
- - = Not yet initialized
CON = Connected
IDL = Idle
OOS = Out-of-service
PND = Pending (connection in progress)
LP TIM - Loopback timeout, where:
- - = No loopback
1-240 = 1 to 240 minute timeout
PRM = Permanent loopback
PHASOR - Phasor status, where:
- - = No errors
- U = Receive underflow errors
- O = Receive overflow errors
- B = Receive underflow and overflow errors
U - = Send underflow errors
O - = Send overflow errors
B - = Send underflow and overflow errors
UU = Send and receive underflow errors
OO = Send and receive overflow errors
BB = Send and receive underflow and overflow errors
FRM ERR - Frame errors, where:
- - = Not connected (idle)
000 - 999 = Number of frame errors
OVR = Overflow (errors exceed 999)
FRM LOSS - Frame losses, where:
- - = Not connected (idle)
000 - 999 = Number of frame losses
OVR = Overflow (losses exceed 999)
QUALITY - Quality performance, where:
VG = Very good
GD = Good
FR = Fair
PR = Poor
PND = Pending
N/A = Not applicable
LOS = Local out-of-sync
ROS = Remote out-of-sync
- - = Disconnected
Figure 5-66. Typical X.50 DS-0 Channel Status Display (DSP ST XS0)
L2UG
7/31/95
5-101
DISPLAY SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DSP SY) COMMAND
The DSP SY command displays the current system parameter values, Figure 5-67.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP SY
N0006>DSP SY
NODE:0006 MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY = 03
ROUTING TABLES: NON-REGIONALIZED
NODAL SECURITY: ENABLED
LEVEL 1 USERS CON/DSC : DISABLED
SP TIMEOUT: ENABLED
UNSOLICITED MESSAGES: LOCAL= DISABLED REMOTE= ENABLED
RET TIMER:02 DIAL TIMER:004 DIAL RETRY:02
OOS TIMER:12
MX PHASOR:08
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK= DLR 09,DLT 07,SKP
ALARM LIST:0010,0025
MASTER CLK LIST:0025,0003,0005,0010,0160,0035,0074,0082,
0066,0124,0149
BUMPING SCHEME : POINT TO POINT
ILP CONTENTION : ENABLED
SYSTEM GROOMING: ENABLED
SUN MON TUE WED THU *FRI SAT
GROOM DISC TIME : 23:00 23:00 *** *** *** 23:00 23:00
GROOM RECON TIME: 23:10 23:10 *** *** *** 23:16 23:10
ST CLK-1 2048000
ST CLK-2 2048000
I/O ERR CHR:00
TIME OFFSET: 02:00 ALARM FORWARDING: TAQ
NODE - Node number
MASTER CLOCKING NODE, PRIORITY - Network clocking type and priority level (blank if node is not a master clocking node)
ROUTING TABLES - Routing tables
(REGIONALIZED or NON-REGIONALIZED)
NODAL SECURITY - Nodal security (ENABLED or
DISABLED)
LEVEL 1 USERS CON/DSC - Password level 1 user’s ability to use CON and DSC commands
(ENABLED or DISABLED) (only displayed when passwords are defined)
SP TIMEOUT - Supervisory port timeout (ENABLED or DISABLED) (only displayed when passwords are defined)
UNSOLICITED MESSAGES - Unsolicited messages
(ENABLED or DISABLED)
RET TIMER - System connect retry time (displayed value x 15 = seconds)
DIAL TIMER - Dial-up services retry timeout value in
30-second intervals
DIAL RETRY: - Retry attempts for dial-up services
OOS TIMER - Intermachine link out-of-service time
MX PHASOR - System maximum phasor size (bytes)
SYSTEM CLOCK FALLBACK - System clock fallback list
ALARM LIST - Alarm notification list (for remote command, blank if nodal security is enabled at receiving node and originating node is not on alarm notification list of receiving node)
MASTER CLK LIST - Master clock list
BUMPING SCHEME - Bumping scheme (POINT TO
POINT, END TO END, or DISABLED)
Figure 5-67. Typical System Parameter Display (DSP SY) (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-102
L2UG
7/31/95
ILP CONTENTION - ILP contention (ENABLED or
DISABLED)
SYSTEM GROOMING - System grooming
(ENABLED or DISABLED)
GROOM DISC TIME - Grooming disconnect times
(*** = Time not indicated)
GROOM RECON TIME - Grooming reconnect times
(*** = Time not indicated)
When the day of week is preceded by *, the groom reconnect time exceeds the groom disconnect time by more than 15 minutes.
ST CLK-1 - Speed of station clock 1
ST CLK-2 - Speed of station clock 2
I/O ERR CHR - I/O error character
TIME OFFSET - Time-stamped alarm ± offset in hours:minutes
ALARM FORWARDING - Alarm forwarding, where:
AQ = Sends "I have an Alarm" message if any alarms are in DSP AQ queue.
TAQ = Sends "I have an Alarm" message if any alarms are in DSP TAQ queue.
Figure 5-67. Typical System Parameter Display (DSP SY) (Sheet 2)
DISPLAY AND CLEAR TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST (DSP TAQ, CLR
TAQ) COMMANDS
The DSP TAQ command displays alarms that are currently in the TAQ alarm list as well as their associated time-stamp. Alarms are displayed in FIFO order. Once the alarm list is filled, each successive new entry will force the oldest entry from the list until the list is cleared.
The CLR TAQ command clears the time-stamped alarm list. See Appendix A, Error and Status
Messages, for a description of each alarm.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TAQ
[
a[-a]...
[
,a[-a]
]
]
where: a = alarm number or:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TAQ [/C] where: /C = clears the alarm list after the time-stamped alarms are displayed.
[NOD xxxx] CLR TAQ
Two types of alarms are reported by the LINK/2+ System, state alarms and event alarms:
•
State alarms, once they occur, are logged and a start of state alarm is generated. State alarms are then continually monitored by the system until the alarm condition returns to a non-alarm state, at which time an end of state alarm is generated.
•
Event alarms are logged each time they occur.
Typical DSP TAQ commands are illustrated in Figure 5-68.
NOTE:
Alarm 12 will only be posted on the initial failure of a channel to connnect. While the channel remains in the retry queue and continues to attempt a connection, additional alarm 12’s will not be generated.
If a connect channel command is subsequently issued to that channel before it connects, however, alarm 12 will be posted again.
L2UG
7/31/95
5-103
To further display the error conditions flagged by the alarm list, use the DSP ST CH, DSP ST
DS0, DSP ST DS1, DSP ST DL, DSP ERR, DSP ST LFM, DSP ST SY, DSP ST ALM 1, DSP
ST ALM 2, DSP ST ALM 6, DSP ST ALM 7, DSP ST ALM 9, DSP ST ALM 10, DSP ST
ALM 12, DSP ST ALM 15, DSP ST ALM 21, DSP ST ALM 24, DSP ST ALM 25, DSP ST
ALM 26, DSP ST ALM 27, DSP ST ALM 33, and DSP HIS commands.
N0001>dsp taq
STATUS: LAST ALARM LOGGED ON JUL-13-1995 AT 18:10:04
THE LAST 16 SELECTED ALARM OCCURRENCES:
ALM: SOURCE: DATE: TIME: ALARM TYPE:
9 1:03 JUL-13-1995 18:08:59 S DATABASE CONFLICT
9 1:10 JUL-13-1995 18:09:00 S DATABASE CONFLICT
9 1:11 JUL-13-1995 18:09:00 S DATABASE CONFLICT
15 2:12 JUL-13-1995 18:09:04 S ILP ALARM
21 1:07 JUL-13-1995 18:09:06 S RED/YELLOW ALARM ON CSP/ILQ
34 JUL-13-1995 18:09:14 LAST STANDBY XSM USED
21 1:07 JUL-13-1995 18:09:16 E RED/YELLOW ALARM ON CSP/ILQ
6 1:07:07 JUL-13-1995 18:09:21 LINK IN-SERVICE
6 1:06 JUL-13-1995 18:09:31 LINK IN-SERVICE
12 1:07:24 JUL-13-1995 18:09:44 CONNECTION FAILURE
12 1:13:01:01 JUL-13-1995 18:09:44 CONNECTION FAILURE
12 1:11:01 JUL-13-1995 18:09:44 CONNECTION FAILURE
12 1:09:01 JUL-13-1995 18:09:44 CONNECTION FAILURE
24 1:07 JUL-13-1995 18:10:04 LINK BER BELOW THRESHOLD
A. DISPLAY ALL ALARMS
N0001>dsp taq 15,21,34
STATUS: LAST ALARM WRAPPED ON JUL-13-1995 AT 18:10:04
THE LAST 3 SELECTED ALARM OCCURRENCES:
ALM: SOURCE: DATE: TIME: ALARM TYPE:
15 2:12 JUL-13-1995 18:09:04 S ILP ALARM
21 1:07 JUL-13-1995 18:09:06 S RED/YELLOW ALARM ON CSP/ILQ
21 1:07 JUL-13-1995 18:09:16 E RED/YELLOW ALARM ON CSP/ILQ
34 JUL-13-1995 18:09:14 LAST STANDBY XSM USED
B. DISPLAY A RANGE OF ALARMS
STATUS: - Lists the time that last alarm occurred, where:
LOGGED = TAQ buffer has not overflowed
WRAPPED = TAQ buffer overflowed
ALM: - Alarm number
SOURCE: - Source of alarm, where:
1:03 = nest:slot
1:03:04 = nest slot:channel
1:03:04:08 = nest:slot:channel:subrate channel
blank = Not a nest:slot specific alarm
DATE - Date in month-day-year
TIME - Time of day in 24-hour format; hours:minutes:seconds
ALARM TYPE: - Alarm description, where:
S = Start of state alarm
E = End of state alarm
blank = Event alarm
Figure 5-68. Typical Time-Stamped Alarm List Display (DSP TAQ)
5-104
L2UG
7/31/95
DISPLAY TIME OF DAY (DSP TIM) COMMAND
The DSP TIM command displays time of day (24-hour format) in hours:minutes:seconds, day of week, and day of the year as month-day-year, Figure 5-69.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TIM
If the real time clock fails, the message "ERROR RTC" is displayed.
N0010>DSP TIM
TIME: 16:25:53 DATE: THU JUN-09-1994
TIME - Time of day in 24-hour format; hour:minutes:seconds
DATE - Day of week and month-day-year
Figure 5-69. Typical Time and Date Display (DSP TIM)
DISPLAY TOPOLOGY (DSP TOP) COMMAND
The DSP TOP command displays all intermachine link connections between the local node and any remote nodes. The command displays the slot numbers of the Interlink Modules and the slot and bundle numbers of the Integrated Trunk Modules at the local node and indicates the remote node, slots, and bundle numbers to which each intermachine link is connected, Figure 5-70. If the connection is via a logical node, the logical node number is displayed.
NOTE:
The translation type is displayed with the logical node number when full translation is defined.
For simplex intermachine link connections, the DSP TOP command shows logical node translation status at the transmitting node only, not at the receiving node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TOP
L2UG
7/31/95
5-105
N0001>DSP TOP
LINK 1:09 ->NODE:0010 L03
LINK 1:10:12 ->NODE:0013 L05
*LINK 1:11
LINK 1:12:11 ->NODE:0002 L12:16
LINK 1:15 ->NODE:0100 L05
LINK 1:16
’
LINK 1:17 ->NODE:0102 N/A
LINK 1:09 - Nest:slot number of Interlink Module at local node
LINK 1:10:12 - Nest:slot:bundle number of
Integrated Trunk Module at local node
*LINK 1:11 - Asterisk indicates link is out-of-service.
LINK 1:16
’
- Apostrophe indicates offline module of a redundant pair.
->NODE:0010 - Remote node number to which intermachine link is connected
L03 - Slot number of Interlink Module at remote node. Slot numbers above 32 indicate slot in
LINK/100+ Dual Mainframe 2.
To determine actual slot, subtract 32.
L12:16 - Slot:bundle number of Integrated Trunk
Module at remote node
N/A - N/A indicates remote node is a LINK/1 System.
Figure 5-70. Typical Topology Display (DSP TOP)
DISPLAY TIME SLOT ASSIGNMENTS (DSP TS) COMMAND
The DSP TS command displays the allocated time slots in a full T-1 frame for the specified
LFM.10, LFM.11, or LFM.12 Link Framing Module(s), Figure 5-71.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TS
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
N0010>DSP TS 1:11
LFM 1:11
TS: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A: A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B: - - - - - B - B - B B - - B - - - B B B B - - B
LFM 1:11 - Nest:slot location of specified Link
Framing Module
TS - Time slots
A - Assigned time slots for connection A of the Link
Framing Module
– (dash) - Unassigned time slots
B - Assigned time slots for connection B of the Link
Framing Module
NOTE: Time slot B applies to LFM.12 Module in
2-to-2 mode only.
Figure 5-71. Typical Time Slot Assignments Display (DSP TS)
5-106
L2UG
7/31/95
DISPLAY PARTIAL TEST (DSP TST) COMMAND
The DSP TST command displays the results of the message generator counters for partial P1 or
P2 tests. See Chapter 7, Diagnostic Commands, for information on initiating the tests with the
TST command.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP TST
Figure 5-72 illustrates a typical DSP TST command display.
When initiated by a local command, the test results display is updated continuously. Pressing any key at the supervisory terminal stops the display.
When initiated by a remote command, the test results are only displayed once.
N0010>DSP TST
G*35107 B 136
G - Good bytes
*
- Buffer overflow, where asterisk (*) following:
G = Good byte counter has overflowed.
B = Bad byte counter has overflowed.
35107 - Number of good bytes received
B - Bad bytes
136 - Number of bad bytes received
Figure 5-72. Typical Partial Test Display (DSP TST)
L2UG
7/31/95
5-107
DISPLAY VOICE PROFILE (DSP VPR) COMMAND
The DSP VPR command displays the defined voice profile for the specified voice profile number, Figure 5-73.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP VPR
{
* or vp[-vp]...
[
,vp[-vp]
]}
where: vp = voice profile number (1-64)
N0010>DSP VPR 1-3
SPEED ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB
VPROF 01 16K-ATC ENABLED 32 MS DISABLED OFF
VPROF 02 8K-ASET ENABLED 16 MS DISABLED ON
VPROF 03 4.8K STU ENABLED 8 MS DISABLED OFF
CON TYP LOCAL IO FAX FAX DELAY NSF
VPROF 01 GRND START FXO YES NORMAL DISABLE
VPROF 02 4-WIRE NO
VPROF 03 GRND START FXO NO
SF SIG REC GAIN XMIT GAIN TONE MIN TONE MAX
VPROF 01 2280 0 DB 0 DB OFF OFF
VPROF 02 2280
VPROF 03 2280 0 DB 0 DB OFF OFF
VPROF 01 - Voice profile number
SPEED - Compression speed
ECH CANL - Echo canceler
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length
CEN CLIP - Center clipper
TONE DSB - Tone detection
CON TYP - Connection type
LOCAL IO - Local IO
FAX - Fax required
DELAY - Fax delay
NSF - Nonstandard fax features
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling (Hz)
REC GAIN - Receive gain
XMIT GAIN - Transmit gain
TONE MIN - Not currently supported
TONE MAX - Not currently supported
Figure 5-73. Typical Voice Profile Display (DSP VPR)
5-108
L2UG
6/30/97
DISPLAY X.50 SUBRATE CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP XCH)
COMMAND
The DSP XCH command displays the current parameter values, Figure 5-74, for the specified
X.50 subrate channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP XCH
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
where: cc = X.50 DS-0 channel (1-16) sr = X.50 subrate channel (1-20)
N0010>DSP XCH 1:3:6:1
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR SPEED MAPPING
1:03:06:01 ORIG DEFAULT 01 00 9600 C
FNS PHASOR
1:03:06:01 INBAND 4
1:03:06:01 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel:X.50
subrate channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
SPEED - X.50 subrate channel speed (bps)
MAPPING - Time slot position within X.50 frame
FNS - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
Figure 5-74. Typical X.50 Subrate Channel Parameter Display (DSP XCH)
L2UG
7/31/95
5-109
DISPLAY X.50 DS-0 CHANNEL PARAMETERS (DSP XS0) COMMAND
The DSP XS0 command displays the current parameter values, Figure 5-75, for the specified
X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSP XS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
where: cc = X.50 DS-0 channel (1-16)
N0010>DSP XS0 1:5:1
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR PROTOCOL IDLE
1:05:01 ORIG DEFAULT 16 07 DIV-2 42
FNS OOS PHASOR
1:05:01 INBAND 17 MX
1:05:01 - Nest:slot:X.50 DS-0 channel number
CONNECT - Originator/terminator
PROFILE - ABM profile (when preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PROTOCOL - X.50 frame format
IDLE - Number of idle channels
FNS - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
OOS - Out-of-service timer
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
Figure 5-75. Typical X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameter Display (DSP XS0)
5-110
L2UG
7/31/95
Chapter
6
Configuration Commands
LINK/2+ Systems are preprogrammed according to the configuration worksheets submitted with the order. Initial configuration of a LINK/2+ System requires a configuration planning process, which is discussed in the LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual.
Subsequent changes in the network may require configuration changes or complete reconfiguration of one or more nodes. This chapter discusses the commands used to perform typical configuration activities, provides guidelines for performing configuration activities, and describes all supervisory port configuration (programming) commands. Configuration commands are used to:
●
Define system, intermachine link, DS-1/E-1, ISDN D-channel, quality, DS-0, Link Framing
Module, and I/O channel parameters
●
Define routing
●
Define bundle configurations
●
Define channel connections and broadcast/polling connections
●
Define ABM, speed, and voice profiles
●
Connect and disconnect channels
The supervisory port configuration commands are listed in Table 6-1. Commands are in alphabetical order by command mnemonic. Parameters that can be programmed using the supervisory terminal are described in the Configuration Planning Manual.
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES
The examples in this chapter guide the user in:
●
Verifying parameters
●
Changing parameters
●
Adding modules
●
Adding a node to the network or reconfiguring a node
Before beginning any configuration task:
❒ Obtain a copy of each affected configuration worksheet for the node(s) to be programmed.
❒ If programming active LINK/2+ System(s), determine what effect the programming operations will have on data flow, and notify users as necessary.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-1
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands
G N
G # CLR FMC
G
G
Command
Description: Clears node from being a master clocking node. Node then defaults to a slave clocking node.
# NOD xxxx CLR GWY
{
CP or SP
}
Description: Clears supervisory computer port (CP) or supervisory port (SP) of gateway status. Command must be directed to a remote node.
# CLR MC
G
Description: Clears node from being a master clocking node. Node then defaults to a slave clocking node.
# CLR MM
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Clears node from being a master clocking node. Node then defaults to a slave clocking node.
# CLR POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A]
Description: Disconnects and clears the specified channel from the associated broadcast/polling group. Optional /A modifier clears the master broadcast/polling channel and all broadcast/polling group members associated with the specified master channel.
# CLR PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
Description: Deletes specified ABM profile(s).
# CLR RDN [n:]ss
Description: Clears redundancy on Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk Module, Channelized Services Processor, and Voice
Processor pairs; and resets both modules of the redundant pair.
# CLR REG
Description: Defines the node as nonregionalized routing.
# CLR RTE xxxx[-xxxx]...
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]
Description: Clears routing table for specified node(s).
# CLR SEC
Description: Disables nodal security; allows the node to accept global gateway commands from any gateway node.
# CLR SPR sp
Description: Clears the Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) defined for the specified profile number, where: sp = speed profile number (1-16)
# CLR VPR vp
Description: Clears the defined voice profile for the specified voice profile number, where: vp = voice profile number (1-64)
# CNV BIAS ss
1
[:cc
1
]
{ ss
2
[:cc
2
] or OFF
}
Description: Changes bias routing from one intermachine link or bundle (ss
1
[:cc
1
]) to another (ss
2
[:cc
2
]), or to off. Bundle number is used for Integrated Trunk Module proprietary connections.
# CNV PRO ppp
1
ppp
2
Description: Converts the ABM profile of all channels using profile ppp
1
to ppp
2
.
6-2
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G
G
G
Command
# CON *
Description: Loads parameters and connects all I/O channels, DS-0 channels, X.50 DS-0 channels, and X.50 subrate channels.
# CON
{ n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[, n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Description: Loads parameters and connects specified X.50 subrate channels.
# CON BDL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]} [/
B z or /X z
]
G
Description: Loads parameters and connects bundled DS-0 channels when master DS-0 channel is specified.
# CON CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Loads parameters and connects specified I/O channel(s).
# CON DR
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]..
.[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
p
1
[,p
2
,...p
8}
]
}
CON DR
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]..
.[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
p
1
[,p
2,
...p
8
] [/B or /X]
}
CON DR
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]..
.[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
p
1
[,p
2,
...p
8
]
}
Description: Loads parameters and connects specified channel to its destination using specified route, where:
/B = overrides the first path number and specifies the corresponding backup bundle instead.
/X = overrides the first path number and specifies the corresponding expansion bundle instead.
# CON DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/B z
or /X z
]
Description: Loads parameters and connects specified DS-0 channel(s) and bundled DS-0 channels when master DS-0 channel is specified, where:
/B z
= specifies the use of the backup dial link directory associated with z, the Interlink Module slot or Integrated
Trunk Module bundle number.
/X z
= specifies the use of the expansion dial link directory associated with z, the Interlink Module slot or
Integrated Trunk Module bundle number.
# CON ND
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]
…
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
[/Ppr]
Description: Loads parameters and connects all channels originating at this node and terminating at specified node(s).
Optional /Ppr modifier restricts connect request to channels with specified priority level.
# CON POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A]
Description: Connects the specified channel to the defined broadcast/polling group. Optional /A modifier connects all broadcast/polling group members associated with the specified master channel.
# CON PR
{
* or pr[-pr]
…
[
,pr[-pr]
]}
[/Nxxxx]
Description: Loads parameters and connects all channels originating at this node that have the specified priority level(s).
Optional /Nxxxx modifier restricts connect request to specified termination node.
# CON PRO ppp[-ppp]
…
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]
[/D]
CON PRO /D
Description: Connects all channels that have been assigned to the specified ABM profile(s). Optional /D qualifier includes default ABM profile in the range.
# DEF ALM
Description: Defines alarm notification list. In response to prompts, enter up to 16 node numbers.
# DEF BDL NPR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Defines parameters for nonproprietary bundles on the specified Integrated Trunk Module.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-3
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G
Command
# DEF BDL PR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
G
Description: Defines parameters for proprietary bundles on the specified Integrated Trunk Module.
# DEF BIAS CH n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
/routing
G
Description: Defines bias routing at originator end of I/O channel(s). Routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc}/O = odd-numbered I/O channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/E = even-numbered I/O channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
OFF = terminate bias routing
OFF/O = terminate bias routing only for odd-numbered I/O channels
OFF/E = terminate bias routing only for even-numbered I/O channels
# DEF BIAS DS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
/routing
Description: Defines bias routing at originator end of DS-0 channel(s) or bundled DS-0 channels. Routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/O = odd-numbered DS-0 channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/E = even-numbered DS-0 channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
OFF = terminate bias routing
OFF/O = terminate bias routing only for odd-numbered DS-0 channels
OFF/E = terminate bias routing only for even-numbered DS-0 channels
G # DEF CFB 1 clock
DEF CFB 2 clock
DEF CFB 3 clock
Description: Defines system clock fallback list —primary clock source (CFB 1) and two fallback sources (CFB 2 and CFB 3).
Clock is one of the following:
CH 1:ss:c = synchronous channel receive clock
DLR ss = intermachine link receive clock
DLT ss = intermachine link transmit clock
DRI ss = intermachine link independent receive clock
DS1 n:ss = DS-1 trunk clock
DS1 n:ss/SC1 = DS-1 trunk clock with Voice Processor output to Network Module station clock 1
DS1 n:ss/SC2 = DS-1 trunk clock with Voice Processor output to Network Module station clock 2
INT = internal 6 MHz oscillator
LFM n:ss = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock (from LFM.14 Module)
LFM n:ss/SC1 = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock with LFM.14 Module output to Network Module station clock 1
LFM n:ss/SC2 = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock with LFM.14 Module output to Network Module station clock 2
SC1 = Network Module station clock 1 input
SC2 = Network Module station clock 2 input
SKP = skip clock source
6-4
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G # DEF CH/module n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
Command
Description: Defines channel parameters for specified type of I/O module. Module is one of the following:
DCI = Dual Isochronous Module
DSC = Dual Synchronous Module
EVM = Enhanced Voice Module
FXO = Foreign Exchange Office Module
FXS = Foreign Exchange Station Module
ICM = Isochronous Communication Module
QAM = Quad Asynchronous Module
QSC = Quad Synchronous Module, QVC Voice Module, or Subrate Channel Processor
QSP = Quad Synchronous Processor
QVM = QVM Voice Module
QVM.1 = QVM.1 Voice Module
QVM.2 = QVM.2 Voice Module
QVM.3 = QVM.3 Voice Module
QVM.5 = QVM.5 Voice Module
QVM.6 = QVM.6 Voice Module
G #
DEF CON n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
[-n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
] or Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
]
or Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
]}
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Defines channel connection from an I/O channel to another I/O channel or to a DS-0 channel or X.50 subrate channel, where /Nxxxx specifies node number of destination channel. Destination channel must be at a remote node for I/O channel to I/O channel connections.
# DEF CP
Description: Defines supervisory computer port parameters.
# DEF CSP 1:ss[-1:ss]
…
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]
Description: Defines DS-1 parameters for Channelized Services Processor(s) in specified slot(s).
# DEF DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Defines ISDN D-channel parameters for the specified D-Channel Module(s).
# DEF DL ss[-ss]
…
[
,ss[-ss]
]
Description: Defines intermachine link parameters for Interlink Module(s) in specified slot(s).
#
DEF DST CH n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
[-n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
] or Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
]
or Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
[-n:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
]
}
G
G
Description: Defines channel connection from an I/O channel to another I/O channel, a DS-0 channel, or X.50 subrate channel, where /Nxxxx specifies node number of destination channel. Destination channel must be at a remote node for I/O channel to I/O channel connections.
# DEF DST DS0 n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
[-n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
] or Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
]
or Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
]
}
Description: Defines channel connection from a DS-0 channel to another DS-0 channel, an I/O channel, or X.50 DS-0 channel, where /Nxxxx specifies node number of destination channel.
# DEF DST XCH n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
:sr
L
[-n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
:sr
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
] or Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
]
}
Description: Defines channel connection from an X.50 subrate channel to another X.50 subrate channel or to another I/O channel, where Nxxxx specifies node number of destination channel.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-5
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G
Command
# DEF DST XS0 n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
[-n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
] or Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
]
or Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
]
}
G
Description: Defines channel connection from an X.50 DS-0 channel to another X.50 DS-0 channel, a DS-0 channel, or an
I/O channel, where /Nxxxx specifies node number of destination channel.
# DEF DS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
G
Description: Defines DS-0 channel parameters for specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s).
# DEF DS1 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
G
Description: Defines DS-1 parameters for Voice Processor(s) in specified slot(s).
# DEF EP
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Defines external port parameters.
# DEF ILQ 1:ss[-1:ss]
…
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]
Description: Defines DS-1 parameters for the specified Integrated Trunk Module(s).
# DEF LFM 3 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Description: Defines parameters for specified Link Framing Module(s) (Model LFM.3).
# DEF LFM 10 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Description: Defines parameters for specified Link Framing Module(s) (Model LFM.10).
# DEF LFM 11 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[/1]
Description: Defines parameters for specified Link Framing Module(s) (Model LFM.11), where /1 specifies two-to-one mode.
# DEF LFM 12 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[/1 or /2]
Description: Defines parameters for specified Link Framing Module(s) (Model LFM.12), where /1 specifies two-to-one mode and /2 specifies two-to-two mode.
# DEF LFM 14 n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Description: Defines parameters for specified Link Framing Module(s) (Model LFM.14).
# DEF MCL
G
G
G
G
Description: Defines remote master clocking node(s) that will receive “alive and well” and clock status messages from the local master clocking node. In response to prompts, enter up to 15 node numbers.
# DEF MDS0 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
…
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]
Description: Defines master DS-0 channel parameters for specified Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channel(s).
# DEF MM cpr
Description: Defines node as a master clocking node for the network and assigns a clock priority to the node.
# DEF MSR POL n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
Description: Defines the broadcast/polling master channel.
DEF NOD xxxx
Description: Enters specified node number of local LINK/2+ System in the database.
6-6
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G # DEF OOS tt
G
G
Command
Description: Defines time in seconds (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16) before out-of-sync intermachine link is declared out of service.
# DEF POL n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
/M n:ss:c
Description: Defines specified channel(s) to a broadcast/polling group with the specified master channel.
# DEF PRO ppp
G
G
G
Description: Defines parameters for a single ABM profile.
# DEF PSZ pp
Description: Defines system maximum phasor size (8, 10, 12, or 14) in bytes.
# DEF QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
}
Description: Defines parameter values for performance monitoring of the interface of Voice Processor(s) and Channelized
Services Processor(s) specified.
# DEF RET zz
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Defines time Network Module will wait before attempting to reconnect channels after intermachine link failure or after previous attempt to connect failed. Retry timer number zz (00, 02 to 16) = waiting time from 2 seconds (zz = 0) to 240 seconds (zz = 16).
# DEF RTE xxxx [/F]
Description: Defines routing to specified node. In response to prompts, enter up to eight paths. Each path is specified by intermachine link number, bundle number, and path delay. Optional /F modifier allows routing paths to be defined in any order of path delay.
# DEF SC
Description: Defines station clock speeds.
# DEF SP
Description: Defines supervisory port parameters. For parameters to take effect, Network Module DIP switch must be set to use database parameters; otherwise, default supervisory port parameters are used.
# DEF SPR sp
Description: Defines the Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) for the specified profile number, where: sp = speed profile number (1-16)
# DEF VPR vp
Description: Defines the voice profile for the specified voice profile number, where: vp = voice profile number (1-64)
# DEF XCH n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
Description: Defines the X.50 subrate channel parameters for the specified X.50 Server Module.
# DEF XS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
Description: Defines the X.50 DS-0 channel parameters for the specified X.50 Server Module.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-7
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G # DEL
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
G
Command
Description: Deletes database entries for specified slot(s).
# DEL CH n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
…
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
G
Description: Deletes database entries for specified I/O channel(s), DS-0 channel(s), X.50 DS-0 channels, or X.50 subrate channels.
# DEL RTE xxxx p
Description: Deletes the route with path number p to the specified node from the routing table.
G
G
G
G
G
G
# DSC * [/F or /T]
Description: Disconnects all I/O channels, DS-0 channels, X.50 DS-0 channels, and X.50 subrate channels. Proprietary bundles are excluded. Optional /F modifier disconnects the specified bundle and all channels on the bundle or disconnects the X.50 DS-0 channel and all associated X.50 subrate channels. Optional /T modifier disconnects specified I/O channels,
DS-0 channels, X.50 DS-0 channels, or X.50 subrate channels at the terminator end of a connection.
# DSC n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]
[/T]
Description: Disconnects all specified X.50 subrate channels. Optional /T modifier disconnects specified X.50 subrate channels at the terminator end of a connection.
# DSC BDL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/F or /T]
Description: Disconnects bundled DS-0 channels when master DS-0 channel is specified.
# DSC BP
{
Nxxxx n:ss:cc or ccc-ccc
}
Description: Temporarily disconnects the specified bypass channel(s), where: ccc = bypass channel (1-511)
# DSC CH
{*
or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]..
.[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/T]
Description: Disconnects specified I/O channel(s). Optional /T modifier disconnects specified I/O channels.
# DSC DL
{
* or ss[-ss]
…
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
[option]
G
G
G
Description: Disconnects all originator channels connected over the specified intermachine link(s). Option is one of the following:
/Ppr = disconnects only channels with specified priority level
/Nxxxx = disconnects only channels that terminate at specified node
/A = disconnects all originator, terminator, and bypass channels connected over the specified intermachine link(s)
# DSC DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/F or /T]
Description: Disconnects specified DS-0 channel(s) and bundled DS-0 channels when master DS-0 channel is specified.
# DSC ND
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]
…
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
[/Ppr]
Description: Disconnects all channels originating at this node and terminating at specified node(s). Optional /Ppr modifier restricts disconnect request to channels with specified priority level. Does not affect bandwidth contention channels.
# DSC POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A]
Description: Disconnects specified channel from the defined broadcast/polling group. Optional /A modifier disconnects all broadcast/polling group members associated with specified master channel.
6-8
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G # DSC PR
{
* or pr[-pr]
…
[
,pr[-pr]
]}
[/Nxxxx]
G
Command
Description: Disconnects all channels originating at this node that have the specified priority level(s). Optional /Nxxxx modifier restricts disconnect request to specified termination node.
# DSC PRO ppp[-ppp]
…
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]
[/D]
DSC PRO/D
G
Description: Disconnects all channels that have been assigned to the specified ABM profile(s). Does not affect bandwidth contention channels. Optional /D qualifier includes default ABM profile in the range.
# INS n:ss[-n:ss]..
.[
,n:ss[-n:ss] or *
Description: Logically inserts module into specified slot.
# INS RTE xxxx p {ss, n:ss or 1:ss:bdl, or 1:ss:cc} delay
Description: Adds a route to a routing table of specified node, where:
delay = path delay number
# RMV n:ss[-n:ss]..
.[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Description: Logically removes module from specified slot.
G # SET ALM FWD {AQ or TAQ}
Description: Defines which alarm queue will determine when node transmits "I have an Alarm" message to nodes on remote alarm notification list.
AQ = Use the AQ alarm list
TAQ = Use the TAQ alarm list
G
G
# SET BIAS XCH n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr] /routing
Description: Defines bias route over which an X.50 subrate channel will be connected to a remote node. Routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/O = odd-numbered subrate channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/E = even-numbered subrate channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
OFF = terminate bias routing
OFF/O = terminate bias routing only for odd-numbered subrate channels
OFF/E = terminate bias routing only for even-numbered subrate channels
# SET BIAS XS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[, n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
/routing
Description: Defines bias routing at originator end of X.50 DS-0 channel(s). Routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/O = odd-numbered X.50 DS-0 channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
Lss[:cc]/E = even-numbered X.50 DS-0 channels routed through the bias intermachine link or bundle
OFF = terminate bias routing
OFF/O = terminate bias routing only for odd-numbered X.50 DS-0 channels
OFF/E = terminate bias routing only for even-numbered X.50 DS-0 channels
L2UG
7/31/95
6-9
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G
Command
# SET BMP {E or P or D}
Description: Enables or disables end-to-end or point-to-point bumping at a node.
E = enables end-to-end bumping only
P = enables point-to-point bumping
D = disables bumping
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
# SET CFG n:ss:cc=cc[-cc]
…
[
,cc[-cc]
]
[/A]
SET CFG n:ss:cc/OFF
Description: Defines the bundle configuration for each Integrated Trunk Module and Channelized Services Processor. When
/A modifier is used, adds specified slave DS-0 channel(s) to an existing bundle. /OFF option clears master channel and all slave DS-0 channels associated with the specified master channel.
# SET CH
{ n:ss:c-n:ss:c or n:ss:cc-n:ss:cc
} {
/Pppp
}
Description: Assigns an ABM profile (ppp) to channels.
# SET CLK
{
1 or 2 or 3
}
Description: Selects one of the clock sources from clock fallback list as the system clock source, where:
1 = clock fallback 1 (primary) source
2 = clock fallback 2 source
3 = clock fallback 3 source
# SET CQT
{
LO or HI
}
Description: Sets the clock qualification level of the nodal timing source (for NCL+ and NCL* Network Modules only).
# SET CSW [QS or SS]
Description: Sets the maximum time for the LINK/2+ System to qualify and start locking to an alternate clock source. QS sets the time to 17 seconds; SS to 30 seconds.
# SET CTN
{
E or D or C
}
Description: Enables (E) or disables (D) ILP bandwidth contention on a call-demand basis, or forces a connection (C) between contention channels that are not busied out.
# SET DL BCK
{
* or ss or 1:ss or 1:ss:cc
}
X
{
1:ss:cc or OFF or C
}
Description: Defines or cancels the proprietary bundle on an Integrated Trunk Module that backs up the intermachine link of an Interlink Module or another proprietary bundle of an Integrated Trunk Module, where:
X = a delimiter (/, =, or a blank)
# SET DL EXP
{
* or ss or 1:ss or 1:ss:cc
}
X
{
1:ss:cc or OFF or C
}
Description: Defines or cancels the proprietary bundle on an Integrated Trunk Module that can be used as an expansion link for the intermachine link of an Interlink Module or for another proprietary bundle of an Integrated Trunk Module, where:
X = a delimiter (/, =, or a blank)
# SET DRT rt
Description: Defines the maximum number of redialing attempts for an ISDN or Switched 56 connection, where rt specifies the number of retries.
6-10
L2UG
7/31/95
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G # SET DTM tmo
G
Command
Description: Defines the delay between dialing retries for an ISDN or Switched 56 connection, where tmo specifies the timeout value in 30-second intervals.
# SET GRM
{
E or D
}
Description: Enables (E) or disables (D) grooming of originator channels with profiles set for GRM=ENABLE.
G
G
G
G
G
# SET GRM day time
1
time
2
Description: Sets the grooming day, disconnect time, and reconnect time on a system-wide basis.
day = SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, or * for every day of the week
time
1
= grooming disconnect time (hours:minutes), or C to clear disconnect time
time
2
= grooming reconnect time (hours:minutes), or C to clear reconnect time
# NOD xxxx SET GWY
{
CP or SP
}
Description: Sets supervisory computer port (CP) or supervisory port (SP) for gateway operation. Command must be directed to a remote node.
# SET IO hh
Description: Sets the ASCII character used to indicate a parity error in a QAM Module data stream, where:
hh = hexadecimal equivalent of ASCII character
# SET L1C {D or E}
Description: Allows (E) users with password level 1 to issue CON and DSC commands or prohibits (D) users from issuing these commands.
# SET MAP n:ss:cc:sr/ speed=timeslot
SET MAP n:ss:*/Fspeed
Description: Defines the speed and time slot for the specified X.50 subrate channel on the X.50 Server Module, where:
speed = speed of subrate channel in bps
timeslot = X.50 timeslot the specified subrate channel will occupy
* = all X.50 DS-0 channels
/F = fill all timeslots with defined speed
G # SET PHN BCK
{
1:ss:cc=phn[/D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:cc[/C or /D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:*/C
}
Description: Enters or clears phone numbers for backup Switched 56 or ISDN connections for specified Interlink or
Integrated Trunk Module, where: phn = phone number (20 characters maximum for ISDN connections; 16 characters maximum for Switched 56 connections)
/D = domestic
/I = international
/C = clears phone numbers
/H0 = H0-channel
L2UG
7/31/95
6-11
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G
Command
# SET PHN XDL
{
1:ss:cc=phn[/D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:cc [/C or /D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:*/C
}
Description: Enters or clears phone numbers for Switched 56 or ISDN expansion connections for specified Integrated Trunk
Module, where: phn = phone number (20 characters maximum for ISDN connections; 16 characters maximum for Switched 56 connections)
/D = domestic
/I = international
/C = clears phone numbers
/H0 = H0-channel
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
# SET PRO {* or ppp[-ppp]
…
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/parameter=value
Description: Modifies parameters within existing ABM profiles. Parameters and their values are:
ENC =
SDT =
EPR =
{
D or R
}
{
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or D
}
{
D or V or G or F
}
{
D or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7} GRP =
GRM =
BMP =
{
D or E
}
{
D or E or R or B
}
BLV =
OVR =
{
1 or 2 or 3 or 4
}
{
D or E
}
# SET RDN [n:]ss
Description: Sets redundancy for Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk Module, Channelized Services Processor, D-Channel
Module, and Voice Processor pairs; and resets both modules of the redundant pair.
# SET SEC
Description: Enables nodal security; restricts the node from accepting global gateway commands.
# SET TSA n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
=cc[-cc]
…
[
,cc[-cc]
]
Description: Sets time slot assignments for bundle A of Link Framing Module (Models LFM.10, .11, .12 only).
# SET TSA n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
/OFF
Description: Clears time slot assignments of bundle A of Link Framing Module (Models LFM.10, .11, .12 only).
# SET TSB n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
=
{ cc[-cc]
…
[
,cc[-cc]
]
Description: Sets time slot assignments for bundle B of Link Framing Module (Models LFM.10, .11, .12 only).
# SET TSB n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
/OFF
Description: Clears time slot assignments of bundle B of Link Framing Module (Models LFM.10, .11, .12 only).
# SET VSM n:ss[-n:ss]...[,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Description: Defines the specified module(s) as a Voice Server Module.
# SET XSM n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[/R]
Description: Defines the specified module(s) as a primary or redundant X.50 Server Module.
6-12
L2UG
7/31/95
Table 6-1. Configuration Commands (Cont’d)
G N Command
G entry in "G" column indicates a nonglobal gateway command.
# entry in "N" column indicates that a command can be issued to a remote node by preceding the command with NOD xxx.
c = I/O channel number (1 to 4) cc = DS-0 channel number (1 to 31) or X.50 DS-0 channel number (1 to 16) ccc = bypass channel number (1 to 511) cpr = clock priority level (1 to 16) n:ss:c n:ss:c,n:ss:c n = nest number: 1 = Control Mainframe; 2 = Expander A Mainframe (upper);
3 = Expander B Mainframe (lower)
=
= specifies single channel specifies two or more channels n:ss:c - n:ss:c n
D
:ss
D
:c
D n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
=
=
=
=
= specifies range of channels in ascending order when defining channel connections, specifies destination I/O channel when defining channel connections, specifies destination DS-0 channel when defining channel connections, specifies destination X.50 subrate channel when defining channel connections, specifies local I/O channel n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
= when defining channel connections, specifies local DS-0 channel p = path number (1 to 8) of path defined in routing table pp = phasor size (8, 10, 12, or 14) ppp = ABM profile (1 to 250 or D for default) pr = connect priority level (1 to 16) sp = speed profile (1 to 16) sr = X.50 subrate channel number (1 to 20) ss = slot number tt = time in seconds (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16) vp = voice profile (1 to 64) xxxx = node number (1 to 2000) zz = retry timer number (0, 2 to 16)
* = all elements in a range. Can also be used to specify all channels on a module, e.g., n:ss:*
[ ] = optional parameter. Brackets are never entered as part of command.
{ } = required parameter. Choose one of the elements within braces.
Braces are never entered as part of command.
...
= used before [ ] symbol to indicate command can be entered with several parameter values.
Dots are never entered as part of command.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-13
Verifying Parameters
Table 6-2 shows the typical activities needed when verifying system level, intermachine link,
DS-1, ISDN D-channel, and channel programming. See Chapter 5, Display Commands, for sample displays of the commands used in Table 6-2.
Verifying parameters will not disrupt data flow.
Changing Parameters
Tables 6-3 through 6-18 show typical activities needed when changing:
●
System parameters
●
Intermachine link parameters and Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 parameters
●
Routing
●
Voice Processor DS-1/E-1 parameters, quality parameters, and DS-0 parameters
●
Channelized Services Processor DS-1/E-1 parameters, quality parameters, master DS-0 parameters, and bundle configuration
●
I/O channel parameters
●
Channel connections
●
Broadcast/polling group connections
●
Voice compression connections
●
ABM profiles
●
Voice profiles
●
X.50 DS-0 channels and X.50 subrate channels
In these examples, most programming is performed using remote supervisory port commands entered at a central site. Programming can also be performed locally. See "Guidelines for
Performing Configuration Activities" paragraphs later in this chapter.
NOTE:
Parameter changes at one node may require corresponding changes at a remote node. If the local supervisory terminal cannot issue commands to the remote node, ensure that the required changes are made at the remote node before proceeding with the next activity.
6-14
L2UG
6/30/94
Adding Modules
In general, adding a module requires the following activities:
●
If a module must be removed or relocated before the new module can be installed, use the DEL command to delete database entries for the module being removed.
●
Use the RMV and INS commands to logically remove and insert modules.
●
Define database parameters for the modules that have been added or relocated:
For Interlink Modules, define intermachine link parameters and routing tables. See Tables
6-4 and 6-5.
For Integrated Trunk Modules, define DS-1/E-1 parameters, bundle configurations, proprietary and nonproprietary bundle parameters, channel connections, D-channel parameters, and routing tables. See Tables 6-4 and 6-5.
For Voice Processors, define DS-1/E-1 parameters, quality parameters, DS-0 channel parameters, and channel connections. See Tables 6-6, 6-7, and 6-12.
For Channelized Services Processors, define DS-1/E-1 parameters, quality parameters, master DS-0 channel parameters, bundle configuration, and channel connections. See
Tables 6-8, 6-9, 6-10, and 6-12.
For Voice Server Modules, use the SET VSM command to define the module.
For I/O modules, define channel connections and parameters. See Tables 6-11 and 6-12.
For X.50 Server modules, use SET XSM command to define the module, then define channel connections and parameters. See Table 6-18.
For more detailed information on adding modules to an existing LINK/2+ System, see Installing
Additional Modules chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual, which provides step-by-step procedures covering the physical installation as well as the programming activities required for each type of module.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-15
6-16
Table 6-2. Typical Configuration Activities
Verifying Parameters
Activity
Display system parameters.
Display supervisory port parameters.
Display supervisory computer port parameters.
Display external port parameters.
Display Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 parameters.
Display Link Framing Module parameters.
Display intermachine link parameters.
Display intranetwork routing parameters at any node.
Display Voice Processor DS-1 parameters.
Display Channelized Services Processor DS-1 parameters.
Display quality parameters.
Display bundle configurations.
Display nonproprietary bundle parameters.
Display proprietary bundle parameters.
Display I/O channel parameters.
Display Voice Processor DS-0 channel parameters.
Display Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channel parameters.
Display channel connections.
Display internetwork channel connections at a transfer node.
Display broadcast/polling group connections.
Display ABM profile parameters.
Display voice profile parameters.
Display speed profile parameters.
Display ISDN D-Channel parameters.
Display link backup phone numbers.
Display link expansion and dial link phone numbers.
Command
DSP SY
DSP SP
DSP CP
DSP EP
DSP ILQ
DSP LFM
DSP DL
DSP RTE
DSP DS1
DSP CSP
DSP QUA
DSP CFG [/M]
DSP BDL NPR
DSP BDL PR
DSP CH
DSP DS0
DSP MDS0
DSP DST *
DSP TRA
DSP POL
DSP PRO
DSP VPR
DSP SPR
DSP DCM
DSP PHN BCK
DSP PHN XDL
Example
NOD 9 DSP SY
NOD 12 DSP SP
NOD 12 DSP CP
NOD 12 DSP EP
NOD 9 DSP ILQ 1:5
NOD 9 DSP LFM 1:9-1:12
NOD 7 DSP DL *
NOD 7 DSP RTE *
NOD 16 DSP DS1 *
NOD 16 DSP CSP *
NOD 16 DSP QUA *
NOD 16 DSP CFG */M
NOD 16 DSP BDL NPR *
NOD 16 DSP BDL PR *
NOD 16 DSP CH *
NOD 16 DSP DS0 *
NOD 16 DSP MDS0 *
NOD 16 DSP DST *
NOD 97 DSP TRA *
NOD 16 DSP POL *
NOD 16 DSP PRO *
NOD 16 DSP VPR *
NOD 16 DSP SPR *
NOD 16 DSP DCM*
NOD 16 DSP PHN BCK 1:5
NOD 16 DSP PHN XDL 1:5
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-3. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing System Parameters
Activity
Display current system parameters.
Command
DSP SY
Example
NOD 6 DSP SY
Change any of the following parameters, as required:
Define network clock type (default type is slave clocking node):
•
To designate node as a master clocking node, define the node as a master clocking node and assign a clock priority level.
•
To define master clocking list for master clocking node:
In response to system prompts, enter up to 15 master clocking node numbers on master clocking list.
DEF MM
DEF MCL
NOD 6 DEF MM 1
NOD 6 DEF MCL
ENTRY 01: 3
•
•
ENTRY 02: 7
•
ENTRY 15:22
-
Press RETURN key to store master clocking list and exit.
•
To set the permissible frequency range of the nodal timing source with Network Module classified as NCL+:
-
Set the clock qualification tolerance to low for a long-term frequency deviation from +22 ppm from nominal to -26 ppm from nominal.
-
Set the clock qualification tolerance to high for a long-term frequency deviation from +45 ppm from nominal to -53 ppm from nominal.
•
To set the permissible frequency range of the nodal timing source with Network Module classified as NCL*:
-
Set the clock qualification tolerance to low for a long-term frequency deviation from
±
10 ppm from nominal.
-
Set the clock qualification tolerance to high for a long-term frequency deviation from
±
32 ppm from nominal.
•
Set 17 seconds as the maximum time interval for the LINK/2+
System to qualify and start locking to an alternate clock source.
•
Allow the LINK/2+ System up to 30 seconds to qualify and start locking to an alternate clock source.
•
To designate node as a slave clocking node if node was previously defined as a master clocking node, clear node from being a master clocking node.
•
Verify parameter changes.
•
Repeat above steps to define additional master clocking nodes
(up to 16 master clocking nodes are permitted).
Define routing table type:
•
To designate node for nonregionalized routing, set the routing tables as nonregionalized.
RETURN key
SET CQT LO
SET CQT HI
SET CQT LO
SET CQT HI
SET CSW QS
SET CSW SS
CLR MC, CLR FMC, or
CLR MM
DSP ST CLK
CLR REG
NOD 6 SET CQT LO
NOD 6 SET CQT LO
NOD 6 SET CSW QS
NOD 6 SET CSW SS
NOD 10 CLR MM
NOD 6 DSP ST CLK
L2UG
6/30/94
6-17
Table 6-3. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing System Parameters (Cont’d)
Activity Command Example
Set nodal security:
•
To restrict the node from accepting global gateway commands, enable nodal security.
•
To allow the node to accept global gateway commands, disable nodal security.
SET SEC
CLR SEC
NOD 6 SET SEC
Define or clear passwords:
•
To define password 1:
-
In response to system prompts, enter old/default password.
Enter new password.
-
Enter the new password again.
•
To define password 2:
In response to system prompts, enter old/default password.
-
Enter new password.
Enter the new password again.
•
To clear passwords and disable password protection:
-
In response to system prompt, enter password 2.
Set or clear the supervisory port timeout.
Set or clear the supervisory port display of unsolicited messages.
Define system connect retry timer.
Define intermachine link out-of-service time.
Define system maximum phasor size:
•
Disconnect channels using the system maximum phasor size.
•
Specify the system maximum phasor size.
•
Reconnect channels.
DSC CH
DEF PSZ
CON CH
Define system clock fallback list:
•
Define clock fallback 1 (primary) source.
•
Define clock fallback 2 source.
•
Define clock fallback 3 source.
DEF CFB 1
DEF CFB 2
DEF CFB 3
Define alarm notification list:
•
In response to system prompts, enter up to 16 node numbers on alarm notification list.
DEF ALM
DEF PW1
DEF PW2
CLR PW
NOD 6 DEF PW1
TIMEPLEX
DATAFLEX
DATAFLEX
NOD 6 DEF PW2
TIMEPLEX
MANAGER
MANAGER
NOD 6 CLR PW
MANAGER
SET TMO or CLR TMO NOD 6 SET TMO
SET MUM or CLR MUM NOD 6 SET MUM LOC
DEF RET
DEF OOS
NOD 7 DEF RET 2
NOD 11 DEF OOS 8
NOD 8 DSC CH 1:8:1-1:8:4
NOD 8 DEF PSZ 14
NOD 8 CON CH 1:8:1-1:8:4
NOD 6 DEF CFB 1 DLR 2
NOD 6 DEF CFB 2 DLR 5
NOD 6 DEF CFB 3 SKP
NOD 2 DEF ALM
ALARM 01: 3
•
•
ALARM 02: 7
•
ALARM 16:22
•
Press RETURN key to store alarm notification list and exit.
RETURN key
6-18
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-3. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing System Parameters (Cont’d)
Activity Command
DEF SC
Define station clock speed:
Example
NOD 20 DEF SC
Current station clock speeds are displayed, one at a time.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value for station clock 1 speed.
•
Press RETURN key to display station clock 2 speed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value for station clock 2 speed.
•
Press RETURN key to store station clock speeds and exit.
F key or B key
RETURN key
F key or B key
RETURN key
NOD 15 SET IO BF Define asynchronous I/O error character by entering 2-digit hexadecimal number.
Set contention:
•
To enable contention on a call demand basis and disable bandwidth pooling.
•
To disable contention and enable bandwidth pooling. When contention is disabled, all DS-0 channels assigned to contention return bandwidth to the bandwidth pool.
•
To force a connection between contention channels that are not busied out.
SET IO
SET CTN
SET CTN
SET CTN
SET CTN E
SET CTN D
SET CTN C
Set bumping:
•
To enable bumping on an end-to-end basis for channels originating at the node.
•
To enable bumping on a point-to-point basis for channels originating at the node.
•
To disable bumping for channels originating at the node.
Set system grooming flag:
•
To enable grooming
•
To disable grooming.
Clear system grooming day and time.
Set system grooming day and time.
Set dial-up retry.
Set dial-up timer.
Verify parameter changes.
Update configuration worksheets.
SET BMP
SET BMP
SET BMP
SET GRM
SET GRM
SET GRM
SET GRM
SET DRT
SET DTM
DSP SY
SET BMP E
SET BMP P
SET BMP D
SET GRM E
SET GRM D
SET GRM * C C
SET GRM MON 10:00 12:00
SET DRT 2
SET DTM 4
NOD 16 DSP SY
L2UG
6/30/94
6-19
Table 6-4. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Intermachine Link and Bundle Parameters
Activity
Disconnect all channels connected over the affected intermachine link(s) or bundle(s).
NOTE
When the DSC DL command is used with the
/A modifier, the LINK/2+ System disconnects all originator, terminator, and bypass channels connected over the specified intermachine link but does NOT attempt to reestablish the connections over an alternate path; channels must be reconnected with the CON CH and
CON DS0 commands. Other commands can be used to disconnect channels at the originator end of the channel connections; see
Table 6-1 for commands.
NOTE
Do not use the DSC BDL command if there are no alternate paths to the remote end.
Instead:
1. Disconnect all I/O over affected link.
2. Define remote link parameters.
3. Reset the remote bundle.
4. Define local link parameters.
5. Reset the local bundle.
Specify intermachine link(s) or bundle(s) to be changed.
Command
DSC DL
DSC BDL
DEF DL
Example
NOD 11 DSC DL 3/A
NOD 11 DSC BDL 1:9:5/F
DEF BDL PR
NOD 11 DEF DL 3
Current intermachine link parameters are displayed.
NOD 11 DEF BDL PR 1:9:5
Current proprietary bundle parameters are displayed.
Change parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE Bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP DL
DSP BDL PR
NOD 11 DSP DL 3
NOD 11 DSP BDL PR 1:9:5
Current parameters are displayed.
6-20
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-4. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Intermachine Link and Bundle Parameters (Cont’d)
Command Example Activity
If required, change parameters at other end of intermachine link and verify parameter changes.
DEF DL
DSP DL
DEF BDL PR
DSP BDL PR
NOD 17 DEF DL 5
NOD 17 DSP DL 5
NOD 21 DEF BDL PR 1:3:5
NOD 21 DSP BDL PR 1:3:5
NOTE
See the Intermachine Link Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for intermachine link parameters that must be the same at both ends of the connection.
If intermachine link has redundant modules, enter SET RDN command to copy parameters from one Interlink or Integrated Trunk
Module to the other. The SET RDN command automatically resets both modules in the redundant pair.
SET RDN NOD 11 SET RDN 3
NOD 17 SET RDN 5
NOD 11 SET RDN 9
NOD 21 SET RDN 3
If intermachine link does not have redundant modules, reset Interlink
Module or bundle.
RST
RST BDL
NOD 11 RST 1:3
NOD 17 RST 1:5
NOD 11 RST BDL 1:9:5
If required, reconnect channels at the originator end of the channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
CON CH, CON DS0 NOD 11 CON CH 2:1:1-2:5:4
NOD 17 CON CH 1:10:1-1:12:4
L2UG
6/30/94
6-21
Table 6-5. Typical Configuration Activities
Routing
Activity Command Example
Display current routing for node.
DSP RTE NOD 5 DSP RTE *
Routing tables for all destination nodes of node 5 are displayed.
NOD 5 CLR RTE 2 If required, clear existing routing table for specified destination node.
CLR RTE
Define routing table:
•
To define routing table in any order of path delay, use the /F modifier to specify the preferred order of routing:
−
Specify destination node.
−
In response to system prompts, define up to eight paths.
Each path is specified by: a. Intermachine link and bundle number
(for Integrated Trunk Module only) b. Path delay
DEF RTE /F NOD 5 DEF RTE 2/F
PATH 1 DL = 3:1
PATH 1 PD = 2
PATH 2 DL = 5
•
•
PATH 2 PD = 0
•
PATH 8 DL = 9
PATH 8 PD = 7
−
Press RETURN key to store routing table and exit.
•
To define routing in ascending order of path delay
−
Specify destination node.
−
In response to system prompts, define up to eight paths. Each path is specified by: a. Intermachine link and bundle number
(for Integrated Trunk Module only) b. Path delay
RETURN key
DEF RTE NOD 5 DEF RTE 3
PATH 1 DL = 5
PATH 1 PD = 0
PATH 2 DL = 3:1
•
•
PATH 2 PD = 2
•
PATH 8 DL = 9
PATH 8 PD = 7
−
Press RETURN key to store routing table and exit.
Display system parameters to determine if the routing tables are defined as regionalized or nonregionalized:
•
For nonregionalized routing tables, repeat above steps to define routing to every node in the network.
Verify routing.
Update configuration worksheets.
RETURN key
DSP SY
DSP RTE
NOD 5 DSP SY
NOD 5 DSP RTE 2
If required, convert or define bias routing for I/O and DS-0 channels:
Display current bias routing.
NOD 5 DSP DST *
Disconnect channels whose bias route will be changed.
DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, or
DSP DST *
DSC CH or DSC DS0 NOD 5 DSC CH 2:6:1-2:6:4
6-22
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-5. Typical Configuration Activities
Routing (Cont’d)
Activity Command Example
Convert or define bias routing:
•
To convert bias routing, specify the intermachine links to be changed.
•
To define I/O or DS-0 channel bias routing, specify the intermachine link bias route.
Reconnect channels.
Verify bias routing
CNV BIAS
DEF BIAS CH or
DEF BIAS DS0
CON CH or CON DS0
DSP DST CH,
DSP DST DS0, or
DSP DST *
NOD 5 CNV BIAS 12 11
NOD 5 DEF BIAS CH 2:6:1-
2:6:4/L11
NOD 5 CON CH 2:6:1-2:6:4
NOD 5 DSP DST *
Update configuration worksheets.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-23
Table 6-6. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Voice Processor DS-1/E-1 and
Quality Parameters
Activity Command Example
Disconnect all DS-0 channels on affected Voice Processor:
•
Determine the connect status and destination node of all DS-0 channels on affected Voice Processor.
•
Determine the originator end of all connected DS-0 channels on affected Voice Processor.
•
Disconnect all connected DS-0 channels on the affected Voice
Processor at the originator end of the channel connection.
•
Verify channels are disconnected.
Specify DS-1 or E-1 trunk(s) to be changed.
DSP DST DS0
DSP DS0
DSC DS0
DSP DST DS0
DEF DS1
NOD 11 DSP DST DS0 1:7:*
NOD 11 DSP DS0 1:7:*
NOD 11 DSC DS0 1:7:1-1:7:10
NOD 15 DSC DS0 1:9:5-1:9:10
NOD 11 DSP DST DS0 1:7:*
NOD 11 DEF DS1 1:7
Current DS-1 or E-1 parameters are displayed.
Change parameters.
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP DS1 NOD 11 DSP DS1 1:7
Current DS-1 or E-1 parameters are displayed.
NOD 11 SET RDN 1:7 If redundant Voice Processors are used, enter SET RDN command to copy parameters from one Voice Processor to the other. The SET
RDN command automatically resets both Voice Processors in the redundant pair.
SET RDN
If redundant Voice Processors are not used, reset Voice Processor.
RST
Connect all noncontending DS-0 channels on affected Voice
Processor at the originator end of the channel connection.
CON DS0
Specify DS-1 or E-1 trunk(s) whose quality parameters are to be changed.
DEF QUA
Change parameters:
•
Press RETURN key to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter values for the first four parameters.
RETURN key
F key or B key
•
Enter numbers from the keyboard for the last three parameters.
Numeric keys
•
Press RETURN key after final parameter to store all parameters and exit.
RETURN key
Verify parameter changes.
DSP QUA
NOD 11 RST 1:7
NOD 11 CON DS0 1:7:1-1:7:10
NOD 15 CON DS0 1:9:5-1:9:10
NOD 11 DEF QUA 1:7
NOD 11 DSP QUA 1:7
Current quality parameters are displayed.
Update configuration worksheets.
6-24
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-7. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Voice Processor DS-0 Channel
Parameters
Activity Command Example
Disconnect channel(s) to be changed at the originator end of the channel connection.
Verify channels are disconnected.
DSC DS0 NOD 31 DSC DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Specify channel(s) to be changed.
DSP DST DS0
DEF DS0
NOD 31 DSP DST DS0
1:8:1-1:8:10
NOD 31 DEF DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Current channel parameters are displayed.
Change parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP DS0
DEF DS0 or DEF MDS0
DSP DS0 or DSP MDS0
NOD 31 DEF DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Current channel parameters are displayed.
NOD 17 DEF DS0 1:10:1-1:10:10
NOD 17 DSP DS0 1:10:1-1:10:10
If required, change parameters at other end of the channel connection and verify parameter changes.
NOTE
See the Digital Voice and Channelized
Services Parameters chapter in the
Configuration Planning Manual for channel parameters that must be the same at both ends of the channel connection.
Connect noncontending channels at the originator end of the channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
CON DS0 NOD 31 CON DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
L2UG
6/30/94
6-25
Table 6-8. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Channelized Services Processor
DS-1/E-1 and Quality Parameters
Activity Command Example
Disconnect all DS-0 channels on affected Channelized Services
Processor:
•
Determine the connect status and destination node of all DS-0 channels on affected Channelized Services Processor.
•
Determine the originator end of all connected DS-0 channels on affected Channelized Services Processor.
•
Disconnect all connected DS-0 channels on the affected
Channelized Services Processor at the originator end of the channel connection.
•
Verify channels are disconnected.
Specify DS-1 or E-1 trunk(s) to be changed.
DSP DST DS0
DSP MDS0
DSC DS0
DSP DST DS0
DEF CSP
NOD 11 DSP DST DS0 1:9:*
NOD 11 DSP MDS0 1:9:*
NOD 11 DSC DS0 1:9:1-1:9:10
NOD 15 DSC DS0 1:11:5-1:11:10
NOD 11 DSP DST DS0 1:9:*
NOD 11 DEF CSP 1:9
Current DS-1 or E-1 parameters are displayed.
Change parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP CSP
SET RDN
NOD 11 DSP CSP 1:9
Current DS-1 or E-1 parameters are displayed.
NOD 11 SET RDN 1:9 If redundant Channelized Services Processors are used, enter SET
RDN command to copy parameters from one Channelized Services
Processor to the other. The SET RDN command automatically resets both Channelized Services Processors in the redundant pair.
If redundant Channelized Services Processors are not used, reset
Channelized Services Processor.
Connect all DS-0 channels on affected Channelized Services
Processor at the originator end of the channel connection.
Specify DS-1 or E-1 trunk(s) whose quality parameters are to be changed.
RST
CON DS0
DEF QUA
NOD 11 RST 1:9
NOD 11 CON DS0 1:9:1-1:9:10
NOD 15 CON DS0 1:11:5-1:11:10
NOD 11 DEF QUA 1:9
6-26
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-8. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Channelized Services Processor
DS-1/E-1 and Quality Parameters (Cont’d)
Activity Command Example
Change parameters:
•
Press RETURN key to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter values for the first four parameters.
RETURN key
F key or B key
•
Enter numbers from the keyboard for the last three parameters.
Numeric keys
•
Press RETURN key after final parameter to store all parameters and exit.
RETURN key
Verify parameter changes.
DSP QUA NOD 11 DSP CSP 1:9
Current quality parameters are displayed.
Update configuration worksheets.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-27
Table 6-9. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Channelized Services Processor
DS-0 Channel Parameters
Activity Command Example
Disconnect channel(s) to be changed at the originator end of the channel connection.
Verify channels are disconnected.
DSC DS0
DSP DST DS0
NOD 10 DSC DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Specify channel(s) to be changed.
DEF MDS0
NOD 10 DSP DST DS0
1:8:1-1:8:10
NOD 10 DEF MDS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Current channel parameters are displayed.
Change parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP MDS0 NOD 10 DSP MDS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
Current channel parameters are displayed.
NOD 12 DEF DS0 1:10:1-1:10:10 If required, change parameters at other end of the channel connection and verify parameter changes.
NOTE
See the Digital Voice and Channelized
Services Parameters chapter in the
Configuration Planning Manual for channel parameters that must be the same at both ends of the channel connection.
Connect channels at the originator end of the channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
DEF DS0, DEF MDS0, or DEF CH/
DSP DS0, DSP MDS0, or DSP CH
CON DS0
NOD 12 DSP DS0 1:10:1-1:10:10
NOD 10 CON DS0 1:8:1-1:8:10
6-28
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-10. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Bundle Configuration
Activity Command Example
Display the current bundle configuration.
Disconnect master DS-0 channel(s) to be changed at the originator end of the channel connection.
Verify master DS-0 channel(s) are disconnected.
Specify new bundle configuration.
DSP CFG [/M]
DSC DS0
DSP DST DS0
SET CFG
NOTE
See LINK/2+ Configuration Planning Manual for bundle configuration guidelines.
Verify bundle configuration changes.
DSP CFG [/M]
If required, change parameter values of the master DS-0 channel(s): DEF MDS0
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
SPACE bar
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
Verify parameter changes.
If required, change parameters at other end of the channel connection and verify parameter changes.
Connect master DS-0 channel(s) at the originator end of the channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
DSP MDS0
DEF MDS0, DEF DS0, or DEF CH/
DSP MDS0, DSP DS0, or DSP CH
CON DS0
NOD 7 DSP CFG */M
NOD 7 DSC DS0 1:16:2
NOD 7 DSP DST DS0 1:16:2
NOD 7 SET CFG 1:16:2 = 4, 6, 8
NOD 7 DSP CFG 1:16/M
NOD 7 DEF MDS0 1:16:2
NOD 7 DSP MDS0 1:16:2
NOD 10 DEF MDS0 1:18:1
NOD 10 DSP MDS0 1:18:1
NOD 7 CON DS0 1:16:2
L2UG
6/30/94
6-29
Table 6-11. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing I/O Channel Parameters
Activity Command Example
At the originator end of the channel connection, disconnect channels.
Verify channels are disconnected.
Specify I/O channel type and channel(s) to be changed.
DSC CH
DSP CON
DEF CH/
NOD 31 DSC CH 1:8:1-1:8:4
NOD 31 DSP CON 1:8:1-1:8:4
NOD 31 DEF CH/QSC 1:8:1-1:8:4
Current channel parameters are displayed.
Change parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP CH NOD 31 DSP CH 1:8:1-1:8:4
Current channel parameters are displayed.
NOD 17 DEF CH/QSC
1:10:1-1:10:4
NOD 17 DSP CH 1:10:1-1:10:4
If required, change parameters at other end of the channel connection and verify parameter changes.
NOTE
See the Synchronous Channel Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for channel parameters that must be the same at both ends of the channel connection.
DEF CH/
DSP CH
At the originator end of the channel connection, connect channels.
CON CH
Update configuration worksheets.
NOD 31 CON CH 1:8:1-1:8:4
6-30
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-12. Typical Configuration Activities
Defining Channel Connections
Activity Command Example
Display current channel connections.
DSP DST * NOD 3 DSP DST *
Currently defined channel connections for all channels at node 3 are displayed.
NOD 3 DSC CH 1:5:* At originator end of the channel connection, disconnect channels.
DSC CH or
DSC DS0
To define channel connections over an intermachine link for connections that do not require a transfer node:
•
Define channel connections.
DEF DST CH or
DEF DST DS0
•
Define corresponding channel connections for other end of the connection.
•
Repeat above steps as required to define all T-1/E-1 channel connections.
DEF DST CH or
DEF DST DS0
•
Verify channel connections.
DSP DST *
•
At originator end of the channel connection, connect channels.
CON CH or
CON DS0
To define DS-0 channel connections that do not require a transfer node:
•
Define local channel connections.
•
Define corresponding local Voice Processor or Channelized
Services Processor connections for other end of the connection.
•
Define remote channel connections.
DEF DST DS0
DEF DST CH or
DEF DST DS0
•
Define corresponding remote Voice Processor or Channelized
Services Processor connections for other end of the connection.
•
Repeat above steps as required to define all DS-1 channel connections.
•
Verify channel connections.
DEF DST CH or
DEF DST DS0
DEF DST DS0
DSP DST *
•
At local node, connect the originator channels.
CON CH or
CON DS0
NOD 3 DEF DST CH 1:5:*/N12
C1:6:*
NOD 12 DEF DST CH 1:6:*/N3
C1:5:*
NOD 3 DSP DST *
NOD 3 CON CH 1:5:*
NOD 6 DEF DST CH 1:4:*/N6
DS0
NOD 6 DEF DST DS0
1:10:1-1:10:4/N6 C1:4:*
NOD 10 DEF DST CH
1:8:*/N10 DS0
NOD 10 DEF DST DS0
1:12:1-1:12:4/N10 C1:8:*
NOD 6 DSP DST *
NOD 10 DSP DST *
NOD 6 CON DS0 1:10:1-1:10:4
L2UG
6/30/94
6-31
Table 6-12. Typical Configuration Activities
Defining Channel Connections (Cont’d)
Command Example Activity
•
At remote node, connect the originator channels.
CON CH or
CON DS0
NOD 10 CON DS0 1:12:1-1:12:4
•
•
To define channel connections over an intermachine link for connections that require a transfer node:
Define local channel connections to transfer node.
Set transfer node translation table entry.
DEF DST CH
SET TRA
•
Define corresponding channel connections to transfer node for other end of the connection.
•
Repeat as required to define all T-1/E-1 channel connections.
•
Verify channel connections.
•
At originator end of the channel connection, connect channels.
DEF DST CH
TRC SUB or TRC BCK
CON CH
NOD 11 DEF DST CH
2:1:3/N252 C1:8:1
NOD 129 SET TRA 1:8:9/N11
2:1:3/N101 1:6:4
NOD 129 S 101 DEF DST CH
1:6:4/N129 C1:8:1
NOD 129 TRC SUB N11 2:1:3
NOD 11 CON CH 2:1:3
Update configuration worksheets.
6-32
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-13. Typical Configuration Activities
Changing Broadcast/Polling Master and Group Connections
Activity Command Example
Display current broadcast/polling group connections.
Disconnect the originator host channel connection associated with the master broadcast/polling channel to be changed.
DSP POL
DSC CH
NOD 12 DSP POL *
NOD 5 DSC CH 1:18:3
Verify originator host channel is disconnected.
Clear and disconnect the master broadcast/polling channel and broadcast/polling group members to be changed.
Verify master broadcast/polling channel and broadcast/polling group members are disconnected.
If required, change channel parameters:
•
Specify channel(s) to be changed.
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify parameter changes.
Define master broadcast/polling channel.
Define broadcast/polling group members.
DSP DST CH
CLR POL [/A]
DSP POL [/A]
DEF CH/QSP
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
DSP CH
DEF MSR POL
DEF POL
Define the connection between the originator host channel and master broadcast/polling channel at both ends.
Connect the originator host channel.
Update configuration worksheets.
DEF DST CH
CON CH
NOD 5 DSP DST CH 1:18:3
NOD 12 CLR POL 1:17:1/A
NOD 12 DSP POL 1:17:1/A
NOD 12 DEF CH/QSP 1:17:1-1:17:4
NOD 12 DSP CH 1:17:1-1:17:4
NOD 12 DEF MSR POL 1:17:4
NOD 12 DEF POL
1:17:1-1:17:3/M 1:17:4
NOD 5 DEF DST CH 1:18:3/N12
C1:17:4
NOD 12 DEF DST CH 1:17:4/N5
C1:18:3
NOD 5 CON CH 1:18:3
L2UG
1/30/95
6-33
Table 6-14. Typical Configuration Activities
Defining Voice Compression Connections
Activity Command Example
Logically insert the Voice Server Module.
Define the Voice Server Module.
Define voice profile(s):
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes are made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
NOTE
To define a voice profile for voice compression, select 8000 or 16000 for compression speed.
Verify defined voice profiles.
To assign a voice profile to undefined channel(s):
•
Define the I/O or DS-0 channel as follows:
INS
SET VSM
DEF VPR
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
DSP VPR
INS 1:10
SET VSM 1:10
DEF VPR 2
DSP VPR 2
DEF DS0 1:12:1-1:12:8 DEF CH/, DEF DS0, or DEF BDL NPR
SPACE bar Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to voice profile parameter to define.
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
-
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
After all changes are made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
To assign a voice profile to defined channel(s):
•
Display current channel connections.
•
If the channel is connected, disconnect the channel.
F key or B key
RETURN key
DSP DST *
DSC DS0 1:13:1
•
Assign a voice profile to the channel.
•
At the originator end of the channel connection, connect the channel.
Define channel connections.
DSP DST *
DSC CH [/T], DSC
BDL, or DSC DS0 [/T]
DEF CH/, DEF DS0,
or DEF BDL NPR
CON CH, CON BDL, or CON DS0
DEF DST CH or
DEF DST DS0
DEF CH/EVM 1:13:1
CON DS0 1:13:1
DEF DST DS0 1:12:1-1:12:8/N22
D1:6:9-1:6:16
NOD 22 DEF DST DS0
1:6:9-1:6:16/N3 D1:12:1-1:12:8
Update configuration worksheets.
6-34
L2UG
1/30/95
Table 6-15. Typical Configuration Activities
Setting and Assigning Advanced Bandwidth Management (ABM) Profiles
Activity Command Example
Delete old ABM profile that is no longer to be used.
Define new ABM profile parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to display next line of parameters.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes have been made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
At originator end, connect channels that have been assigned to the designated ABM profile.
Verify channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
CLR PRO
DEF PRO
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
RETURN key
Verify ABM profile changes.
Modify a single parameter within an existing ABM profile.
If required, change ABM profile at other nodes and verify changes.
Assign an ABM profile to a specified I/O or DS-0 channel.
DSP PRO
SET PRO
Display all connections associated with this ABM profile.
Disconnect I/O and DS-0 channels assigned to the ABM profile.
SET CH
DSP DST */P
DSC PRO
Define connection over an intermachine link:
•
Define channel connections.
•
Define corresponding channel connections for destination end of connection.
DEF DST CH
DEF DST CH
CON PRO
DSP DST CH
CLR PRO 10
DEF PRO 10
DSP PRO 10
SET PRO 10/EPR=D
SET CH 1:10:1/P10
DSP DST */P10
DSC PRO 10
DEF DST CH 1:10:1/N2 C1:5:1
NOD 2 DEF DST CH 1:5:1/N1
C1:10:1
CON PRO 10
DSP DST CH */P10
L2UG
1/30/95
6-35
Table 6-16. Typical Configuration Activities
Assigning Voice Profiles
Activity Command Example
Define new voice profile parameters:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes are made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify voice profile changes.
Assign the voice profile to a specified channel(s) as follows:
•
Display current channel connections.
•
If the channel that is to be assigned the voice profile is connected, disconnect the channel.
•
Assign the voice profile.
•
At the originator end of the channel connection, connect the channel.
Verify channel connection.
DEF VPR
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
DSP VPR
DSP DST *
DSC CH [/T], DSC
BDL, or DSC DS0 [/T]
DEF CH/, DEF DS0, or DEF BDL NPR
CON CH, CON BDL, or CON DS0
DSP DST CH or
DSP DST DS0
DEF VPR 2
DSP VPR 2
DSP DST *
DSC DS0 1:13:1
DEF CH/EVM 1:13:1
CON DS0 1:13:1
DSP DST DS0 1:13:1
Update configuration worksheets.
6-36
L2UG
1/30/95
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node
Table 6-17 shows typical activities needed when adding a node to the network or when reconfiguring an existing node.
Table 6-17. Typical Configuration Activities
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node
Command Example Activity
Set DIP switches for each module according to the procedure given in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
When adding a node to the network, the following programming must be done locally.
NOTE
A supervisory terminal must be connected to local supervisory port. See "Accessing
Supervisory Port" paragraph in Chapter 2,
Getting Started. Supervisory port parameters and gateway status are initially defined by
Network Module DIP switch settings. After the following local node programming has been defined, these parameters can be changed by
DEF SP and CLR/SET GWY commands entered at a remote node.
Define node number.
Reset node.
Select supervisory port pagination:
•
For paginated output (23 lines per page) with a pause before printing each page
•
For continuous output
Define at least one route from the new node to the root node, i.e., the central site that has a network management computer or supervisory terminal for network control:
•
To define routing table in any order of path delay, use the /F modifier to specify the preferred order of routing:
Specify destination node.
-
In response to system prompts, define up to eight paths.
Each path is specified by: b.
Path delay
DEF NOD
RST
SET PG
CLR PG
DEF RTE /F
DEF NOD 35
RST 1:1
SET PG
CLR PG
NOD 5 DEF RTE 2/F
PATH 1 DL = 3
PATH 1 PD = 2
PATH 2 DL = 5:2
•
•
PATH 2 PD = 0
•
PATH 8 DL = 9
PATH 8 PD = 7
-
Press RETURN key to store routing table and exit.
Repeat above steps as required to define routes for each node in the path from the new node to the root node.
RETURN key
L2UG
6/30/94
6-37
Table 6-17. Typical Configuration Activities
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node (Cont’d)
Command Example Activity
•
To define routing in ascending order of path delay:
Specify destination node.
-
In response to system prompts, define up to eight paths.
Each path is specified by:
DEF RTE NOD 4 DEF RTE 3
PATH 1 DL = 5
PATH 1 PD = 0
PATH 2 DL = 3
•
•
PATH 2 PD = 2
•
PATH 8 DL = 9
PATH 8 PD = 7
-
Press RETURN key to store routing table and exit.
Repeat above steps as required to define routes for each node in the path from the new node to the root node.
Define alarm notification list and ensure the node number of the root node is entered on list.
•
In response to system prompts, enter up to 16 node numbers on alarm notification list.
RETURN key
DEF ALM DEF ALM
ALARM 01:3
•
•
ALARM 02:7
•
ALARM 16:22
•
Press RETURN key to store alarm notification list and exit.
The following programming can be done locally or from a remote site.
Define all system parameters.
Define intermachine link parameters for all intermachine links.
Define routing tables.
NOTE
When adding a new node to the network, ensure that routing tables of other nodes in the network are updated to define routing to the new node.
Define DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters for all Voice Processor
DS-1/E-1 trunks.
Define DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters for all Channelized Services
Processor DS-1/E-1 trunks.
Define bundle configurations.
Define channel parameters for all channels.
Define ABM profiles.
Define voice profiles.
RETURN key
See Table 6-3.
See Table 6-4.
See Table 6-5.
See Table 6-6.
See Table 6-8.
See Table 6-10.
See Tables 6-7, 6-9, and
6-11.
See Table 6-15.
See Table 6-16.
6-38
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 6-17. Typical Configuration Activities
Adding or Reconfiguring a Node (Cont’d)
Activity Command Example
DEF SPR 3 Define speed profiles.
Define channel connections for all channels.
Define broadcast/polling group connections.
Define voice compression connections.
Define/change supervisory port or supervisory computer port parameters. (Network Module DIP switch must be set to use database values.)
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
Press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Select supervisory port or supervisory computer port gateway status. (Command must be entered from a remote node.)
Initialize real time clock.
Set date.
Verify all programming.
Verify and record database checksum.
Set database checksum, if necessary.
DEF SPR
See Table 6-12.
See Table 6-13.
See Table 6-14.
DEF SP or DEF CP
SPACE bar
F key or B key
RETURN key
SET GWY CP or SP
CLR GWY CP or SP
SET TIM
SET DAT
See Table 6-2.
DSP CKS
SET CKS
DSP CKS
Backup/save database to microcomputer or floppy disk to archive using the Database Backup procedure in Chapter 2, Getting Started.
SAV DB
Verify database integrity using the CHECKDB.EXE program
(provided with LINK/2+ operational software floppy disk package).
DEF CP
Current supervisory computer port parameters are displayed.
NOD 14 SET GWY SP
SET TIM 10:15:00
SET DAT 07-20-1989
DSP CKS
SET CKS
DSP CKS
SAV DB
L2UG
6/30/94
6-39
Table 6-18. Typical Configuration Activities —Defining an X.50 Server Module Channel
Connection
Activity Command Example
Logically insert the X.50 Server Module.
Define the X.50 Server Module.
INS
SET XSM [/R]
DEF XS0
SPACE bar
INS 1:3
SET XSM 1:3/R
NOTE:
/R indicates redundant module.
DEF XS0 1:3:1 Define X.50 DS-0 channels:
•
Press SPACE bar to advance cursor to parameter to be changed.
•
Use F key or B key to scroll to new parameter value.
•
Repeat above steps to change additional parameters.
•
After all changes are made, press RETURN key to store parameters and exit.
Verify defined X.50 DS-0 channels.
Define destination between X.50 DS-0 and other module. Module may be another XSM, ILP, ILQ, CSP, QSC, or QSP.
F key or B key
RETURN key
DSP XS0
DEF DST XS0
Display channel connections.
Connect X.50 DS-0 channels.
Display status of X.50 DS-0 channels.
Use SET MAP command to assign correct speed and time slot.
Use DISPLAY MAP command to ensure that the mapping has been set as required.
Define X.50 subrate channels.
Display defined X.50 subrate channels.
Define destination for X.50 subrate channels.
Verify defined X.50 subrate channel connections.
Connect X.50 subrate channels.
Display status of X.50 subrate channels.
Display X.50 subrate channel connection.
Update configuration worksheets.
DSP DST DS0
CON
DSP ST XS0
SET MAP
DSP MAP
DEF XCH
DSP XCH
DEF DST XCH
DSP DST
CON
DSP ST XCH
DSP DST
DSP XS0 1:3:1
DEF DST XS0 1:3:1/N2000
D1:15:1, can also be X1:3:1
DEF DST XS0 1:15:1/N2000
D1:3:1
DSP DST 1:3:1
DSP DST DS0 1:15:1
DSP DST DS0 1:3:1/N2000
D1:15:1
CON 1:3:1
DSP ST XS0 1:3
SET MAP 1:3:1:1/9600 = A
DSP MAP 1:3:1
DEF XCH 1:3:1:1
DSP XCH 1:3:1:1
DEF DST XCH 1:3:1:1/N2000
X1:15:1:1 or C1:10:1
DSP DST 1:3:1:1
CON 1:3:1:1
DSP ST XCH 1:3:1
DSP DST 1:3:1:1
6-40
L2UG
6/30/94
GUIDELINES FOR PERFORMING CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES
Maintaining Configuration Records
For proper network maintenance and control, an accurate description of each node in the network is vital. To provide a record of node configuration:
●
Update the configuration worksheets each time a configuration change is made.
●
Maintain a chronological log of configuration activities showing the date, reason, and individual associated with each change.
●
Update database file archives using the Database Backup procedure in Chapter 2, Getting
Started.
●
Verify database file archives integrity with the CHECKDB.EXE program (provided with the
LINK/2+ operational software floppy disk package).
Performing Configuration Activities from a Local or Remote Site
Because most supervisory port commands can be directed to a remote node, the following approaches can be taken to configure a network:
●
Configuration activities can be performed from the supervisory terminal at a central LINK/2+
System using remote commands. This centralized approach is especially useful for configuration tasks that affect several nodes in a network. To issue remote configuration commands from a local supervisory terminal:
The remote node must have the intermachine link security parameter disabled. See "Define
Intermachine Link Parameters (DEF DL) Command" and "Define Proprietary Bundle
Parameter (DEF BDL PR) Command" paragraphs.
The local supervisory port must be designated as a gateway port. See Network Module chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual.
The node number of the remote node must be defined. See "Define Node Number (DEF
NOD) Command" paragraph.
The local node number must be on the alarm notification list of the remote node. See
"Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command" paragraph.
At least one route between the local and remote nodes must be defined for each node in the path. See "Define and Clear Routing Table (DEF RTE, CLR RTE) Commands" paragraph.
●
Configuration activities can be performed at each LINK/2+ System using a local supervisory terminal. Local configuration changes are allowed as long as the local supervisory port is designated as a gateway port.
●
Configuration activities can be performed using the TIME/VIEW NMS connected to the
LINK/2+ System.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-41
Parameter Effectivity
Parameter changes take effect as follows:
●
System parameters—Changes to most system parameters are implemented immediately upon entry of the command.
Exceptions are:
Intermachine link out-of-service timer; requires reset of affected Interlink Module(s). For
Integrated Trunk Modules, resetting one proprietary bundle changes the out-of-service timer for all proprietary bundles on the module. Affects intermachine links with individual outof-service timer programmed as SYS only.
System maximum phasor size; requires disconnect of affected channels to change, and subsequent reconnect of those channels to take effect
System I/O parameter; requires disconnect of affected channels to change, and subsequent reconnect of those channels to take effect
Most system parameters can have different values at each node, so changes made at one node do not necessarily require changes at another node.
●
Intermachine link parameters—Changes to most intermachine link parameters are not implemented until the Interlink Module or the bundle(s) of the Integrated Trunk Module is reset. Exceptions are satellite delay, subrate multiplexing, security, encryption, group, alarm threshold, Link Framing Module slot/bundle, logical node translation, and node to translate, which take effect immediately. Most intermachine link parameters must be the same at both ends of the intermachine link, so changes made at one node usually require changes at another node.
●
DS-1/E-1 parameters—Changes to DS-1/E-1 parameters are not implemented until the
Integrated Trunk Module, Voice Processor, or Channelized Services Processor for that trunk is reset. Usually, the trunk is connected to a channel bank, PBX, digital cross-connect, or fractional service provider access point, so changes made at one Integrated Trunk Module,
Voice Processor, or Channelized Services Processor do not require changes anywhere else in the network.
●
DS-0 and I/O channel parameters—Channels should be disconnected before DS-0 and I/O channel parameters are changed. After parameter changes are made, the channels must be reconnected to implement the changes. Exceptions are the echo cancellation and transmission level point parameters for the Enhanced Voice Module, Foreign Exchange Station Module, and
Foreign Exchange Office Module. Some channel parameters must be the same at both ends of the channel connection, so changes made at one node may require changes at another node.
●
Bundle configurations—Changes to Channelized Services Processor and Integrated Trunk
Module bundle configurations may require changes to the master DS-0 channel parameters and channel parameters at the terminator end of the connection. See Digital Voice and Channelized
Services Parameters chapter and Integrated Trunk Parameters chapter in the Configuration
Planning Manual for configuration guidelines.
6-42
L2UG
6/30/94
●
Broadcast/polling connections—Changes to master broadcast/polling channel connections require that the broadcast/polling group members, originator host channel, and master broadcast/polling channel are disconnected. After parameter changes are made, all channels must be reconnected to implement the changes.
●
Voice Server Module connections—Changes to the speed parameter for channels processed by a Voice Server Module require that the channels be disconnected before the speed is changed. After the change is made, the channels must be reconnected to implement the change.
●
Link Framing Modules (Models LFM.3, .10, .11, .12, .14) —Parameters and configuration do not take effect until the module is reset with the RST n:ss command.
●
D-Channel Module—Parameters do not take effect until the module is reset with the RST n:ss command.
●
Voice profiles—Changes to voice profiles do not affect associated channels until the channels are disconnected then reconnected.
●
Speed profiles—Changes to speed profiles do not affect associated channels until the channels are disconnected then reconnected.
●
Before making configuration changes, display parameters to verify current values and slot locations of channels.
●
After making configuration changes, display parameters to verify that changes are correct.
Record changes on configuration worksheets.
CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Supervisory port configuration (programming) commands are described in the following paragraphs. Commands are in alphabetical order by command mnemonic. Related commands are discussed together.
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR FMC, CLR MC, or CLR MM)
Command
The CLR FMC, CLR MC, and CLR MM commands clear a node from being a master clocking node. Either command can be used.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] CLR FMC
[NOD xxxx] CLR MC
[NOD xxxx] CLR MM
See "Define Master Clocking Nodes (DEF MM) Command" paragraph for information on defining a master clocking node.
L2UG
1/30/95
6-43
Clear Remote Node Gateway (CLR GWY) Command
See "Set and Clear Remote Node Gateway (SET GWY, CLR GWY) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR MC) Command
See "Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR FMC, CLR MC, or CLR MM) Command" paragraph.
Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR MM) Command
See "Clear Master Clocking Node (CLR FMC, CLR MC, or CLR MM) Command" paragraph.
Clear Broadcast/Polling Group Members (CLR POL) Command
See "Define and Clear Broadcast/Polling Group Members (DEF POL, CLR POL) Commands" paragraph.
Clear ABM Profile (CLR PRO) Command
See "Define and Clear ABM Profile (DEF PRO, CLR PRO) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Redundant Module (CLR RDN) Command
See "Set and Clear Redundant Module (SET RDN, CLR RDN) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Region (CLR REG) Command
The CLR REG command clears a node from regionalized routing. Nonregional routing requires that a route to every other node in the network be defined. This should be done prior to issuing the
CLR REG command; otherwise, remote communication may be lost.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR REG
Use the DSP SY command to determine if the node is defined as regionalized or nonregionalized.
Clear Routing Table (CLR RTE) Command
See "Define and Clear Routing Table (DEF RTE, CLR RTE) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Nodal Security (CLR SEC) Command
See "Set and Clear Nodal Security (SET SEC, CLR SEC) Commands" paragraph.
6-44
L2UG
1/30/95
Clear Speed Profile (CLR SPR) Command
See "Define and Clear Speed Profile (DEF SPR, CLR SPR) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Voice Profile (CLR VPR) Command
See "Define and Clear Voice Profile (DEF VPR, CLR VPR) Commands" paragraph.
Convert Bias Routing (CNV BIAS) Command
The CNV BIAS command changes the bias routing for all channels that were bias routed on one intermachine link to another intermachine link.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CNV BIAS ss
1
[:cc
1
]
{
ss
2
[:cc
2
] or OFF
}
where: ss
1 ss
2
[:cc
1
[:cc
2
] = current bias intermachine link slot number and bundle number (optional)
] = new bias intermachine link slot number and bundle number (optional)
OFF = terminate bias on intermachine link specified
For example, to change the routing for all channels currently bias routed over intermachine link 12 to intermachine link 11, enter:
CNV BIAS 12 11
NOTE:
Channels must be disconnected before the CNV BIAS command is issued. After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Convert ABM Profile (CNV PRO) Command
The CNV PRO command converts the ABM profile of all channels and DS-0 channels using one
ABM profile to another ABM profile.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CNV PRO ppp
1
ppp
2 where: ppp
1 ppp
2
= "from" ABM profile (1-250 or D for default)
= "to" ABM profile (1-250 or D for default)
For example, to convert all channels using the default ABM profile to ABM profile 1, enter:
CNV PRO D 1
L2UG
6/30/94
6-45
Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON, CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0,
DSC, DSC BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Commands
The CON command connects bundles, I/O channels, DS-0, X.50 DS-0, and X.50 subrate channels. The DSC command disconnects nonproprietary bundles, IO, DS-0, X.50 DS-0, and
X.50 subrate channels. The CON BDL, DSC BDL, CON DS0, and DSC DS0 commands connect and disconnect DS-0 channels and bundled DS-0 channels when master DS-0 channel is specified.
PRECAUTION: The DSC * command disconnects all nonproprietary bundles, IO, DS-0, X.50 DS-0, and X.50 subrate channels.
Use the DSC * command with extreme caution.
NOTE:
If all channels or a range of channels are disconnected using the DSC
CH command and then immediately reconnected using the CON CH command, one or more channels may fail to connect. If this should happen, repeat the CON CH command to successfully connect all of the channels.Commands:
[NOD xxxx] CON *
[NOD xxxx] CON
{
n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[NOD xxxx] CON
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
[NOD xxxx] CON BDL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Bz or /Xz]
[NOD xxxx] CON CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[NOD xxxx] CON DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/Bz or /Xz]
[NOD xxxx] DSC *[/F or /T]
[NOD xxxx] DSC
{
n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[/
T
]
[NOD xxxx] DSC
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}[/
T
]
[NOD xxxx] DSC BDL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/F or /T]
[NOD xxxx] DSC CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/T]
[NOD xxxx] DSC DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/F or /T] where: /B = specifies the use of the backup dial link directory associated with z, the
Interlink Module slot or Integrated Trunk Module bundle number
/F = disconnects the specified bundle and all channels on the bundle or disconnects the X.50 DS-0 channel and all associated X.50 subrate channels
/X = specifies the use of the expansion dial link directory associated with z, the
Interlink Module slot or Integrated Trunk Module bundle number
/T = disconnects specified I/O channels, DS-0 channels, X.50 DS-0 channels, or
X.50 subrate channels at the terminator end of a connection z = {1:ss, ss} for Interlink Module slots or {1:ss:cc, ss:cc} for Integrated Trunk
Module bundle numbers
NOTE:
If the DSC CH command is issued with the /T modifier to a simplex terminator channel, the channel is temporarily disconnected and the connection is retried.
Channels must be disconnected before certain programming changes are made. For example, the following commands require that the channels are disconnected before the command is issued, then reconnected to implement the changes:
●
CNV BIAS—Changes bias routing for channel(s).
●
DEF BIAS CH—Defines bias routing for I/O channel(s).
6-46
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
1/30/95
●
DEF BIAS DS0—Defines bias routing for DS-0 channel(s).
●
DEF CH/—Defines I/O channel parameters.
●
DEF DS0—Defines Voice Processor DS-0 channel parameters.
●
DEF DST CH or DEF CON—Defines I/O channel connections.
●
DEF DST DS0 or DEF DST XS0—Defines DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel connections.
●
DEF DST XCH—Defines X.50 subrate channel connections.
●
DEF MDS0—Defines Channelized Services Processor master DS-0 channel parameters.
●
DEF MSR POL—Defines the broadcast/polling master channel.
●
DEF POL—Defines the specified channel to a broadcast/polling group with the specified master channel.
●
DEF PSZ—Defines system maximum phasor size.
●
DEF SPR—Defines the Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) for the specified profile number.
●
DEF VPR—Defines the voice profile for the specified voice profile number.
●
DEF XCH—Defines the X.50 subrate channel parameters for the X.50 Server Module.
●
DEF XS0—Defines the X.50 DS-0 channel parameters for the X.50 Server Module.
●
DEL CH—Deletes the database entries for the specified I/O channel(s), DS-0 channel(s), X.50
DS-0 channels, or X.50 subrate channels.
●
SET BIAS XCH—Defines bias routing for X.50 subrate channel(s).
●
SET BIAS XS0—Defines bias routing for X.50 DS-0 channel(s).
●
SET CFG—Defines the bundle configuration for each Channelized Services Processor or
Integrated Trunk Module.
●
SET CH—Assigns the specified ABM profile to I/O or DS-0 channels within a specified range.
●
SET MAP—Defines speed and timeslot for specified subrate channel (s) of the X.50 Server
Module.
To implement the programming changes specified by these commands, the channel(s) must be disconnected and then connected as follows:
●
If a channel is currently disconnected, issue the command to make programming changes.
Then, enter the CON CH, CON DS0, or CON command to connect the channel and implement the changes.
6-47
●
If a channel is currently connected, enter the DSC CH, DSC DS0, or DSC command to disconnect the channel. Issue the command to make programming changes. Then, enter the
CON CH or CON DS0 command to connect the channel and implement the changes.
The connect channel command can be issued only at the originator end of a channel. Use the DSP
CH, DSP MDS0, DSP DS0, or DSP XS0 command to determine which end of the channel is the originator.
The disconnect channel command can be issued at the originator or terminator end of a channel.
Use the /T modifier to issue a disconnect channel command at the terminator end of a connection.
The following commands can also be used to connect or disconnect channels:
●
CON DR—Direct channel connect.
●
CON ND, DSC ND—Connect to node and disconnect from node.
●
CON PR, DSC PR—Connect and disconnect channels by priority.
●
CON PRO, DSC PRO—Connect and disconnect channels by ABM profile.
●
DSC DL—Disconnect channels on intermachine link.
NOTE:
Contention channels with the proper control signals present will not respond to the DSC CH command.
Connect Channel (CON CH) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC BDL, DSC CH,
DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Direct Channel Connect (CON DR) Command
The CON DR command allows the user to specify the route a particular channel connection will take to the destination node, overriding the paths defined in the routing tables.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] CON DR
{
* or n:ss:c
[
-n:ss:c
]
...[,n:ss:c
[
-n:ss:c
]
] p
1
[,p
2
[NOD xxxx] CON DR
{
* or n:ss:cc
[
-n:ss:cc
]
...[,n:ss:cc
[
-n:ss:cc
]
] p
[NOD xxxx] CON DR
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr
[
-n:ss:cc:sr
]
...[,n:ss:cc:sr
[
,...p
8
1
[,p
2
]
}
,...p
-n:ss:cc:sr
]
8
][/B or /X]
] p
1
[,p
2
,...p
8
]
}
}
where: n:ss:c = I/O channel to be routed n:ss:cc = DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel to be routed n:ss:cc:sr = X.50 subrate channel to be routed p
1
= a path number (1-8) listed in the routing table of the originating node. This path is used to connect the channel to the next node in the route to the p
2
,...p
8 destination node.
= a path number (1-8) listed in the routing table of each subsequent bypass node.
Each path is used to connect the channel to the next node in the route to the
6-48
L2UG
1/30/95
destination node. Up to seven bypass nodes between the originating node and the destination node are allowed.
/B = overrides the first path number and specifies the corresponding backup bundle instead
/X = overrides the first path number and specifies the corresponding expansion bundle instead
NOTE:
The CON DR command is not supported for Isochronous
Communication Module I/O channels.
See Figure 6-1 for an example of the CON DR command.
If a routed channel encounters an intermachine link operating in simplex mode, the channel may not be routed according to the specified path.
The route established by the CON DR command is NOT stored in the database and will be lost if the specified channel is subsequently disconnected and connected.
The CON DR command can be implemented only at the originator end of a channel. Use the DSP
CH, DSP MDS0, or DSP DS0 command to determine which end of the channel is the originator.
For diagnostic purposes, CON DR connections can be made over an intermachine link that is in loopback.
NOTE:
If the CON DR command is issued to a channel while a previous CON
DR command is still being processed, the message "CONNECT
QUEUE IN USE" is displayed.
Connect DS-0 Channel (CON DS0) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC BDL, DSC CH,
DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Connect to Node and Disconnect from Node (CON ND, DSC ND)
Commands
The CON ND command connects channels to the specified node(s). The DSC ND command disconnects channels from the specified node(s). Both commands can be restricted to connect or disconnect channels having the specified priority level.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] CON ND
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]...
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
[/Ppr]
[NOD xxxx] DSC ND
{
* or xxxx[-xxxx]...
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]}
[/Ppr] where: /Ppr = connects or disconnects channels with connect priority level pr (1-16) only
For example, to connect all channels originating at node 15 and terminating at nodes 20 and 21, enter:
NOD 15 CON ND 20,21
L2UG
6/30/94
6-49
6-50
NODE 4
ROUTING TABLE
TO NODE 3
PATH 1: DL04, PD00
PATH 2: DL03, PD01
NODE 4
4
NODE 5
ROUTING TABLE
TO NODE 3
PATH 1: DL04, PD00
PATH 2: DL03, PD01
PATH 3: DL05, PD01
3
NODE 5
4
5
3
NODE 1
ROUTING TABLE
TO NODE 3
PATH 1: DL04, PD00
PATH 2: DL05, PD01
PATH 3: DL03, PD01
NODE 1
3
4
5
NODE 3
3
4
NODE 2
NODE 2
ROUTING TABLE
TO NODE 3
PATH 1: DL04, PD00
PATH 2: DL03, PD01
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND ENTERED AT SUPERVISORY TERMINAL LOCATED
AT NODE 1:
NOD 5 CON DR n:ss:c 3,2,1
CONNECTION USES:
- PATH 3 FROM NODE 5 TO NODE 1
- PATH 2 FROM NODE 1 TO NODE 2
- PATH 1 FROM NODE 2 TO NODE 3
= SHOWS ROUTE SPECIFIED BY
CON DR COMMAND
Figure 6-1. Example of Direct Channel Connect (CON DR) Command
L2UG
6/30/94
To restrict the connections to only those channels having a priority of 3, enter:
NOD 15 CON ND 20,21/P3
To disconnect all channels originating at node 15 and terminating at nodes 20 and 21, enter:
NOD 15 DSC ND 20,21
The CON ND and DSC ND commands can be implemented only at the originator end of a channel. Use the DSP CH, DSP MDS0, or DSP DS0 command to determine which end of the channel is the originator.
Connect and Disconnect Broadcast/Polling Group Members
(CON POL, DSC POL) Commands
The CON POL command connects the specified channel to the defined broadcast/polling group.
The DSC POL command disconnects the specified channel from the defined broadcast/polling group.
The specified channel will be connected if the following requirements are met:
●
The associated Quad Synchronous Processor is installed and the INS command was issued for the module.
●
The master channel and the broadcast/polling channel are in the same nest.
●
A previous connection for the channel does not exist.
●
The channel is defined to a broadcast/polling group.
●
The master channel is connected.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx]CON POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A]
[NOD xxxx]DSC POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A] where: /A = connects or disconnects all broadcast/polling group members associated with the specified master channel
NOTE:
The DSC POL command will not disconnect the master broadcast/polling channel(s). To disconnect the master broadcast/polling channel(s), each corresponding originator host channel must be disconnected using the DSC CH command.
For example, to connect broadcast/polling group member 1:18:3, enter:
CON POL 1:18:3
To connect all the broadcast/polling group members associated with master channel 1:18:1, enter:
CON POL 1:18:1/A
L2UG
6/30/94
6-51
To disconnect broadcast/polling group member 1:18:3, enter:
DSC POL 1:18:3
To disconnect all the broadcast/polling group members associated with master channel 1:18:1, enter:
DSC POL 1:18:1/A
Connect and Disconnect Channels by Priority
(CON PR, DSC PR) Commands
The CON PR command connects channels with the specified priority level(s). The DSC PR command disconnects channels with the specified priority level(s). Both commands can be restricted to connect or disconnect channels terminating at a specified node.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx]CON PR
{
* or pr[-pr]...
[
,pr[-pr]
]}
[/Nxxxx]
[NOD xxxx]DSC PR
{
* or pr[-pr]...
[
,pr[-pr]
]}
[/Nxxxx] where: pr = connect priority level (1-16)
/Nxxxx = connects or disconnects channels terminating at node xxxx only
For example, to connect all channels originating at node 30 having priorities of 3 and 4, enter:
NOD 30 CON PR 3,4
To restrict the connections to only those channels terminating at node 20, enter:
NOD 30 CON PR 3,4/N20
To disconnect all channels originating at node 30 having priorities of 3 and 4, enter:
NOD 30 DSC PR 3,4
The CON PR and DSC PR commands can be implemented only at the originator end of a channel.
Use the DSP CH, DSP MDS0, DSP DS0, DSP XS0 command to determine which end of the channel is the originator.
Connect and Disconnect Channels by ABM Profile
(CON PRO, DSC PRO) Commands
The CON PRO command connects all channels that have been assigned to the specified ABM profile(s). The DSC PRO command disconnects all channels that have been assigned to the specified ABM profile(s).
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] CON PRO ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]
[/D]
[NOD xxxx] CON PRO /D
6-52
L2UG
6/30/94
[NOD xxxx] DSC PRO ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]
[/D]
[NOD xxxx] DSC PRO /D where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250)
/D = qualifier to include default ABM profile in the range
NOTE:
The DSC PRO command does not affect bandwidth contention channels.
For example, to connect all channels using the default ABM profile, enter:
CON PRO/D
To disconnect all channels using ABM profiles 1, 5, and the default ABM profile, enter:
DSC PRO 1,5/D
Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command
The DEF ALM command defines the alarm notification list for a node. The alarm notification list specifies the remote node(s) that the local node must notify when an alarm occurs. An alarm message is automatically displayed on an idle supervisory terminal at the specified remote node(s) when an alarm occurs (providing the SET MUM REM command has not been implemented) and is logged in the alarm table.
The alarm notification list also specifies the remote nodes that can issue nonglobal gateway commands to the local node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF ALM
NOTE:
When the remote command is used, the local node should be placed on the alarm notification list to ensure that subsequent gateway commands are accepted.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port prompts the user to enter node numbers, Figure
6-2. Up to 16 node numbers can be entered on the alarm notification list. Press the RETURN key at a blank entry to terminate the list. If a Control C character is entered when defining a node’s alarm notification list from a remote node, no entry is made on the list. If a Control C character is entered when defining a node’s alarm notification list locally, the last node entered is not saved to the list.
N0001>DEF ALM
ALARM 01:148
ALARM 02:253
ALARM 03:1330
ALARM 04:
ALARM 01 - Alarm notification list numbers (1-16) 148 - User-entered node number
Figure 6-2. Typical Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command
L2UG
6/30/94
6-53
Define Integrated Trunk Module Bundle Parameters (DEF BDL NPR,
DEF BDL PR) Commands
The DEF BDL NPR and DEF BDL PR commands display the current Integrated Trunk Module bundle configuration parameters and allow the user to change parameter values in the database for the specified Integrated Trunk Module. The DEF BDL NPR command displays the current nonproprietary bundle parameters; the DEF BDL PR command displays the current proprietary bundle parameters. The commands are always issued to the master DS-0 of any bundle.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF BDL NPR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
[NOD xxxx] DEF BDL PR
{
* or 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]}
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current nonproprietary, Figure 6-
3A, or proprietary, Figure 6-3B, bundle parameters for the specified Integrated Trunk Module.
Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General
Information. See the Integrated Trunk Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one channel or a range of channels is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the first channel specified. After the new parameter values have been entered, the parameters of all specified channels will be overwritten with the bundle parameter values that are displayed.
NOTE:
Channels must be disconnected before the DEF BDL NPR command is issued. After the command is issued, the bundle must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Channels should be disconnected before the DEF BDL PR command is issued. After the command is issued, reset the bundle with the RST
BDL command to effect the changes. The channels must then be reconnected.
If a DS-0 channel is connected when a remote DEF BDL NPR command is issued, the command is aborted and the message
"CONNECTION EXISTS, CMD ABORTED" is displayed.
If a DS-0 channel within a range is connected, execution of a local
DEF BDL NPR command will update only the disconnected channel parameters.
The Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundle uses only frame mode 2.
6-54
L2UG
6/30/94
N0077>DEF BDL NPR 1:10:01
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
ORIG 32 NONE 01 02 Nx64K CC NONE
A OOS B OOS C D OOS OOS BITS DSC ALM
7F ENABLE
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile
VPROFILE - Voice profile
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
A. NONPROPRIETARY BUNDLE PARAMETERS (DEF BDL NPR)
N0077>DEF BDL PR 1:10:15
CONNECT ARQ SYNCS TX MODE SECURITY ENCRYPT
PR-ORIG 200 08,LVL2 NxSW56K DISABLE NO
BDL TYPE GROOMING POWERUP LINKBACK LINK EXP
DIAL LNK DISABLE AUTO CON 1:12:1 1:14:06
GROUP ALMTHLD AL7MASK UNIT
------- DONT CARE ON MASTER
CONNECT - Proprietary originator/terminator of connection
ARQ - Supervisory channel bandwidth (BPS)
SYNCS - Number of sync characters per scan cycle, sync level
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SECURITY - Security
ENCRYPT - Encryption
BDL TYPE - Bundle type
GROOMING - Grooming
POWERUP - Automatic connect at powerup
LINKBACK - Link backup bundle
LINK EXP - Link expansion bundle
GROUP - Group assignment
ALMTHLD - Alarm threshold
AL7MASK - Alarm 7 masking
UNIT - Master/Slave designation
B. PROPRIETARY BUNDLE PARAMETERS (DEF BDL PR)
Figure 6-3. Typical Define Integrated Trunk Module Bundle Parameters Commands
L2UG
6/30/94
6-55
Define Bias Routing (DEF BIAS CH, DEF BIAS DS0) Commands
The DEF BIAS CH and DEF BIAS DS0 commands define the bias route (first intermachine link) over which a channel will be connected to a remote node. The DEF BIAS CH command defines the bias routing for I/O channels. The DEF BIAS DS0 command defines bias routing for Voice
Processor, Channelized Services Processor, and Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 channels or bundled DS-0 channels.
NOTE:
To define bias routing for X.50 DS-0 channels, use the SET BIAS XS0 command.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF BIAS CH n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
/routing
[NOD xxxx] DEF BIAS DS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
/routing where routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = the intermachine link number and bundle number (optional) to which all channels in the specified range of channels will bias
Lss[:cc]/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
Lss[:cc]/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
OFF = the specified channels will terminate bias routing
OFF/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
OFF/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
If the intermachine link specified in the command is out-of-service, then the next intermachine link in the routing table is selected. Every intermachine link in the routing table is attempted before the biased intermachine link is retried. The channel is not placed on the retry queue until every intermachine link in the routing table is tried once.
If the intermachine link selected in the command is not defined or is not listed in the routing table to the destination node, then the LINK/2+ System will attempt connection over the primary, nonbiased route.
Some applications of bias routing include the following:
●
An alternative to the CON DR command: The route defined with the DEF BIAS command remains in the database, while the route defined using the CON DR command will be lost if the channel is subsequently disconnected and reconnected.
●
Channel redundancy: Route two channels with the same destination over two different intermachine links.
●
Route avoidance: Bias route to ensure that less desirable routes are taken only as a last resort.
6-56
L2UG
6/30/94
●
Load sharing: Bias routing can be used to distribute channels over several intermachine links.
Without bias routing, the primary route is always the first one attempted.
NOTE:
The bias routing parameters are defined for originator channels only.
Channels must be disconnected before the DEF BIAS CH and DEF
BIAS DS0 commands are issued. After the commands are issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Define System Clock Fallback List (DEF CFB) Commands
The DEF CFB commands define the system clock fallback list, which specifies the primary system clock source and two fallback clock sources.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF CFB 1 clock
[NOD xxxx] DEF CFB 2 clock
[NOD xxxx] DEF CFB 3 clock
Define the three system clock sources by entering each of the following commands:
DEF CFB 1 clock - Clock fallback 1 (primary) source
DEF CFB 2 clock - Clock fallback 2 source
DEF CFB 3 clock - Clock fallback 3 source
All three commands must be entered. See System Parameters chapter in the Configuration
Planning Manual for guidelines on clock source selection. The choices for the clock parameter are:
CH 1:ss:c = synchronous channel receive clock
DLR ss = intermachine link receive clock
DLT ss = intermachine link transmit clock
DRI ss = intermachine link independent receive clock
DS1 n:ss = DS-1 trunk clock
DS1 n:ss/SC1 = DS-1 trunk clock with Voice Processor output to Network Module station clock 1
DS1 n:ss/SC2 = DS-1 trunk clock with Voice Processor output to Network Module station clock 2
INT = internal 6 MHz oscillator
LFM n:ss = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock (from LFM.14 Module)
LFM n:ss/SC1 = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock with LFM.14 Module output to Network Module station clock 1
LFM n:ss/SC2 = NTT High-Speed Secondary Service trunk clock with LFM.14 Module output to Network Module station clock 2
SC1 = Network Module station clock 1 input
SC2 = Network Module station clock 2 input
SKP = skip clock source (indicates that this clock fallback entry does not have a clock source and is not checked when a clock failure occurs)
L2UG
6/30/94
6-57
6-58
NOTE:
Up to two SKP clock fallback entries are allowed. At least one clock fallback entry must specify a clock source.
If all system clock sources are incorrectly defined, e.g., slot number specified for DLR or DLT clock is not an Interlink Module, the internal clock is used as the system clock.
Some typical clocking arrangements are as follows:
●
Clock fallback 1, 2, and 3 are all independent clock sources. If clock fallback 1 (primary) fails, clock fallback 2 is automatically used as the system clock. If clock fallback 2 fails, clock fallback 3 is automatically used as the system clock. If clock fallback 3 fails, the LINK/2+
System will attempt to use the original primary clock fallback 1 source. If all clocks on the fallback list fail, the internal clock is used until one of the clocks on the fallback list becomes functional.
●
Clock fallback 1 and 2 are independent clock sources, and clock fallback 3 is a SKP clock source entry. If clock fallback 1 (primary) fails, clock fallback 2 is automatically used as the system clock. If clock fallback 2 fails, the LINK/2+ System will attempt to use the original primary clock fallback 1 source. If all clocks on the fallback list fail, the internal clock is used until one of the clocks on the fallback list becomes functional.
●
Clock fallback 3 is an independent clock source and clock fallback 2 is a dependent clock source. When clock fallback 1 (primary) fails, clock fallback 3 is automatically used as the system clock source; the LINK/2+ System will attempt to use an independent clock source before a dependent clock source. If clock fallback 3 fails, clock fallback 2 is automatically used as the system clock. If clock fallback 2 fails, the LINK/2+ System will attempt to use the original primary clock fallback 1 source. If all clocks on the fallback list fail, the internal clock is used until one of the clocks on the fallback list becomes functional.
The following restrictions apply to system clock sources:
●
If the internal clock is on the clock fallback list, automatic fallback to the next clock source is inhibited. Use the SET CLK command to direct the LINK/2+ System to use another clock source as the system clock.
●
If a synchronous channel receive clock is a system clock source, enter n:ss:c to specify the channel. Only channels in the Control Mainframe (nest 1) can be used. The specified channel must be defined as a DTE with an external clock. The channel speed should be at least 2400 bps and must be a multiple of 400 Hz.
●
If an intermachine link receive clock (DLR or DRI) or intermachine link transmit clock (DLT) is a system clock source, enter slot number ss to specify the location of the Interlink Module for that intermachine link.
●
If Network Module station clock 1 or station clock 2 is a system clock source, define the station clock speed with the DEF SC command before entering SC1 or SC2 on the clock fallback list.
●
If a DS-1 trunk clock (DS1) is a system clock source, enter nest and slot number n:ss to specify the location of the Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services
Processor for that DS-1 trunk. If the Voice Processor is in an Expander Mainframe, the DS-1 clock must be externally input to the Network Module via station clock 1 (/SC1) or station clock 2 (/SC2).
L2UG
6/30/94
●
If an Integrated Trunk Module is selected as a clock fallback, the only valid choice for the
clock parameter is DS1 n:ss.
Define Channel Parameters (DEF CH/, DEF DS0, DEF MDS0)
Commands
The DEF CH/, DEF DS0, and DEF MDS0 commands display the current channel parameters for the specified channel(s) and module type, and allow the user to change parameter values in the database. Use the DEF CH/ command for I/O module channels. Use the DEF DS0 command for
Voice Processor DS-0 channels. Use the DEF MDS0 command for Channelized Services
Processor master DS-0 channels.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF CH/module n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
where: DCI = Dual Isochronous Module
DSC = Dual Synchronous Module
EVM = Enhanced Voice Module
FXO = Foreign Exchange Office Module
FXS = Foreign Exchange Station Module
ICM = Isochronous Communication Module
QAM = Quad Asynchronous Module
QSC = Quad Synchronous Module, QVC Voice Module, or Subrate Channel
Processor
QSP = Quad Synchronous Processor
QVM = QVM Voice Module
QVM.1 = QVM.1 Voice Module
QVM.2 = QVM.2 Voice Module
QVM.3 = QVM.3 Voice Module
QVM.5 = QVM.5 Voice Module
QVM.6 = QVM.6 Voice Module
NOTE:
Channel parameters for an entréeLINK+ FXO.3 Foreign Exchange
Office Module cannot be configured from a LINK/2+ node. This module must be configured via the supervisory port of an entréeLINK+ node or from a TIME/VIEW Network Management
System.
[NOD xxxx] DEF DS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
[NOD xxxx] DEF MDS0 1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]...
[
,1:ss:cc[-1:ss:cc]
]
After the DEF CH/, DEF DS0, or DEF MDS0 command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current channel parameters, Figure 6-4, for the specified channel. Select new parameters per
"Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the chapters on defining channel parameters in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one channel or a range of channels is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the first channel specified. After the new parameter values have been entered, the parameters of all specified channels will be overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed, provided these channels are on the same module type as the displayed channel.
L2UG
8/30/94
6-59
NOTE:
Channels must be disconnected before the DEF CH/, DEF DS0, and
DEF MDS0 commands are issued. After the commands are issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
If a DS-0 channel is connected when a local or remote DEF DS0 or
DEF MDS0 command is issued, the command is aborted and the message "CONNECTION EXISTS, CMD ABORTED" is displayed.
If a DS-0 channel within a range is connected, execution of a local or
remote DEF DS0 or DEF MDS0 command will update only the disconnected channel parameters.
N0001>DEF CH/QSC 1:6:1
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR CONNECT FNS.
9600 * 5 16 07 ORIG OUTBAND
TYPE PHRESET PHASOR OOS OPER CTSGEN CTSDELAY
DCE MX DO NOTHING AUTO 28
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS.
OFF
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
SPEED - Data speed. Only speeds supported by the type of Network Module installed are displayed as menu selections.
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
FNS - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
TYPE - Interface type
PHRESET - Receive phasor reset (inband DTE only)
PHASOR - Phasor size
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
CTSGEN - CTS generation (DCE only)
CTSDELAY - CTS delay (AUTO CTSGEN only)
CTN. TYPE - Contention type
B/W. FNS. - Bandwidth functions
NOTE: See DSP CH or DSP DS0 command examples in Chapter 5 for other types of channel parameter displays.
A. QUAD SYNCHRONOUS MODULE CHANNELS (DEF CH/)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 1 of 6)
NOTE:
When defining Quad Synchronous Processor channels at a local node, a "g" will appear to the right of the speed value if the speed is not supported by the Network Module type installed. The speed is recognized by the LINK/2+ System, but external clocking is required
(i.e., TYPE = DTE2) for other than QSP.12, QSP.14, or QSP.18 Quad
Synchronous Processor Modules.
When defining a remote Quad Syncronous Processor channel, the "g" will not be displayed. In this case, use the DSP CH command to determine if the speed is a "g" type.
6-60
L2UG
8/30/94
N0001>DEF CH/ICM 1:3:2
CONNECT MODE TYPE SPD.PROF OOS OPER PHASOR
ORIG PLEIS DTE1 DISABLE MARK FF 10
SPEED PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR POLARITY MIL.INT.
1544000 DEFAULT 01 02 D-N,F-N D-B,F-B
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS. CTSGEN CTSDELAY MX.ADJST BYTE CNT
OFF 1 1
DSR/DTR ERR.POL. MX.STUFF
TRNS NORMAL 04
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
MODE - Mode of operation
TYPE - Interface type
SPD.PROF - Speed profile (ENABLE/DISABLE)
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
◊
PROFILE - ABM profile
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
POLARITY - Polarity, where:
D-N,F-N = data normal, functions normal
D-I,F-N = data inverted, functions normal
D-N,F-I = data normal, functions inverted
D-I,F-I = data inverted, functions inverted
◊
= When speed profile is enabled, speed profile number is displayed.
MIL.INT. - Military switchable interface, where:
D-B, F-B = data balanced, functions balanced
D-U, F-B = data unbalanced, functions balanced
D-B, F-U = data balanced, functions unbalanced
D-U, F-U = data unbalanced, functions unbalanced
CTN.TYPE - Contention type
B/W. FNS. - Bandwidth functions
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds
MX.ADJST - Maximum output clock adjustment
BYTE CNT - Byte counter
DSR/DTR - Data set ready/data terminal ready control
ERR.POL. - Error polarity
MX.STUFF - Maximum stuffer error correction
B. ISOCHRONOUS COMMMUNICATION MODULE CHANNELS (DEF CH/)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
6-61
N0010>DEF CH/EVM 2:1:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
ORIG 2 NONE 16000 01 06
PHASOR CODE.LAW 1S.DNSTY E-LD FTR OOS OPER
8 OFF 0 FORCE IDLE
ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB SF SIG
ENABLE 16 MS ENABLE ON NONE
TX TLP IN DBM RX TLP IN DBM FAX NSF
-18 .0 -18 .0 DISABLE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed §
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
CODE.LAW - Code law
1S. DNSTY - Ones density
E-LD FTR - E-lead filter
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
ECH CANL - Echo canceler §
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length §
CEN CLIP - Center clipper §
TONE DSB -Tone disable §
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling §
TX TLP IN DBM - Transmit transmission level point in dBm
RX TLP IN DBM - Receive transmission level point in dBm
FAX NSF - Fax nonstandard functions (EVM.3 only)
§ = If a voice profile is selected, these parameters are not individually programmed.
C. ENHANCED VOICE MODULE CHANNELS (DEF CH/)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 3)
6-62
L2UG
6/30/94
N0010>DEF CH/FXO 1:7:1 - 1:7:4
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE SPEED PRIORITY DELAYTHR
ORIG 1 NONE 8000 02 07
PHASOR CODE.LAW 1S.DNSTY A/B FLTR OOS OPER
8 MU-LAW ON FORCE IDLE
ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB SF SIG
ENABLE 32 MS ENABLE ON NONE
TX TLP IN DBM RX TLP IN DBM FAX NSF
-10 .0 -10 .0 ENABLE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
SPEED - Channel speed §
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
CODE.LAW - Code law
1S. DNSTY - Ones density
A/B FLTR - A/B filter
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
ECH CANL - Echo canceler §
ECH TAIL - Echo tail length §
CEN CLIP - Center clipper §
TONE DSB -Tone disable §
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling
TX TLP IN DBM - Transmit transmission level point in dBm
RX TLP IN DBM - Receive transmission level point in dBm
FAX NSF - Nonstandard fax features
◊
§ = If a voice profile is selected, these parameters are not individually programmed.
◊
=
FXO.3 and FXS.3 Modules only.
D. FOREIGN EXCHANGE MODULE CHANNELS (DEF CH/)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 4)
L2UG
6/30/94
6-63
N0001>DEF DS0 1:9:1
CONNECT PROFILE VPROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
ORIG * 2 1 03 01 A
A OOS B OOS C D OOS ABCD IDL OOS BITS DSC ALM BUSYOUT
MARK SPACE SP SP
PHASOR
08
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator/contention
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
VPROFILE - Voice profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling, where:
SP = space
MK = mark
ABCD IDL - ABCD idle bit pattern
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
BUSYOUT - Busy out timer
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
E. VOICE PROCESSOR DS-0 CHANNELS (DEF DS0)
N0001>DEF MDS0 1:9:1
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR TX MODE SIGNAL
ORIG 2 03 01 MU-PCM AB
A OOS B OOS C D OOS OOS BITS DSC ALM
SPACE SPACE SP SP
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TX MODE - Transport mode of operation
SIGNAL - Signaling mode
A OOS - Out-of-service operation for A signaling
B OOS - Out-of-service operation for B signaling
C D OOS - Out-of-service operation for C and D signaling, where:
SP = space
MK = mark
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
DSC ALM - Disable/enable alarm
F. CHANNELIZED SERVICES PROCESSOR DS-0 CHANNELS (DEF MDS0)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 5)
6-64
L2UG
6/30/94
N0001>DEF CH/QSP 2:12:3
CONNECT SPEED OUTPUT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR
ORIG 56000 =IN SPD DEFAULT 02 02
TYPE FNS. PHRESET PHASOR CTSGEN CTSDELAY
DCE INBAND MX TRANS
CTN.TYPE B/W.FNS. OOS OPER DTR.FUNC MIL.INT. POLARITY
OFF MARK FF TRNS D-U,F-U D-N,F-N
SPECIAL STR.TMR. DSR.OPT. SW56_SIG
56K/64K TRNS ENABLE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
SPEED - Channel speed (bps)
OUTPUT - Output mode or transmit speed
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
TYPE - Interface type
FNS. - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
PHRESET - Receive phasor reset (DTE, in-band only)
PHASOR - Phasor size
CTSGEN - Clear-to-send generation (DCE only)
CTSDELAY - Clear-to-send delay time in milliseconds
(DCE, AUTO CTSGEN only)
CTN. TYPE - Contention type
B/W. FNS. - Bandwidth functions
OOS OPER - Out-of-service operation
DTR.FUNC - Data terminal ready signal
MIL.INT. - Military switchable interface, where:
D-B, F-B = data balanced, functions balanced
D-U, F-B = data unbalanced, functions balanced
D-B, F-U = data balanced, functions unbalanced
D-U, F-U = data unbalanced, functions unbalanced
POLARITY - Polarity, where:
D-N,F-N = data normal, functions normal
D-I,F-N = data inverted, functions normal
D-N,F-I = data normal, functions inverted
SPECIAL - Special features, where:
NONE = No special features selected
LPDA-1 = Link Problem Diagnostic Aid
56K/64K = 56K service
BCAST/D = Broadcast/polling, data sensitivity
BCAST/D/SP = Broadcast/polling, data sensitivity, spacing alarm
BCAST/F = Broadcast/polling, function sensitivity
BCAST/F/SP = Broadcast/polling, function sensitivity, spacing alarm
SMPLX BCST = Simplex broadcast mode
STR. TMR. - Anti-streaming timer, where:
OFF = No anti-streaming timer
1-30 or 64 = 1 to 30 seconds or 64 seconds
DSR. OPT. - Data set ready option
SW56_SIG - Switched 56K service with end-to-end signaling when enabled. Switched 56K service without end-to-end signaling when disabled.
G. QUAD SYNCHRONOUS PROCESSOR MODULE CHANNELS (DEF QSP)
Figure 6-4. Typical Define Channel Parameters Commands (Sheet 6)
L2UG
6/30/94
6-65
Define Channel Connection (DEF CON) Command
The DEF CON command defines channel connections from an I/O channel to another I/O channel, a DS-0 channel, or an X.50 subrate channel. The DEF CON command is the same as the
DEF DST CH command. See "Define Destination Channel (DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0, DEF
DST XS0) Commands" paragraph.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF CON n
or Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
L
:ss
D
:ss
L
D
:c
L
:cc
[-n
L
:ss
L
:c
D
] or Xn
L
D
]/Nxxxx
:ss
{
D
:cc
D
:sr
Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
:ss
D
]
D
:c
D
]
}
where: n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
= specifies local I/O channel
/Nxxxx = specifies node number of destination channel. Destination channel must be at a
Cn
Dn
D
D
:ss
:ss
D
Xn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
D
:c
:cc
D
:sr
D
D remote node for I/O channel to I/O channel connections.
= specifies destination I/O channel
= specifies destination DS-0 channel
= specifies destination X.50 subrate channel
NOTE:
A channel must be defined before establishing a connection.
Otherwise, the message "UNDEFINED CHANNEL" is displayed.
Define Supervisory Computer Port Parameters (DEF CP) Command
The DEF CP command displays the current supervisory computer port parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF CP
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current parameters, Figure 6-5.
Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General
Information. See the System Parameters chapter of the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
N0001>DEF CP
SPEED STOP PARITY
9600 01 NONE
SPEED - Computer port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
PARITY - Parity type
Figure 6-5. Typical Define Supervisory Computer Port Parameters (DEF CP) Command
6-66
L2UG
6/30/94
Define Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF CSP)
Command
The DEF CSP command displays the current Channelized Services Processor DS-1 parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF CSP 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]
NOTE:
All DS-0 channels on a Channelized Services Processor must be disconnected when DS-1 parameters for that Channelized Services
Processor are defined.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current DS-1 parameters, Figure
6-6, for the Channelized Services Processor in the specified slot number. Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the Digital
Voice and Channelized Services Parameters chapter of the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the Channelized Services Processor in the first slot number specified. After the new parameter values are entered, the parameters of all Channelized
Services Processors specified in the command are overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTES:
If a DS-0 channel is connected on any Channelized Services Processor within a range, execution of a local or remote DEF CSP command will update only the Channelized Services Processors that have no connected DS-0 channels.
The DEF CSP command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the Channelized Services Processor(s) must be reset.
N0001>DEF CSP 1:16
FRAMNG CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE LN DRV OOS BITS
G.732S SYS A-PCM INT 7F
KG RATE KG LEAD KG MODE KG POLR INTL BIT NATL BIT
5 SEC SINGLE PULSE NEGATIVE 1 1F
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
KG RATE - Retrain signal rate
KG LEAD - Retrain signal lead
KG MODE - Retrain signal mode
KG POLR - Retrain signal polarity
INTL BIT - International bit
NATL BIT - National bits
Figure 6-6. Typical Define Channelized Services Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF CSP) Command
L2UG
6/30/94
6-67
Define ISDN D-Channel Parameters (DEF DCM) Command
The DEF DCM command displays the current ISDN D-channel parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF DCM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current ISDN D-channel parameters, Figure 6-7, for the D-Channel Module in the specified slot number. Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the
ISDN D-Channel Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the D-Channel Module in the first slot number specified. After the new parameter values are entered, the parameters of all D-Channel Modules specified in the command are overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTE:
The DEF DCM command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the D-Channel Module(s) must be reset.
A maximum of six on-line D-Channel Modules are permitted per node.
If more than six are defined, the message "TOO MANY DCMs IN
NODE" is displayed. Redundant modules are not counted toward the maximum.
N0010>NOD 0077 DEF DCM 1:12
NET TYPE NET PLAN NET ID SERVICE INTRFACE POLARITY
NATIONAL CARRIER 586 PSN 05 NORMAL
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
NET TYPE - Network type
NET PLAN - Network plan
NET ID - Network ID
SERVICE - Service type
INTERFACE - Interface
POLARITY-Polarity
Figure 6-7. Typical Define ISDN D-Channel Parameters (DEF DCM) Command
Define Intermachine Link Parameters (DEF DL) Command
The DEF DL command displays the current intermachine link parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF DL ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]
Use the range version of the command to load parameters into a redundant Interlink Module simultaneously.
6-68
L2UG
6/30/94
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current intermachine link parameters, Figure 6-8, for the Interlink Module in the specified slot number. Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the
Intermachine Link Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the Interlink Module in the lowest slot number. After the new parameter values have been entered, the parameters of all Interlink Modules specified in the command will be overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTE:
The DEF DL command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the Interlink Module(s) must be reset. Exceptions are security, encryption, group, satellite delay, subrate multiplexing, alarm threshold, logical node translation, and node to translate, which take effect immediately.
N0020>DEF DL 13
SPEED RECEIVE TXCLOCK LN DRV FRAME SATDELAY SATBUFF
48000 =TX SPD SYS EXT 02 NONE
ARQ RXARQ SYNCS UNIT SRM SEL ALMTHLD AL7MASK
3200 04,LVL1 MASTER NO DONT CARE OFF
SECURITY ENCRYPT GROUP TRNSLATE NOD2TRNS LFM SLOT LFM BNDL
DISABLE NO ------- OFF NONE
LINKBACK LINK EXP ACCESS OOS TIME
1:10:05 1:10:01 TO SUBNET SYS
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
SPEED - Intermachine link speed (bps)
◊
RECEIVE - Receive Intermachine link speed
SRM SEL - Subrate multiplexing
ALMTHLD - Alarm threshold
TXCLOCK - Source of transmit clock
LN DRV - Line driver type and speed (internal or external mandatory)
FRAME - Frame mode
SATDELAY - Satellite delay
SATBUFF - Satellite buffer size (bits)
ARQ - Supervisory channel bandwidth (bps)
RXARQ - Receive supervisory channel bandwidth
(bps)
SYNCS - Number of sync characters per scan cycle and sync character level
UNIT - Master/slave designation
AL7MASK - Intermachine link alarm 7 masking
SECURITY - Intermachine link security
(disable/enable)
ENCRYPT - Encryption
GROUP - Group assignment
TRNSLATE - Logical node translation
NOD2TRNS - Node to translate
LFM SLOT - Link Framing Module slot
LFM BNDL - Link Framing Module bundle
LINKBACK - Link backup bundle
LINK EXP - Link expansion bundle
ACCESS - Direction of intermachine link connection
(to backbone or to subnetwork)
OOS TIME - Out-of-service timer
◊
= When value displayed is followed by a "g", the speed is not supported by Network Module type installed. The speed is recognized by the LINK/2+ System but external clocking is required (i.e., TXCLOCK cannot be SYS).
Figure 6-8. Typical Define Intermachine Link Parameters (DEF DL) Command
L2UG
6/30/94
6-69
Define Destination Channel (DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0, DEF DST XS0)
Commands
The DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0, and DEF DST XS0 commands define channel connections:
●
The DEF DST CH command defines connection from an I/O channel to another I/O channel or to a DS-0 channel, or to an X.50 subrate channel. The DEF DST CH command is the same as the DEF CON command.
●
The DEF DST DS0 command defines connection from a DS-0 channel to another DS-0 channel, to an I/O channel, or to an X.50 DS-0 channel.
●
The DEF DST XS0 command defines connection from an X.50 DS-0 channel to another X.50
DS-0 channel, an I/O channel, or to a DS-0 channel.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF DST CH n
or Dn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
[-n
L
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:ss
L
:c
L
]/Nxxxx
{
Cn
D
:ss
] or Xn:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
}
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:c
D
] where: n
L
:ss
L
:c
L
= local I/O channel number
/Nxxxx = node number of destination channel
Cn
Xn
Dn
D
D
:ss
D
:ss
:ss
D
D
:cc
D
:c
:cc
D
D
D
:sr
D
= destination I/O channel number; must be at a remote node
= destination DS-0 channel; can be at local or remote node
= destination X.50 subrate channel; can be at local or remote node
NOTE:
A channel must be defined before that channel’s destination is defined.
Otherwise, the message "UNDEFINED CHANNEL" is displayed.
[NOD xxxx] DEF DST DS0 n
or Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
L
:ss
D
:c
D
L
:cc
L
[-n
] or Xn
L
:ss
D
:ss
D
L
:cc
L
]/Nxxxx
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
{
Dn
D
]
}
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
] where: n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
= local DS-0 channel number
/Nxxxx = node number of destination channel
Dn
D
Cn
Xn
D
:ss
D
D
:ss
:ss
D
:cc
D
D
:c
:cc
D
D
= destination DS-0 channel number; can be at local or remote node
= destination I/O channel number; can be at local or remote node
= destination X.50 DS-0 channel number; can be at local or remote node
[NOD xxxx] DEF DST XS0 n
or Cn
D
:ss
D
:c
D
[-n
D
:ss
L
:ss
D
:c
D
L
:cc
L
[-n
] or Dn
L
:ss
D
:ss
D
L
:cc
L
]/Nxxxx
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
{
Xn
D
]
}
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
[-n
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
] where: n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
= local DS-0 channel number
/Nxxxx = node number of destination channel
Xn
D
Cn
Dn
D
:ss
D
D
:ss
:ss
D
:cc
D
D
:c
:cc
D
D
= destination X.50 DS-0 channel number; can be at local or remote node
= destination I/O channel number; can be at local or remote node
= destination DS-0 channel number; can be at local or remote node
6-70
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
6/30/94
NOTE:
To connect channels via a DS-1 trunk, a Voice Processor, Integrated
Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor must be in both the local and remote nodes. A connection must be defined between the channels and Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor
DS-0 channels at the local node, and the channels and Voice
Processor or Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channels at the remote node. The CON DS0 or CON CH command must be issued to the originator channels at the local and remote nodes.
Channel connections must be defined in the LINK/2+ System database for each end of the channel. For example:
●
Single channel connection—To define a connection between I/O channel 1:5:1 at node 12 and
DS-0 channel 1:6:10 at node 21, enter the following commands:
NOD 12 DEF DST CH 1:5:1/N21 DS0
NOD 21 DEF DST DS0 1:6:10/N12 C1:5:1
●
Range of channel connections—To define connections between channels 1:5:1-1:5:4 at node
12 and channels 1:6:1-1:6:4 at node 21, enter the following commands:
NOD 12 DEF DST CH 1:5:*/N21 C1:6:*
NOD 21 DEF DST CH 1:6:*/N12 C1:5:*
●
Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor connections—To define a connection between I/O channel 1:16:1 at node 6 and I/O channel 1:12:1 at node 10 via a DS-1 trunk, where Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channel 1:8:4 is at node 6 and Channelized
Services Processor DS-0 channel 1:9:8 is at node 10, enter the following commands:
NOD 6 DEF DST CH 1:16:1/N6 DS0
NOD 6 DEF DST DS0 1:8:4/N6 C1:16:1
NOD 10 DEF DST CH 1:12:1/N10 DS0
NOD 10 DEF DST DS0 1:9:8/N10 C1:12:1
●
D-channel connections—To define a connection between D-channel 1:17:1 at node 6 and
Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 1:10:24 at node 6, enter the following commands:
NOD 6 DEF DST DS0 1:10:24/N6 C1:17:1
NOD 6 DEF DST CH 1:17:1/N6 D1:10:24
Channels must be disconnected before the DEF DST CH and DEF DST DS0 commands are issued. After the commands are issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
6-71
To implement the channel connection changes, the channel(s) must be disconnected and then connected as follows:
●
If a channel is currently disconnected, issue the DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0, or DEF DST
XS0 command to change the channel connections. Then, enter the CON CH or CON DS0 command to connect the channels and implement the changes.
●
If a channel is currently connected, enter the DSC CH or DSC DS0 command to disconnect the channel. Issue the DEF DST CH, DEF DST DS0, or DEF DST XS0 command to change the channel connections. Then, enter the CON CH or CON DS0 command to connect the channels and implement the changes.
Define Destination X.50 Subrate Channel (DEF DST XCH) Command
The DEF DST XCH command defines the connection from an X.50 subrate channel to another
X.50 subrate channel or to an I/O channel.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF DST XCH n
L
{Xn
D
:ss
D
:cc
D
:sr
D
[-n
D
:ss
:ss
L
D
:cc
:cc
L
:sr
L
[-n
L
D
:sr
D
] or Cn
:ss
L
D
:ss
:cc
D
L
:c
:sr
L
D
[-n
]/Nxxxx
D
:ss
D
:c
D
] where: n
L
:ss
L
:cc
L
:sr
L
= local X.50 subrate channel number
/Nxxxx = node number of destination channel
Xn
D
:ss
Cn
D
D
:cc
:ss
D
:sr
D
D
:c
D
= destination X.50 subrate channel; can be at local or remote node
= destination I/O channel number; can be at local or remote node
Define DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF DS0) Command
See "Define Channel Parameters (DEF CH/, DEF DS0, DEF MDS0) Commands" paragraph.
Define Voice Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF DS1) Command
The DEF DS1 command displays the current Voice Processor DS-1 parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF DS1 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Use the range version of the command to load parameters into a redundant Voice Processor simultaneously.
NOTE:
All DS-0 channels on a Voice Processor must be disconnected when
DS-1 parameters for that Voice Processor are defined.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current DS-1 parameters, Figure
6-9, for the Voice Processor in the specified slot number. Select new parameters per "Making
6-72
L2UG
6/30/94
Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the Digital Voice and
Channelized Services Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the Voice Processor in the first slot number specified.
After the new parameter values are entered, the parameters of all Voice Processors specified in the command are overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTES:
If a DS-0 channel is connected on any Voice Processor within a range, execution of a local or remote DEF DS1 command will update only the Voice Processors that have no connected DS-0 channels.
The DEF DS1 command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the Voice Processor(s) must be reset.
Define External Port Parameters (DEF EP) Command
The DEF EP command displays the current parameter values of the external port that interfaces the LINK/2+ System to a LINK/CSU and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
N0001>DEF DS1 1:9
FRAMING CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE TX ADPCM LN DRV OOS BITS
D4 NO RCV MU-PCM ANSI EXT
ILP MODE KG RATE KG LEAD KG MODE KG POLR INTL BIT NATL BIT
SCAN 30 SEC BOTH PULSE NEGATIVE
SEIZURE PRE-EMPT ORIG DSC SEIZE ON
500 MS 2 SEC 33.0 MS SPACE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
TX ADPCM - Transport ADPCM
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
ILP MODE - Mode of operation
KG RATE - Retrain signal rate
KG LEAD - Retrain signal lead
KG MODE - Retrain signal mode
KG POLR - Retrain signal polarity
INTL BIT - Internationl bits
NATL BIT - National bits
SEIZURE - Seizure time
PRE-EMPT - Preemption timer
ORIG DSC - Originator disconnect time
SEIZE ON - Seizure polarity
Figure 6-9. Typical Define Voice Processor DS-1 Parameters (DEF DS1) Command
L2UG
6/30/94
6-73
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF EP
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current parameters, Figure 6-10.
Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General
Information. See the System Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
N0001>DEF EP
SPEED STOP PARITY DATA
9600 01 EVEN 07
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
SPEED - External port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
PARITY - Type of parity
DATA - Number of data bits
Figure 6-10. Typical Define External Port Parameters (DEF EP) Command
Define Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameters (DEF ILQ) Command
The DEF ILQ command displays the current Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF ILQ 1:ss[-1:ss]...
[
,1:ss[-1:ss]
]
NOTE:
All bundles on an Integrated Trunk Module must be disconnected when DS-1 parameters for that Integrated Trunk Module are defined.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current DS-1 parameters, Figure
6-11, for the Integrated Trunk Module in the specified slot number. Select new parameters per
"Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the Integrated Trunk
Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the Integrated Trunk Module in the first slot number specified. After the new parameter values are entered, the parameters of all Integrated Trunk
Modules specified in the command are overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTES:
If a DS-0 channel is connected on any Integrated Trunk Module within a range, execution of a local DEF ILQ command will update only the
Integrated Trunk Modules that have no connected DS-0 channels.
The DEF ILQ command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the Integrated Trunk Module(s) must be reset.
6-74
L2UG
6/30/94
N0020>DEF ILQ 1:12
FRAMING CLEAR CH TX CLOCK PCM TYPE LFM SLOT LFM BNDL
G.732N YES SYS MU-PCM
LN DRV OOS BITS INTL BIT NATL BIT CRC-4
EXT 7F 1 1F ENABLE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
FRAMING - Framing format
CLEAR CH - Clear channel
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
LN DRV - Line driver type
OOS BITS - Out-of-service bit pattern
INTL BIT - International bit
PCM TYPE - PCM code law
LFM SLOT - Link Framing Module slot
LFM BUNDLE - Link Framing Module bundle
NATL BIT - National bits
CRC-4 - Cyclic redundancy check
Figure 6-11. Typical Define Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 Parameters (DEF ILQ) Command
Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM) Command
The DEF LFM command displays the current Link Framing Module parameters (Models LFM.3,
LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12, and LFM.14) and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF LFM 3 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[NOD xxxx] DEF LFM 10 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[NOD xxxx] DEF LFM 11 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[/1]
[NOD xxxx] DEF LFM 12 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
[/1 or /2]
[NOD xxxx] DEF LFM 14 n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
where: /1 = establishes two-to-one mode of operation
/2 = establishes two-to-two mode of operation
If no mode of operation is specified, the DEF LFM command establishes one-to-one mode of operation. The LFM.3 and LFM.10 Modules operate in one-to-one mode only. The LFM.14
Module may operate in one-to-one, two-to-one, three-to-one, or four-to-one mode, however, a qualifier is not used.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current Link Framing Module parameters, Figure 6-12, for the Link Framing Module(s) in the specified slot range. Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the
Link Framing Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-75
N0097>DEF LFM 3 1:7
SPEED TX CLOCK TX CRC RX CRC
512K - 8 SYS ENABLE ENABLE
SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count
TX CRC - Transmit CRC
TX CLOCK - Source of transmit clock
RX CRC -Receive CRC
A. TYPICAL DEF LFM 3 COMMAND
N0097>DEF LFM 10 1:7
A:FRAME B:FRAME
D4
A:SPEED A:LN DRV A:LENGTH A:TX CLK A:YELLOW A:B8ZS
1536K=64X24 EXT ->133 FT SYS DISABLE ENABLE
FRAME - Framing format
SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size
LN DRV - Line driver type
LENGTH - DSX-1 line length
TX CLK - Source of transmit clock
YELLOW - Yellow alarm
B8ZS - Bipolar operation
B. TYPICAL DEF LFM 10 COMMAND
Figure 6-12. Typical Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM) Commands (Sheet 1 of 3)
6-76
L2UG
6/30/94
N0097>DEF LFM 11 1:9/1
A:FRAME B:FRAME
D4
A:SPEED A:LN DRV A:LENGTH A:TX CLK A:YELLOW A:B8ZS
256K=64X4 EXT ->267 FT SYS ENABLE ENABLE
B:SPEED B:LN DRV B:LENGTH B:TX CLK B:YELLOW B:B8ZS
56K=56X1
FRAME - Framing format
A: - Parameters for connection A
B: - Parameters for connection B, not used except for speed
SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size
LN DRV - Line driver type
LENGTH - DSX-1 line length
TX CLK - Source of transmit clock
YELLOW - Yellow alarm
B8ZS - Bipolar operation
C. TYPICAL DEF LFM 11 COMMAND
N0097>DEF LFM 12 1:11/2
A:FRAME B:FRAME
D4 D4
A:SPEED A:LN DRV A:LENGTH A:TX CLK A:YELLOW A:B8ZS
56K=56X1 EXT ->267 FT SYS ENABLE ENABLE
B:SPEED B:LN DRV B:LENGTH B:TX CLK B:YELLOW B:B8ZS
56K=56X1 EXT ->267 FT SYS ENABLE ENABLE
A:FRAME - Framing format, connection A
B:FRAME - Framing format, connection B
A: - Parameters for connection A
B: - Parameters for connection B
SPEED - Intermachine link speed and DS-0 count/bundle size
LN DRV - Line driver type
LENGTH - DSX-1 line length
TX CLK - Source of transmit clock
YELLOW - Yellow alarm
B8ZS - Bipolar operation
D. TYPICAL DEF LFM 12 COMMAND
Figure 6-12. Typical Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM) Commands (Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
6-77
N0097>DEF LFM 14 1:13
A:MODULE A:SPEED B:MODULE B:SPEED
UNFRAMED 64K=64X1 D5 1544K
C:MODULE C:SPEED D:MODULE D:SPEED
UNFRAMED 1536K=64X24 NONE
A:MODULE - Framing format for connection A
A:SPEED - Speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection A
B:MODULE - Framing format for connection B
B:SPEED - Speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection B
C:MODULE - Framing format for connection C
C:SPEED - Speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection C
D:MODULE - Framing format for connection D
D:SPEED - Speed and DS-0 count/bundle size for connection D
E. TYPICAL DEF LFM 14 COMMAND
Figure 6-12. Typical Define Link Framing Module Parameters (DEF LFM) Commands (Sheet 3)
If more than one slot number or a range of slot numbers is entered in the command, the supervisory port displays the parameters of the Link Framing Module in the first slot number specified. After the new parameter values are entered, the parameters of all Link Framing Modules specified in the command are overwritten with the parameter values that are displayed.
NOTE:
The DEF LFM command enters the new parameters into the database but does not implement the changes. For the new parameters to take effect, the Link Framing Module(s) must be reset.
Define Master Clocking List (DEF MCL) Command
The DEF MCL command defines the remote master clocking node(s) that will receive "alive and well" and clock status messages from the local master clocking node. Up to 15 nodes can be placed on a master clocking list.
Each master clocking node should have a master clocking list defined. This enables each master clocking node in the network to know the status of the other master clocking nodes. Use the DSP
ST CLK command to determine the status of the master clocking node(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF MCL
After the command is entered, the supervisory port prompts the user to define the entries for the master clocking list. Each entry is defined by entering a master clocking node number, Figure
6-13. After the last master clocking node number is entered, the define master clocking list command is exited by pressing the RETURN key.
6-78
L2UG
6/30/94
N0001>DEF MCL
ENTRY 01: 25
ENTRY 02: 550
ENTRY 03: 252
ENTRY 04: 165
ENTRY 05: 130
ENTRY 06: 236
ENTRY 07: 30
ENTRY 08: 66
ENTRY 09: 75
ENTRY 10: 122
ENTRY 11: 108
ENTRY 12: 1120
ENTRY 13: 20
ENTRY 14: 59
ENTRY 15: 23
Figure 6-13. Typical Define Master Clocking List (DEF MCL) Command
Define Master DS-0 Channels (DEF MDS0) Command
See "Define Channel Parameters (DEF CH/, DEF DS0, DEF MDS0) Commands" paragraph.
Define Master Clocking Nodes (DEF MM) Command
The DEF MM command defines a node as a master clocking node for the network and assigns a clock priority to the node. Up to 16 nodes can be defined as master clocking nodes. Each master clocking node should be defined with a different clock priority.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF MM cpr where: cpr = clock priority of the specified master clocking node. Clock priority is from 1 to 16, where 1 is the highest clock priority.
For example, to define node 18 as a master clocking node with priority 1, enter:
NOD 18 DEF MM 1
The purpose of multiple master clocking node(s) is to guarantee under all conditions that there will be an independent clock source in the network. If all independent clock sources in all multiple master clocking nodes are inoperable, the multiple master clocking node with the highest priority will use its internal oscillator to provide timing to the network until an independent clock source at any multiple master clocking node becomes operational.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-79
Define Broadcast/Polling Master Channel (DEF MSR POL) Command
The DEF MSR POL command defines the broadcast/polling master channel. The specified channel will become the broadcast/polling master channel if the following requirements are met:
●
A previous connection for the channel does not exist.
●
The channel is defined for broadcast/polling.
●
The channel is not a member of a broadcast/polling group.
The master broadcast/polling channel will connect to the host channel at the originating node. All broadcast/polling members associated with a master broadcast/polling channel communicate to the host channel via the connection established between the host channel and the master broadcast/polling channel.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF MSR POL n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
For example, to define channel 1 of the Quad Synchronous Processor located in nest 1, slot 16 as a master channel, enter:
DEF MSR POL 1:16:1
NOTE:
Channel(s) must be disconnected before the DEF MSR POL command is issued. After the command is issued, the channel(s) must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Define Node Number (DEF NOD) Command
The DEF NOD command enters the node number of the local LINK/2+ System in the database.
The node number identifies the LINK/2+ System in all remote commands and on the alarm notification list.
Command:
DEF NOD xxxx
The DEF NOD command must be entered locally at each LINK/2+ System.
Upon completion of the DEF NOD command, the node must be reset.
Define Intermachine Link Out-Of-Service Time (DEF OOS) Command
The DEF OOS command defines the time in seconds that an intermachine link may be continuously out-of-sync before the intermachine link is declared out-of-service. This parameter applies to all intermachine links at a node.
6-80
L2UG
6/30/94
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF OOS tt where: tt = 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16 seconds
When an intermachine link is out-of-sync beyond the specified time, the out-of-service alarm 07 is displayed on an idle supervisory terminal and also logged in the alarm table. If the out-of-service time is changed, the Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 database receives the update through a reset of the module or of any proprietary bundle on the module. The Interlink Module receives the update through a reset of the module.
Define and Clear Broadcast/Polling Group Members
(DEF POL, CLR POL) Commands
The DEF POL command defines the specified channel(s) to a broadcast/polling group with the specified master channel. The channel will become a member of the broadcast/polling group if the following requirements are met:
●
The channel is defined for broadcast/polling.
●
The channel is not defined and connected to another broadcast/polling group. If the channel is defined to another broadcast/polling group but is not connected, the channel is redefined to the specified broadcast/polling group.
●
The channel speed, mode of transmitting EIA functions, and broadcast/polling sensitivity mode are the same as those defined for the master channel.
●
A previous connection for the channel does not exist.
●
The channel is not a master channel.
The CLR POL command disconnects and clears the specified channel from the associated broadcast/polling group. A master channel cannot be disconnected and cleared if the following conditions exist:
●
A connection for the master channel exists.
●
Broadcast/polling group members are associated with the master channel.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF POL n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
/M n:ss:c
[NOD xxxx] CLR POL
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/A] where:
/M n:ss:c = specifies the master broadcast/polling channel the broadcast/polling group member is associated with
/A = clears the master broadcast/polling channel and all broadcast/polling group members associated with the specified master channel
L2UG
6/30/94
6-81
NOTE:
The CLR POL command must be issued with the /A modifier to disconnect and clear a master broadcast/polling channel.
For example, to define channel 3 of the Quad Synchronous Processor located in nest 1, slot 16 to the broadcast/polling group with master channel 1:16:1, enter:
DEF POL 1:16:3/M 1:16:1
To disconnect and clear master channel 1:16:1, enter:
CLR POL 1:16:1/A
NOTE:
Channel(s) must be disconnected before the DEF POL command is issued. After the command is issued, the channel(s) must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Define and Clear ABM Profile (DEF PRO, CLR PRO) Commands
The DEF PRO command defines parameters for a single ABM profile.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF PRO ppp where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250)
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays parameters for the specified ABM profile number, Figure 6-14. Select parameter values per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in
Chapter 3, General Information. See the Advanced Bandwidth Management Profile Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
Once an ABM profile has been defined, individual parameter values can be changed using the
SET PRO command.
To assign an ABM profile to I/O and DS-0 channels, use the SET CH command.
The CLR PRO command deletes previously defined ABM profiles which will no longer be used at a node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250)
* = all ABM profiles
6-82
L2UG
6/30/94
N0001>DEF PRO 3
ENCRYPT MAXSAT LNKEPR LNKGRP GROOMING
DONT CARE DONT CARE GOOD <E-4 DONT CARE DISABLE
BMPSTATE BMPLEVEL OVERRIDE
DISABLE DISABLE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
ENCRYPT - Encryption
MAXSAT - Satellite threshold
LNKEPR - Link error performance
LNKGRP - Link group
GROOMING - Grooming enable/disable
BMPSTATE - Bumping state
BMPLEVEL - Bumping level (selectable only if bumping state is bumper, bumpee, or both)
OVERRIDE - Override enable/disable
Figure 6-14. Typical Define ABM Profile (DEF PRO) Command
Define System Maximum Phasor Size (DEF PSZ) Command
The DEF PSZ command defines the system maximum phasor buffer size.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF PSZ pp where: pp = 8, 10, 12, or 14 bytes
To program a channel to use the system maximum phasor size, set the channel PHASOR parameter to MX.
NOTE:
To change the system maximum phasor size, channels using this parameter must be disconnected before the DEF PSZ command is issued. After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Define Quality (DEF QUA) Command
The DEF QUA command allows you to change parameter values for performance monitoring of the interface of the Voice Processor(s) and Channelized Services Processor(s) specified, Figure
6-15. Use the DSP ST QUA command to view the framing errors reported for the parameters defined by the DEF QUA command.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF QUA
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
L2UG
6/30/94
6-83
N0001>DEF QUA 1:11
ALARM : ENABLE
SAMPLE INTERVAL : 10 SEC
ERROR TEST PERIOD : 24 HR
SEVERE ERROR TEST PERIOD : 30 MIN
SEVERE ERROR : 100
ERROR THRESHOLD : 1200
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD : 200
ALARM through SEVERE ERROR TEST PERIOD parameters are changed via menu selection;
SEVERE ERROR through SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD parameters are entered from keyboard.
ALARM - Enable/disable quality alarm report
SAMPLE INTERVAL - Quality sample interval
ERROR TEST PERIOD - Error test period
SEVERE ERROR TEST PERIOD - Severe error test period
SEVERE ERROR - Number of errors in sample interval that, if exceeded, will be declared a severe error
ERROR THRESHOLD - Error threshold
SEVERE ERROR THRESHOLD - Severe error threshold
Figure 6-15. Typical Define Quality (DEF QUA) Command
Define System Connect Retry Timer (DEF RET) Command
The DEF RET command defines the time the Network Module at an originator node will wait before reattempting to connect to the channel at the terminator node when:
●
Channels become disconnected because an intermachine link has failed.
●
The previous attempt to connect failed because bandwidth was not available.
●
Channel was groomed by translation node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF RET zz where: zz = a retry timer number (00, 02 to 16) that corresponds to a time in seconds given by: retry timer number x 15 = waiting time in seconds
NOTE:
An exception is the retry timer number 00. This number produces a waiting time of 2 seconds for the first reconnect attempt. The timer is changed to 8, 16, and 30 seconds for each subsequent attempt.
For example, if the retry timer is 02, the actual Network Module waiting time in seconds before reattempting to connect a channel is:
02 x 15 = 30 seconds
6-84
L2UG
6/30/94
Define and Clear Routing Table (DEF RTE, CLR RTE) Commands
The DEF RTE command defines a routing table that specifies all possible intermachine link paths from an originating node (physical node) to a destination node (physical or logical node). Routing tables must be defined so that remote commands and channel connections can be executed.
Defining all possible paths in the routing table helps to ensure that communication between two nodes will continue even in the event of multiple intermachine link failures.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF RTE xxxx[/F] where: /F = allows the user to define the routing paths in any order of path delay
To remotely define a routing table, at least one path to the remote supervisory terminal must be programmed at each node in the path. Typically, these routing tables are preprogrammed prior to shipment.
After the command is entered, the supervisory port prompts the user to define the paths from the originating node to the specified destination node. Each path is defined by entering:
●
Interlink Module slot number, or Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundle slot and bundle number
●
Path delay number
The path delay is the minimum number of bypass nodes between the originating node and the destination node. For point-to-point connections, the path delay number is 0. If the DEF RTE
command is issued without the /F modifier, paths must be defined in ascending order of path delay.
After the last intermachine link number and path delay are entered, the define routing table command is exited by pressing the RETURN key.
To illustrate, Figure 6-16 shows a typical network. The routing from physical node 5 to physical node 4 or logical node 10, for example, can take four possible paths—link 3, 5:7, 7, or 9.
If the DEF RTE command is issued WITHOUT the /F modifier, the routing is defined as follows:
●
When link 5:7 is used, the path delay is 0, i.e., point-to-point connection. Therefore, the path using link 5:7 should be the first entry in the routing table.
●
When link 7 or 9 is used, the path delay is 1, i.e., one other node —node 7—must be bypassed.
Since both paths have the same path delay, decide which intermachine link is preferable and enter that intermachine link path first, then enter the other intermachine link path in the routing table.
●
When link 3 is used, the path delay is 3, i.e., three other nodes —nodes 3, 1, and 2—must be bypassed. This path has the longest path delay and should be entered last in the routing table.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-85
NODE 3 NODE 33
ENTRY
NODE
NODE 6
NODE 1
ENTRY
NODE
LINK 3
NODE 5
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
LINK 5:7
NODE 2
ENTRY
NODE
LINK 7
LINK 9
NODE 7 NODE 4
LOGICAL
NODE
10
NODE 66
ENTRY
NODE
Figure 6-16. Sample Network to Be Routed
6-86
OTHER
NETWORK
SITES
NODE 34
ENTRY
NODE
OTHER
NETWORK
SITES
NODE 65
ENTRY
NODE
L2UG
6/30/94
If the DEF RTE command is issued WITH the /F modifier, the paths can be entered in any order, e.g., link 3 can be the first entry in the routing table even though that path has the longest path delay.
Figure 6-17 shows sample DEF RTE commands for defining the routing table from physical node
5 to physical node 4.
Observe the following guidelines when defining routing tables:
●
Up to eight different paths can be defined in each routing table.
●
An intermachine link number may appear only once in the same routing table.
●
For an intermachine link with redundant Interlink Modules, enter the slot number of the primary module only, i.e., the odd-numbered slot.
●
For an intermachine link with redundant Integrated Trunk Modules, enter the slot and bundle number of the primary Integrated Trunk Module only, i.e., the odd-numbered slot.
●
The maximum path delay number that can be entered in a routing table is 7.
N0001>NOD 5 DEF RTE 4
PATH 1 DL= 5:7
PATH 1 PD= 0
PATH 2 DL= 7
PATH 2 PD= 1
PATH 3 DL= 9
PATH 3 PD= 1
PATH 4 DL= 3
PATH 4 PD= 3
PATH 5 DL=
N0001>NOD 5 DEF RTE 4/F
PATH 1 DL= 9
PATH 1 PD= 1
PATH 2 DL= 7
PATH 2 PD= 1
PATH 3 DL= 3
PATH 3 PD= 3
PATH 4 DL= 5:7
PATH 4 PD= 0
PATH 5 DL=
N0001>NOD 5 DEF RTE 4 - Defines route from physical node 5 to physical node 4
PATH 1 DL= 5:7 - Intermachine link slot and bundle number for path 1
PATH 1 PD= 0 - Path delay for path 1
PATH 2 DL= 7, PATH 2 PD= 1 - Intermachine link slot and bundle numbers and path delay numbers for alternate paths, entered in ascending order of path delay. Up to eight paths can be defined.
A. WITHOUT /F MODIFIER
N0001>NOD 5 DEF RTE 4 - Defines route from physical node 5 to physical node 4
PATH 1 DL= 9 - Intermachine link slot for path 1
PATH 1 PD= 1 - Path delay for path 1
PATH 2 DL= 7, PATH 2 PD= 1 - Intermachine link slot and bundle numbers and path delay numbers for alternate paths, entered in any order of path delay. Up to eight paths can be defined.
B. WITH /F MODIFIER
Figure 6-17. Typical Define Routing Table (DEF RTE) Commands
L2UG
6/30/94
6-87
The CLR RTE command clears the routing table entries for the specified node(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR RTE xxxx[-xxxx]...
[
,xxxx[-xxxx]
]
NOTE:
Entering a remote command NOD xxxx xxxx
2 with node xxxx
1
1
should be avoided, since node xxxx
2
.
CLR RTE xxxx
2
from node
will no longer communicate
Define Station Clock Speed (DEF SC) Command
The DEF SC command displays the current station clock speeds and allows the user to change parameter values in the database. Station clock speeds must be defined if station clock 1 or station clock 2 will be used as a system clock source.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF SC
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current station clock speeds,
Figure 6-18. Select new speeds per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General
Information. See the System Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
Once the station clock speeds are defined, station clock 1 or station clock 2 can be entered on the system clock fallback list using the DEF CFB command.
N0001>DEF SC
ST CLK-1 576000
ST CLK-2 576000
ST CLK-1 - Speed of station clock 1 ST CLK-2 - Speed of station clock 2
Figure 6-18. Typical Define Station Clock Speed (DEF SC) Command
Define Supervisory Port Parameters (DEF SP) Command
The DEF SP command displays the current supervisory port parameters and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF SP
After the command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current parameters, Figure 6-19.
Select new parameters per "Making Menu Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General
6-88
L2UG
6/30/94
Information. See the System Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
For the LINK/2+ System to use the parameter values programmed in the database, Network
Module DIP switch must be set to use database parameters; otherwise, default supervisory port parameters are used:
●
Speed: 9600 bps
●
Stop bits: 1
●
Data bits/parity: 8 data bits, no parity
See the Network Module chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for
Network Module DIP switch settings.
Communications must be established between the supervisory terminal and supervisory port before the DEF SP command can be used to change local supervisory port parameters. Initial communications can be established by programming local supervisory port parameters from a supervisory computer port or a remote supervisory port, or by using default parameter values for the local supervisory port.
N0001>NOD 6 DEF SP
SPEED STOP DATA
1200 01 8 BITS NONE
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
SPEED - Supervisory port speed (bps)
STOP - Number of stop bits
DATA - Number of data bits and type of parity
Figure 6-19. Typical Define Supervisory Port Parameters (DEF SP) Command
Define and Clear Speed Profile (DEF SPR, CLR SPR) Commands
The DEF SPR command defines the Isochronous Communication Module speed(s) for the specified profile number, Figure 6-20. The CLR SPR command clears the Isochronous
Communication Module speed(s) defined for the specified profile number.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx]DEF SPR sp
[NOD xxxx]CLR SPR sp where: sp = speed profile number (1-16)
To define the speed(s), use the F key or B key to scroll through the speed selections. Press the
SPACE bar for each speed you want to select. A plus sign (+) appears next to the speed when it is selected. Upon completing selections, press RETURN key. The valid speed(s) selected for the profile are displayed. See Isochronous I/O Channel Parameters chapter in the Configuration
Planning Manual for more information on speed profiles.
L2UG
1/30/95
6-89
NOTE:
When selecting speeds for the profile, the SPACE bar is used to toggle the plus sign that appears next to a speed. If the plus sign appears, the speed is selected for the profile. Otherwise the speed is not selected for the profile.
N0001>DEF SPR 4
PROF: 04
1544000+
PROF: 04 1544000 1064000 728000 504000 336000
224000 153600 100000 64000 40800
19200
PROF: - Speed profile number
1544000+ - Defined profile speed indicator (plus sign)
NOTE:
19200 - Selected speeds (bps)
When INVALID is displayed instead of a valid speed, a speed not supported by the Isochronous
Communication Module was defined via TIME/VIEW or the computer port.
Figure 6-20. Typical Define Speed Profile (DEF SPR) Command
Define and Clear Voice Profile (DEF VPR, CLR VPR) Commands
The DEF VPR command defines the voice profile for the specified voice profile number, Figure
6-21. The CLR VPR command clears the defined voice profile for the specified voice profile number.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] DEF VPR vp
[NOD xxxx] CLR VPR vp where: vp = voice profile number (1-64)
The voice profile specifies the speed, echo canceler, echo tail length, center clipper, tone generation, single frequency signaling, and fax requirement for the channels associated with the
Voice Server Module.
To assign a voice profile to I/O and DS-0 channels, use the DEF CH or DEF DS0 command.
6-90
L2UG
1/30/95
N0008>DEF VPR 2
SPEED ECH CANL ECH TAIL CEN CLIP TONE DSB
VPROF 02 9.6K-STU ENABLE 16 MS ENABLED OFF
VPROF 02 CON TYP LOCAL IO FAX DELAY NSF
LOOP START FXO NO NORMAL DISABLE
VPROF 02 SF SIG REC GAIN XMIT GAIN TONE MIN TONE MAX
NONE 0 DB 0 DB OFF OFF
SPEED - Compression speed
ECH CANL - Echo canceler
ECH TAIL
∆
- Echo tail length
FAX DELAY - Fax delay
NSF - Nonstandard fax features
CEN CLIP - Center clipper
TONE DSB - Tone detection
CON TYP - Connection type
LOCAL IO - Local I/O
SF SIG - Single frequency signaling
REC GAIN - Receive gain
XMIT GAIN - Transmit gain
TONE MIN - Not currently supported
TONE MAX - Not currently supported
FAX - Fax required
∆
= Fixed at 32 ms for 16K-ATC, 6K-CELP, 8K-CELP, 9.6K-CELP, and 16K-CELP.
Figure 6-21. Typical Define Voice Profile (DEF VPR) Command
Define X.50 Subrate Channel Parameters (DEF XCH) Command
The DEF XCH command displays the current X.50 subrate channel parameters, Figure 6-22, for the specified X.50 subrate channel(s) on the X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF XCH n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr
]
]
where cc = X.50 DS-0 channel number 1-16
sr = X.50 subrate channel number 1-20
NOTES:
The speed and mapping fields cannot be scrolled or defined with the
DEF XCH command.
Before using the DEF XCH command, the SET MAP command must be used to define the speed and mapping parameters.
L2UG
6/30/97
6-91
N0129>DEF XCH 1:5:8:1
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR SPEED MAPPING
ORIG DEFAULT 02 07 9600 A
FNS PHASOR
NONE MX
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
‡ NOTE:
SPEED - X.50 subrate channel speed (bps)‡
MAPPING - Time slot position within X.50 frame‡
FNS - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
These fields are for display only. Refer to the SET MAP command for configuring these parameters.
Figure 6-22. Typical Define X.50 Subrate Channel Parameters (DEF XCH) Command
After the DEF XCH command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current channel parameters for the specified X.50 subrate channels. Select new parameters per "Making Menu
Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the X.50 Server Module Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
Define X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF XS0) Command
The DEF XS0 command displays the X.50 DS-0 channel parameters, Figure 6-23, for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) of an X.50 Server Module and allows the user to change parameter values in the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEF XS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
[,n:ss:cc
[
-n:ss:cc
]
]
where cc = X.50 DS-0 channel number 1-16
N0129>DEF XS0 1:5:7
CONNECT PROFILE PRIORITY DELAYTHR PROTOCOL IDLE FNS
ORIG DEFAULT 02 07 DIV-2 F1 INBAND
OOS PHASOR
29 MAX
CONNECT - Originator/terminator of connection
PROFILE - ABM profile (When preceded by *, profile is undefined)
PRIORITY - Connect priority level
DELAYTHR - Delay threshold
PROTOCOL - X.50 frame format
IDLE - Idle characters
FNS - Mode of transmitting EIA functions
OOS - Out-of-service timer
PHASOR - Phasor size (bytes)
Figure 6-23. Typical Define X.50 DS-0 Channel Parameters (DEF XS0) Command
6-92
L2UG
6/30/94
NOTE:
Deleting an X.50 DS-0 channel from the database will not result in deleting the associated channels.
After the DEF XS0 command is entered, the supervisory port displays the current channel parameters for the specified X.50 DS-0 channel. Select new parameters per "Making Menu
Selections" paragraph in Chapter 3, General Information. See the X.50 Server Module Parameters chapter in the Configuration Planning Manual for parameter values.
Delete Slot (DEL) Command
The DEL command deletes the database entries for the specified slot(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEL n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
or
*
The DEL command is primarily used when the type of module in a slot is changed. For example, if a Quad Synchronous Module in slot 1:4 is to be replaced by an Interlink Module, the command sequence is:
●
●
DSC CH 1:4:*
DEL 1:4
- Disconnect channels on Quad Synchronous Module in slot 4.
- Delete channel parameters of the Quad Synchronous Module from the database.
●
RMV 1:4 - Logically remove Quad Synchronous Module from slot 4.
●
Physically remove - Quad Synchronous Module
●
●
●
Physically insert
INS 1:4
DEF DL 4
- Interlink Module
- Logically insert Interlink Module into slot 4.
- Define intermachine link parameters for Interlink Module.
Delete Channel (DEL CH) Command
The DEL CH command deletes the database entries for the specified I/O channel(s), DS-0 channel(s), X.50 DS-0 channel(s) or X.50 subrate channel(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEL CH n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c
[
-n:ss:c
]
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
or
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
NOTE:
All specified channels and Voice Processor contention channels must be disconnected before the DEL CH command is issued. All specified
Quad Synchronous Processor broadcast polling masters and
Channelized Services Processor bundle masters must be cleared using the CLR POL and SET CFG /OFF commands before the DEL CH command is issued.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-93
When all the channels on a module are deleted, the module database is not removed. To remove the module database, issue the DEL command.
Delete Route (DEL RTE) Command
See "Insert and Delete Route (INS RTE, DEL RTE) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect (DSC) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON *, CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC *, DSC
BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect Bundle (DSC BDL) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON *, CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC *, DSC
BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect Bypass Channel (DSC BP) Command
The DSC BP command temporarily disconnects the specified bypass channel(s). The bypass channel(s) to disconnect can be specified by issuing the command to the originator channel, terminator channel, or bypass channel(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSC BP
{
Nxxxx n:ss:cc or ccc-ccc
}
where: ccc = bypass channel number (1-511)
Disconnect I/O Channel (DSC CH) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON , CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC , DSC
BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect Channels on Intermachine Link (DSC DL) Command
The DSC DL command disconnects all originator channels connected over the specified intermachine link(s). The command can be limited to disconnect channels with a specified priority level or channels terminating at a specified node. The command can also be expanded to disconnect all originator, terminator, and bypass channels connected over the specified intermachine link(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DSC DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
[option]
6-94
L2UG
6/30/94
where option is one of the following:
/Ppr = disconnects channels with connect priority level pr (1-16) only
/Nxxxx = disconnects channels terminating at node xxxx only
/A = disconnects ALL channels that originate, terminate, or bypass at this node via the specified intermachine link(s)
NOTE:
Channels disconnected when the /A option is used are permanently disconnected; no attempt will be made to reestablish the connections.
However, the DSC DL/A command will not permanently disconnect
I/O and DS-0 contention channels if the control signal remains.
For example, to disconnect all channels that originate at node 11 and are connected over link 3, enter:
NOD 11 DSC DL 3
To disconnect all channels that originate at node 11, are connected over link 3, and have connect priority level 4, enter:
NOD 11 DSC DL 3/P4
To disconnect all channels that originate at node 11, are connected over link 3, and terminate at node 12, enter:
NOD 11 DSC DL 3/N12
To disconnect all channels that originate, terminate, or bypass at node 11 via link 3, enter:
NOD 11 DSC DL 3/A
The DSC DL command can be implemented only at the originator end of a channel unless the /A option is used. Use the DSP CH, DSP MDS0, or DSP DS0 command to determine which end of the channel is the originator.
NOTE:
If a channel is in the process of being connected while the DSC DL command is executed, that channel will NOT be disconnected. After the channel connection is complete, reenter the DSC DL command to disconnect the channel.
Disconnect DS-0 Channel (DSC DS0) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channel (CON *, CON BDL, CON CH, CON DS0, DSC *, DSC
BDL, DSC CH, DSC DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect from Node (DSC ND) Command
See "Connect to Node and Disconnect from Node (CON ND, DSC ND) Commands" paragraph.
L2UG
6/30/94
6-95
Disconnect Broadcast/Polling Group Members
(DSC POL) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Broadcast/Polling Group Members (CON POL, DSC POL)
Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect Channels by Priority (DSC PR) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channels by Priority (CON PR, DSC PR) Commands" paragraph.
Disconnect Channels by ABM Profile (DSC PRO) Command
See "Connect and Disconnect Channels by ABM Profile (CON PRO, DSC PRO) Commands" paragraph.
Insert and Remove Module (INS, RMV) Commands
The INS command logically inserts a module into a slot. The RMV command logically removes a module from a slot.
NOTE:
The number of Voice Processors, Integrated Trunk Modules,
Channelized Services Processors, Voice Server Modules, and X.50
Server Modules that can be installed in a Mainframe is dependent on their combined total. Refer to the "Maximum Number of Voice Server
Modules per Mainframe" Table in Chapter 2 of the Configuration
Planning Manual for specific number information.
PRECAUTION: Logically removing a Voice Server Module will disconnect all channels supported by that Voice Server Module and place the channels on the retry queue.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] INS n:ss[-n:ss]...,n:ss[-n:ss] or *
[NOD xxxx] RMV n:ss[-n:ss]...,n:ss[-n:ss]
A module may be physically inserted in a slot, but the LINK/2+ System will not recognize the module unless the INS command is used. Conversely, the RMV command must be used to indicate that a module is no longer inserted in a slot, even when the module has already been physically removed from the slot.
NOTES:
After logically removing a module from a slot using the RMV command, physically remove the module from the slot per the
Replacement Procedures chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and
Maintenance Manual.
The RMV command does not delete the module database parameters.
See "Delete Slot (DEL) Command" paragraph.
6-96
L2UG
6/30/94
When nodal security is enabled, the received RMV n:ss command is interpreted as a nonglobal gateway command.
To delete a Channelized Services Processor, Voice Processor, or
Integrated Trunk Module once the hardware has been removed, perform the following steps:
•
Disconnect all channels over proprietary bundles (Integrated
Trunk Module only).
•
Disconnect all nonproprietary bundles.
•
Clear redundancy for both the online and redundant pair.
•
Delete the appropriate slot.
At system start-up or after reset of the online Network Module, all modules physically installed will be recognized as logically inserted.
Insert and Delete Route (INS RTE, DEL RTE) Commands
The INS RTE command adds a route (link or bundle and path delay) as an entry into a routing table of a specified node. See the "Define and Clear Routing Table (DEF RTE, CLR RTE)
Commands" paragraph for a general discussion of routing table entries.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] INS RTE xxxx p {ss, n:ss, 1:ss:bdl, or 1:ss:cc} delay where: delay = path delay number, 0 through 7, specifying the minimum number of bypass nodes between the originating and destination nodes.
If the routing table already includes eight entries, this command is rejected.
The path number, p, determines the position of the new route in the list of all available routes to the destination node. In the revised routing table, the new route precedes previously listed routes with the same or higher path number. If the routing table has fewer entries than the specified path number, the new route becomes the last route in the table with the next higher path number.
The DEL RTE command deletes the route with path number p from the routing table to the specified node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] DEL RTE xxxx p
NOTE:
Before entering a remote command NOD xxxx
1 node xxxx
2
DEL RTE xxxx
2
1 from
, make sure that there is another entry in the routing table so that node xxxx
1
can continue to communicate with node xxxx
2
.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-97
Remove Module (RMV) Command
See "Insert and Remove Module (INS, RMV) Commands" paragraph.
Set Alarm Forwarding (SET ALM FWD) Command
The SET ALM FWD command defines which alarm queue the node will use to trigger the transmission of an "I have an Alarm" message to nodes on this node’s remote alarm notification list. See the "Define Alarm Notification List (DEF ALM) Command" paragraph for information on defining the alarm notification list.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET ALM FWD {AQ or TAQ} where:
AQ = forwards "I have an Alarm" message when any alarms are logged in the AQ alarm queue
TAQ = forwards "I have an Alarm" message when any alarms are logged in the TAQ alarm queue
The system monitors both the AQ and TAQ alarm queues every 10 minutes. Depending on which queue has been selected by the SET ALM FWD command, if any alarms are present in the queue, the "I have an Alarm" message is generated. Also, if a new alarm occurs, the "I have an Alarm" message is immediately generated.
If the network management system polls alarms using the TAQ alarm queue, select TAQ.
Otherwise, select AQ.
Set Bias Routing for X.50 Subrate Channel (SET BIAS XCH) Command
The SET BIAS XCH command defines the bias route over which an X.50 subrate channel (s) will be connected to a remote node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET BIAS XCH n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]/routing where routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = the intermachine link number and bundle number (optional) to which all channels in the specified range of channels will bias
Lss[:cc]/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
Lss[:cc]/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
OFF = the specified channels will terminate bias routing
6-98
L2UG
7/31/95
OFF/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
OFF/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
If the intermachine link specified in the command is out-of-service, then the next intermachine link in the routing table is selected. Every intermachine link in the routing table is attempted before the biased intermachine link is retried. The channel is not placed on the retry queue until every intermachine link in the routing table is tried once.
If the intermachine link selected in the command is not defined or is not listed in the routing table to the destination node, then the LINK/2+ System will attempt connection over the primary, nonbiased route.
Some applications of bias routing include the following:
●
An alternative to the CON DR command: The route defined with the DEF BIAS command remains in the database, while the route defined using the CON DR command will be lost if the channel is subsequently disconnected and reconnected.
●
Channel redundancy: Route two channels with the same destination over two different intermachine links.
●
Route avoidance: Bias route to ensure that less desirable routes are taken only as a last resort.
●
Load sharing: Bias routing can be used to distribute channels over several intermachine links.
Without bias routing, the primary route is always the first one attempted.
NOTE:
The bias routing parameters are defined for originator channels only.
Channels must be disconnected before the SET BIAS XCH command is issued. After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Set Bias Routing for X.50 DS-0 Channel (SET BIAS XS0) Command
The SET BIAS XS0 command defines the bias route (first intermachine link) over which the X.50
DS-0 channels on an X.50 Server Module will be connected to a remote node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET BIAS XS0 n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
/routing where routing is one of the following:
Lss[:cc] = the intermachine link number and bundle number (optional) to which all channels in the specified range of channels will bias
Lss[:cc]/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
L2UG
7/31/95
6-99
Lss[:cc]/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will bias to the intermachine link and bundle number (optional) specified in the command
OFF = the specified channels will terminate bias routing
OFF/O = only the odd-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
OFF/E = only the even-numbered channels within the specified range of channel numbers will terminate bias routing
If the intermachine link specified in the command is out-of-service, then the next intermachine link in the routing table is selected. Every intermachine link in the routing table is attempted before the biased intermachine link is retried. The channel is not placed on the retry queue until every intermachine link in the routing table is tried once.
If the intermachine link selected in the command is not defined or is not listed in the routing table to the destination node, then the LINK/2+ System will attempt connection over the primary, nonbiased route.
Some applications of bias routing include the following:
●
An alternative to the CON DR command: The route defined with the SET BIAS command remains in the database, while the route defined using the CON DR command will be lost if the channel is subsequently disconnected and reconnected.
●
Channel redundancy: Route two X.50 DS-0 channels with the same destination over two different intermachine links.
●
Route avoidance: Bias route to ensure that less desirable routes are taken only as a last resort.
●
Load sharing: Bias routing can be used to distribute X.50 DS-0 channels over several intermachine links. Without bias routing, the primary route is always the first one attempted.
NOTE:
The bias routing parameters are defined for originator channels only.
Channels must be disconnected before the SET BIAS XS0 command is issued. After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Set Bump (SET BMP) Command
The SET BMP command enables or disables end-to-end or point-to-point bumping at a node. The command determines whether an originating channel at a local node, which has an ABM profile authorizing it to be a bumper, will become an active bumper. If bumping is disabled at a local node, a bumper originating at a remote node can still bump a bumpee at the local node.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET BMP
{
E or P or D
}
6-100
L2UG
7/31/95
where: E = enables end-to-end bumping only
P = enables point-to-point bumping
D = disables bumping
NOTE:
Since end-to-end bumping is less disruptive to a network than pointto-point bumping, end-to-end bumping will always be attempted first, even when point-to-point bumping is enabled.
Set Bundle Configuration (SET CFG) Command
The SET CFG command defines the bundle configuration for each Integrated Trunk Module and
Channelized Services Processor. Each defined DS-0 channel must be configured as a bundle. For bundle sizes greater than 1, each bundle is defined by specifying the master DS-0 channel and each slave DS-0 channel that is a member of the bundle. For a bundle size of 1, the bundle is defined by specifying the defined DS-0 channel as the master channel and the slave channel. After the Integrated Trunk Module or Channelized Services Processor is configured for bundling, issue all subsequent commands to the master DS-0 channel(s).
NOTE:
To make it easier to remember which DS-0 channel is the master
DS-0 channel, always make the lowest numbered DS-0 channel of the bundle the master DS-0 channel.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET CFG n:ss:cc=cc[-cc]...
[
,cc[-cc]
]
[/A]
[NOD xxxx] SET CFG n:ss:cc/OFF where: cc = specifies each slave DS-0 channel and/or range(s) of DS-0 channels that are members of the bundle
/A = adds specified slave DS-0 channel(s) to an existing bundle
/OFF = clears master channel and all slave DS-0 channels associated with the specified master channel
For example, a Channelized Services Processor in slot 10 of the Control Mainframe, defined for
G.732N framing, contains 31 DS-0 channels. These channels can be configured for bundling as follows:
●
SET CFG 1:10:3=7,11 has a bundle size of 3 with DS-0 channel 3 as the master channel and
DS-0 channels 7 and 11 as the slave channels. The speed of this bundle is 192 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a local or remote Quad Synchronous Processor channel.
●
SET CFG 1:10:1=5,9,13,17,21,25,29 has a bundle size of 8 with DS-0 channel 1 as the master channel and DS-0 channels 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, and 29 as the slave channels. The speed of this bundle is 512 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a local Dual Synchronous Module channel.
●
SET CFG 1:10:2=4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,24 has a bun dle size of 12 with DS-0 channel 2 as the master channel and DS-0 channels 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 as the slave channels. The speed of this bundle is 768 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a remote
Channelized Services Processor bundle.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-101
●
SET CFG 1:10:15=19, 23, 26, 27, 28 has a bundle size of 6 with DS-0 channel 15 as the master channel and DS-0 channels 19, 23, 26, 27, and 28 as the slave channels. The speed of this bundle is 384 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a local Channelized Services
Processor.
●
SET CFG 1:10:30=30 has a bundle size of 1 with DS-0 channel 30 as the master channel. The speed of this channel is 64 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a local or remote Voice
Processor.
●
SET CFG 1:10:31=31 has a bundle size of 1 with DS-0 channel 31 as the master channel. The speed of this channel is 64 kbps. This bundle can be connected to a local or remote Subrate
Channel Processor.
●
SET CFG 1:10:3/OFF clears master channel 3 and all slave DS-0 channels, channels 7 and 11, associated with master DS-0 channel 3.
●
SET CFG 1:10:2 = 16/A adds DS-0 channel 16 as a member of the bundle with master channel
1:10:2.
NOTES:
If the Integrated Trunk Module or Channelized Services Processor is defined for G.732S framing, DS-0 channel 16 cannot be used.
Channels must be disconnected before the SET CFG command is issued. After the command is issued, the channels must be reconnected for the changes to take effect.
Follow the steps listed below when defining a bundle:
•
Clear bundle configuration
•
Set bundle configuration
•
Define bundle parameters
SET CFG n:ss:c/OFF
SET CFG n:ss:cc = cc-cc
DEF BDL PR or DEF BDL NPR
Assign ABM Profile to Channels (SET CH) Command
The SET CH command assigns the specified ABM profile to I/O, DS-0, X.50 DS-0, or X.50
subrate channels within a specified range.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CH
{
n:ss:c-n:ss:c or n:ss:cc-n:ss:cc
}{
/Pppp
}
where: n:ss:c = I/O channel n:ss:cc = DS-0 channel ppp = ABM profile (1-250 or D for default)
6-102
L2UG
7/31/95
Set Clock (SET CLK) Command
The SET CLK command directs the LINK/2+ System to use one of the clocks listed on the clock fallback list as the system clock source.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CLK
{
1 or 2 or 3
}
where: 1 = clock fallback 1 (primary) source
2 = clock fallback 2 source
3 = clock fallback 3 source
NOTE:
If the clock fallback source selected is defined as a SKP clock source, the command is rejected.
PRECAUTION: Using this command on an active network may result in information loss during clock switchover.
See "Define System Clock Fallback List (DEF CFB) Command" paragraph for information on selecting clock sources.
Set Clock Qualification Tolerance Level (SET CQT) Command
The SET CQT command sets the permissible frequency range for the nodal timing source (for
NCL+ and NCL* Network Modules only).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CQT
{
LO or HI
}
For NCL+: LO = sets the qualification frequency range for the nodal timing source to a longterm frequency deviation from +22 parts per million (ppm) from nominal to
-26 ppm from nominal.
HI = sets the qualification frequency range for the nodal timing source to a longterm frequency deviation from +45 ppm from nominal to -53 ppm from nominal.
For NCL*: LO = sets the qualification frequency range for the nodal timing source to a longterm frequency deviation of
±
10 ppm from nominal
HI = sets the qualification frequency range for the nodal timing source to a longterm frequency deviation of
±
32 ppm from nominal
For example, to set the clock qualification tolerance level to low for master clocking node 28, enter:
NOD 28 SET CQT LO
Use the DSP ST CLK command to display the current clock qualification tolerance level.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-103
Set Clock Switching (SET CSW QS, SET CSW SS) Commands
The SET CSW QS command sets an interval of 17 seconds as the maximum time allowed for the
LINK/2+ System to qualify and start locking to an alternate clock source. These commands apply to the Enhanced Digital PLL only.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CSW QS
The SET CSW SS command allows the LINK/2+ System to qualify and start locking to an alternate clock source within 30 seconds.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CSW SS
Use the DSP ST CLK command to display the current clock switching time interval.
Set Contention (SET CTN) Command
The SET CTN command enables or disables dynamic bandwidth allocation on a call demand basis to Voice Processor DS-0 channels programmed for contention. Contending DS-0 channels are monitored for off-hook and are allocated bandwidth, if available, and placed in the connected state. The allocated bandwidth is returned to the bandwidth pool when the call originator goes onhook. The command can also be used to force connections between DS-0 contention channels that are not busied out.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CTN
{
E or D or C
}
where: E = enables DS-0 contention
D = disables DS-0 contention
C = connects DS-0 contention channels that are not busied out. The connect request is issued from the lower node.
Set Backup Link (SET DL BCK) Command
The SET DL BCK command defines or cancels the proprietary bundle on an Integrated Trunk
Module that backs up the intermachine link of an Interlink Module or another proprietary bundle of an Integrated Trunk Module. The SET DL BCK command takes effect immediately. It is not necessary to reset the module to redesignate a backup bundle.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET DL BCK
{
*or ss or 1:ss or 1:ss:cc
}
X
{
1:ss:cc or OFF or C
}
where: X = a delimiter (/, =, or a blank)
6-104
L2UG
7/31/95
For example, to back up the Interlink Module in slot 15 with bundle 1 of the Integrated Trunk
Module in slot 10, enter:
SET DL BCK 1:15=1:10:1
To cancel all backup bundles at a node, enter:
SET DL BCK */C
The options C and OFF have the same effect of canceling the backup.
To back up all appropriate intermachine links and proprietary bundles at a node with bundle 3 of the Integrated Trunk Module in slot 10, enter:
SET DL BCK *=1:10:3
When the LINKBCK field is blanked on the supervisory terminal, the SET DL BCK command is still accepted, but the field remains blanked.
Set Expansion Link (SET DL EXP) Command
The SET DL EXP command defines or cancels the proprietary bundle on an Integrated Trunk
Module that can be used as an expansion link for the intermachine link of an Interlink Module or for another proprietary bundle of an Integrated Trunk Module. The SET DL EXP command takes effect immediately. It is not necessary to reset the module to redesignate an expansion bundle.
Command:
[NOD xxxx SET DL EXP
{
*or ss or 1:ss or 1:ss:cc
}
X
{
1:ss:cc or OFF or C
}
where: X = a delimiter (/, =, or a blank)
For example, to set bundle 1 of the Integrated Trunk Module in slot 10 as the expansion link for the Interlink Module in slot 15, enter:
SET DL EXP 1:15=1:10:1
To cancel all expansion bundles at a node, enter:
SET DL EXP */C
The options C and OFF have the same effect of canceling the expansion link.
To set bundle 3 of the Integrated Trunk Module in slot 10 as the expansion bundle for all appropriate intermachine links and proprietary bundles at a node, enter:
SET DL EXP *=1:10:3
When the LINK EXP field is blanked on the supervisory terminal, the SET DL EXP command is still accepted, but the field remains blanked.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-105
Set Dial-Up Retry (SET DRT) Command
The SET DRT command defines the maximum number of redialing attempts for an ISDN or
Switched 56K connection if the dialed number is busy or not reachable. The command is effective at the next channel connection.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET DRT rt where: rt = retries (0-63)
For example, to define 2 as the maximum number of dialing attempts for an ISDN connection, enter:
SET DRT 2
Use the DSP SY command to display the dial retry value.
Set Dial-Up Timer (SET DTM) Command
The SET DTM command defines delay between dialing retries in 30-second intervals for an ISDN or Switched 56K connection attempt. The command is effective at the next channel connection.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET DTM tmo where: tmo = timeout value in 30-second intervals (1-255)
For example, if a 2-minute delay between dialing attempts for an ISDN connection is desirable, define 4 (4 x 30 seconds = 2 minutes) as the timeout value and enter:
SET DTM 4
Use the DSP SY command to display the dial timer value.
Set Grooming Flag and Grooming Time (SET GRM) Commands
The SET GRM commands are used to:
●
Set the system grooming flag, i.e., enable or disable g rooming
●
Set the grooming day(s) and time(s) on a system basis
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET GRM
{
E or D
}
where: E = enables system grooming
D = disables system grooming
6-106
L2UG
7/31/95
[NOD xxxx] SET GRM day time
1
time
2
where: day = SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, or * for every day of the week
time time
2
1
= grooming disconnect time (hours:minutes), or C to clear disconnect time
= grooming reconnect time (hours:minutes), or C to clear reconnect time
Figure 6-24 shows an example of using the SET GRM command to set the grooming time.
Note the following guidelines for setting grooming times:
●
Entering a time greater than 23:59 for either disconnect or reconnect time is invalid.
●
Both disconnect and reconnect times must be entered to set the grooming times.
●
If the interval between disconnect and reconnect times is greater than 15 minutes, a warning flag (*) will precede the day of the week in the grooming time-table display, Figure 6-26.
●
If the disconnect time is greater than the reconnect time, a warning message will follow the grooming time-table display, Figure 6-24.
●
If the disconnect and reconnect times are set equal, reconnection will immediately follow the disconnect.
N0001>SET GRM MON 01:20 02:50
*SUN *MON TUE WED THU *FRI *SAT
GROOM DISC TIME: 10:15 01:20 *** *** *** 09:30 14:40
GROOM RCON TIME: 20:40 02:50 05:00 *** 03:00 23:50 20:40
* RECON TIME IS MORE THAN 15 MINUTES LATER THAN DISC TIME!
GROOMING IS CURRENTLY ENABLED
N0001>SET GRM * c 22:00
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
GROOM DISC TIME: *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
GROOM RCON TIME: 22:00 22:00 22:00 22:00 22:00 22:00 22:00
GROOMING IS CURRENTLY DISABLED
Parameters are changed via menu selection:
SUN - SAT - Day of week
01:20 - Disconnect time
02:50 - Reconnect time
RECON TIME IS MORE THAN 15 MINUTES
Warning Message - (*Precedes days in grooming time table where this occurs)
GROOMING IS CURRENTLY ENABLED - Current grooming status
Figure 6-24. Typical Set Groom (SET GRM) Command Displays
For a channel to be groomed, the following conditions must be in effect:
●
Channel’s ABM profile is enabled for grooming and system grooming is enabled.
●
Channel is the originator.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-107
●
Channel’s current path delay is greater than the shortest path delay defined in the routing table for its destination node.
●
When bias routing is selected, the channel is groomed:
If the channel is not connected over its bias route
If the channel is connected over its bias route but the actual path delay is greater than the shortest path delay defined in the routing table
In addition, channels that were connected in override will be groomed.
If a channel is a local connection channel, contention channel, or directly connected channel, the channel will not be groomed.
A channel will be reconnected when the grooming reconnect time is reached.
For backup and expansion bundles with grooming enabled, the bundle connection will terminate at grooming disconnect time if and only if the intermachine link being backed up has come back in service.
Set and Clear Remote Node Gateway (SET GWY, CLR GWY) Commands
The SET GWY command designates the specified remote node supervisory port or supervisory computer port as a gateway. The CLR GWY command clears the gateway status. Gateway status is initially determined by Network Module DIP switch but can be changed by the SET GWY or
CLR GWY command.
Commands:
NOD xxxx SET GWY
{
CP or SP
}
NOD xxxx CLR GWY
{
CP or SP
}
where: CP = supervisory computer port
SP = supervisory port
NOTE:
When the Network Module is reset, the gateway status determined by
Network Module DIP switch takes effect, overriding any previous SET
GWY or CLR GWY command. See Network Module chapter in the
LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for Network Module
DIP switch settings.
Set QAM I/O Error Character (SET IO) Command
The SET IO command determines the ASCII character that the LINK/2+ System uses to indicate a parity error in the data stream of a QAM Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET IO hh
6-108
L2UG
7/31/95
where: hh = the hexadecimal equivalent of the ASCII character (00 to FF)
Set Password Level 1 CON/DSC (SET L1C) Command
The SET L1C command allows or prohibits users with password level 1 to use the CON and DSC commands. The SET L1C command can be issued by a level 2 user only. If passwords have been defined, the DSP SY command response indicates the current status (enabled or disabled).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET L1C {D or E} where: D = prohibits all password level 1 users from issuing CON BDL, CON CH,
CON DS0, DSC BDL, DSC CH, and DSC DS0 commands
E = allows all password level 1 users to issue CON BDL, CON CH, CON
DS0, DSC BDL, DSC CH, and DSC DS0 commands
Set Map (SET MAP) Command
The SET MAP command defines the speed and time slot (s) for the specified X.50 subrate channel (s) on the X.50 Server Module.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET MAP n:ss:cc:sr /speed = timeslot
This command defines the speed and timeslot of a single subrate channel on the specified X.50
Server Module.
where: cc = X.50 DS-0 channel (1-16) sr = X.50 subrate channel (1-20)
speed = speed in bps of subrate channel
timeslot = X.50 time slot that this subrate channel will occupy
For example, to define the speed and time slot for subrate channel 2 of X.50 DS-0 channel 8 on the X.50 Server Module located in slot 7 of Mainframe 1, enter:
SET MAP 1:7:8:2 /4800=B1
This example defines the speed for this subrate channel as 4800 bps and assigns the channel to time slots B1 and B3.
[NOD xxxx] SET MAP n:ss:*/Fspeed
This command assigns the same speed to all subrate channels on the specified X.50 Server
Module.
where: * = all X.50 DS-0 channels
/F = fill all timeslots with defined speed
speed = speed in bps (2400, 4800, or 9600)
L2UG
7/31/95
6-109
For example:
SET MAP 2:14:*/F2400 sets all subrate channels (320) of X.50 Server Module located in slot
14 of Mainframe 2 to a speed of 2400 bps.
SET MAP 2:14:*/F4800 sets all subrate channels (160) of X.50 Server Module located in slot
14 of Mainframe 2 to a speed of 4800 bps.
SET MAP 2:14:*/F9600 sets all subrate channels (80) of X.50 Server Module l ocated in slot
14 of Mainframe 2 to a speed of 9600 bps.
The selected speed and time slots for X.50 subrate channels can by displayed using the DSP XCH command.
Set Phone Numbers (SET PHN BCK, SET PHN XDL) Commands
The SET PHN BCK and SET PHN XDL commands enter the user’s ISDN or Switched 56K phone numbers into directories for the specified Interlink Module or Integrated Trunk Module.
The directories are used for dial-up services. The SET PHN BCK command establishes the directory of phone numbers used for the dial-up service link backup feature used by the Integrated
Trunk Module and Interlink Module. The SET PHN XDL command establishes the directory of phone numbers used for the dial-up service link expansion and dial link features used only by the
Integrated Trunk Module.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET PHN BCK {1:ss:cc=phn[/D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:cc[/C][/H0] or 1:ss:*/C}
[NOD xxxx] SET PHN XDL {1:ss:cc=phn[/D or /I][/H0] or 1:ss:cc[/C][/H0] or 1:ss:*/C} where: phn = ISDN or Switched 56K phone number up to 16 characters (0 through 9, *, #, :,
-). The hyphen (-) is used for clarity only. For ISDN applications, the colon (:) can be used only once to indicate that the following characters are a network sub-party address. The asterisk (*) and pound sign (#) are used with ISDN applications only. ISDN applications may use up to 20 characters.
/D = Domestic (default)
/I = International
/C = Clears phone number(s)
/H0 = H0-channel
NOTE:
The * can be used to specify all channels of a module only when the
/C option is used.
For example, to define the phone number 1-201-555-6000 as the link backup phone number for channel 12, enter:
SET PHN BCK 1:5:12=1-201-555-6000
Use the DSP PHN BCK or DSP PHN XDL command to display all the phone numbers listed for the specified directory.
6-110
L2UG
7/31/95
Change ABM Profile Parameter (SET PRO) Commands
The SET PRO commands are used to modify parameters within existing ABM profiles.
The general command format is:
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/parameter=value where: ppp = ABM profile (1-250)
* = all defined ABM profiles
The SET PRO commands can modify the following parameters:
ENC = encryption parameter
SDT = satellite threshold parameter
EPR = link error performance parameter
GRP = link group parameter
GRM = grooming parameter
BMP = bumping state parameter
BLV = bumping level parameter
OVR = override parameter
The formats for modifying each parameter value are shown below.
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/ENC=
{
D,R
}
where: ENC = encryption parameter
D = disable
R = required
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/SDT=
{
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,D
}
where: SDT = satellite threshold parameter
0-6 = number of satellite hops
D = don’t care
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/EPR=
{
D,V,G,F
}
where: EPR = link error performance parameter
D = don’t care
V = very good
G = good
F = fair
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/GRP=
{
D,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
}
where: GRP = link group parameter
D = don’t care
1-7 = group number
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/GRM=
{
D,E
}
L2UG
7/31/95
6-111
where: GRM = grooming parameter
D = disable
E = enable
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/BMP=
{
D,E,R,B
}
where: BMP = bumping state parameter
D = disable
E = bumpee
R = bumper
B = both
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/BLV=
{
1,2,3,4
}
where: BLV = bumping level parameter
1-4 = level
[NOD xxxx] SET PRO
{
* or ppp[-ppp]...
[
,ppp[-ppp]
]}
/OVR=
{
D,E
}
where: OVR = override parameter
D = disable
E = enable
Set and Clear Redundant Module (SET RDN, CLR RDN) Commands
The SET RDN command sets the redundancy logic between a pair of associated Interlink
Modules, Integrated Trunk Modules, Channelized Services Processors, D-Channel Modules, or
Voice Processors. The SET RDN command also copies intermachine link parameter values from one Interlink Module to the other, or DS-1/DS-0 parameter values from one Voice Processor,
Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor to the other. The CLR RDN command clears the redundancy logic between the pair, but does not affect parameter values.
Either command resets both modules of a redundant pair.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET RDN [n:]ss
[NOD xxxx] CLR RDN [n:]ss
Redundant operation is possible only if the two modules are of the same type and are inserted into adjacent slots with the left-most module occupying an odd-numbered slot. The ss specified in the command is the slot number of the module containing the desired parameter values.
NOTE:
If a remote SET RDN or CLR RDN command is sen t to a node that targets the only datalink (i.e. route) back to the issuing node the prompt character of the supervisory port will not return to the display.
Enter a Control-C character to terminate the command and return the prompt character to the display. The SET RDN command does not copy the LFM SLOT and LFM BNDL parameter fields of an Interlink
Module database.
6-112
L2UG
7/31/95
To initially configure a redundant pair of modules, perform the following:
●
Ensure that the two modules are adjacent to each other and that the left-most module is in an odd-numbered slot.
●
Using the appropriate command, define the parameter values for one of the modules of the redundant pair.
●
Issue the SET RDN command, specifying the value for ss as the slot number of the module containing the desired parameter values.
For example, to ensure that the redundant module in slot 4 has the same parameter values as the module in slot 3, enter:
SET RDN 1:3 Sets the redundancy logic and copies the parameter values of the module in slot 3 to the module in slot 4. Thereafter, if the online module fails, the redundant module will take control to maintain service.
NOTE:
It is recommended that channels on Voice Processors or Channelized
Services Processors be disconnected before issuing a SET RDN command. In addition, if Voice Processors or Channelized Services
Processors have channels in queue waiting to be connected when the
SET RDN command is issued, the command is aborted and the message "CHANNEL(S) QUEUED, CMD ABORTED" is displayed.
The operator should wait for the connections to be completed before proceeding.
The CLR RDN command clears the redundancy logic but does not affect the parameter values in either module. If the command is issued to either of the modules in a redundant pair that have been properly configured for redundant operation, the online module will continue normal operation but, if that module fails, the redundant module will not take control.
For example:
CLR RDN 1:3 or
CLR RDN 1:4
Clears the redundancy logic between the modules in slots 3 and 4. Thereafter, if the online module fails, the redundant module will not take control to maintain service.
Set System Connect Retry Timer (SET RET) Command
See "Define System Connect Retry Timer (DEF RET) Command" paragraph.
L2UG
7/31/95
6-113
Set and Clear Nodal Security (SET SEC, CLR SEC) Commands
The SET SEC command enables nodal security and restricts a node from accepting global gateway commands. When nodal security is enabled, all global gateway commands are interpreted by the node as nonglobal commands and are accepted only if both:
●
The supervisory port or supervisory computer port originating the command is designated a gateway.
●
The node number of the node originating the command is on the alarm notification list of the node receiving the command.
The CLR SEC command disables nodal security and allows the node to accept global gateway commands from any gateway node.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET SEC
[NOD xxxx] CLR SEC
Use the DSP SY command to determine if nodal security is enabled or disabled.
Set Link Framing Module Time Slots (SET TSA and SET TSB)
Commands
The SET TSA and SET TSB commands establish the active time slots on the Link Framing
Module (Models LFM.10, LFM.11, and LFM.12) and determine the time slots that make up bundles A and B on the connected trunk(s).
The number of assigned time slots in bundles A and B must match the speeds assigned with the
DEF LFM command. If the DEF LFM command sets the Link Framing Module to two-to-one mode, the time slots for bundles A and B cannot overlap.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET TSA n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
=cc[-cc]...
[
,cc[-cc]
]
[NOD xxxx] SET TSA n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
/OFF
[NOD xxxx] SET TSB n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
=cc[-cc]...
[
,cc[-cc]
]
[NOD xxxx] SET TSB n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
/OFF where: /OFF = clears all time slot assignments for the bundle
For example, to set time slots 1 through 12 and 13 through 24 as active for the local LFM.12
module in slot 9 of nest 1, enter:
SET TSA 1:9=1-12
SET TSB 1:9=13-24
6-114
L2UG
7/31/95
NOTE:
The SET TSA and SET TSB commands enter the new active time slots parameters to take effect, the Link Framing Module(s) must be reset.
Set Voice Server Module (SET VSM) Command
The SET VSM command defines the specified module(s) as a Voice Server Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET VSM n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
Set X.50 Server Module (SET XSM) Command
The SET XSM command defines the specified module(s) as a primary or redundant X.50 Server
Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET XSM n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
] [
/R
]
where /R = redundant module
L2UG
7/31/95
6-115
L2UG
6/30/94
Chapter
7
Diagnostic Commands
The following diagnostics can be performed from a supervisory terminal:
●
Loopback Tests: Isolate problem to a specific location on:
- an I/O module
- an intermachine link
- a DS-0 channel or DS-1 trunk
- bypass channel
- a D-channel
- a V-channel (channel processed by the Voice Server Module)
- an X.50 DS-0 channel or subrate channel
●
Internal Test Generator: Provides test message or control functions on I/O module channels for loopback tests.
●
Internal Tone Generator: Provides milliwatt reference equivalent test tone on DS-0 channels for loopback tests.
●
Reset Commands: Check module operation including Driver Modules and Power Supply
Modules.
●
Alarm Relays: Test alarm relays.
●
Monitoring Channel Data: Continuous monitoring of I/O channel data.
●
Phasors: Center bypass and channel phasors.
Table 7-1 lists the supervisory port diagnostic commands in alphabetical order by command mnemonic.
Many supervisory port display commands are also useful when performing diagnostics. See
Chapter 5, Display Commands, for a description of these commands.
The Troubleshooting chapter in the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual also includes information on performing diagnostics.
7-1
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands
Command G N
G #
BSY
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Description: Places specified DS-0 channel(s) in a busy state.
#
CEN PHS
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Centers phasor(s) of specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s).
#
CLR BP LP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]
…
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
…
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
Description: Clears bypass channel loopback on specified bypass channel(s).
#
CLR BP PH
{
* or ccc[-ccc]
…
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
…
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
Description: Centers both phasors on specified bypass channel(s).
#
CLR CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
Description: Clears I/O module channel(s) of any I/O module loopback or any associated V-channel loopback(s) that may exist.
#
CLR DL
{
* or ss[-ss]
…
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
Description: Clears intermachine link associated with Interlink Module in slot ss of any loop.
#
CLR DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Clears specified DS-0 channel(s) of any loopback or any associated D-channel or V-channel loopback(s) that may exist. When command is issued to a member of a bundle, clears all associated members of the DS-0 bundle in loopbacks. Does not center the phasor(s).
#
CLR DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Clears DS-1 trunk on specified Integrated Trunk Module(s), Voice Processor(s), or Channelized Services
Processor(s) of any DS-1 or network interface loop. Resets out-of-frame counter.
#
CLR LCL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Clears specified local DS-0 channel(s) or bundled channels of specified master from loopback or busy out;
DS-0 channel(s) at the remote end are unaffected.
#
CLR LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Description: Clears LFM.14 Link Framing Module line driver (high speed port) from loopback.
#
CLR MG
Description: Stops internal test message generator and clears internal test detector. Removes I/O channel from monitor mode.
7-2
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G #
CLR PH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
Command
Description: Centers phasor of specified I/O module channel(s).
G #
CLR RLY
G
G
G
Description: Stops relay test.
# CLR TON
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Stops test tone generator on specified DS-0 channel(s).
#
LP BP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]
…
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
…
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
Description: Places specified bypass channel(s) in bidirectional loopback.
#
LP loopback CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
…
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}[{
/I or /O
}][
speed
][
/P
]
Description: Places specified I/O module channel(s) in analog, digital, or bus loopback, where loopback is one of the following:
LB = bidirectional bus loopback
RB = bidirectional bus loopback
LP = parallel bidirectional loopback of Quad Synchronous Processor channels only
LS = serial bidirectional loopback of Quad Synchronous Processor or Isochronous Communication Module channels only
LD = local modem local digital loopback for data channels; bidirectional channel controller loopback for
Quad Voice Module and Enhanced Voice Module channels only
LA = local modem local analog loopback for data channels; codec loopback for Quad Voice Module and
Enhanced Voice Module channels only
RA = remote modem remote analog loopback
RD = remote modem remote digital loopback
VS = used with channels serviced by a Voice Server Module. Places associated V-channel in bidirectional loopback.
NOTE: /P is a required modifier that is used with VS loopback only.
Optional modifiers /I and /O are used with asymmetrical channels only:
/I = runs loopback using input speed.
Default loopback speed is /I.
/O = runs loopback using output speed.
Speed is an optional modifier used to alter the nominal test speeds of isochronous communication loopback testing:
/F = faster than nominal communication speed
/S = slower than nominal communication speed
/R = equal to nominal communication speed
NOTE: /F, /S, /R options are used with Isochronous Communication Module and Dual Isochronous Module only.
L2UG
8/30/94
7-3
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
G N
G #
LP loopback DL
{
* or ss[-ss]
…
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
[{
/R or /T
}][{
/mm or /P
}]
Command
Description: Places intermachine link associated with Interlink Module specified by slot ss in analog, digital, or bus loopback, where loopback is one of the following:
LB = local Interlink Module bus loopback
LD = local line driver local digital loopback
LA = local line driver local analog loopback; local buffer local analog loopback for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module
RA = remote line driver remote analog loopback
RD = remote line driver remote digital loopback; remote buffer remote digital loopback for LFM.14 Link
Framing Module
RB = remote Interlink Module bus loopback
NOTE: RA, RD, and RB cannot be performed on asymmetrical/simplex links. The /P (permanent) modifier cannot be used for loopbacks issued to a remote node.
Optional modifiers /R and /T are used with asymmetrical links only:
/R = runs loopback using received speed.
Default loopback speed is /R.
/T = runs loopback using transmit speed.
G
G
# LP DS0 loopback
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
…
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
Description: Places specified DS-0 channel(s) or associated bundled DS-0 channels for specified master in equipment, local, or bidirectional loopback, where loopback is one of the following:
EQ = channel phasor loopback toward the
DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, i.e., toward the external equipment
LI = channel phasor loopback toward an Interlink Module, I/O module, Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk
Module, or Channelized Services Processor via the system bus, i.e., toward the LINK network
BI = channel phasor bidirectional loopback
VS = used with channels serviced by a Voice Server Module. Places associated V-channel in bidirectional loopback.
RA = remote analog loopback of remote line driver of the remote Interlink Module
RB = remote Integrated Trunk Module bus loopback
RD = remote digital loopback of remote line driver of the remote Interlink Module
NOTE: The /mmm option does not apply to VS loopbacks. The /P option, however, is a required modifier for VS loopbacks.
#
LP DS1 loopback
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
Description: Places DS-1 (or E-1) interface(s) on specified Integrated Trunk Module(s), Voice Processor(s), or
Channelized Services Processor(s) in equipment, local, or bidirectional loopback, where loopback is one of the following:
EQ = loopback toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, i.e., toward the external equipment
LI = loopback away from the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, i.e., toward the LINK network
BI = bidirectional DS-1 (or E-1) interface loopback
7-4
L2UG
8/30/94
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
Command G N
G #
LP LFM loopback
{*
or
n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mm or /P
}]
G
Description: Places in loopback all intermachine links associated with LFM.14 Link Framing Module(s), where loopback is one of the following:
LK = loopback at line driver toward Link Framing Module
LLB = loopback at line driver toward the JT-2 trunk
#
LP NI loopback
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
G
Description: Places DS-1 (or E-1) trunk(s) on specified Integrated Trunk Module(s), Voice Processor(s), or Channelized
Services Processor(s) in loopback at the line driver, i.e., Bipolar Interface Module, Digital Termination Module, or Link
Framing Module, where loopback is one of the following:
LK = loopback at line driver toward the Integrated Trunk Module, Voice Processor, or Channelized Services
Processor; loopback at local buffer toward local Integrated Trunk Module for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module
LLB = loopback at line driver toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk; loopback at local buffer toward JT-2 trunk for
LFM.14 Link Framing Module
#
LP XCH
{ n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
Description: Loops the designated subrate channel(s) phasor data on the specified X.50 Server Module back towards the low speed side, and the subrate channel(s) processed phasor data back toward the associated X.50 DS-0 channel. All other subrate channels supported by that X.50 DS-0 channel are unaffected.
G #
LP XS0
{ n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
Description: Places the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) in bidirectional loopback. The aggregate data is looped toward the
X.50 network at the phasor and all of the subrate channels supported by the X.50 DS-0 channel(s) are looped towards the low speed outputs. All other X.50 DS-0 channels supported by that X.50 Server Module are unaffected.
G #
MON
{
L or R
}
n
1
:ss
1
:c
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2
or
{
L or R
} { n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:cc
2
or n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2
}
or
{
L or R
} { n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
:sr
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:cc
2
:sr
2
or n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
:sr
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2
}
Description: Monitors I/O module, X.50 DS-0, or X.50 subrate channel data, where:
L = data sent from local channel c
1
(or cc
1
, or sr
1
) is monitored
on local channel c
2
(or cc
2
, or sr
2
).
R = data received by local channel c
1
(or cc
1
, or sr
1
) is monitored on
local channel c
2
(or cc
2
, or sr
2
).
L2UG
6/30/94
7-5
G N
G
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
Command
#
RST n:ss[-n:ss]
…
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
G
Description: Resets module in specified slot.
#
RST BDL 1:ss:cc
G
Description: Disconnects and reconnects the specified Integrated Trunk Module bundle to apply new bundle parameters.
#
RST CH n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
][
/B
]
Description: Resets specified V-channel without affecting the channel connection, where:
/B = optional modifier that causes V-channel (s) to be blocked until the RST CH command is re-issued to the specified channel (s)
G
G
G
G
G
#
RST DR n
Description: Resets Driver Module in specified nest.
#
RST PS n
Description: Resets online power supply for specified nest.
#
SET CKS
Description: Calculates and stores database checksum on the online Network Module.
#
SET RLY
Description: Activates relay test.
#
SET TON
{
EQ or LI
} n:ss:cc
[{
/mmm or /P
}]
Description: Initiates a milliwatt reference equivalent test tone on specified DS-0 channel either toward the equipment or toward the LINK network, where:
EQ = tone directed toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, i.e., toward the external equipment
LI = tone directed away from the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk toward an Interlink Module, I/O module, Voice
Processor, or Channelized Services Processor, i.e., toward the LINK network
7-6
L2UG
6/30/94
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
G N Command
#
TRC BP Nxxxx
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}[
/F
]
NOTE: This command can also be entered as
TRC BP
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
/Nxxxx
[
/F
]
To display bypass status for channels inbound or outbound on a specific intermachine link:
TRC BP Nxxxx
{ n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]} {
I or O
} { ss or ss:cc
}[
/F
]
Description: Displays the bypass status for the specified channels, where Nxxxx specifies the originating or terminating node number, n:ss:c is an originating or terminating I/O channel, n:ss:cc is an originating or terminating DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel, n:ss:cc:sr is an originating or terminating X.50 subrate channel, and:
I = inbound intermachine link
O = outbound intermachine link ss = slot location of Interlink Module ss:cc = slot location and bundle of Integrated Trunk Module
/F = optional modifier that causes list of nodes channel traverses to be displayed
G
#
TRC CH
{*
or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]} or for X.50 subrate channels:
TRC CH
{*
or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Description: Displays the status of the specified channel connection(s) at the originating or terminating node. Displays the Vchannel (if connected), outbound link number, originator node, bypass node(s) (if any), and terminator. For CON DR channels, the path at each node is displayed. For disconnected channels, NOT CONNECTED is displayed.
#
TST DS0
{
EQ or LI
} {
* or n:ss:cc
[
-n:ss:cc
]
...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Description: Causes milliwatt test tone to be transmitted on specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s) and detects whether tone is received back on the opposite side of the associated channel phasor(s). Result is PASS or FAIL.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-7
Table 7-1. Diagnostic Commands (Cont’d)
Command G N
G #
TST
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
} n:ss:c
or
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
} n:ss:cc
or
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
} n:ss:cc:sr
Description: Conducts a complete or partial test of data, analog voice, or EIA control functions on the specified I/O module channel, where:
L = local
R = remote
CNT = conducts a test of EIA control functions on channel n:ss:c
DAT = conducts a test of data or analog voice on channel n:ss:c
C = complete test
P1 = partial test 1; constant data bit pattern, or EIA control functions in off condition
P2 = partial test 2; constant data bit pattern that is different from the P1 bit pattern, or EIA control functions in on condition
G entry in “G” column indicates a nonglobal gateway command.
G entry in “G” column indicates a global gateway command.
# entry in “N” column indicates that a command can be issued to a remote node by preceding the command with NOD xxxx.
c = I/O channel number (1 to 4) cc = DS-0 channel number (1 to 31) or X.50 DS-0 channel number (1 to 16) ccc = bypass channel number (1 to 511) n = nest number: 1 = Control Mainframe; 2 = Expander A Mainframe (upper); 3 = Expander B Mainframe (lower) n:ss:c = specifies single channel n:ss:c,n:ss:c = specifies two or more channels n:ss:c-n:ss:c = specifies range of channels in ascending order sr = X.50 subrate channel number (1 to 20) ss = slot number xxxx = node number (1 to 2000)
/mm or /mmm = minutes remaining (1 - 15 for mm, 1 - 240 for mmm) before loopback, test tone, or busy out command is automatically cleared. If not specified, command will be cleared after 2 minutes.
/P = permanent; loopback, test tone, or busy out command will not be cleared automatically.
*
= all elements in a range. Can also be used to specify all channels on a module, e.g., n:ss:*
…
= used before [ ] symbol to indicate command can be entered with several parameter values. Dots are never entered as part of command.
{ } = required parameter. Choose one of the elements within braces. Braces are never entered as part of command.
[ ] = optional parameter. Brackets are never entered as part of command.
7-8
L2UG
6/30/94
DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDS
Supervisory port diagnostic commands are described in the following paragraphs. Commands are in alphabetical order by command mnemonic. Related commands are discussed together.
Busy Out DS-0 (BSY) Command
The BSY command places specified DS-0 channel(s) in the busy state. The busy state is also called a remote equipment busy out (RE). When a DSP ST DS0 command is issued, the loop status of these channels will be displayed as RE type.
NOTE:
To place V-channel(s) on a Voice Server Module in the busy state, refer to the RST CH command in this chapter.
Issuing the LP DS0 EQ command also places the remote end of specified DS-0 channel(s) in the busy state. The CLR LCL command clears specified channel(s) from the busy state.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] BSY
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where: /mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which busy out is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; busy out will not be cleared automatically
Center Phasor (CEN PHS) Command
The CEN PHS command optimizes the phasor(s) of the specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s) to reduce timing errors.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CEN PHS
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Clear Bypass Channel Loop (CLR BP LP) Command
See "Loop Bypass Channel and Clear Bypass Channel Loop (LP BP, CLR BP LP) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Bypass Phasor (CLR BP PH) Command
The CLR BP PH command centers both channel phasors of specified bypass channel(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR BP PH
{
* or ccc[-ccc]...
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]...
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
L2UG
6/30/94
7-9
Clear I/O Module Channel Loop (CLR CH) Command
See "Loop I/O Module Channel and Clear Channel Loop (LP CH, CLR CH) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Intermachine Link Loop (CLR DL) Command
See "Loop Intermachine Link and Clear Intermachine Link Loop (LP DL, CLR DL) Commands" paragraph.
Clear DS-0 Channel Loop (CLR DS0) Command
See "Loop DS-0 Channel and Clear DS-0 Channel Loop (LP DS0, CLR DS0) Commands" paragraph.
Clear DS-1/E-1 Trunk Loop (CLR DS1) Command
See "Loop DS-1/E-1 Trunk and Clear Trunk Loop (LP DS1, CLR DS1) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Local DS-0 (CLR LCL) Command
The CLR LCL command clears channel(s) from the busy state (RE loopback state) at the local end of specified DS-0 channel(s) or bundled channels of specified master.
As long as any DS-0 channels that have been placed in loopback remain connected, the CLR
DS0 command should be used to clear loopback at both ends of the DS-0 channel(s) in one operation. However, if the local Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized
Services Processor is reset, the loopback will be cleared at the local end of the DS-0 channel(s), but the remote end will remain in a busy out state. In this situation, use CLR LCL at the remote node or NOD xxxx CLR LCL at the local node to clear the remote DS-0 busy out state.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR LCL
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
Clear LFM (CLR LFM) Command
See "Loop LFM and Clear LFM (LP LFM, CLR LFM) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Test Generator (CLR MG) Command
See "Test Generator and Clear Test Generator (TST, CLR MG) Commands" paragraph.
7-10
L2UG
6/30/94
Clear Phasor (CLR PH) Command
The CLR PH command is used to force the specified I/O module channel phasor(s) to center position.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] CLR PH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
Clear Alarm Relay (CLR RLY) Command
See "Set and Clear Alarm Relay (SET RLY, CLR RLY) Commands" paragraph.
Clear Tone Generator (CLR TON) Command
See "Set and Clear Tone Generator (SET TON, CLR TON) Commands" paragraph.
Loop Bypass Channel and Clear Bypass Channel Loop
(LP BP, CLR BP LP) Commands
To perform a bidirectional loopback, Figure 7-1, on specified bypass channel(s), enter the LP BP command. The CLR BP LP command clears the loopback on specified bypass channel(s).
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP BP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]...
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]...
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
[NOD xxxx] CLR BP LP
{
* or ccc[-ccc]...
[
,ccc[-ccc]
]
or 1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]...
[
,1:ss:ccc[-1:ss:ccc]
]}
BYPASS LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
BYPASS
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
COMMAND: LP BP n:ss:ccc
Figure 7-1. Bypass Channel Loopback
L2UG
8/30/94
7-11
To test a bypass channel using the local test generator and test detector, enter:
●
NOD xxxx DSP ST BP command to determine the bypass channel that connects to the local channel
●
NOD xxxx LP BP command to loop the bypass channel
●
LP CH command to loop the local channel toward the bypass node
●
TST R command to initiate a complete or partial test message that is looped first by the local channel and passed across an intermachine link to the bypass channel. The bypass channel loops the test message back across an intermachine link to the local test detector.
Loop I/O Module Channel and Clear Channel Loop
(LP CH, CLR CH) Commands
The LP CH command places specified I/O module channel(s) in loopback. The CLR CH command clears specified channel(s) from loopback or any associated V-channel loopback(s) that may exist, restoring channel(s) to normal operation.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP loopback CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[{
/I or /O
}][
speed
][
/P
]
[NOD xxxx] CLR CH
{
* or n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
where loopback is one of the following:
LB = bidirectional bus loopback
RB = bidirectional bus loopback
LP = parallel bidirectional loopback of Quad Synchronous Processor or
Isochronous Communication Module channels only
LS = serial bidirectional loopback of Quad Synchronous Processor or Isochronous
Communication Module channels only
LD = local modem local digital loopback for data channels; bidirectional channel controller loopback for Quad Voice Module and Enhanced Voice Module channels only
LA = local modem local analog loopback for data channels; codec loopback for
Quad Voice Module and Enhanced Voice Module channels only
RA = remote modem remote analog loopback
RD = remote modem remote digital loopback
VS = used with Quad Voice Module channels serviced by a Voice Server Module.
Places associated V-channel in bidirectional loopback
NOTE: /P is a required modifier that is used with VS loopback only.
Optional modifiers /I and /O are used with asymmetrical channels only:
/I = runs loopback using input speed. Default loopback speed is /I.
/O = runs loopback using output speed
7-12
L2UG
8/30/94
L2UG
6/30/97
Speed is an optional modifier used with Isochronous Communication Module and Dual
Isochronous Module channels only to alter the nominal test speeds of isochronous communication loopback testing:
/F = force output frequency faster than nominal communication speed
/S = force output frequency slower than nominal communication speed
/R = force output frequency equal to nominal communication speed
If speed modifier is not entered, default is a normal loopback with phasor timing.
NOTES:
No warning is given if VS loopback is specified and channel is not being processed by a Voice Server Module.
LP RB CH command is not used with Quad Synchronous Processors.
Use LP LS CH and LP LP CH commands for Quad Synchronous
Processor bidirectional loopbacks.
If a Quad Synchronous Module channel is disconnected while still in loopback, the channel status will be shown as in loopback (not as disconnected) when a DSP ST CH command is issued. To avoid this, clear the loopback before disconnecting the channel.
PRECAUTION: When more than one channel on a Quad Asynchronous
Module is set to a speed of 19.2 kbps and one of the 19.2
kbps channels is placed in remote loopback (NOD xxxx
LP loopback CH), if one or more other 19.2 kbps channels is connected, the channel in loopback will lose synchronization.
This problem does not occur when an external loopback plug is used at the remote node.
To test local I/O module channels with the local test generator and test detector, use the LP CH command with the TST L command.
To test remote I/O module channels that connect to local I/O module channels using the local test generator and test detector with the TST R command:
●
Loop the remote channel toward the local channel using the NOD xxxx LP CH command.
●
Loop the local I/O channel toward the remote channel using the LP CH command.
●
Use the TST R command to initiate a complete or partial test message that is looped first by the local channel and passed across an intermachine link to the remote channel. The remote channel loops the test message back across an intermachine link to the local node where the message is received by the test detector.
NOTE:
Local and remote channel loopback tests, when used on data channels, require that the tail circuit modems accept test signals
(CCITT circuits 140 and 141).
7-13
INTERNAL
BUS LOOP
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
DATA
I/O MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR
◊
,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR
◊
,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
◊
= FOR QUAD SYNCHRONOUS
MODULE APPLICATIONS
ONLY
EXTERNAL
PATTERN
GENERATOR
TO DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
EXTERNAL
BUS LOOP
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
A. DATA CHANNEL COMMAND: LP
LB
RB
CH n:ss:c
TIMS
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
66M
PUNCH-DOWN
BLOCK
E & M INTERFACE
MODULE
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
QVC
VOICE
MODULE
T
R
T1
R1
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
TO
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
EXTERNAL
BUS LOOP
INTERNAL
BUS LOOP
CH n:ss:c
Figure 7-2. Bidirectional Bus Channel Loopbacks
7-14
L2UG
8/30/94
Bidirectional Bus Loopbacks
The LP LB CH and LP RB CH commands loop the circuit bidirectionally at the local I/O module channel interface, Figure 7-2A. The internal bus loop can be tested using the internal test generator and test detector. The external bus loop can be tested using an external pattern generator or a terminal.
For QVC Voice Module channels only, the external bus loop which passes through the E & M
Interface Module can be tested using a transmission impairment measurement set (TIMS), Figure
7-2B.
Bidirectional Loopbacks
The LP LS CH and LP LP CH commands place the specified Quad Synchronous Processor channels in loopback, Figures 7-3 and 7-4. The LP LS CH command can also be used with
Isochronous Communication Module channels.
Quad Synchronous Processor channels can be synchronous I/O channels, Switched 56K Service channels, or broadcast/polled channels.
Isochronous Communication Module channels can be plesiochronous data at rates of up to 1.544
Mbps or isochronous data at rates of up to 512 kbps.
NOTES:
An LS loopback for a DTE1 channel will result in a loop timed interface. An LP loopback for a DTE1 channel will result in the transmit clock being driven from the system timing source. An LS loopback for a DTE2 channel is not supported unless both the receive and transmit clocks are phase aligned, but the LP loopback will always work regardless of clocking configuration.
When a Quad Synchronous Processor channel is in LP loopback, the
DSP FN command will show remote input functions in the "O=" part of the display. See the Display Commands chapter for a description of the DSP FN command.
When a Quad Synchronous Processor DTE2 port is programmed for a bus/serial bidirectional loopback, the local user (external DTE2) input clock clocks data both into and out of the ports. Additionally, remote data to and from the intermachine link is clocked from the output phasor into the input phasor using the local user DTE2 output clock.
When a Quad Synchronous Processor DTE2 port is programmed for a parallel bidirectional loopback, the following operation is supported:
●
The local user (external DTE2) input clock is used to clock local data into the local port and the local user (external DTE2) output clock is used to clock local data from the local port.
L2UG
6/30/97
7-15
7-16
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
QUAD
SYNCHRONOUS
PROCESSOR OR
ISOCHRONOUS
COMMUNICATION
MODULE
INTERFACE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
TO FRONT END
PROCESSOR
OR
POLLED DTE
TO INTERMACHINE
LINK
TO FRONT END
PROCESSOR
OR
POLLED DTE
INTERNAL BUS
LOOP
TX/RX
PHASOR LOOP
COMMAND: LP LS CH n:ss:c
Figure 7-3. Serial Bidirectional Loopback
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
QUAD
SYNCHRONOUS
PROCESSOR
PHASOR
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
TO INTERMACHINE
LINK
TX PHASOR
LOOP
RX PHASOR
LOOP
COMMAND: LP LP CH n:ss:c
Figure 7-4. Parallel Bidirectional Loopback
L2UG
6/30/94
●
No clock but rather the intermachine link’s scan cycle is used to clock data both from the local intermachine link to the local port and from the local port to the local intermachine link, over the local bus interface.
When an Isochronous Communication Module DTE2 port is programmed for a bus/serial bidirectional loopback, the local user
(external DTE2) input clock clocks data both into and out of the ports. Additionally, remote data to and from the Isochronous
Communication Module is clocked from the output phasor into the input buffer using the output phasor’s derived clock.
When an Isochronous Communication Module DTE2 port is programmed for a parallel bidirectional loopback, the following operation is supported:
●
●
The local user (external DTE2) input clock is used to clock local data into the local port, and the local user (external DTE2) output clock is used to clock local data from the local port.
No clock but rather the intermachine link scan cycle is used to clock data both from the local intermachine link to the local port and from the local port to the local intermachine link, over the local bus interface.
Local Digital Channel Loopback
For data channels, the LP LD CH command directs an external modem to loop the circuit at the digital interface of the local modem, Figure 7-5A. If the external modem does not accept the test control signals, use a loopback plug, Figure 7-6. For Quad Voice Module or Enhanced Voice
Module channels only, the LP LD CH command loops the circuit bidirectionally at the channel controller, Figure 7-5B. The external channel controller loop can be tested using an external
TIMS. The internal loop can be tested using the internal test generator and detector or a remote
TIMS. The Enhanced Voice Module is equipped with front panel test jacks which may be used to connect the TIMS and conduct loopback testing.
Local Analog Channel Loopback
For data channels, the LP LA CH command directs an external modem to loop the circuit at the analog interface of the local modem, Figure 7-7A (CCITT circuit 141 output on pin 16 of I/O channel connector).
For Quad Voice Module or Enhanced Voice Module channels, the LP LA CH command loops the circuit at the analog interface of the codec, Figure 7-7B. The codec loop can be tested using an external TIMS at the opposite end of the channel connection.
For QSP.2 Quad Synchronous Processor data channels connected to a Link Framing Module, the
LP LA CH command causes the Link Framing Module to enter a remote digital loop via the
QSP-LFM cable.
NOTE:
For the Isochronous Communication Module, whenever a local analog (LA) or local digital (LD) loopback is selected, the
Isochronous Communication Module will always execute a local analog loopback.
L2UG
6/30/97
7-17
TAIL CIRCUIT
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
DATA I/O
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR
◊
,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR
◊
,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
DTE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
TIMS
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
REMOTE
AIM
MODEM
66M
PUNCH-DOWN
BLOCK
T
R
T1
R1
LOCAL
AIM
MODEM
◊
= FOR QUAD SYNCHRONOUS
MODULE APPLICATIONS ONLY
A. DATA CHANNEL COMMAND: LP LD CH n:ss:c
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ENHANCED
VOICE MODULE
OR
QUAD VOICE
MODULE
CODEC
CHANNEL
CONTROLLER
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR
♦
,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR
♦
,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
♦
= FOR QUAD VOICE MODULE OR ENHANCED VOICE MODULE
PCM APPLICATIONS ONLY
B. VOICE CHANNEL COMMAND: LP LD CH n:ss:c
Figure 7-5. Local Digital Channel Loopback
7-18
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
6/30/94
20
5
18
12
15
17
4
8
2
3
6
24
22
25
25-PIN MALE
EIA CONNECTOR
Figure 7-6. I/O Module Channel Loopback Plug for DTE1 or DCE (Unbalanced Interface)
7-19
DTE
TAIL CIRCUIT
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
DATA I/O
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR ,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR ,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
REMOTE
AIM
MODEM
LOCAL
AIM
MODEM
= FOR QUAD SYNCHRONOUS
MODULE APPLICATIONS
ONLY
A. DATA CHANNEL COMMAND: LP LA CH n:ss:c (CCITT Circuit 141)
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR ,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR ,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
ENHANCED
VOICE MODULE
OR
QUAD VOICE
MODULE
CHANNEL
CONTROLLER CODEC
TO DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK
OR INTERMACHINE LINK
= FOR QUAD VOICE MODULE OR ENHANCED VOICE MODULE
PCM APPLICATIONS ONLY
NOTE: ON QVM.6 VOICE MODULE, LOOPBACK IS BIDIRECTIONAL.
B. VOICE CHANNEL COMMAND: LP LA CH n:ss:c
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
Figure 7-7. Local Analog Channel Loopback
7-20
L2UG
6/30/94
Remote Analog Channel Loopback
The LP RA CH command directs an external modem to loop the data channel circuits only at the analog interface of the remote modem, Figure 7-8. For QSP.2 Quad Synchronous Processor data channels connected to an LFM.1 Link Framing Module, the LP RA CH command causes the
LFM.1 Link Framing Module to enter a local analog loop via the QSP-LFM cable.
NOTE:
For the Isochronous Communication Module, whenever a remote analog (RA) or remote digital (RD) loopback is selected, the
Isochronous Communication Module will always execute a remote digital loopback.
DTE
REMOTE
MODEM
TAIL CIRCUIT
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
DATA I/O
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR ,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR ,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
LOCAL
MODEM
= FOR QUAD SYNCHRONOUS MODULE
APPLICATIONS ONLY
COMMAND: LP RA CH n:ss:c
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
Figure 7-8. Remote Analog Channel Loopback
Remote Digital Channel Loopback
The LP RD CH command directs an external modem to loop the data channel circuits only at the digital interface of the remote modem, Figure 7-9 (CCITT circuit 140 output on pin 5 of I/O channel connector).
L2UG
8/30/94
7-21
DTE
REMOTE
AIM
MODEM
TAIL CIRCUIT
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
DATA I/O
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR ,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR ,
OR INTERLINK
MODULE
LOCAL
AIM
MODEM
= FOR QUAD SYNCHRONOUS MODULE
APPLICATIONS ONLY
COMMAND: LP RD CH n:ss:c
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK OR
INTERMACHINE LINK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
Figure 7-9. Remote Digital Channel Loopback (CCITT Circuit 140)
Bidirectional V-Channel Loopback
The LP VS CH command is issued to a Quad Voice Module channel serviced by a Voice Server
Module. This command places the associated V-channel on the Voice Server Module in bidirectional loopback. The V-channel PCM phasor data is looped back towards the Quad Voice
Module and the V-channel processed phasor data is looped back towards the Interlink Module or
Integrated Trunk Module, Figure 7-10.
To test the PCM phasor side (towards the Quad Voice Module in Figure 7-10) of the local Voice
Server Module V-channel, use an external TIMS connected to the associated local Quad Voice
Module port.
To test the processed phasor side (towards the Integrated Trunk or Interlink Module in Figure
7-10) of the local Voice Server Module V-channel, use an external TIMS connected to the associated remote Quad Voice Module port at the other end of the channel connection. The test signal is sent from the remote node over the intermachine link to the local Voice Server Module and then looped back across the intermachine link to the remote TIMS.
7-22
L2UG
8/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
QUAD VOICE
MODULE
VOICE
SERVER
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP VS CH n:ss:c
Figure 7-10. Bidirectional V-Channel Loopback
Loop Intermachine Link and Clear Intermachine Link Loop
(LP DL, CLR DL) Commands
The LP DL command places intermachine link(s) associated with Interlink Module(s) specified by slot ss in loopback. An optional loopback time of between 1 and 15 minutes is permitted with the default time being 2 minutes. Optional permanent loopbacks are allowed locally.
The CLR DL command clears specified intermachine link(s) from loopback, restoring intermachine link(s) to normal operation.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP loopback DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}[{
/R or /T
}][{
/mm or /P
}]
where loopback is one of the following:
LB = local Interlink Module bus loopback
LD = local line driver local digital loopback
LA = local line driver local analog loopback
RA = remote line driver remote analog loopback
RD = remote line driver remote digital loopback
RB = remote Interlink Module bus loopback
NOTE:
RA, RD, and RB cannot be performed on asymmetrical/simplex links.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-23
and where: ss = Interlink Module slot number
/mm = number of minutes (1-15) after which loopback is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; loopback will not be cleared automatically. Cannot be used for loopbacks issued to a remote node.
Optional modifiers /R and /T are used with asymmetrical links only:
/R = runs loopback using received speed. Default loopback speed is /R.
/T = runs loopback using transmit speed
[NOD xxxx] CLR DL
{
* or ss[-ss]...
[
,ss[-ss]
]}
where: ss = Interlink Module slot number
Executing the LP DL command results in an immediate display of the loopback status. An example of placing the Interlink Module in slot 7 into local bus loopback for 9 minutes is:
Command: LP LB DL 7/09
Response: LINK 1:07
LOOP= LB TIME: 09
If the Interlink Module fails to go into loopback, one of the following error messages will be displayed:
●
TIMED OUT BEFORE LOOPBACK
●
MUST NOT LOOPBACK SYSTEM CLOCK
●
MUST NOT INITIATE RB LOOPBACK IF TXCLOCK=RCV
Intermachine Link Loopback Tests
To perform an intermachine link loopback test, a channel must be connected across the intermachine link in loopback using the CON DR programming command.
●
The intermachine link in loopback must be in the routing table at the destination node of the specified channel.
●
The path number specified in the CON DR command must establish a route for the specified channel via the intermachine link in loopback in the command.
To test the intermachine link loopbacks with the internal test generator, use the TST R command with a local I/O module channel loopback. The TST R command initiates a test message that is looped by an I/O module channel to the Interlink Module. The intermachine link loopback will loop the test message back to the local test detector.
To test the intermachine link loopback with external test equipment, connect an external pattern generator to the channel that is connected across the intermachine link in loopback. The test signal will enter the LINK/2+ System through the channel and will be looped back to the test equipment by the intermachine link loopback.
7-24
L2UG
6/30/94
NOTE:
Any intermachine link that is providing timing to a node cannot be looped toward that node. Intermachine link loopback commands will be rejected by the LINK/2+ System and result in the error message:
MUST NOT LOOPBACK SYSTEM CLOCK. An exception is an intermachine link defined on the clock fallback list as a DRI clock source. The intermachine link would still qualify as an acceptable nodal timing source if either a remote bus or an external loopback is performed.
Local Bus Intermachine Link Loopbacks
The LP LB DL command loops the circuit at the Interlink Module bus, Figure 7-11.
Local Digital Intermachine Link Loopback
The LP LD DL command loops the circuit at the bipolar encoder/decoder of the local line driver
(for example, Digital Termination Module or Link Framing Module), Figure 7-12, or directs an external modem to loop the local digital interface, Figure 7-13A. If the modem does not accept loopback commands, use a loopback plug on the Interlink Module, Figure 7-15A.
Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopback
The LP LA DL command loops the circuit at the bipolar encoder/decoder of the local line driver,
Figure 7-12, directs an external modem to loopback at the local analog interface, Figure 7-13B, or loops the circuit at the buffer of the local LFM.14 Link Framing Module, Figure 7-14.
Loopback plugs can be used on Digital Termination Modules and Link Framing Modules, Figure
7-15B.
NOTE:
On Digital Termination Modules and Link Framing Modules, the LP
LD DL and LP LA DL commands loop the intermachine link at the same location.
PRECAUTION: The LP LA DL command must not be used on an intermachine link with an LFM.3 Link Framing Module that uses receive (RCV) timing if the Network Module is not type C or D. With any other Network Module, the required clocking cannot be supplied for this loop command under these conditions.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-25
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LINE
DRIVER
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINE
DRIVER
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP LB DL ss
Figure 7-11. Local Bus Intermachine Link Loopback
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LINE
DRIVER
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINE
DRIVER
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
7-26
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP LD DL ss or LP LA DL ss
A. LINE DRIVER IN ONE-TO-ONE MODE WITHOUT BIM.2 OR BIM.3 BIPOLAR
INTERFACE MODULE
Figure 7-12. Local Digital and Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers
(Sheet 1 of 5)
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O
MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LFM.3 LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
BIM.2
OR BIM.3
BIPOLAR
INTERFACE
MODULE
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
BIM.2
OR BIM.3
BIPOLAR
INTERFACE
MODULE
LFM.3 LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O
MODULE
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP LA DL ss
B. LINE DRIVER (LFM.3 LINK FRAMING MODULE) WITH BIM.2 OR BIM.3 BIPOLAR INTERFACE MODULE
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LFM.12
LINK
FRAMING
MODULE INTERMACHINE
LINKS
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
COMMAND: LP LA DL ss
C. LINE DRIVER (LFM.12 LINK FRAMING MODULE) IN TWO-TO-TWO MODE
Figure 7-12. Local Digital and Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers
(Sheet 4)
L2UG
6/30/94
7-29
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LFM.11 OR
LFM.12
LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
TWO-
TO-
ONE
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
LFM.11 OR
LFM.12
LINK
FRAMING
MODULE
TWO-
TO-
ONE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP LA DL ss
E. LINE DRIVER IN TWO-TO-ONE MODE WITH BOTH INTERLINK MODULES GOING THROUGH LFM.11 OR
LFM.12 LINK FRAMING MODULES PUT INTO LOCAL ANALOG LOOPBACK
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LOCAL
MODEM
A. COMMAND: LP LD DL ss
REMOTE
MODEM
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
LOCAL
MODEM
B. COMMAND: LP LA DL ss
REMOTE
MODEM
Figure 7-13. Local Digital and Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Analog Modems
L2UG
6/30/94
7-31
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILC.2
INTERLINK
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
BUFFERS
NTT
FRAMER
JT-2
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
NTT
FRAMER
BUFFERS
ILC.2
INTERLINK
MODULES
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP LA DL ss
23
15
17
24
18
16
12
14
19
13
22
21
25
6
11
8
2
3
4
5
7
25-PIN MALE
EIA CONNECTOR
A. INTERLINK MODULE
LOOPBACK PLUG
2
13
14
25
25-PIN MALE
EIA CONNECTOR
B. DIGITAL TERMINATION MODULE OR LINK
FRAMING MODULE LOOPBACK PLUG
1
4
2
5
8-PIN MODULAR
MALE CONNECTOR
C. BIPOLAR INTERFACE
MODULE LOOPBACK
PLUG
9
21
14
16
2
3
5
12
17
24
25-PIN MALE
EIA CONNECTOR
D. VOICE PROCESSOR LOOPBACK PLUG
(ALSO USED FOR CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR AND
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE)
Figure 7-15. Loopback Plugs
L2UG
6/30/94
7-33
Remote Analog Intermachine Link Loopback
The LP RA DL command loops the circuit at the bipolar encoder/decoder of the remote line driver, Figure 7-16, or directs an external modem to loopback at the remote analog interface,
Figure 7-17A.
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LINE
DRIVER
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINE
DRIVER
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP RA DL ss or LP RD DL ss
A. LINE DRIVER IN ONE-TO-ONE MODE
Figure 7-16. Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers
(Sheet 1 of 3)
7-34
L2UG
6/30/94
PROCESSOR, INTEGRATED
PROCESSOR, INTEGRATED
Figure 7-16. Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers
(Sheet 2)
L2UG
6/30/94
7-35
Figure 7-16. Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Line Drivers
(Sheet 3)
7-36
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
LOCAL
MODEM
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
A. COMMAND: LP RA DL ss
REMOTE
MODEM
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
LOCAL
MODEM
REMOTE
MODEM
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
B. COMMAND: LP RD DL ss
Figure 7-17. Remote Analog and Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopbacks for Analog
Modems
L2UG
6/30/94
7-37
Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopback
The LP RD DL command loops the circuit at the bipolar encoder/decoder of the remote line driver, Figure 7-16, directs an external modem to loopback at the remote digital interface, Figure
7-17B, or loops the circuit at the buffer of the remote LFM.14 Link Framing Module, Figure
7-18.
NOTE:
On Digital Termination Modules and Link Framing Modules, the LP
RA DL and LP RD DL commands loop the intermachine link at the same location.
Remote Bus Intermachine Link Loopback
The LP RB DL command loops the circuit at the bus of the remote Interlink Module, Figure
7-19.
NOTE:
When the command NOD xxxx LP RB DL is directed to the node at the other end of the intermachine link, the local node Interlink
Module is placed in bus loopback. This loopback can be cleared from the remote node using the CLR DL ss command or from the local node using the RST 1:ss command, where ss equals the slot position of the Interlink Module in loopback.
7-38
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILC.2
INTERLINK
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
BUFFERS NTT
FRAMER
JT-2
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
NTT
FRAMER
BUFFERS
ILC.2
INTERLINK
MODULES
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP RD DL ss
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LINE
DRIVER
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINE
DRIVER
INTERLINK
MODULE
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP RB DL ss
Figure 7-19. Remote Bus Intermachine Link Loopback
Loop DS-0 Channel and Clear DS-0 Channel Loop
(LP DS0, CLR DS0) Commands
The LP DS0 command places specified DS-0 channel(s) or bundled channels of specified master in loopback. The CLR DS0 command clears specified DS-0 channel(s) or any associated Dchannel(s) or V-channel(s) from loopback, restoring channels to normal operation. This command does not center the phasor. Use the CEN PHS command to center phasor(s) of the specified DS-0 channel(s). When the CLR DS0 command is issued to a member of a bundle, all associated members of the bundle are cleared of DS-0 loopback.
AB bit signaling is ignored and timers are reset for all bandwidth contention DS-0 channels in loopback. Contending channels will not automatically connect and disconnect.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP DS0 loopback
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
[NOD xxxx] CLR DS0
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
where loopback is one of the following:
EQ = channel phasor loopback toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, that is, toward the external equipment
LI = channel phasor loopback toward an Interlink Module, I/O module, Integrated
Trunk Module, Voice Processor, or Channelized Services Processor via the system bus, that is, toward the LINK network
7-40
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
8/30/94
BI = channel phasor bidirectional loopback
RA = remote analog loopback of remote line driver of the remote Interlink Module
RB = remote Integrated Trunk Module bus loopback
RD = remote digital loopback of remote line driver of the remote Interlink Module
VS = used with channels serviced by a Voice Server Module. Places associated Vchannel in bidirectional loopback and where:
/mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which loopback is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; loopback will not be cleared automatically (option not valid for remote Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundle or Interlink Module)
NOTES:
The /mmm option does not apply to VS loopbacks. The /P option, however, is a required modifier for VS loopbacks.
No warning is provided if VS loopback is specified and channel is not processed by a Voice Server Module.
The remote LP DS0 EQ command NOD xxxx LP DS0 EQ cannot be used for remote connected Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk
Module, and Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channels or bundles.
After the LP DS0 command is entered, the supervisory port displays the loopback status of the
DS-0 channels, Figure 7-20.
To test a local DS-0 channel that connects locally to an I/O module using the local test generator and test detector:
NOTE:
The internal test generator and detector cannot be used with the
Voice Server Module. For those loopback tests, use external test equipment.
●
Loop the I/O module channel toward the DS-0 channel using the LP CH command.
●
Loop the DS-0 channel toward the I/O module channel using the LP DS0 command.
●
Use the TST R command to initiate a test message that is looped first by the I/O module and passed to the Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor. The Voice Processor or
Channelized Services Processor loops the test message at the DS-0 channel phasor back to test detector.
To test a local DS-0 channel that connects locally to another DS-0 channel using the tone generator on the Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor:
●
Loop the DS-0 channel at one of the Voice Processors or Channelized Services Processors using the LP DS0 command.
●
Use the SET TON command on the other Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor to initiate a test tone toward the looped DS-0 channel. The looped DS-0 channel returns the test tone to the unlooped DS-0 channel.
7-41
N0058> LP DS0 EQ 1:10:1/4
DS0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LP STA EQ RE NL NL VS NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
LP TIM 004 005 000 000 005 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
DS0 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
LP STA NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
LP TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Parameters are set via command line and results are displayed:
DSO - DS-0 channel number
LP STA - Loopback status of DS-0 channel, where:
EQ = Loopback toward external equipment established
LI =Loopback toward LINK/2+ network established
BI = Bidirectional loopback established
RA = Remote Integrated Trunk Module analog loopback
RB = Remote Integrated Trunk Module bus loopback
RD = Remote Integrated Trunk Module digital loopback
RE = Remote equipment busy out
VS = Voice Server Module V-channel loopback
NL = DS-0 channel not in loopback
LP TIM - Time duration for established loopback
Figure 7-20. Typical Loop DS-0 Channel (LP DS0) Command
●
Use external test equipment to monitor the tone received by the unlooped DS-0 channel.
To test a local DS-0 channel that connects across an intermachine link to a remote I/O module using the remote test generator and test detector:
●
Loop the I/O module channel toward the local node using the NOD xxxx LP CH command.
●
Loop the DS-0 channel toward the remote node using the LP DS0 command.
●
Use the NOD xxxx TST R command to initiate a test message that is looped first by the remote I/O module and passed across an intermachine link to the local DS-0 channel in loopback. The DS-0 channel returns the test message to the remote node via an intermachine link where the message is received by the remote test detector.
To test a local DS-0 channel that connects across an intermachine link to a remote DS-0 channel using the tone generator on the remote Voice Processor or Channelized Services Processor:
●
Loop the local DS-0 channel toward the remote channel using the LP DS0 command.
●
Use the NOD xxxx SET TON command to initiate a test tone that passes across the intermachine link to the local DS-0 channel in loopback.
●
Use external test equipment at the remote node to monitor the looped tone.
7-42
L2UG
8/30/94
NOTE:
If the channel is an ILP contention channel, the channel must be disconnected, the connect type reprogrammed at both ends as originator/terminator, and reconnected before proceeding with the above steps.
Equipment Loopback
The LP DS0 EQ command loops the specified DS-0 channel circuit toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk (that is, toward the local equipment) at the phasor, Figure 7-21. The equipment loop can be tested by using the SET TON command or an external tone generator and an external tone monitor.
Provided that channel connections exist, executing the LP DS0 EQ command automatically issues the BSY command to busy out the remote end of the specified DS-0 channel(s). The remote DS-0 channel(s) will become busied out before the equipment loopback is established and will remain busied out for 1 minute after the loopback is removed.
If the BSY command cannot reach the remote node for any reason, such that the command hangs up the system, issue Control C characters from the keyboard until the supervisory port prompt
(Nxxxx>) reappears.
AB bit signaling is ignored and timers are reset for all bandwidth contention DS-0 channels in loopback. Contending channels will not automatically connect and disconnect.
L2UG
8/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK MODULE,
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
PHASOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
NOTE: REMOTE DS-0 CHANNEL
IS BUSIED OUT WHILE
LOOPBACK IS IN EFFECT.
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S,
QVM.3, QVM.3/S,
QVM.6, QVM.6/S,
QVM.5, EVM,
QSC, OR QSP
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS0 EQ n:ss:cc
Figure 7-21. DS-0 Channel Equipment Loopback
7-43
LINK Interface Loopback
The LP DS0 LI command loops the specified DS-0 channel circuit at the phasor toward another module (that is, Interlink Module, I/O module, Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or
Channelized Services Processor) via the system bus, Figure 7-22. The DS-0 channel toward the equipment is busied out while the loopback is in effect.
Bidirectional Loopbacks
The LP DS0 BI command loops the specified DS-0 channel circuit bidirectionally at the phasor,
Figure 7-23.
Remote Analog Integrated Trunk Module Loopback
The LP DS0 RA command initiates an analog loop of the remote line driver of the remote
Interlink Module, Figure 7-24.
Remote Bus Integrated Trunk Module Loopback
The LP DS0 RB command initiates a bus loop at the remote Interlink Module, Figure 7-25.
Remote Digital Integrated Trunk Module Loopback
The LP DS0 RD command initiates a digital loop of the remote line driver of the remote Interlink
Module, Figure 7-26.
Voice Server Bidirectional Loopbacks
The LP DS0 VS command is issued to a Voice Processor or Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 channel serviced by a Voice Server Module. This command places the associated V-channel on the Voice Server Module in bidirectional loopback. The V-channel PCM phasor data is looped back towards the Voice Processor or Integrated Trunk Module while the processed phasor data is looped back towards the Interlink Module or Integrated Trunk Module, Figure 7-27.
7-44
L2UG
8/30/94
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE,
INTERMACHINE LINK, OR
DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK MODULE,
CHANNELIZED SERVICES PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
PHASOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO DS-1
(OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
NOTE: LOCAL DS-0 CHANNEL IS BUSIED OUT WHILE
LOOPBACK IS IN EFFECT.
COMMAND: LP DS0 LI n:ss:cc
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3, QVM.3/S, QVM.6,
QVM.6/S, QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
Figure 7-22. DS-0 Channel Link Interface Loopback
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE
OR INTERMACHINE LINK
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK MODULE,
CHANNELIZED SERVICES PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
PHASOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO DS-1
(OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS0 BI n:ss:cc
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3, QVM.3/S, QVM.6,
QVM.6/S, QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
Figure 7-23. Bidirectional DS-0 Channel Loopback
L2UG
6/30/94
7-45
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTERLINK
MODULE
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
LOCAL
MODEM
REMOTE
MODEM
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS0 RA n:ss:cc
Figure 7-24. Remote Analog Integrated Trunk Module Loopback
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE
LINE
DRIVER
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LINE
DRIVER
INTERLINK
MODULE
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS0 RB n:ss:cc
Figure 7-25. Remote Bus Integrated Trunk Module Loopback
7-46
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTERLINK
MODULE
I/O MODULE,
INTERLINK
MODULE,
CHANNELIZED
SERVICES
PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
OR VOICE
PROCESSOR
LOCAL
MODEM
REMOTE
MODEM
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS0 RD n:ss:cc
Figure 7-26. Remote Analog and Remote Digital Integrated Trunk Module Loopbacks for Analog
Modems
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULE OR
VOICE
PROCESSOR
VOICE
SERVER
MODULE
INTEGRATED
TRUNK OR
INTERLINK
MODULE
L2UG
6/30/94
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
PCM (I/O)
PHASOR
PROCESSED
PHASOR
COMMAND: LP DS0 VS n:ss:cc
Figure 7-27. Voice Server Module Bidirectional Loopback
7-47
Loop DS-1/E-1 Trunk and Clear Trunk Loop (LP DS1, CLR DS1)
Commands
The LP DS1 command places the DS-1 (or E-1) interface(s) on specified Voice Processor(s),
Integrated Trunk Module(s), or Channelized Services Processor(s) in loopback. The CLR DS1 command clears DS-1 (or E-1) interface(s) on specified Voice Processor(s), Integrated Trunk
Module(s), or Channelized Services Processor(s) from DS-1 (or E-1) and network interface loopback and resets the out-of-frame counter.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] LP DS1 loopback
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where loopback is one of the following:
EQ = loopback toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, that is, toward the external equipment
LI = loopback away from the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, that is, toward the LINK network
BI = bidirectional DS-1 (or E-1) interface loopback and where:
/mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which loopback is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; loopback will not be cleared automatically (option not valid for remote command to an Integrated Trunk Module)
[NOD xxxx] CLR DS1
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
Equipment Loopback
The LP DS1 EQ command, Figure 7-28, loops the incoming DS-1 (or E-1) signal toward the trunk at the DS-1 (or E-1) interface, Figure 7-29. All DS-0 channels on the specified trunk must be disconnected before this loopback command is entered, and reconnected following the loopback test.
For Voice Processors and Channelized Services Processors, if any affected DS-0 channels are connected when the LP DS1 EQ command is issued, the command will be rejected and the message "CHANNELS ARE CONNECTED, CMD ABORTED" will be displayed. Also, if a command is issued to connect a DS-0 channel while the equipment loopback is in effect, the command will be rejected. A subsequent display of DS-0 channel connections will show a DISC
ALARM indication.
7-48
L2UG
6/30/94
N0020> LP DS1 EQ 1:9/7
ILP 1:15
LOOP : EQ TIME : 002
Parameters are set via command line and results are displayed:
ILP 1:9 - Voice Processor in loopback (CSP displayed for Channelized Services Processor in loopback or ILQ displayed for Integrated
Trunk Module in loopback)
LOOP: - Loopback status of DS-1 trunk, where:
LI = Loopback toward LINK/2+ network established
BI = Bidirectional loopback established
TIME: - Time duration (in minutes) for established loopback
EQ = Loopback toward external equipment established
Figure 7-28. Typical Loop DS-1 Trunk (LP DS1) Command
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK
MODULE, INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S,
QVM.3, QVM.3/S,
QVM.6, QVM.6/S,
QVM.5, EVM,
QSC, OR QSP
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS1 EQ n:ss
Figure 7-29. DS-1 Signal Equipment Loopback
LINK Interface Loopback
The LP DS1 LI command loops the outgoing DS-1 (or E-1) signal at the DS-1 (or E-1) interface toward another module via the system bus, Figure 7-30. The local trunk acts like an open circuit at the DS-1 (or E-1) interface while this loopback is in effect. The equipment connected to the trunk may detect an alarm condition.
Bidirectional Loopbacks
The LP DS1 BI command loops the DS-1 (or E-1) signal bidirectionally at the DS-1 (or E-1) interface, Figure 7-31.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-49
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE,
INTERMACHINE LINK, OR
DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK
MODULE, INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS1 LI n:ss
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3, QVM.3/S, QVM.6,
QVM.6/S, QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
Figure 7-30. DS-1 Signal Link Interface Loopback
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE,
INTERMACHINE LINK, OR
DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK
MODULE, INTEGRATED
TRUNK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE PROCESSOR,
OR CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP DS1 BI n:ss
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3, QVM.3/S, QVM.6,
QVM.6/S, QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
Figure 7-31. Bidirectional DS-1 Signal Loopback
7-50
L2UG
6/30/94
Loop LFM and Clear LFM (LP LFM, CLR LFM) Commands
The LP LFM command places in loopback all intermachine links associated with the LFM.14
Link Framing Module specified by slot n:ss. An optional loopback time of between 1 and 15 minutes is permitted with the default time being 2 minutes. Optional permanent loopbacks are allowed locally.
The CLR LFM command clears the line driver (high speed port) of the specified LFM.14 Link
Framing Module from loopback, restoring all ILC.2 Interlink Modules and/or all ILQ.1
Integrated Trunk Modules associated with the LFM.14 Link Framing Module to normal operation.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP LFM loopback
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mm or /P
}]
where loopback is one of the following:
LK = loopback at line driver toward Link Framing Module
LLB = loopback at line driver toward the JT-2 trunk (ILQ.1 Integrated Trunk
Module only) and where:
n:ss = slot location of LFM.14 Link Framing Module
/mm = number of minutes (1-15) after which loopback is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; loopback will not be cleared automatically. Cannot be used for loopbacks issued to a remote node.
[NOD xxxx] CLR LFM
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}
where:
n:ss = slot location of LFM.14 Link Framing Module
The LP LFM LK command loops the outgoing JT-2 signal towards the LINK/2+ System at the line driver, Figure 7-32A. The local trunk acts like an open circuit while the loopback is in effect.
The equipment connected to the trunk may detect an alarm condition. All intermachine links supported by the LFM.14 Link Framing Module will be placed in loopback when this command is entered.
The LP LFM LLB command loops the incoming JT-2 signal toward the trunk at the LFM.14
Module line driver, Figure 7-32B. All intermachine links supported by the LFM.14 Link
Framing Module will be placed in loopback when this command is entered.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-51
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILC.2
OR ILQ.1
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
BUFFERS
NTT
FRAMER
LINE
DRIVER
TO JT-2
TRUNK
COMMAND: LP LFM LK n:ss
A. LOOPBACK TOWARD LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILC.2
OR ILQ.1
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
BUFFERS
NTT
FRAMER
LINE
DRIVER
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
TO JT-2
TRUNK
7-52
COMMAND: LP LFM LLB n:ss
B. LOOPBACK TOWARD JT-2 TRUNK
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
Figure 7-32. High Speed Port Loopbacks for LFM.14 Link Framing Module
L2UG
6/30/94
Loop Network Interface (LP NI) Command
The LP NI command places the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk on specified Voice Processor(s), Integrated
Trunk Module(s), or Channelized Services Processor(s) in loopback at the line driver, that is,
Bipolar Interface Module, Digital Termination Module, or Link Framing Module.
The CLR DS1 command clears the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk from loopback at the line driver. See
"Loop DS-1/E-1 Trunk and Clear Trunk Loop (LP DS1, CLR DS1) Commands" paragraph.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] LP NI loopback
{
* or n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where loopback is one of the following:
LK = loopback at line driver toward the Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor
LLB = loopback at line driver toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk and where:
/mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which loopback is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; loopback will not be cleared automatically
For Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor, the LP NI
LK command loops the outgoing DS-1 (or E-1) signal toward the Voice Processor, Integrated
Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor at the bipolar encoder/decoder on the line driver, Figure 7-33. The local trunk acts like an open circuit at the line driver while the loopback is in effect. The equipment connected to the trunk may detect an alarm condition. If the line driver does not accept LINK/2+ System loopback commands, use a loopback plug, Figure
7-15D, on the Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor.
For LFM.14 Link Framing Module, the LP NI LK command loops the outgoing signal toward the ILQ.1 Integrated Trunk Module at the buffer of the local LFM.14 Link Framing Module,
Figure 7-34.
For Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor, the LP NI
LLB command loops the incoming DS-1 (or E-1) signal toward the trunk at the bipolar encoder/decoder of the line driver, Figure 7-35.
PRECAUTION: For Integrated Trunk Modules, proprietary bundle channels will not automatically reconnect after the LP NI
LLB loopback is cleared. All DS-0 channels on the specified trunk must be disconnected before this loopback command is entered and must be reconnected following the loopback test.
For LFM.14 Link Framing Module, the LP NI LLB command loops the incoming signal toward the JT-2 trunk at the buffer of the local LFM.14 Link Framing Module, Figure 7-36.
AB bit signaling is ignored and timers are reset for all bandwidth contention DS-0 channels in loopback. Contending channels will not automatically connect and disconnect.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-53
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
,
INTERLINK MODULE,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR LINE DRIVER
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE,
INTERMACHINE LINK,
OR DS-1 (OR E-1) TRUNK
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP NI LK n:ss
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3, QVM.3/S, QVM.6,
QVM.6/S, QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
Figure 7-33. Network Interface Loopback Toward Voice Processor, Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized Services Processor
7-54
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILQ.1
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
T1 XCVRS BUFFERS NTT
FRAMER
JT-2
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
NTT
FRAMER
ILQ.1
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULES
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP NI LK n:ss
7-56
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
,
INTERLINK MODULE,
VOICE PROCESSOR,
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, OR CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR
INTEGRATED TRUNK
MODULE, VOICE
PROCESSOR,
OR CHANNELIZED
SERVICES PROCESSOR LINE DRIVER
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S,
QVM.3, QVM.3/S,
QVM.6, QVM.6/S,
QVM.5, EVM,
QSC, OR QSP
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: LP NI LLB n:ss
Figure 7-35. Network Interface Loopback Toward DS-1 Trunk
L2UG
6/30/94
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
ILQ.1
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULES
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
T1 XCVRS
BUFFERS NTT
FRAMER
JT-2
INTERMACHINE
LINK
REMOTE LINK/2+ SYSTEM
LFM.14 LINK FRAMING MODULE
NTT
FRAMER
BUFFERS T1 XCVRS
ILQ.1
INTEGRATED
TRUNK
MODULES
SUPERVISORY
TERMINAL
COMMAND: LP NI LLB n:ss
Loop X.50 Server Module Subrate Channel (LP XCH) Command
The LP XCH command directs the designated subrate channel(s) phasor data on the specified
X.50 Server Module back towards the low speed side, and the subrate channel(s) processed phasor data back toward the associated X.50 DS-0 channel, Figure 7-37. All other subrate channels supported by that X.50 DS-0 channel are unaffected.
The CLR XCH command clears the specified subrate channel(s)from loopback, restoring the channel(s) to normal operation.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP XCH
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where: /mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which busy out is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; busy out will not be cleared automatically
[NOD xxxx] CLR XCH
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Loop X.50 Server Module X.50 DS-0 Channel (LP XS0) Command
The LP XS0 command places the specified X.50 DS-0 channel(s) in bidirectional loopback. The aggregate data is looped toward the X.50 network at the phasor and all of the subrate channels supported by the X.50 DS-0 channel(s) are looped towards the low speed outputs, Figure 7-38.
All other X.50 DS-0 channels supported by that X.50 Server Module are unaffected.
The CLR XS0 command clears the specified aggregate channel(s)from loopback, restoring the channel(s) to normal operation.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] LP XS0
{
n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where: /mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which busy out is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; busy out will not be cleared automatically
[NOD xxxx] CLR XS0
{
n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
7-58
L2UG
6/30/94
L2UG
6/30/94
Figure 7-37. X.50 Subrate Channel Bidirectional Loopback
7-59
7-60
Figure 7-38. X.50 DS-0 Channel Bidirectional Loopback
L2UG
6/30/94
Monitor Channel Data (MON) Command
The MON command allows data or analog voice being sent or received by a specified channel to be monitored on another specified unused (not connected) channel.
Monitoring an I/O Channel
For I/O channels, the MON command allows the user to monitor:
●
Data or analog voice sent from an active I/O module channel to an Interlink Module,
Integrated Trunk Module, or Voice Processor (MON L)
●
Data or analog voice received by an active I/O module channel from an Interlink Module,
Integrated Trunk Module, or Voice Processor (MON R)
The I/O channel is monitored on another specified I/O channel that is not currently connected.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] MON
{
L or R
}
n
1
:ss
1
:c
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2 where: L = data sent from local channel c
1
to an Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk
Module, or Voice Processor is monitored on local channel c
R = data received by local channel c
1
from an Interlink Module, Integrated Trunk
Module, or Voice Processor is monitored on local channel c
2
2
.
.
The following I/O channel parameters must be identical for both channels:
●
Speed
●
Mode of transmitting functions
●
Phasor size
The CLR MG command removes the I/O channel from monitor mode.
Monitoring an X.50 DS-0 Channel
For X.50 DS-0 channels, the MON command allows the user to monitor:
●
X.50 DS-0 channel data sent from an active Quad Synchronous Processor Module or Voice
Processor to an X.50 Server Module, Interlink Module, or Integrated Trunk Module (MON L)
●
X.50 DS-0 channel data received by an active Quad Synchronous Module or Voice Processor from an X.50 Server Module, Interlink Module, or Voice Processor (MON R)
The X.50 DS-0 channel is monitored on another specified X.50 DS-0 channel or I/O channel that is not currently connected.
L2UG
6/30/94
7-61
Command:
[NOD xxxx] MON
{
L or R
} {
n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:cc
2
or
n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2
}
where: L = data sent from local channel cc
1
is monitored on local channel cc
R = data received by local channel cc
1
2
.(or c
2
is monitored on local channel cc
2
)
.(or c
2
)
The following X.50 DS-0 channel parameters must be identical for both channels:
●
Speed
●
Mode of transmitting functions
●
Phasor size
The CLR MG command removes the X.50 DS-0 channel from monitor mode.
Monitoring an X.50 Subrate Channel
For X.50 subrate channels, the MON command allows the user to monitor:
●
X.50 subrate channel data sent from an active Quad Synchronous Processor Module or Quad
Synchronous Module to an X.50 Server Module, Interlink Module, or Integrated Trunk
Module (MON L)
●
X.50 subrate channel data received by an active Quad Synchronous Processor Module or
Quad Synchronous Module from an X.50 Server Module, Interlink Module, or Integrated
Trunk Module (MON R)
The X.50 subrate channel is monitored on another specified X.50 subrate channel or I/O channel that is not currently connected.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] MON
{
L or R
} {
n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
:sr
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:cc
2
:sr
2
or n
1
:ss
1
:cc
1
:sr
1
,n
2
:ss
2
:c
2
}
where: L = data sent from local channel sr
1
is monitored on local channel sr
R = data received by local channel sr
1
2
.(or c
is monitored on local channel sr
2
)
2
.(or c
2
)
The following channel parameters must be identical for both channels:
●
Speed
●
Mode of transmitting functions
●
Phasor size
The CLR MG command removes the X.50 subrate channel from monitor mode.
7-62
L2UG
6/30/94
NOTE:
Isochronous Communication Module channels can only be monitored by other Isochronous Communication Module channels. The channel that is monitoring must be a terminator. If an Isochronous
Communication Module is monitoring a channel using FD (frequency discrimination), only the connected speed when the MON command is issued will be monitored.
Reset Module (RST) Command
The RST command resets the modules in the specified slots or ranges of slots. The following modules can be reset with the RST command:
●
Network Module
●
Interlink Module
●
Voice Processor
●
Channelized Services Processor
●
Integrated Trunk Module
●
D-Channel Module
●
Bypass Module
●
Voice Server Module
●
X.50 Server Module
●
Quad Asynchronous Module
●
Dual Isochronous Module
●
Quad Synchronous Processor
●
Foreign Exchange Office Module
●
Foreign Exchange Station Module
●
Isochronous Communication Module
●
Enhanced Voice Module
●
Programmable Link Framing Modules (Models LFM.3, .10, .11, .12, .14)
Command:
[NOD xxxx] RST n:ss[-n:ss]...
[
,n:ss[-n:ss]
]
L2UG
6/30/94
7-63
7-64
NOTE:
After issuing a remote RST command to an online Network Module, online Integrated Trunk Module, or online Interlink Module, enter a
Control C character to display the supervisory port prompt.
Resetting a module initiates a hardware and firmware self-test (hardware only on Quad
Synchronous Processor) and reinitializes the module. Use the DSP ERR command to display self-test results.
In addition to the self-test:
●
Reset to an online Network Module:
All modules in the LINK/2+ System are reset.
If online Network Module is part of a redundant pair, the offline Network Module becomes the online Network Module, unless an error is detected in the offline Network
Module.
●
Reset to an offline Network Module of a redundant pair:
Offline Network Module performs self-test.
Parameters from the online Network Module are loaded into the database of the offline
Network Module.
●
Reset to an online Interlink Module in a nonredundant configuration causes intermachine link parameters to be loaded.
●
Reset to an online Interlink Module of a redundant pair:
Offline Interlink Module is switched online.
Original online Interlink Module performs self-test.
If both Interlink Modules are connected to a Digital Termination Module, both the
Interlink Module and the associated driver unit on the Digital Termination Module are switched as a pair.
●
Reset to an online Voice Processor in a nonredundant configuration loads all DS-1 (or E-1) and DS-0 parameters.
●
Reset to an online Voice Processor of a redundant pair:
Offline Voice Processor loads all DS-1 (or E-1) and DS-0 parameters and is switched online.
Original online Voice Processor is switched offline and performs self-test.
If the Voice Processors are connected to Bipolar Interface Modules or Digital Termination
Units, each Voice Processor and its associated Bipolar Interface Module or Digital
Termination Unit are switched in unison.
●
Reset to an offline Voice Processor of a redundant pair downloads all DS-1 (or E-1) and DS-0 parameters from the online Voice Processor and performs a self-test.
L2UG
6/30/94
●
Reset to a Channelized Services Processor operates the same as reset to a Voice Processor.
●
Reset to an Integrated Trunk Module operates the same as reset to a Voice Processor:
All proprietary bundles are reinitialized.
Dial-up connections must be manually reestablished.
●
Reset to an online Bypass Module:
Channel connections in Bypass Module are cleared, and Network Module reestablishes all bypass channel connections that existed prior to the reset.
If online Bypass Module is part of a redundant pair, the offline module becomes the online module. The Network Module reestablishes all bypass channel connections that existed prior to the reset.
●
Reset to an offline Bypass Module causes a self-test of the offline Bypass Module.
●
Reset to a primary X.50 Server Module that is currently online causes the next available redundant X.50 Server Module that is in the next highest numbered slot to take over.
NOTE:
A primary X.50 Server Module in the Control Mainframe requires the supporting redundant X.50 Server Module(s) be located in the
Control Mainframe as well.
During this switch over, the X.50 channels and X.50 subrate channels remain fully connected.
If there is no redundant X.50 Server Module available, the primary module will disconnect the channels, perform a self-test and then (if the self-test is successful) reconnect the channels.
●
Reset to a redundant X.50 Server Module that is currently online causes the original primary module to take over providing the primary module has recovered from its failure state.
Otherwise, the next available redundant module will take over.
●
Reset to a redundant X.50 Server Module that is currently offline causes the module to perform a self-test and then return to the redundant offline state.
●
Reset to a Quad Synchronous Processor reinitializes module hardware and updates channel parameters.
Reset Bundle (RST BDL) Command
The RST BDL command causes a disconnect and then a reconnect on the specified Integrated
Trunk Module bundle. When the command is issued to a proprietary bundle, all channels in the bundle are disconnected and may be assigned to alternate routes. In addition, ARQ/BER testing is restarted, and Alarms 6 and 7 are generated. If the bundle parameters were changed prior to issuing this command, the new bundle parameters take effect upon reconnect. If the specified bundle is a dial link type, the bundle realigns after all DS-0s are reconnected.
When issued to a nonproprietary bundle, the command disconnects all DS-0s in the bundle, causing an out-of-service condition and possibly a signal disruption, and then attempts to
L2UG
6/30/94
7-65
reconnect all DS-0s if bandwidth is available. If the bundle parameters were changed prior to issuing this command, the new bundle parameters take effect upon reconnect.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] RST BDL 1:ss:cc
For example, to reset a bundle with master DS-0 2 originating at node 61 on the Integrated Trunk
Module in slot 12, enter:
NOD 61 RST BDL 1:12:2
Reset V-Channel (RST CH) Command
The RST CH command resets the specified V-channel (s) on a Voice Server Module without affecting the channel connections. The optional /B qualifier allows the user to block out one or more V-channels, making them unavailable. Channels that are blocked out will be skipped by the
Network Module when the Voice Server Module channels are scanned for possible connections.
When the DSP ST VCH command is issued, the blocked channels will show a BUSY status.
Re-issuing the RST CH command, without the /B modifier, to the same V-channel (s) unblocks the channel (s) and allows them to again be scanned by the Network Module.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] RST CH n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]
[/B]
For example, to block out V-channels 6 through 10 on the Voice Server Module in slot 12 of the
Control Mainframe, enter:
RST CH 1:12:6-1:12:10/B
To unblock those same V-channels from the blocked state, enter:
RST CH 1:12:6-1:12:10
Reset Driver Module (RST DR) Command
The RST DR command permits the user to transfer redundancy between driver 1 circuits and driver 2 circuits on the Driver Module, regardless of the error status.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] RST DR n
PRECAUTION: Transfers on active modules may cause momentary disruption of channel data traffic.
7-66
L2UG
6/30/94
Reset Power Supply Module (RST PS) Command
The RST PS command is used to:
●
Determine if a faulty Power Supply Module exists in a redundant pair associated with a specific Mainframe.
●
Determine which Power Supply Module of the pair is faulty.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] RST PS n
NOTE:
This command does not apply to part number AW00642-1 Power
Supply Modules.
Under normal operating conditions, redundant Power Supply Modules in a LINK/2+ System share the power load. After issuing this command, the LINK/2+ System tests the operation of an individual Power Supply Module by drawing power for 2 minutes from only one power supply.
The Power Supply Module under test is identified by a lit ON LINE indicator.
A faulty Power Supply Module can be isolated as follows:
1.
Enter a CLR AQ command to clear the alarm table.
2.
Enter the RST PS n command to test one Power Supply Module. ON and ON LINE indicators light on Power Supply Module now in use. ON indicator lights on Power Supply
Module NOT in use.
3.
If alarm 04 is not displayed within approximately 2 minutes, the Power Supply Module under test is operational.
Set Database Checksum (SET CKS) Command
The SET CKS command calculates and stores a new database checksum on the online Network
Module. The checksum is updated each time the database is changed, that is, a parameter change.
The checksum computed by the SET CKS command is a total recalculation of the checksum.
The checksum is used to detect any corruption of the database.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] SET CKS
The database checksum is tested whenever the LINK/2+ System is turned on or the online
Network Module is reset. During a checksum test, the checksum is calculated again and compared to the previously stored checksum value. If the values do not agree, the LINK/2+
System reports a database checksum error. In general, a checksum error indicates either a hardware failure or a change in the database by an electrical transient. Use the DSP CKS command to determine if a checksum error exists.
L2UG
6/30/97
7-67
If a database checksum error is reported, enter the SET CKS command. Determine the error that needs to be corrected by checking the database, and make the appropriate changes to the database. The SET CKS command recalculates the checksum but does not correct the error.
NOTE:
If the database has been previously backed up using the SAV DB command, the database should then be restored using the procedure described in Appendix C of the Installation and Maintenance
Manual.
The value determined by the SET CKS command is stored in memory, and the value calculated in all subsequent checksum tests will be compared to the stored value.
Set and Clear Alarm Relay (SET RLY, CLR RLY) Commands
A test of the major and minor alarm relays is conducted using the SET RLY and CLR RLY commands. The SET RLY command causes the contacts of the major and minor alarm relays on the Network Module to close (alarm condition). The CLR RLY command causes the alarm relay contacts to open, restoring the relays to their normal operating condition.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET RLY
[NOD xxxx] CLR RLY
When the alarm relay contacts are closed, either by the SET RLY command or because of a real alarm, these contact closures are presented to the user via the supervisory port connector. Also, a control signal conforming to RS-423 is provided at the Control Mainframe rear panel connector
1D, where:
+6V = relay test activated
-6V = relay test not activated
See the LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for cabling information.
A major alarm occurs whenever:
●
A clock (phase locked loop) failure occurs (alarm 5).
●
ALL intermachine links at a node are declared out-of-service (alarm 7).
●
A Bypass Module fails (no redundancy) or both Bypass Modules fail (redundancy) (alarm
13).
●
Both circuits on a Driver Module fail (alarm 14).
●
ALL intermachine links are down as a result of a LINK/CSU failure (alarm 16).
●
The active master clocking node’s clock source is its internal oscillator (alarm 23).
7-68
L2UG
6/30/97
A minor alarm occurs when the LINK/2+ System is still operational but some failure or error condition exists. Minor alarms are generated by alarms 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 21, 22, 24,
25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, and 35. In addition:
●
Alarm 7 is minor when one or more Interlink Modules or Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundles are out-of-service.
●
Alarm 13 is minor when one Bypass Module of a redundant pair fails. If both Bypass
Modules fail at a node, alarm 13 is major.
●
Alarm 14 is minor if one circuit of a Driver Module fails. If both circuits of a Driver Module fail, alarm 14 is major.
●
Alarm 16 is minor if one or more intermachine links are down as a result of a LINK/CSU alarm. If ALL intermachine links are down, alarm 16 is major.
Set and Clear Tone Generator (SET TON, CLR TON) Commands
The SET TON command initiates a milliwatt reference equivalent test tone on a specified noncontending DS-0 channel. When used with DS-0 channel loopback commands, the SET TON command allows a DS-0 channel to be tested with a known reference signal. The CLR TON command stops the test tone generator on specified DS-0 channel(s).
If the test tone is used with DS-0 contention channels, these channels should be defined as noncontention channels before applying the test tone.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] SET TON
{
EQ or LI
}
n:ss:cc
[{
/mmm or /P
}]
where: EQ = tone directed toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, that is, toward the external equipment
LI = tone directed away from the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk toward an Interlink Module,
I/O module, Voice Processor, or Channelized Services Processor, that is, toward the LINK network
/mmm = number of minutes (1-240) after which test tone is cleared automatically
(default is 2 minutes)
/P = permanent; test tone will not be cleared automatically
[NOD xxxx] CLR TON
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
NOTE:
To test more than one DS-0 channel on a Voice Processor or
Channelized Services Processor at the same time, the test tones must all be set toward the same direction. If a test tone is set in the opposite direction, that command will be rejected.
Test tones can only be used on Channelized Services Processors with a bundle size of 1.
L2UG
6/30/97
7-69
Equipment Test
The test tone begins at the internal tone generator on the specified Voice Processor or
Channelized Services Processor and flows toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk via the DS-1 (or E-1) interface, Figure 7-39.
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK
MODULE, VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
VOICE PROCESSOR OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S,
QVM.3, QVM.3/S,
QVM.6, QVM.6/S,
QVM.5, EVM,
QSC, OR QSP
BUFFER
TONE
GENERATOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
COMMAND: SET TON EQ n:ss:cc
Figure 7-39. Set Tone Equipment Test
Link Interface Test
The test tone begins at the internal tone generator on the specified Voice Processor or
Channelized Services Processor and flows toward another module (that is, Interlink Module, I/O module, Voice Processor, or Channelized Services Processor) via the DS-0 channel phasor,
Figure 7-40.
Trace Bypass (TRC BP) Command
The TRC BP command is directed to a bypass node to display the bypass status for the specified channel(s).
If you know the channel number(s), one of the following commands is used.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx *
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx
{
n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]...
[
,n:ss:c[-n:ss:c]
]}
[/F]
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx
{
n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
[/F]
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx
{
n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
[/F]
7-70
L2UG
6/30/97
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
I/O MODULE
◊
, INTERLINK
MODULE, VOICE PROCESSOR, OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
VOICE PROCESSOR OR
CHANNELIZED SERVICES
PROCESSOR
BUFFER
TONE
GENERATOR
DS-1
INTERFACE
TO EXTERNAL
CHANNEL DEVICE,
INTERMACHINE LINK,
OR DS-1 (OR E-1)
TRUNK
◊
= QVM.2, QVM.2/S, QVM.3,
QVM.3/S, QVM.6, QVM.6/S,
QVM.5, EVM, QSC, OR QSP
COMMAND: SET TON LI n:ss:cc
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
Figure 7-40. Set Tone Link Interface Test
where:
* = all originating or terminating channels n:ss:c = an originating or terminating I/O channel n:ss:cc = an originating or terminating DS-0 or X.50 DS-0 channel n:ss:cc:sr = an originating or terminating X.50 subrate channel
Nxxxx = originating or terminating node number
/F = optional modifier that causes the list of nodes that the channel traverses
(including the originator and terminator nodes) to be displayed
This command can also be entered as:
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
/Nxxxx[/F] where:
/Nxxxx = originating or terminating node number
Each channel displayed represents a full duplex channel consisting of the originator connection and the termination connection. See Figure 7-41A for a typical display of an I/O, DS-0, or X.50
DS-0 channel. See Figure 7-41B for a typical display of an X.50 subrate channel.
To display the bypass status for channels inbound or outbound on a specific intermachine link at a bypass node, use the following command.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
{
I or O
}{
ss or ss:cc
}
[/F]
L2UG
6/30/97
7-71
or
For X.50 subrate channels, the command is:
[NOD xxxx] TRC BP Nxxxx
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
{
I or O
}{
ss or ss:cc
}
[/F] where:
I = inbound intermachine link (from originator node)
O = outbound intermachine link (toward destination node) ss = slot location of Interlink Module ss:cc = slot location and bundle on Integrated Trunk Module
/F = optional modifier that causes the list of nodes that the channel traverses
(including originator and terminator nodes) to be displayed
N1100>NOD 510 TRC BP 1:17:*/N410
SLOT 1:07 DEST PHASOR LOOP CH TYPE FNS.
CH 043 ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:17:01 LINK 9 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:09:03 ILQ 13:05
CH 044 ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:17:02 LINK 9 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:09:04 LINK 11 14
CH 045 ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:17:03 LINK 9 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:12:01 LINK 11 14 ER
CH 046 ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:17:04 LINK 9 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:12:03 LINK 11* 14
SLOT 1:07 - Online Bypass Module at node to which command is directed
CH 043 - Bypass channel number
ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:17:01- Node number and nest:slot:channel number of originator channel
LINK 9 - Slot location of Interlink Module, Integrated
Trunk Module, or Channelized Services
Processor that connects towards Originator node (* = connection is pending)
PHASOR - Phasor size in bytes of bypass pair phasors (ER = Phasor error has occurred)
LOOP - Loopback status of Bypass Module, where:
OFF = Bypass channel not in loopback
ON = Bypass channel in loopback
CH TYPE - Type of channel being bypassed, where:
ASYNC = Quad Asynchronous Module channel
SYNC = Synchronous, Isochronous, or Voice
Module channel
FNS. - Mode of transmitting functions, in-band or outof-band
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:09:03 - Node number and nest:slot:channel number of terminator channel
ILQ 13:05 - Slot location of Interlink Module,
Integrated Trunk Module, or Channelized
Services Processor that connects towards the
Terminator node
A. DISPLAY USING n:ss:c MODIFIER
Figure 7-41. Typical Trace Bypass Display (TRC BP) (Sheet 1 of 2)
7-72
L2UG
6/30/97
N1100>NOD 510 TRC BP 1:15:10:12/N410
SLOT 1:17 DEST PHASOR LOOP CH TYPE FNS.
CH 153 ORIG: N0410 CHAN 1:15:10:12 LINK 9 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0310 CHAN 2:09:03:15 LINK 11 14
CHAN 1:15:10:12 - Channel number of originator
X.50 subrate channel
CHAN 2:09:03:15 Channel number of terminator
X.50 subrate channel
B. DISPLAY USING n:ss:cc:sr MODIFIER
N0129>TRC BP N150 * I 5/F
SLOT 1:17 DEST PHASOR LOOP CH TYPE FNS.
CH 042 0RIG: N0150 CHAN 2:01:01 LINK 05 14 OFF SYNC INBAND
TERM: N0097 CHAN 3:16:03 LINK 09 14
NODES -> 150 37 10 129 097 GRM ENABLED
NODES -> - List of nodes traversed by channel displayed
-GRM ENABLED - Grooming enabled
C. DISPLAY USING I ss MODIFIER
Figure 7-41. Typical Trace Bypass Display (TRC BP) (Sheet 2)
Each channel displayed represents a full duplex channel consisting of the originator connection and the termination connection. An asterisk indicates that a connection is pending, that is, not yet established. See Figure 7-41C for a typical display.
Trace Channel (TRC CH) Command
The TRC CH command, when issued to an originating or terminating node, displays the status of the specified channel connection(s).
Command:
[NOD xxxx] TRC CH
{
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
or
For X.50 subrate channels, the command is:
[NOD xxxx] TRC CH
{
* or n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]...
[
,n:ss:cc:sr[-n:ss:cc:sr]
]}
Status is indicated by the following messages:
●
CH n:ss:cc Vn:ss:pp Lss -> aaaa bbbb cccc ...nnnn
L2UG
6/30/97
7-73
where:
Vn:ss:pp = V-channel address (if applicable)
Lss = outbound link number aaaa = originator node bbbb = first bypass node cccc = second bypass node nnnn = terminator node
* = indicates the node number in the list where the channel resides
●
CH n:ss:cc CON DR PATH a b c...
where:
CON DR = direct connection a, b, c... = direct connect path
●
CH n:ss:cc NOT CONNECTED
●
CH n:ss:cc LOCAL DROP
●
CH n:ss:cc CON - TERMINATOR
●
CH n:ss:cc PROP BUNDLE
See Figure 7-42 for a typical display.
N0006>TRC CH 1:16:1-1:16:8
CH 1:16:01 L04 -> *0006 0020 0030
CH 1:16:02 V1:06:01 L04 -> *0006 0020 0030
CH 1:16:03 L04 -> CON DR PATH: 1
CH 1:16:04 L04 -> *0006 0020
CH 1:16:05 V1:06:02 L04 -> *0006 0025 0035 SPX
CH 1:16:06 L04 -> CON DR PATH: 2
CH 1:16:07 L04 -> 0001 XXXX XXXX 0033*
CH 1:16:08 NOT CONNECTED
CH 1:16:01 - Channel number
L04 - Outbound link number
V1:06:01 - V-channel address. An asterisk (*) after the V-channel indicates a pending state. The
I/O channel is connected; however, the Vchannel is not yet fully connected.
XXXX XXXX - Denotes unknown bypass nodes which are the result of a lost simplex connection request and reinitiation of the request by the receiving node to reestablish the connection.
-> *0006 0020 0030 - Lists originator node, bypass node(s), and terminator node. Asterisk (*) indicates the node number in the list where the channel resides; SPX signifies a simplex link.
CON DR PATH - Direct connect path
Figure 7-42. Typical Trace Channel Display (TRC CH)
7-74
L2UG
6/30/97
Test DS-0 Channel (TST DS0) Command
The TST DS0 command causes a milliwatt reference equivalent test tone to be transmitted on specified Voice Processor DS-0 channel(s), and detects whether the tone is received back on the opposite side of the associated channel phasor(s). The test result is PASS or FAIL. After the TST
DS0 command is entered, the supervisory port displays the DS-0 channel test results, Figure
7-43.
Command:
[NOD xxxx] TST DS0
{
EQ or LI
} {
* or n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]...
[
,n:ss:cc[-n:ss:cc]
]}
where: EQ = channel phasor loopback toward the DS-1 (or E-1) trunk, that is, toward the external equipment
LI = channel phasor loopback toward an Interlink Module, I/O module, or Voice
Processor via the system bus, that is, toward the LINK network.
N0028> TST DSO EQ 1:2:11-1:2:14
1:02:11 PASS 1:02:12 FAIL 1:02:13 PASS 1:02:14 PASS
Test results for each selected channel are displayed:
1:02:11 - DS-0 channel being tested PASS - Test results, where:
PASS = Test tone is received
FAIL = Test tone not received
Figure 7-43. Typical Test DS-0 Channel (TST DS0) Command
The following conditions and results apply when the TST DS0 command is issued:
●
The DS-0 channel must be connected.
●
The TST DS0 command can only be executed on channels that are not compressed. Attempts to issue a test on ADPCM channels will be rejected, and the message "ILLEGAL" is displayed at the supervisory terminal.
●
If a test tone is not already activated on the DS-0 channel, the Voice Processor will issue a test tone, and then will remove it when the test is finished.
●
If a test tone is already activated on the DS-0 channel, but the tone is in the opposite direction, or if other DS-0 channels have tones in place in the opposite direction, the command will be rejected.
●
The test command requires that a digital loopback be activated somewhere on the channel to be tested. If no loopback exists, or if the loopback is analog, the test will report FAIL.
●
The TST DS0 command cannot be issued from the supervisory terminal if the command has already been issued from a supervisory computer. Otherwise, the message "IN PROG" is displayed at the supervisory terminal.
L2UG
6/30/97
7-75
●
The TST DS0 command should not be used with contention DS-0 channels. To test contention DS-0 channels, the channels should be defined for noncontention before proceeding.
Test Generator and Clear Test Generator (TST, CLR MG) Commands
A complete or partial test of data, analog voice, or EIA control functions is established by the
TST command. To loop the test path from the internal test generator to the internal test detector, test generator commands are used with loopback commands. The CLR MG command stops and clears the test generator for partial tests 1 and 2. This command also removes an I/O channel from monitor mode. The CLR MG command should be entered before each loopback test to ensure that the byte counters are cleared.
NOTE:
Do not run test generator at channel rates above 392 kbps.
Commands:
[NOD xxxx] TST
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
}
n:ss:c
For X.50 Server Module, the commands are:
[NOD xxxx] TST
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
}
n:ss:cc
or
[NOD xxxx] TST
{
L or R
} {
DAT or CNT
} {
C or P1 or P2
}
n:ss:cc:sr where: L = local test
R = remote test
CNT = conducts a test of EIA control functions on channel n:ss:c
DAT = conducts a test of data or analog voice on channel n:ss:c
C = complete test
P1 = partial test 1; constant data bit pattern, or EIA control functions in off condition
P2 = partial test 2; constant data bit pattern that is different from the P1 bit pattern, or EIA control functions in on condition n:ss:c = I/O channel n:ss:cc = X.50 DS-0 channel n:ss:cc:sr = X.50 subrate channel
[NOD xxxx] CLR MG
NOTE:
When using TST command with FXS/FXO Modules, put channel into loopback using LP LD CH command.
Local Test
The test signal begins locally at the internal test generator, flows through the local I/O module channel being tested, is looped by a selected I/O module channel loopback command, and returns to the local test detector. See Figure 7-44A for an example.
7-76
L2UG
6/30/97
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TEST
GENERATOR
I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LOCAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BUS CHANNEL
LOOPBACK
LOCAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BUS CHANNEL
LOOPBACK
TEST
DETECTOR
A. COMMAND: TST L
DAT
CNT
C
P1
P2 n:ss:c
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
LOCAL LINK/2+ SYSTEM
TEST
GENERATOR
I/O MODULE
INTERLINK
MODULE
LINK FRAMING
MODULE
LOCAL ANALOG
INTERMACHINE
LINK LOOPBACK
TEST
DETECTOR
B. COMMAND: TST R
DAT
CNT
C
P1
P2 n:ss:c
Figure 7-44. Internal Test Generator
TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY
L2UG
6/30/97
7-77
Remote Test
The test begins locally at the internal test generator, is looped by a selected I/O module channel loopback command, and flows through an Interlink Module across the intermachine link or through a Voice Processor until the flow is looped again. The test signal then returns to the local test detector. See Figure 7-44B for an example.
EIA Control Functions Tests
The complete (CNT C) EIA control functions test checks EIA functions both in ON and OFF status. The complete test results are automatically displayed on the supervisory terminal.
Partial test 1 (CNT P1) checks only EIA control functions in the OFF condition. Partial test 2
(CNT P2) checks EIA control functions in the ON condition. The results of the partial tests are displayed using the DSP TST command.
Data Flow Tests
The complete (DAT C) data test checks two alternate data bit patterns. The test results for the complete test are automatically displayed on the supervisory terminal.
Partial test 1 (DAT P1) checks a constant data bit pattern. Partial test 2 (DAT P2) checks a constant data bit pattern that is different from the P1 bit pattern. The results of the partial tests are displayed using the DSP TST command.
NOTE:
The test generator commands (TST) cannot be used with Subrate
Channel Processor channels. Channel loopbacks on a Subrate
Channel Processor are controlled by manual switches on the module.
End-to-end testing of subrate channels is the responsibility of the
Central Office terminating these channels. See Troubleshooting chapter in LINK/2+ Installation and Maintenance Manual for information on Subrate Channel Processor testing.
7-78
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
Regulatory Requirements
This section contains regulatory information for countries that require specific text to appear in the manual documentation. This equipment has been approved for use in many countries other than those listed in this section. For countries not listed below, regulatory requirements and approvals information can be obtained from your local Ascom Timeplex office.
The information in this section includes mandatory or recommended requirements of certification authorities for the following areas.
Included are requirements for:
•
Canada
•
Europe
•
Switzerland
•
United Kingdom
•
United States
NOTE:
All ports on this equipment are Safe Extra Low Voltage (SELV) unless otherwise noted and should only be connected to SELV ports on other equipment.
REG-1
Canada
Telephone Line Connection Information
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
Load Number
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the Load Number for the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20A designates a Load Number of 20 and an "A" type ringer.
Canadian Compliance Statement
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n'émat pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
L2UG
6/30/97
CAN-1
Europe
General Pan-European Requirements
With the harmonization of Telecommunications in Europe, the connection of Terminal
Equipment to the Public Telecommunications Networks, is regulated by Directives issued by the
European Commission. Public Telecommunication Network Services provided to Terminal
Equipment users may be supplied as a National Service, with interface standards specific to the country in which it is provided, or as a Pan-European Service, with a common interface standard throughout all European countries.
In this section, it is stated which product interfaces are compatible with the National and which with the Pan-European standards. In principle, products with the CE markings are intended for use in any European country, but in practice products with multiple interfaces require a clearer definition of their compatibility with the public network.
CE Marked Equipment
Certain Ascom Timeplex equipment is marked with one of the following:
The equipment, when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions, meets the requirements of the European
Electromagnetic and Low Voltage Directives.
The equipment, when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions, meets the requirements of the European
Electromagnetic, Low Voltage, and Telecommunications Terminal
Directive, and may be connected to the Public Telecommunications
Networks of the European Union Countries.
The equipment, when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions, meets the requirements of the European
Electromagnetic, Low Voltage, and Telecommunications Terminal
Directive, but cannot be connected to the pan-European Public
Telecommunications Networks of the European Union Countries.
Where CE❒ is a National Approval Label that implies the equipment, when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions, meets the requirements of the European Electromagnetic, and Low Voltage Directives, and in addition has been granted Public
Network Attachment Approval in those countries whose labels are afixed.
NOTE:
Refer to the country specific sections of this regulatory section to determine the National Attachment Approvals granted to the equipment.
L2UG
6/30/97
EUR-1
Ascom Timeplex has endeavored to undertake the mandatory "TYPE APPROVAL TESTING" of Public Network Interfaces on their products to both Pan-European and selected country specific requirements. Certificates and reports permitting the CE marking of the products "Placed
On The European Market" and the Public Network Attachment Approval Certificates associated with National Interfaces are held on file by the company. Please contact Ascom Timeplex for further information.
NOTICE
PUBLIC NETWORK ATTACHMENT APPROVAL HAS BEEN GRANTED ON THE
BASIS THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS IDENTICAL TO THAT CERTIFIED DURING
"TYPE APPROVAL TESTING". USERS MUST ENSURE CONFIGURATION, AND
INSTALLATION IS PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE USER MANUAL
INSTRUCTIONS, AND USING THE SPECIFIED APPROVED CABLES.
Declaration of Comformity
In association with the CE marking of the product, Ascom Timeplex declares under its sole responsibility that the products known as the MicroLINK/2+, MiniLINK/2+ and LINK/2+ are in conformity with the following Directives and standards. An official copy of the Declaration of
Comformity is available upon request.
European Low Voltage Directive
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
CE Marking Directive
(LVD)
(TTE)
(EMC)
(CEM)
73/ 23/EEC
91/263/EEC
89/336/EEC
93/ 68/EEC
EN 60950:1992
EN41003:1991
EN 55022:1987
EN 50082-1
IEC 801-2: 1984 / 1991
Safety of information technology equipment, & electrical business equipment
Safety of equipment connectected to telecommunications networks
Limits of radio disturbance characteristics of IT equipment, Class A
Immunity characterstics: Residential, Commercial, & Light Industry
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 801-3: 1984 / 1992d
IEC 801-4: 1988
NET.5
Radiated Electromagnetic Field
Electrical Fast Transients / burst requirements
ISDN Primary Rate Access
BAPT 223 ZV 25 Clause 3 ISDN German deviations to NET.3 and NET.5
OTR-001 2.048Mb/s G.703 75
Ω
Digital Leased Line
EUR-2
L2UG
6/30/97
Regulatory Guidance
It is considered a criminal offence to install Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment which is not approved, or to install it in a non-compliant manner. Advice should be obtained from a competent Engineer BEFORE making Public Network
Connections.
European Telecommunications Regulatory legislation is concerned mainly with the following aspects of connection to Public Telecommunications Networks:
1.
That all equipment in a Network connected directly or indirectly to a public network is approved, and appropriately marked to show this.
2.
That all equipment connected directly to a Public Network is approved for connection to the service concerned.
3.
That any equipment connected directly to the Public Network does not present hazardous conditions to the network or place the user at risk from hazards present on the Public
Network.
4.
That the equipment used as a direct or indirect attachment to the Public Network does not affect the integrity of that Public Network.
5.
That networks installed in one country, but linked to international circuits, comply with international agreements.
6.
That the equipment, approved for operation under certain conditions, and connected in an acceptable manner to the Public Network, is used in accordance with suitable user installation and operating instructions supplied with the equipment.
Principles of Product Attachment Approval Requirements
The Public Network Attachment Approval of this equipment shall be invalidated in the event of the connection of any apparatus or cabling which does not comply with the following:
1.
Digital attachments to PTO Services shall be equipment approved for the purpose in which they are being used.
2.
Attachments shall not materially affect the electrical performance characteristics of the interface to the PTO service.
3.
All cables and wiring shall be compliant with appropriate codes of practice and relevant standards.
4.
Apparatus approved for connection to PTO services must be connected to the Network
Termination Point (NTP) using the approved listed cable or an alternate cable meeting the electrical characteristics of the Ascom Timeplex specified cable.
5.
National requirements may restrict the carrying or interfacing of speech derived from, or destined for the PSTN.
L2UG
6/30/97
EUR-3
Safety Information and Warnings
This equipment is only approved for use when operated in the following environment:
•
Temperature Range
•
Humidity
•
Atmospheric Pressure
•
Power Input Range
0° to 45°C
To 95% (noncondensing)
13,000 feet (4000 meters)
100 to 240Va.c., 50/60 Hz
WARNINGS: ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN CERTIFIED COMPLIANT
WITH EN55022 CLASS A ELECTROMAGNETIC
EMISSIONS STANDARDS, AND IS SUITABLE FOR USE
IN COMMERCIAL AND LIGHT INDUSTRIAL
ENVIRONMENTS WHEN INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE USER INSTRUCTIONS.
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT APPROVED FOR USE IN
PARTICULARLY DAMP ENVIRONMENTS WHERE
WATER OR MOISTURE IS PREVALENT.
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TO A
PROTECTIVE EARTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
INSTRUCTIONS WITHIN THE INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. IMPROPER EARTHING MAY
RESULT IN AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
THIS EQUIPMENT DOES NOT PROVIDE SAFETY
ISOLATION BETWEEN ITS PORTS. HAZARDOUS
CONDITIONS IMPOSED AT A PORT MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS ON OTHER PORTS.
INTERCONNECTION DIRECTLY OR BY WAY OF OTHER
APPARATUS OF ANY EQUIPMENT NOT COMPLIANT
WITH EN60950/EN41003 TO ANY PORT ON THIS
EQUIPMENT MAY PRODUCE HAZARDOUS
CONDITIONS ON THE NETWORK AND, THEREFORE,
ADVICE SHOULD BE OBTAINED FROM A COMPETENT
ENGINEER BEFORE SUCH CONNECTIONS ARE MADE.
EUR-4
L2UG
6/30/97
Analog Voice Barrier (AVB) Module
To protect the Safe Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits of the LINK/2+ System from Telephone
Network Voltages (TNV), voice ports must be connected via an AVB Module if the PABX port does not guarantee isolation from TNV circuits. If the PABX port classification is unknown, an
AVB Module should be used. Note that AVB Modules should only be used with /B variants of the Voice Modules.
PRECAUTION: /B variants MUST NEVER be used without AVB modules.
European Public Network Interface Cables (Eurocables)
With the advent of Pan-European Public Network Interface Standards, Ascom
Timeplex Equipment is approved for connection to European Public Networks using specific cables applicable to the European Marketplace, and required to maintain
Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) compliance. These cables form part of the Attachment Approval and should be ordered using their associated Part
Numbers.
To maintain full compliance with the Interface specifications, attention is drawn to the maximum and minimum lengths, and baud rates specified on some interfaces.
For reliable operation, references are made to CCITT documents which recommend the expected relationship between cable length and baud rate.
Ascom Timeplex has taken into account the following aspects of cable design to ensure compliance with European legislation applicable to equipment used in
"Commercial and Light Industrial" environments:
•
Impedance/meter
•
EMC Earthing practices
•
Interface connections
•
Immunity to interference
•
Capacitance/meter
•
Connector type
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transition rise times
Emissions characteristics
Screen coverage/type
Connector screening
Balance about earth
Safety earthing aspects
PRECAUTION: Before installing the equipment in other environments, or using alternative cabling, the advise of a competent
Engineer should be taken.
L2UG
6/30/97
EUR-5
Switzerland
The Ascom Timeplex LINK/2+ products have been assessed by the Swiss PTT Laboratories and granted Attachment Approval from BAKOM, permitting connection to the services listed in
Table 1.
Table 1. National Attachment Approvals Granted
PTO Service Service Description
E1/2.048 Mbps 2.048 Mbps G.703
unstructured, 120
Ω
Balanced, Point-to-Point
Leased Line
LINK/2+
Modules
ILC.2/BIM.8
LFM.3/BIM.8
Module Description
Interlink Module with
G.703 adapter
Connection Arrangements
4 pin " BERG" header or RJ45 connector to wire endst:
ILP/BIM.8
CSP/BIM.8
G.704 Link Framing
Module with G.703 adapter
G.704/G.703 Structured
Interface
G.704/G.703 Structured
Interface
Cable Type = U72 M shielded 4 Core (twisted)
×
0.6mm, Aluminium coated polyester foil with
0.6mm drain, Braided with tinned copper wire
85% coverage
Cable Filter Ferrites = 2 off JETMAN JMLF-
130, 3 turns on each at LINK/2+
Cable Part Number = Ascom Timeplex
EuroCable No. TBD
Cable Length = Less Than 6dB Total
Attenuation
Maximum Baud Rate = 2.048 Mbps
Swissnet
Primary Rate
ISDN
Primary Rate ISDN
(Compatible with ICTR 4)
DCM.5
ILQ.2
BIM.8
D-Channel Protocol
Module
G.704 / G.703 Framing
Module
G.703/2.048Mb/s,120
Ω
Interface
4 pin " BERG" header or RJ45 connector to wire ends:
Cable Type = U72 M shielded 4 Core (twisted)
×
0.6mm, Aluminium coated polyester foil with
0.6mm drain, Braided with tinned copper wire
85% coverage
Cable Filter Ferrites = 2 off JETMAN JMLF-
130, 3 turns on each at LINK/2+
Cable Part Number = Ascom Timeplex
EuroCable No. TBD
Cable Length = Less Than 6dB Total
Attenuation
Maximum Baud Rate = 2.048 Mbps
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The LINK/2+ products have been certified compliant with EN55022 Class A Radio
Frequency Emission requirements. This permits the installation of the product in
"Commercial and Light Industrial" environments, when installed in accordance with the
Installation Manual instructions, and using the appropriate cables when connecting to the
Public Telecommunications Network.
L2UG
6/30/97
SWISS-1
Speech Traffic
The LINK/2+ product is capable of carrying speech traffic between nodes. Swiss regulations permit the carrying of "Private Voice" traffic which may originate and terminate on PABX’s, or on equipment not permitting the conveyancing of traffic from a third party.
PSTN speech may only be carried using PCM 64 kbps algorithms and the speech quality must be certified by BAKOM. Ascom Timeplex has not obtained this certificate from
BAKOM and therefore only private speech traffic may be conveyed at this time.
Swiss Attachment Approval Numbers
Table 2 lists the approval numbers for Ascom Timeplex LINK/2+ products.
Table 2. Approval Numbers
Product
MicroLINK/2+ System
MiniLINK/2+ System
LINK/2+ System
BAKOM 94.0801.J.N
Approval Number
BAKOM 94.0801.J.N
BAKOM 94.0801.J.N
SWISS-2
L2UG
6/30/97
United Kingdom
National Attachment Approvals
Table 1 lists PTO services for which U.K. national attachment approvals have been granted.
Table 1. National Attachment Approvals Granted
PTO Service
Megastream and equivalentg
E1 Services provided by other UK carriers.
Service Description
2.048 Mbps G.703
unstructured, 75
Ω
BNC
LINK/2+
Modules
ILC.2/BIM.9
ILC.2/DTU.5
LFM.3/BIM.9
DCM.7/ILQ.2/
BIM.9
Interlink Module with
G.703 presentation
G.704 Link Framing
Module with G.703 adapter
Cable Type = Twin RG59 Co-axial
Cable Part Number = Ascom Timeplex
EuroCable No. 41
Cable Length = Less Than 6dB Total
Attenuation
Maximum Baud Rate = 2.048 Mbps
DASS 2 Interface
ILP/BIM.9
Module Description
Interlink Module with
G.703 adaptor
Connection Arrangements
G.703 BNC to G.703 Network Termination
Unit:
CSP/BIM.9
G.704/G.703 structured
PABX Interface
G.704/G.703 structured
PABX Interface
Kilostream
Digital X.21/V.11 Point-to-
Point Leased Line
Up to 64 Kbps
QSC.2
QSP.2
Quad Synchronous
Channel Module
Quad Synchronous
Processor Module
25DM to 15DM Network Termination Unit:
Cable Part Number = Ascom Timeplex
EuroCable No. 9B
Cable Length = As per CCITT V.11
Maximum Baud Rate = 64 Kbps
Kilostream
Kilostream
Digital V.35 Point-to-Point
Leased Line
Up to 48 Kbps
Digital X.21/V.11 Point-to-
Point Leased Line
QSC.4
QSP.4
ILC.2
Quad Synchronous
Channel Module
Quad Synchronous
Processor Module
Interlink Module
25DM to 34 pin MRAC Network Termination
Unit:
Cable Part Number = Ascom Timeplex
EuroCable No. 25B
Cable Length = As per CCITT Rec. V.35
Maximum Baud Rate = 64 Kbps
25DM to 15DM Network Termination Unit:
Cable Type = L1-NTU
L2UG
6/30/97
UK-1
PTO Service
PABX Tie-Line
Ports without
TNV Barrier
Table 1. National Attachment Approvals Granted (Cont’d)
Service Description
LINK/2+
Modules
4 Wire PABX Tie-Line Ports QVM.3/B +
AVB
Module Description
Quad Voice Module
Connection Arrangements
25DM * 2 to wire ends:
Cable Type = QVM/4V
QVM.6/B +
AVB
Quad Voice Module
EVM/B +
AVB
Enhanced Voice Module
PABX Tie-Line
Ports with a
TNV Barrier
4 Wire PABX Tie-Line Ports QVM.3
QVM.6
EVM
Quad Voice Module
Quad Voice Module
Enhanced Voice Module
25DM * 2 to wire ends:
Cable Type = QVM/4V
United Kingdom Attachment Approval Numbers
Table 2 lists the approval numbers for Ascom Timeplex LINK/2+ products.
Table 2. U.K. Attachment Approval Numbers
Product
MicroLINK/2+ System
MiniLINK/2+ System
LINK/2+ System
EntréeLink/+ System
Approval Number
NS/1025/123/J/453143
NS/1025/123/H/452923
NS/1025/123/H452923
NS/1025/12/N/603220
PSTN Speech Traffic
Networks carrying PSTN speech should be designed in conformance with the OFTEL
Network Code of Practice using the characteristics specified in the user manual to determine the design of compliant networks. "Round trip delays" through LINK/2+ nodes require complex calculations dependant on the node configuration. Please contact Ascom
Timeplex to obtain assistance.
UK-2
L2UG
6/30/97
United States
Federal Communication Commission Part-68 Registration Information
WARNING
In accordance with FCC Part 15 Subpart B requirements, changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Ascom Timeplex could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
General Information Regarding the Use of Customer Provided
Telephone Equipment
FCC regulations and telephone company procedures prohibit connection of customer-provided equipment to telephone company-provided coin service (central office implemented systems).
Connection to party lines service is subject to State tariffs.
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request.
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line; both of these items are listed on the equipment label. The sum of all of the REN’s on your telephone lines should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on a given line.
FCC And Telephone Company Procedures And Requirements
In order to connect this system to the network, the local operating company must be provided with the registration number of this equipment, and the proper connections must be ordered.
To order the proper service, provide the telephone company with:
• the quantities and USOC numbers of the required jacks (shown in Tables 1 through 5 below)
• the sequence in which the trunks are to be connected
• the facility interface codes by position; and
• the ringer equivalence number or service code, as applicable, by position.
L2UG
6/30/97
US-1
Table 1
HAC
Trade
Name
Model
Number
Number of
Central Office Ports*
Number of
Stations
Number of
Generic Ports**
N/A
N/A
Ascom
Timeplex
Ascom
Timeplex
LINK/2 miniLINK/2
10
2
N/A
N/A
200
24
N/A Ascom
Timeplex microLINK/2 2
* = Number of T-1 ports
** = Maximum number of voice or data ports that the system allows
N/A 24
NOTE: Systems do not include ancillary equipment (for example, proprietary telephone sets or consoles).
Telephone
Types
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 2
Type of
Interface
USOC
Jack-Connector
2-Wire E & M
Type I Side B
2-Wire E & M
Type II Side B
RJ2EX
RJ2FX
4-Wire E & M
Type I Side B
RJ2GX
4-Wire E & M
Type II Side B
1.544 Mbps digital channel
RJ2HX
RJ48C
1.544 Mbps digital channel
RJ48C o = DS-1 Communication Facility with D4 framing format n
= DS-1 Communication Facility with extended framing format
REN/SRV. Code
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
6.0P
6.0P
Facility Interface
Code
TL11E
TL12E
TL31E
TL32E
04DU9-B o
04DU9-C n
US-2
L2UG
6/30/97
L2UG
6/30/97
Regulatory
Status
*
*
*
*
Digital
Interfaces
04DU9-B
04DU9-C
04DU5-24
04DU5-48
Table 3
Manufacturers
Port Identifier
ILC, ILC.2, DFM, or ILP**
ILC, ILC.2, DFM, or ILP**
SCP/LTS
SCP/LTS
Service
Order Code
6.0P
6.0P
6.0Y
6.0Y
* 04DU5-56 SCP/LTS
* = These ports have been previously included under this grant of registration.
** = T-1 and digital interfaces may use either superframe or extended superframe formats, depending on the channel service unit that is used for connection to the network.
6.0Y
USOC
Jack-Connector
RJ48
RJ48
RJ48S
RJ48T
RJ48S
RJ48T
RJ48S
RJ48T
Regulatory
Status
MTS/WATS
Interfaces
Table 4
Manufacturers
Port Identifier
M
M
*
* 02LS2
02GS2
02LS2
02GS2
FXO
FXO
FXO.1
FXO.1
M
M
02LS2
02GS2
FXO.3
FXO.3
* = These ports have been previously included under this grant of registration.
Ringer
Equivalence
Number
0.4A
0.4A
0.4A
0.4A
0.4A
0.4A
USOC
Jack-Connector
RJ11C
RJ21X
RJ11C
RJ21X
RJ11C
RJ21X
RJ11C
RJ21X
RJ11C
RJ21X
RJ11C
RJ21X
US-3
Table 5
Regulatory
Status
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
M
M
M
M
M
M
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Analog Private
Line Interfaces
TL11E
TL12E
TL31E
TL32E
TL11E
TL12E
TL31E
TL32E
TL11E
TL12E
TL31E
TL32E
OL13A
OL13B
OL13C
OL13A
OL13B
OL13C
OL13A
OL13B
OL13C
* = These ports have been previously included under this grant of registration.
Manufacturers
Port Identifier
QVC, QVM, QVM.2
QVC, QVM, QVM.2
QVC, QVM, QVM.2
QVC, QVM, QVM.2
QVM.6
QVM.6
QVM.6
QVM.6
EVM
EVM
EVM
EVM
FXS
FXS
FXS
FXS.1
FXS.1
FXS.1
FXS.3
FXS.3
FXS.3
Service
Order Code
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
If Problems Arise
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. The telephone operating company must be notified before removal of equipment connected to 1.544 Mbps digital services. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
In the event repairs are ever needed on this equipment, they should be performed by ASCOM
TIMEPLEX, INC. or an authorized representative of ASCOM TIMEPLEX, INC. For information contact:
ASCOM TIMEPLEX, INC.
16255 Bay Vista Drive
Clearwater, Florida 34620
1-800-237-6670
USOC
Jack-Connector
RJ2EX
RJ2FX
RJ2GX
RJ2HX
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ2EX
RJ2FX
RJ2GX
RJ2HX
RJ2EX
RJ2FX
RJ2GX
RJ2HX
US-4
L2UG
6/30/97
Affidavit for the Connection of
Customer Premises Equipment to 1.544 Mbps and/or
Subrate Digital Services
For work to be performed in the certified territory of ___________________________________________________
(Telco’s Name)
State of __________________
County of ________________
I, ____________________________, ______________________________, _______________________________
(Name) (Business Address) (Telephone Number) representing _________________________, a customer located at ______________________________________
(Name of Customer)
________________________________being duly sworn, state:
(Telephone Number)
I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be connected to ___________
1.544 Mbps and/or ________Subrate digital services. The terminal equipment to be connected complies with Part
68 of the Commissions rules except for the encoded analog content and billing protection specifications. With respect to encoded analog content and billing protection:
I attest that all operations associated with the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the digital CPE with respect to encoded analog content and encoded billing information continuously complies with Part 68 of
FCC’s Rules and Regulations.
The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content or billing information which is intended to be decoded within the telecommunications network.
The encoded analog and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of the customer.
I attest that the operator(s)/maintainer(s) of the digital CPE responsible for the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the encoded analog content and billing information has (have) been trained to perform these functions by successfully completing one of the following: (Check appropriate one(s)).
___a. A training course provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or
___b. A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative, using training materials and instructions provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode signals; or
___c. An independent training course (e.g., trade school or technical institution) recognized by the manufacturer/ grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or
___d. In lieu of the preceding training requirements, the operator(s)/maintainer(s) is (are) under the control of a supervisor trained in accordance _________________with above.
(Circle One)
I agree to provide____________________________with proper documentation to demonstrate compliance with the
(Telco’s Name) information as provided in the preceding paragraph, if so requested.
___________________________________
(Signature)
___________________________________
(Title)
Subscribed and Sworn to before me this day of , 19
___________________________________
(Date)
____________________________________________
NOTARY PUBLIC
My commission expires:
L2UG
6/30/97
US-5
A
ABM. See Advanced Bandwidth Management
ABM Profile assign to channels, 6 -102 change parameters, 6 -111 clear, 6-82 connect channels by, 6-52 convert, 6-45 define, 6-82 disconnect channels by, 6-52 display parameters, 5-50 set (assign) to channels, 6 -35, 6-102 set (change) parameters, 6 -111
Accessing the Supervisory Port, 2-7
Active Poll Group
Add display, 5-12 modules, 6-15 node, 6-37
Advanced Bandwidth Management. See also ABM
Profile bandwidth pooling, 1-4 bumping, 1-4 features, 1-3 grooming, 1-3
ILP bandwidth contention, 1-4 selective routing, 1-3
Alarm 1 display status, 5-58
Alarm 2 display status, 5-58
Alarm 6 display status, 5-59
Alarm 7 display status, 5-60
Alarm 9 display status, 5-61
Alarm 10 display status, 5-62
Alarm 12 display status, 5-63
Alarm 15 display status, 5-64
Alarm 21 display status, 5-65
Alarm 24
Index
display status, 5-66
Alarm 25 display status, 5-67
Alarm 26 display status, 5-68
Alarm 27 display status, 5-69
Alarm 33 display status, 5-70
Alarm History display, 5-40
Alarm Indicators and Messages, 2 -6
Alarm List clear, 5-12 display, 5-12
Alarm Notification List define, 6-53
Alarm Relay clear, 7-68 set, 7-68
Analog Channel Loopback local, 7-17 remote, 7-21
Analog Intermachine Link Loopback local, 7-25 remote, 7-34
Analog Voice I/O Channel Modules, 1-13
Applications (Configuration), 1-1
Asymmetrical Operation
Interlink Module, 1-10
Quad Synchronous Processor, 1-16
B
Backup Link set, 6-104
Bandwidth display, 5-16
Bandwidth Contention (ILP) description, 1-4 set, 6-104
Bandwidth Pooling, 1-4
BER. See Bit Error Rate
BER Levels table of, 2-6
Bias Routing applications, 6-56 convert, 6-45
L2UG
6/30/97
IN-1
define, 6-56 set for X.50 DS-0 channel, 6 -99 set for X.50 subrate channel, 6-98
Bidirectional Bus Loopbacks, 7-15
Bidirectional Loopbacks, 7-15, 7-44, 7-49
Bidirectional V-Channel Loopback, 7-22
Bipolar Interface Module loopback plug, 7-33 product description, 1-11
Bit Error Rate alarm 24, 5 -66 alarm 25, 5 -67 levels, 2-6 test, 2-5
Broadcast/Polling Connect Status display, 5-48
Broadcast/Polling Connections parameter effectivity, 6-43
Broadcast/Polling Group Members clear, 6-81 connect, 6-51 define, 6-81 disconnect, 6-51
Broadcast/Polling Master and Group Connections changing, 6 -33
Broadcast/Polling Master Channel define, 6-80
Broadcast/Polling Mode, 1-16
Broadcast/Polling Status display, 5-93
BSY, 7-9
Bumping alarm 27, 5 -69 description, 1-4 display status alarm 27, 5 -69 set, 6-100
Bundle Configuration changing, 6 -29 display, 5-16 parameter effectivity, 6-42 set, 6-101
Bundle Parameters changing, 6 -20 define nonproprietary, 6-54 define proprietary, 6-54 display integrated trunk bundle status, 5 -71 display nonproprietary, 5-14 display proprietary, 5-15
Bundles connect, 6-46 disconnect, 6-46 reset, 7-65
Busy Out DS-0, 7-9
Bypass Channel
IN-2 clear loop, 7-11 disconnect, 6-94 loop, 7-11
Bypass Channel Status display, 5-73 trace, 7-70
Bypass Module product description, 1-15
Bypass Phasor clear, 7-9
C
CEN PHS, 7-9
Change broadcast/polling master and group connections,
6-33 bundle configuration, 6-29 bundle parameters, 6-20
Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channel parameters, 6-28
Channelized Services Processor DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6-26
I/O channel parameters, 6 -30 intermachine link parameters, 6 -20 parameters, 6-14 system parameters, 6-17
Voice Processor DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -25
Voice Processor DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6-24
Channel connect, 6-46 connect by priority, 6-52 connections, 2-6 define connection, 6-31, 6-66 define destination, 6-70 delete, 6-93 direct connect, 6-48 disconnect, 6-46 disconnect by priority, 6-52 display destination, 5-32 monitor data, 7-61 specifying, 3-5 trace connection status, 7-73
Channel Connect Status display, 5-26
Channel Loopback local analog, 7-17 local digital, 7-17 remote analog, 7-21 remote digital, 7-21
Channel Parameters changing I/O, 6 -30
L2UG
6/30/97
CLR CH, 7-12
CLR DL, 7-23
CLR DS0, 7-40
CLR DS1, 7-48
CLR FMC, 6-43
CLR GWY, 6-108
CLR LCL, 7-10
CLR LFM, 7-51
CLR MC, 6-43
CLR MG, 7-76
CLR MM, 6-43
CLR MUM, 4-11
CLR PG, 4-12
CLR PH, 7-11
CLR POL, 6-81
CLR PRO, 6-82
CLR PW, 4-8
CLR RDN, 6-112
CLR REG, 6-44
CLR RLY, 7-68
CLR RTE, 6-85
CLR SEC, 6-114 define, 6-59 display, 5-17
Channel Status display, 5-75
Channelized Services Processor changing DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -28 changing DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6 -26 define DS-1 parameters, 6-67 display bundle configuration, 5-16 display DS-0 channel status, 5 -85 display DS-1 channel status, 5 -87 display DS-1 parameters, 5-27 display master DS-0 channels, 5-46 display status alarm 21, 5 -65 network interface loopback toward, 7-54 product description, 1-15
Clear Screen, 4-7
Clock define system clock fallback list, 6-57 set, 6-103 set qualification tolerance level, 6-103
Clock Status display, 5-76
Clock Switching Quick set, 6-104
Clock Switching Slow set, 6-104
Closing Mainframe Door, 2-21
CLR @, 4-21
CLR AQ, 5-12
CLR BP LP, 7-11
CLR BP PH, 7-9
L2UG
6/30/97
CLR SPR, 6-89
CLR TAQ, 5-103
CLR TMO, 4-12
CLR TON, 7-69
CLR VPR, 6-90
CLS, 4-7
CNV BIAS, 6-45
CNV PRO, 6-45
Cold Standby Redundancy redundant operation, 1 -6
Command File Commands, 4-15 clear command file, 4-15 clear preset time, 4-21
CLR @, 4-21
D, 4-15 date execution, 4-21
DEF @, 4-15 define command file, 4-15 delay time, 4-23 delete command lines, 4-15 display command file, 4-19
DSP @, 4-19
E, 4-19 edit command lines, 4-19 execute command file, 4-20 exit command file editor, 4-20
I, 4-20 insert command lines, 4 -20 linking command files, 4 -22 repeating command files, 4-22 stop execution, 4-13 terminal control and banner, 4 -23 time and date execution, 4-21 time of day execution, 4-21 typical command file display, 4-19 typical display of command file with terminal control character sequences and banner, 4 -26 typical programming to link command files, 4 -22 typical programming to repeat command file,
4-23 typical use of delay time command, 4-23 typical use of terminal control and banner, 4 -25
X, 4-20
Commands assign (set) ABM profile to channels, 6-102 assign (set) voice profile to channels, 6-102 busy out DS-0, 7-9 center phasor, 7-9 change ABM profile parameter, 6-111 clear ABM profile, 6-82 clear alarm list, 5 -12 clear alarm relay, 7 -68 clear broadcast/polling group members, 6-81 clear bypass channel loop, 7-11
IN-3
clear bypass phasor, 7-9 clear channel loop, 7-12 clear DS-0 channel loop, 7-40 clear DS-1/E-1 trunk loop, 7-48 clear I/O module channel loop, 7-12 clear intermachine link loop, 7 -23 clear LFM, 7-51 clear local DS-0, 7-10 clear master clocking node, 6-43 clear nodal security, 6-114 clear password, 4-8 clear phasor, 7-11 clear redundant module, 6 -112 clear region, 6-44 clear remote node gateway, 6-108 clear routing table, 6-85 clear screen and home cursor, 4 -7 clear speed profile, 6-89 clear supervisory port pagination, 4-12 clear test generator, 7-76 clear time out, 4-12
CLEAR TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST, 5-103 clear tone generator, 7-69 clear trunk loop, 7-48 clear voice profile, 6-90 command file, 4-15 configuration, 6-1 connect broadcast/polling group members, 6-51 connect bundle, 6-46 connect channel, 6-46 connect channels by ABM profile, 6-52 connect channels by priority, 6-52 connect DS-0 channel, 6 -46 connect to node, 6-49 convert ABM profile, 6-45 convert bias routing, 6-45 copy software, 4-7 define ABM profile, 6-82 define alarm notification list, 6 -53 define bias routing, 6-56 define broadcast/polling group members, 6-81 define broadcast/polling master channel, 6 -80 define channel connection, 6-66 define channel parameters, 6 -59 define Channelized Services Processor DS-1 parameters, 6-67 define destination channel, 6 -70 define destination X.50 subrate channel, 6 -72 define DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -59 define external port parameters, 6 -73 define Integrated Trunk Module bundle parameters, 6-54 define Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 parameters, 6-74
IN-4 define intermachine link out -of-service time,
6-80 define intermachine link parameters, 6 -68 define ISDN D-channel parameters, 6 -68 define Link Framing Module parameters, 6 -75 define master clocking list, 6-78 define master clocking nodes, 6-79 define master DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -59 define node number, 6-80 define password, 4-8 define quality, 6-83 define routing table, 6-85 define speed profile, 6-89 define station clock speed, 6-88 define supervisory computer port parameters,
6-66 define supervisory port parameters, 6-88 define system clock fallback list, 6-57 define system connect retry timer, 6-84 define system maximum phasor size, 6-83 define Voice Processor DS-1 parameters, 6-72 define voice profile, 6-90 define X.50 DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -92 define X.50 subrate channel parameters, 6 -91 delete channel, 6-93 delete route, 6-97 delete slot, 6-93 diagnostic, 7-1 direct channel connect, 6 -48 disconnect broadcast/polling group members,
6-51 disconnect bundle, 6-46 disconnect bypass channel, 6-94 disconnect channel, 6-46 disconnect channels by ABM profile, 6-52 disconnect channels by priority, 6-52 disconnect channels on intermachine link, 6 -94 disconnect DS-0 channel, 6 -46 disconnect from node, 6-49 display, 5-1 display ABM profile parameters, 5-50 display active poll group, 5-12 display alarm history, 5-40 display alarm list, 5-12 display bandwidth, 5-16 display broadcast/polling connect status, 5-48 display broadcast/polling status, 5-93 display bundle configuration, 5-16 display bypass channel status, 5-73 display channel connect status, 5-26 display channel parameters, 5 -17 display channel status, 5-75 display Channelized Services Processor DS-1 parameters, 5-27
L2UG
6/30/97
display clock status, 5-76 display database checksum condition, 5-26 display D-Channel Module status, 5-80 display destination channels, 5 -32 display destination intermachine link, 5 -35 display DS-0 channel status, 5 -85 display DS-1 channel status, 5 -87 display EIA functions, 5-38 display error, 5-37 display external port parameters, 5 -36 display integrated trunk bundle status, 5 -71, 5-81 display Integrated Trunk Module DS-1 parameters, 5-43 display Integrated Trunk Module nonproprietary bundle parameters, 5-14 display Integrated Trunk Module proprietary bundle parameters, 5-15 display intermachine link parameters, 5 -29 display intermachine link status, 5 -81 display ISDN D-channel parameters, 5 -28 display keyword information for available commands, 4-14 display Link Framing Module parameters, 5 -44 display Link Framing Module status, 5-90 display list of available commands, 4-9 display map for X.50 subrate channels, 5-45 display master DS-0 channels, 5-46 display partial test, 5-107 display phone numbers, 5-47 display PROM part number, 5-49 display quality parameters, 5-51 display quality status, 5-93 display revision, 5-52 display routing parameters, 5 -53 display signaling, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56 display speed profile, 5-57 display status alarm 1, 5 -58 display status alarm 2, 5 -58 display status alarm 6, 5 -59 display status alarm 7, 5 -60 display status alarm 9, 5 -61 display status alarm 10, 5 -62 display status alarm 12, 5 -63 display status alarm 15, 5 -64 display status alarm 21, 5 -65 display status alarm 24, 5 -66 display status alarm 25, 5 -67 display status alarm 26, 5 -68 display status alarm 27, 5 -69 display status alarm 33, 5 -70 display supervisory computer port parameters,
5-27 display supervisory port parameters, 5-57 display system parameters, 5-102
L2UG
6/30/97 display system status, 5-95 display time of day, 5-105 display time slot assignments, 5-106 display time-stamped alarm List, 5 -103 display topology, 5-105 display Voice Processor DS-0 parameters, 5-30 display Voice Processor DS-1 parameters, 5-31 display voice profile, 5-108 display Voice Server Module channel status, 5-98 display X.50 DS-0 channel parameters, 5 -110 display X.50 DS-0 channel status, 5 -101 display X.50 subrate channel parameters, 5 -109 display X.50 subrate channel status, 5 -100 entering from supervisory terminal, 3 -7 format, 3-1 general information, 3 -1 help to view list of available commands, 4-9 home cursor, 4-9 insert module, 6-96 insert route, 6-97 issuing external port (LINK/CSU), 3-8 issuing remote, 3-7 keyword information, 4-14 load database, 4-9 load software, 4-10 log out, 4-9 loop bypass channel, 7-11 loop DS-0 channel, 7 -40, 7-42 loop DS-1/E-1 trunk, 7 -48 loop I/O module channel, 7-12 loop intermachine link, 7 -23 loop LFM, 7-51 loop network interface, 7-53 loop X.50 Server Module subrate channels, 7-58 loop X.50 Server Module X.50 DS-0 channels,
7-58 mask unsolicited messages, 4-11 monitor channel data, 7 -61 remove module, 6-96 reset bundle, 7-65 reset driver module, 7-66 reset module, 7-63 reset power supply module, 7-67 reset v-channel, 7-66 save database, 4-10 send message to remote node, 4-13 set (change) ABM profile parameter, 6-111 set alarm forwarding, 6 -98 set alarm relay, 7-68 set backup link, 6-104 set bandwidth contention (ILP), 6-104 set bias route for X.50 DS-0 channel, 6 -99 set bias route for X.50 subrate channel, 6-98 set bumping, 6-100
IN-5
set bundle configuration, 6-101 set clock, 6-103 set clock qualification tolerance, 6-103 set database checksum, 7-67 set day of year, 4-11 set dial-up retry, 6-106 set dial-up timer, 6-106 set expansion link, 6-105 set grooming flag and grooming time, 6 -106 set Link Framing Module time slots, 6-114 set map, 6-109 set nodal security, 6-114 set password level 1, 6-109 set phone numbers, 6-110 set QAM I/O error character, 6 -108 set quick clock switching, 6-104 set redundant module, 6-112 set remote node gateway, 6-108 set slow clock switching, 6-104 set supervisory port pagination, 4-12 set time of day, 4-12 set time out, 4-12 set tone generator, 7-69 set Voice Server Module, 6-115 set X.50 Server Module, 6-115 stop command file execution, 4-13 structure, 3-3 support, 4-1 test DS-0 channel, 7 -75 test generator, 7-76 toggle bank, 4-13 trace bypass, 7-70 trace bypass display, 7-72, 7-73 trace channel, 7 -73 trace channel display, 7-74 unmask unsolicited messages, 4-11
CON, 6-46
CON BDL, 6-46
CON CH, 6-46
CON DR, 6-48
CON DS0, 6-46
CON ND, 6-49
CON POL, 6-51
CON PR, 6-52
CON PRO, 6-52
Configuration Activities, 6-1 adding modules, 6-15 adding or reconfiguring a node, 6 -37 assigning voice profiles, 6-36 changing broadcast/polling master and group connections, 6-33 changing bundle configuration, 6 -29 changing bundle parameters, 6 -20
IN-6 changing Channelized Services Processor DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -28 changing Channelized Services Processor
DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6 -26 changing I/O channel parameters, 6 -30 changing intermachine link parameters, 6 -20 changing parameters, 6 -14 changing system parameters, 6 -17 changing Voice Processor DS-0 channel parameters, 6-25 changing Voice Processor DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6-24 defining channel connections, 6 -31, 6-40 defining voice compression connections, 6-34 performing, 6-41 routing, 6-22 setting and assigning ABM profiles, 6 -35 verifying parameters, 6-14, 6-16
Configuration Commands, 6-1, 6-43 table of, 6-2
Configuration Guidelines, 6-41 maintaining configuration records, 6 -41 parameter effectivity, 6-42 performing configuration activities from a local or remote site, 6-41
Configuration Records maintaining, 6 -41
Contention (ILP) set bandwidth, 6-104
Control Mainframe, 1-7
COP SW, 4-7
Copying Operational Software Procedures
VSM.3 Server Module, 2-18
VSM.5 Server Module, 2-18
X.50 Server Module, 2-16
D
D command file command, 4-15
Data Flow Tests, 7-78
Data I/O Channel Modules, 1 -16
Data Link. See Intermachine Link
Database load, 4-9 save, 4-10
Database Backup getting started, 2 -19
Database Checksum display condition, 5-26 set, 7-67
Database/Hardware Conflicts display status alarm 9, 5 -61
L2UG
6/30/97
Date Execution command file command, 4-21
Day of Year set, 4-11
D-Channel Module define ISDN D-channel parameters, 6 -68 display ISDN D-channel parameters, 5 -28 display status, 5-80 parameter effectivity, 6-43 product description, 1-12
DEF @, 4-15
DEF ALM, 6-53
DEF BDL NPR, 6-54
DEF BDL PR, 6-54
DEF BIAS CH, 6-56
DEF BIAS DS0, 6-56
DEF CFB, 6-57
DEF CH/, 6-59
DEF CON, 6-66
DEF CP, 6-66
DEF CSP, 6-67
DEF DCM, 6-68
DEF DL, 6-68
DEF DS0, 6-59
DEF DS1, 6-72
DEF DST CH, 6-70
DEF DST DS0, 6-70
DEF DST XCH, 6-72
DEF EP, 6-73
DEF ILQ, 6-74
DEF LFM 3, 6-75
DEF LFM 10, 6-75
DEF LFM 11, 6-75
DEF LFM 12, 6-75
DEF LFM 14, 6-75
DEF MCL, 6-78
DEF MDS0, 6-59
DEF MM, 6-79
DEF MSR POL, 6-80
DEF NOD, 6-80
DEF OOS, 6-80
DEF POL, 6-81
DEF PRO, 6-82
DEF PSZ, 6-83
DEF PW1, 4-8
DEF PW2, 4-8
DEF QUA, 6-83
DEF RET, 6-84
DEF RTE, 6-85
DEF SC, 6-88
DEF SP, 6-88
DEF SPR, 6-89
DEF VPR, 6-90
DEF XCH, 6-91
L2UG
6/30/97
DEF XS0, 6-92
DEL, 6-93
DEL CH, 6-93
DEL RTE, 6-97
Delay Time, 4-23
Diagnostic Commands, 7-1 table of, 7-2
Dial-Up Connection Failures display alarm history, 5-40
Dial-Up Services set retry, 6-106 set timer, 6-106
Digital Channel Loopback local, 7-17 remote, 7-21
Digital Intermachine Link Loopback local, 7-25 remote, 7-38
Digital Termination Module loopback plug, 7-33 product description, 1-10
Digital Voice. See Voice Processor
Display Commands, 5-1 table of, 5-3
Driver Module product description, 1-10 reset, 7-66
DS-0 bidirectional channel loopback, 7-45 busy out, 7-9 channel equipment loopback, 7-43 channel link interface loopback, 7-45 clear channel loop, 7-40 clear local, 7-10 connect channel, 6-46 define destination, 6-70 disconnect channel, 6-46 display destination channel, 5 -32 loop channel, 7-40 test channel, 7-75
DS-0 Channel Parameters changing, 6 -25, 6-28 define, 6-59 parameter effectivity, 6-42
DS-0 Channel Status display, 5-85
DS-0A Configuration
Subrate Channel Processor, 1-17
DS-0B Configuration
Subrate Channel Processor, 1-17
DS-1 Channel Status display, 5-87
DS-1/E-1 bidirectional signal loopback, 7-50
IN-7
clear trunk loop, 7-48 loop network interface, 7-53 loop trunk, 7-48, 7-49 signal equipment loopback, 7-49 signal link interface loopback, 7-50
DS-1/E-1 Parameters changing, 6 -24, 6-26 parameter effectivity, 6-42
DSC, 6-46
DSC BDL, 6-46
DSC BP, 6-94
DSC CH, 6-46
DSC DL, 6-94
DSC DS0, 6-46
DSC ND, 6-49
DSC POL, 6-51
DSC PR, 6-52
DSC PRO, 6-52
DSP @, 4-19
DSP ACT POL, 5-12
DSP AQ, 5-12
DSP BDL NPR, 5-14
DSP BDL PR, 5-15
DSP BW, 5-16
DSP CFG, 5-16
DSP CH, 5-17
DSP CKS, 5-26
DSP CON, 5-26
DSP CP, 5-27
DSP CSP, 5-27
DSP DCM, 5-28
DSP DL, 5-29
DSP DS0, 5-30
DSP DS1, 5-31
DSP DST, 5-32
DSP DST *, 5-32
DSP DST CH, 5-32
DSP DST DL, 5-35
DSP DST DS0, 5-32
DSP EP, 5-36
DSP ERR, 5-37
DSP FN, 5-38
DSP HIS, 5-40
DSP ILQ, 5-43
DSP LFM, 5-44
DSP MAP, 5-45
DSP MDS0, 5-46
DSP PHN BCK, 5-47
DSP PHN XDL, 5-47
DSP POL, 5-48
DSP PPN, 5-49
DSP PRO, 5-50
DSP QUA, 5-51
DSP REV, 5-52
IN-8
DSP RTE, 5-53
DSP SIG DS0, 5-54
DSP SIG EQ, 5-55
DSP SIG LI, 5-56
DSP SP, 5-57
DSP SPR, 5-57
DSP ST ALM 1, 5-58
DSP ST ALM 2, 5-58
DSP ST ALM 6, 5-59
DSP ST ALM 7, 5-60
DSP ST ALM 9, 5-61
DSP ST ALM 10, 5-62
DSP ST ALM 12, 5-63
DSP ST ALM 15, 5-64
DSP ST ALM 21, 5-65
DSP ST ALM 24, 5-66
DSP ST ALM 25, 5-67
DSP ST ALM 26, 5-68
DSP ST ALM 27, 5-69
DSP ST ALM 33, 5-70
DSP ST BDL, 5-71
DSP ST BP, 5-73
DSP ST CH, 5-75
DSP ST CLK, 5-76
DSP ST DCM, 5-80
DSP ST DL, 5-81
DSP ST DS0, 5-85
DSP ST DS1, 5-87
DSP ST LFM, 5-90
DSP ST POL, 5-93
DSP ST QUA, 5-93
DSP ST SY, 5-95
DSP ST VCH, 5-98
DSP ST XCH, 5-100
DSP ST XS0, 5-101
DSP SY, 5-102
DSP TAQ, 5-103
DSP TIM, 5-105
DSP TOP, 5-105
DSP TS, 5-106
DSP TST, 5-107
DSP VPR, 5-108
DSP XCH, 5-109
DSP XS0, 5-110
Dual Isochronous Module product description, 1-17
Dual Synchronous Module product description, 1-16
E
E command file command, 4-19
L2UG
6/30/97
E-1. See DS-1/E-1
Edit using support commands, 4-2
EIA Control Functions display, 5-38 tests, 7-78
Enhanced Voice Module product description, 1-13
Entering Commands from Supervisory Terminal, 3 -7
Environmental Requirements, 1 -19
EP. See External Port
Equalizer Linedriver Module product description, 1-10
Equipment Loopback, 7-43, 7-48
Equipment Test, 7-70
Error display, 5-37
Error and Status Messages, A -1
Error Performance Violations alarm 26, 5 -68
EX, 4-9
Execute Command File, 4-20
Expander Mainframe, 1 -7
Expansion Link set, 6-105
External Port issuing (LINK/CSU) commands, 3-8 product description, 1-9
External Port Parameters define, 6-73 display, 5-36
F
Facility Interface Module product description, 1-12
Fan Housing, 1-7
Foreign Exchange Office Module product description, 1-13
Foreign Exchange Station Module product description, 1-14
Functional Block Diagram typical LINK/2+ System, 1-8
Functional Description, 1-7
FXO/Network Termination Module, 1-13
FXS/Network Termination Module, 1-14
Gateway (Remote Node) clear, 6-108 set, 6-108
G
L2UG
6/30/97
Gateway and Nongateway Designation, 1-5
Getting Started, 2-1 accessing the supervisory port, 2-7 alarm indicators and messages, 2 -6 bit error rate test, 2 -5 channel connections, 2-6 copying VSM.3 Server Module operational software, 2-18 copying VSM.5 Server Module operational software, 2-18 copying X.50 Server Module operational software, 2-16 database backup, 2-19
Integrated Trunk Module operational software,
2-11 loading Integrated Trunk Module operational software, 2-12 loading Network Module/Interlink Module operational software, 2-9 loading VSM.3 Server Module operational software, 2-17 loading VSM.5 Server Module operational software, 2-17 loading X.50 Server Module operational software, 2-14
Network Module/Interlink Module operational software, 2-9 opening and closing mainframe door, 2 -21 power turn-off, 2-2 power turn-on, 2-2 self-test, 2-3 start-up activities, 2-3 supervisory port log in, 2-8 supervisory port log out, 2-8 system configuration, 2-19
VSM.3 Server Module operational software, 2-16
VSM.5 Server Module operational software, 2-16
X.50 Server Module operational software, 2-14
IN-9
Grooming description, 1-3 set flag and time, 6-106
H
Hardware Errors display status alarm 2, 5 -58
Heat Dissipation (Mainframe), 1-19
HELP, 4-9
History display alarm, 5-40
HOME, 4-9
Home Cursor, 4-9
I
I command file command, 4-20
I/O Channel Parameters parameter effectivity, 6-42
I/O Module Channel clear loop, 7-12 loop, 7-12
ILP Bandwidth Contention description, 1-4 set, 6-104
Information Retrieval Commands. See Display
Commands
INS, 6-96
INS RTE, 6-97
Integrated Trunk Module define DS-1 parameters, 6-74 define nonproprietary bundle parameters, 6 -54 define proprietary bundle parameters, 6-54 display bundle status, 5-71, 5-81 display DS-0 channel status, 5 -85 display DS-1 channel status, 5 -87 display DS-1 parameters, 5-43 display nonproprietary bundle parameters, 5 -14 display proprietary bundle parameters, 5-15 display status alarm 21, 5 -65 display status alarm 6, 5 -59 display status alarm 7, 5 -60 network interface loopback toward, 7-54 operational software, 2-11 product description, 1-11 remote analog loopback, 7-44, 7-46 remote bus loopback, 7-44, 7-46 remote digital and remote analog loopbacks for analog modems, 7-47 remote digital loopback, 7-44
IN-10 reset bundle, 7-65
Interlink Module display status alarm 6, 5 -59 display status alarm 7, 5 -60 loopback plug, 7-33 operational software, 2-9 product description, 1-10
Intermachine Link clear loop, 7-23 define out-of-service time, 6-80 disconnect channels on, 6-94 display destination, 5-35 display status, 5-81 local analog loopback, 7-25 local bus loopbacks, 7-25 local digital loopback, 7-25 loop, 7-23 remote analog loopback, 7-34 remote bus loopback, 7-38 remote digital loopback, 7-38 security, 1-6 specifying, 3-5
Intermachine Link Parameters changing, 6 -20 define, 6-68 display, 5-29 parameter effectivity, 6-42
Internal Test Generator, 7 -1, 7-78
Internal Tone Generator, 7 -1
ISDN define D-channel parameters, 6 -68 display D-channel parameters, 5 -28
Isochronous Communication Module bidirectional loopbacks, 7-15 display speed profile, 5-57 product description, 1-17
Issuing External Port (LINK/CSU) Commands, 3 -8
Issuing Remote Commands, 3-7
K
Keys for support commands, 4-2
L
Line Termination Module product description, 1-17
Line Termination System Chassis, 1 -7
Link Framing Module clear LFM.14 intermachine links, 7 -51 define Link Framing Module parameters, 6 -75
L2UG
6/30/97
display LFM.3, LFM.10, LFM.11, LFM.12,
LFM.14 link framing parameters, 5 -44 display status, 5-90 display time slot assignments, 5-106 loop LFM.14 intermachine links, 7 -51 loopback plug, 7-33 parameter effectivity, 6-43 product description, 1-10 set time slots, 6-114
Link Interface Loopback, 7-44, 7-49
Link Interface Test, 7-70
Link Problem Diagnostic Aid. See LPDA-1 Mode
LINK/CSU. See External Port
Linking Command Files, 4 -22
LOA SW, 4-9, 4-10
Loading Operational Software Procedures
Integrated Trunk Module, 2 -12
Network Module/Interlink Module, 2-9
VSM.3 Server Module, 2-17
VSM.5 Server Module, 2-17
X.50 Server Module, 2-14
Local Analog Channel Loopback, 7-17
Local Analog Intermachine Link Loopback, 7-25
Local Bus Intermachine Link Loopbacks, 7-25
Local Digital Channel Loopback, 7-17
Local Digital Intermachine Link Loopback, 7-25
Local Test, 7-76
Log In, 2-8
Log Out, 2-8, 4-9
Loopbacks analog channel, 7 -17, 7-20, 7-21 analog intermachine link, 7 -34 bidirectional bus, 7-15 bidirectional for DS-0 channel, 7 -44, 7-45 bidirectional for DS-1/E-1 signal, 7-49, 7-50 bidirectional for Isochronous Communication
Module channel, 7-15 bidirectional for Quad Synchronous Processor channel, 7-15 bidirectional for Quad Voice Module V-channel,
7-22 bidirectional for Voice Server Module V-channel,
7-44, 7-47 bidirectional V-channel, 7-23
Bipolar Interface Module plug, 7-33 bypass channel, 7-11 digital channel, 7 -17, 7-18, 7-21, 7-22 digital intermachine link, 7 -38
Digital Termination Module plug, 7 -33 equipment, 7-43, 7-48, 7-49 high speed port for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module, 7-52
I/O module channel plug, 7 -19
Integrated Trunk Module DS-0 channel, 7 -44
L2UG
6/30/97
Interlink Module plug, 7 -33
Link Framing Module plug, 7 -33 link interface, 7-44, 7-45, 7-49, 7-50 local analog for LFM.14 Link Framing Module,
7-32 local analog intermachine link, 7 -25 local bus intermachine link, 7 -25, 7-26 local digital and local analog intermachine link for analog modems, 7-31 local digital and local analog intermachine link for line drivers, 7-26 local digital intermachine link, 7 -25 network interface, 7-54 network interface for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module, 7-55 network interface for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module toward JT-2, 7-57 network interface toward DS-1, 7-56 parallel bidirectional, 7 -16 remote analog and remote digital intermachine link for line drivers, 7 -34 remote analog and remote digital intermachine link loopbacks for analog modems, 7-37 remote analog channel, 7 -21 remote analog for Integrated Trunk Module, 7 -46 remote bus for Integrated Trunk Module, 7-46 remote bus intermachine link, 7 -38, 7-40 remote digital and remote analog Integrated
Trunk Module for analog modems, 7-47 remote digital for LFM.14 Link Framing
Module, 7-39 serial bidirectional, 7-16 tests, 7-1
Voice Processor plug, 7-33
X.50 DS-0 channel bidirectional, 7-60
X.50 subrate channel bidirectional, 7 -59
LP BP, 7-11
LP CH, 7-12
LP DL, 7-23
LP DS0, 7-40
LP DS1, 7-48
LP LFM, 7-51
LP NI, 7-53
LP XCH, 7-58
LP XS0, 7-58
LPDA-1 Mode, 1-16
LTS. See Line Termination System Chassis
M
Mainframe opening and closing door, 2-21 product description, 1-7
IN-11
Map display X.50 subrate channels, 5-45 set, 6-109
Master Clocking List define, 6-78
Master Clocking Node clear, 6-43 define, 6-79
Master DS-0 Channels display, 5-46
Menu Selections making, 3-9 typical parameter programming, 3 -10
Messages, A-1 alarm 32 error code, table of, 5-42 clear unsolicited, 4-11 getting started, 2 -6 mask unsolicited, 4-11 send message to remote node command, 4-13 unmask unsolicited, 4-11
Module add, 6-15 clear redundant, 6 -112 insert, 6-96 remove, 6-96 reset, 7-63 set redundant, 6 -112 specifying, 3-4
MON, 7-61
N
Network Interface loop, 7-53
Network Module copy software, 4-7 load database, 4-9 load operational software, 4-10 operational software, 2-9 operational software, toggle bank, 4-13 product description, 1-9 save database, 4-10
Nodal Security clear, 6-114 description, 1-6 set, 6-114
Node add, 6-37 capacity, 1-2 connect to, 6-49 define number, 6-80 disconnect from, 6-49 reconfigure, 6-37 specifying, 3-4
Nongateway Designation, 1-5
Nonproprietary Bundle Parameters define, 6-54 display, 5-14
O
opening and closing mainframe door, 2 -21
Operational Software
Integrated Trunk Module getting started, 2 -11
Network Module/Interlink Module getting started, 2-9
VSM.3 Server Module, 2-16
VSM.5 Server Module, 2-16
X.50 Server Module getting started, 2-14
IN-12
L2UG
6/30/97
P
Parameter Effectivity broadcast/polling connections, 6-43 bundle configuration, 6-42
D-Channel Module connections, 6-43
DS-0 parameters, 6-42
DS-1/E-1 parameters, 6-42 intermachine link parameters, 6 -42
Link Framing Module connections, 6-43 speed profiles, 6-43 system parameters, 6-42 voice profiles, 6-43
Voice Server Module connections, 6-43
Parameters changing, 6 -14 verifying, 6-14, 6-16
Password clear, 4-8 define, 4-8 protection, 1-5 set level 1, 6-109
Phasor center, 7-9 clear, 7-11
Phone Numbers display, 5-47 set, 6-110
Physical Configuration, 1-18
Pooled Redundancy redundant operation, 1 -6
Power Consumption, 1-19
Power Requirements, 1-18
Power Supply Chassis product description, 1-9
Power Supply Module product description, 1-9 reset, 7-67
Power Turn-Off, 2-2
Power Turn-On, 2-2
Preset Time clear, 4-21
Product Description, 1-1 analog voice I/O channel modules, 1-13 applications, 1-1
Bipolar Interface Module, 1-11
Bypass Module, 1-15
Channelized Services Processor, 1-15 data I/O channel modules, 1 -16
D-Channel Module, 1-12
Digital Termination Module, 1 -10
Driver Module, 1-10
Dual Isochronous Module, 1-17
L2UG
6/30/97
Dual Synchronous Module, 1-16
Enhanced Voice Module, 1-13
Equalizer Linedriver Module, 1-10 external port, 1-9
Facility Interface Module, 1-12 fan housing, 1-7 features, 1-2
Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) Module, 1-13
Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) Module, 1-14 functional block diagram, 1-8 functional description, 1-7
Integrated Trunk Module, 1 -11
Interlink Module, 1-10
Isochronous Communication Module, 1-17
Line Termination Module, 1-17 line termination system chassis, 1 -7
Link Framing Module, 1-10 mainframe, 1-7
Network Module, 1-9 power supply chassis, 1-9 power supply module, 1-9
Quad Asynchronous Module, 1-17
Quad Synchronous Module, 1-16
Quad Synchronous Processor, 1-16
Quad Voice Module, 1-13
QVC Voice Module, 1-14 satellite buffer option, 1-10 specifications, 1-17, 1-18 station clock port, 1-9
Subrate Channel Processor, 1-17 supervisory computer port, 1-9 supervisory port, 1-9 system connections, figure of, 1-2
Voice Processor, 1-12
Voice Server Module, 1-14
X.50 Server Module, 1-15
Product Features, 1-2
Advanced Bandwidth Management, 1-3 node capacity, 1-2 redundant operation, 1 -6 system security, 1-4
Programming Commands. See Configuration
Commands
PROM Part Number display, 5-49
Proprietary Bundle Parameters define, 6-54 display, 5-15
QAM I/O Error Character set, 6-108
Q
IN-13
Quad Asynchronous Module product description, 1-17
Quad Synchronous Module product description, 1-16
Quad Synchronous Processor bidirectional loopbacks, 7-15 broadcast/polling mode, 1-16 display active poll group, 5-12 display broadcast/polling connect status, 5-48 display broadcast/polling status, 5-93
LPDA-1 mode, 1-16 product description, 1-16 simplex broadcast mode, 1-17
Quad Voice Module product description, 1-13
Quality Parameters changing, 6 -24 define, 6-83 display, 5-51 display status, 5-93
QVC Voice Module product description, 1-14
R
Reconfiguring a Node, 6-37
Redundant Module clear, 6-112 set, 6-112
Redundant Operation, 1-6
Region clear, 6-44
Remote Analog Channel Loopback, 7-21
Remote Analog Intermachine Link Loopback, 7-34
Remote Bus Intermachine Link Loopback, 7-38
Remote Commands issuing, 3-7
Remote Digital Channel Loopback, 7-21
Remote Digital Intermachine Link Loopback, 7-38
Remote Test, 7-78
Repeating Command Files, 4-22
Reset Commands, 7-1
Revision display, 5-52
RMV, 6-96
Route delete from routing table, 6-97 insert into routing table, 6 -97
Routing configuration activities, 6-22 sample network to be routed, 6-86
Routing Parameters display, 5-53
IN-14
Routing Table clear, 6-85 define, 6-85
RST, 7-63
RST BDL, 7-65
RST CH, 7-66
RST DR, 7-66
RST PS, 7-67
S
Satellite Buffer Option, 1-10
SAV DB, 4-10
Security features, 1-4 gateway and nongateway designation, 1-5 intermachine link, 1 -6 nodal, 1-6 password, 4-8 password protection, 1-5
Selective Routing description, 1-3
Self-Test, 2-3
SET ALM FWD, 6-98
SET BIAS XCH, 6-98
SET BIAS XS0, 6-99
SET BMP, 6-100
SET CFG, 6-101
SET CH, 6-102
SET CKS, 7-67
SET CLK, 6-103
SET CQT, 6-103
SET CSW QS, 6-104
SET CSW SS, 6-104
SET CTN, 6-104
SET DAT, 4-11
SET DL BCK, 6-104
SET DL EXP, 6-105
SET DRT, 6-106
SET DTM, 6-106
SET GRM, 6-106
SET GWY, 6-108
SET IO, 6-108
SET L1C, 6-109
SET MAP, 6-109
SET MUM, 4-11
SET PG, 4-12
SET PHN BCK, 6-110
SET PHN XDL, 6-110
SET PRO, 6-111
SET RDN, 6-112
SET RLY, 7-68
SET SEC, 6-114
L2UG
6/30/97
SET TIM, 4-12
SET TMO, 4-12
SET TON, 7-69
SET TSA, 6-114
SET TSB, 6-114
SET VSM, 6-115
SET XSM, 6-115
Signaling display, 5-54
Simplex Broadcast Mode, 1-17
Simplex Operation
Interlink Module, 1-10
Quad Synchronous Processor, 1-16
Size (Mainframe), 1-18
Slot delete, 6-93
Software copy operational, 4-7
Copy VSM.3 Server Module operational, 2-18
Copy VSM.5 Server Module operational, 2-18 copy X.50 Server Module operational, 2-16 database backup procedure, 2-19 load database, 4-9 load Integrated Trunk Module operational, 2 -12 load Network Module/Interlink Module operational, 2-9 load operational, 4-10 load VSM.3 Server Module operational, 2-17 load VSM.5 Server Module operational, 2-17 load X.50 Server Module operational, 2-14 save database, 4-10 toggle bank, 4-13
Specifications, 1-17 table of, 1-18
Speed Profiles clear, 6-89 define, 6-89 display, 5-57 parameter effectivity, 6-43
Start-Up Activities, 2-3
Station Clock define speed, 6-88
Station Clock Port, 1-9
Status Messages, A-1
STP, 4-13
Structure of Commands, 3-3
STU-III Secure Mode
VSM.5 Voice Server Module, 1-14
Subrate Channel Processor
DS-0A configuration, 1-17
DS-0B configuration, 1-17 product description, 1-17
Supervisory Computer Port product description, 1-9
L2UG
6/30/97
Supervisory Computer Port Parameters define, 6-66 display, 5-27
Supervisory Port accessing, 2-7 command format, 3-1 define parameters, 6-88 display parameters, 5-57 entering commands from, 3-7 general information, 3 -1 issuing external port (LINK/CSU) commands,
3-8 issuing remote commands, 3-7 log in, 2-8 log out, 2-8 making menu selections, 3-9 operational guidelines, 3-7 product description, 1-9
Supervisory Port Pagination clear, 4-12 set, 4-12
Support Commands, 4-1 table of, 4-2
Symmetrical Operation
Interlink Module, 1-10
Quad Synchronous Processor, 1-16
System Clock Fallback List define, 6-57
System Configuration getting started, 2 -19
System Connect Retry Timer define, 6-84
System Connections applications, figure of, 1-2
System Maximum Phasor Size define, 6-83
System Parameters changing, 6 -17 display, 5-102 parameter effectivity, 6-42
System Security features, 1-4 gateway and nongateway designation, 1-5 intermachine link, 1 -6 nodal, 1-6 password protection, 1-5
System Status display, 5-95
T
Terminal Control and Banner, 4 -23
Test Generator
IN-15
clear, 7-76
Tests data flow, 7-78 display partial, 5-107
EIA control functions, 7-78 equipment, 7-70 link interface, 7-70, 7-71 local, 7-76 loopback, 7-1 remote, 7-78 set tone equipment, 7-70
TGL BNK, 4-13
Time and Date Execution command file command, 4-21
Time of Day display, 5-105 set, 4-12
Time of Day Execution command file command, 4-21
Time Out clear, 4-12 set, 4-12
Time Slots display assignments, 5-106 set for Link Framing Module, 6-114
TIME-STAMPED ALARM LIST
CLEAR, 5-103
DISPLAY, 5-103
Tone Generator clear, 7-69 set, 7-69
Topology display, 5-105
TRC BP, 7-70
TRC CH, 7-73
TST, 7-76
TST DS0, 7-75
Turn-Off. See Power Turn-Off
Turn-On. See Power Turn-On
V
V-Channel reset, 7-66
Verifying Parameters, 6-14
Voice Compression Connections defining, 6-34
Voice Processor changing DS-0 channel parameters, 6 -25 changing DS-1/E-1 and quality parameters, 6 -24 define DS-1 parameters, 6-72 display DS-0 channel status, 5 -85 display DS-0 parameters, 5-30
IN-16 display DS-1 channel status, 5 -87 display DS-1 parameters, 5-31 display status alarm 15, 5 -64 loopback plug, 7-33 network interface loopback toward, 7-54 product description, 1-12
Voice Profiles assign to channels, 6 -36, 6-102 clear, 6-90 define, 6-90 display, 5-108 parameter effectivity, 6-43 set (assign) to channels, 6 -102
Voice Server Module bidirectional loopback for V-channel, 7-47 bidirectional loopbacks, 7-44 connections, 6-43 display V-channel status, 5 -98 display voice profile, 5-108 parameter effectivity, 6-43 product description, 1-14 reset v-channel, 7-66 set, 6-115
VSM.3 SERVER MODULE
OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE, 2-16
VSM.5 SERVER MODULE
OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE, 2-16
VSM.5 Voice Server Module
STU-III secure mode, 1-14
W
Weight (Mainframe), 1-18
L2UG
6/30/97
X
X command file command, 4-20
X.50 DS-0 Channels bidirectional loopback, 7-60 define destination, 6-70 define parameters, 6-92 display destination, 5-32 display parameters, 5-110 display status, 5-101 display status alarm 33, 5 -70 loop, 7-58 monitoring, 7-61 set bias route, 6-99
X.50 Server Module defining a channel connection, 6 -40 operational software, 2-14 product description, 1-15 set, 6-115
X.50 Subrate Channels bidirectional loopback, 7-59 define destination, 6-72 define parameters, 6-91 display destination, 5-32 display map, 5-45 display parameters, 5-109 display status, 5-100 loop, 7-58 monitoring, 7-62 set bias route, 6-98 specifying, 3-6
L2UG
6/30/97
IN-17
ಡೌನ್ಲೋಡ್ ಮಾಡಿ
ಸಾರ್ವಜನಿಕ ಲಿಂಕ್ ನವೀಕರಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ
ನಿಮ್ಮ ಚಾಟ್ಗೆ ಸಾರ್ವಜನಿಕ ಲಿಂಕ್ ಅನ್ನು ನವೀಕರಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
ದಾಖಲೆಯ ಸಾರ್ವಜನಿಕ ಲಿಂಕ್
ಜಾಹಿರಾತು
